P63x UK M A543

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Transformer Differential Protection

Software Version -610 Hardware Suffix -305
Technical Manual
Regional English Language Version -800 P63x/UK M/A54
Terminology Note The P63x menu texts (data model) referred to throughout this manual are regional texts which have been customized for the UK/US and similar markets. Diagrams contained in this manual use this terminology. It is commonly referred to as the English (English) data model and is denoted by -800 in the model number and product documentation. Refer to the Getting Started (GS) section for information on device and software setup to allow viewing of either the Reference (English) or Regional (English) menu texts. The original documentation for this product is still applicable and may be consulted for further reference; however this manual is intended to provide the required information for setting, commissioning and maintaining the product using this customized data model.
Note:
The technical manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information. Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA including settlements of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the technical manual. This device MUST NOT be modified. If any modification is made without the express permission of AREVA, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
The AREVA logo and any alternative version thereof are trademarks and service marks of AREVA. MiCOM is a registered trademark of AREVA. All trade names or trademarks mentioned herein whether registered or not, are the property of their owners. This manual is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. 2006, AREVA. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Safety Section
P63x/EN SS/D11
SS N/A IT TD GS ST OP AP MR FD CM MT TS SC SG IN VH
Index
Update Documentation
P63x/UK AD/xxx
Section 1
Introduction
P63x/UK IT/A54
Section 2
Technical Data
P63x/UK TD/A54
Section 3
Getting Started
P63x/UK GS/A54
Section 4
Settings
P63x/UK ST/A54
Section 5
Operation
P63x/UK OP/A54
Section 6
Application Notes
P63x/UK AP/A54
Section 7
Measurements and Recording
P63x/UK MR/A54
Section 8
Firmware Design
P63x/UK FD/A54
Section 9
Commissioning
P63x/UK CM/A54
Section 10
Maintenance
P63x/UK MT/A54
Section 11
Troubleshooting
P63x/UK TS/A54
Section 12
SCADA Communications
P63x/UK SC/A54
Section 13
Symbols and Glossary
P63x/UK SG/A54
Section 14
Installation
P63x/UK IN/A54
Section 15
Firmware and Service Manual Version History
P63x/UK VH/A54
Index
Safety Section
P63x/EN SS/D11
SS
SAFETY SECTION
P63x/EN SS/D11
Safety Section
SS
Safety Section
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 1
CONTENTS
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
Symbols Labels
3 3 4
4 4
SS
4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective fuse rating Protective class Installation category Environment
4 7 7
7 7 7 7
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 2
Safety Section
SS
Safety Section
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 3
STANDARD SAFETY STATEMENTS AND EXTERNAL LABEL INFORMATION FOR AREVA T&D EQUIPMENT 1. INTRODUCTION
This Safety Section and the relevant equipment documentation provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment also includes reference to typical equipment label markings. The technical data in this Safety Section is typical only, see the technical data section of the relevant equipment documentation for data specific to a particular equipment. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section and the ratings on the equipments rating label. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.
SS
2.
HEALTH AND SAFETY

The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of this Safety Section, or the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M). When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and also cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who: Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
The equipment documentation gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manuals cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 4
Safety Section
3.
SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

For safety reasons the following symbols which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.
SS
3.1
Symbols
Caution: refer to equipment documentation
Caution: risk of electric shock
Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal
Functional/Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal Note: This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS TECHNICAL MANUAL IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.
3.2
Labels See Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M) for typical equipment labeling information.
4.
INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning, or servicing the equipment. be consulted before installing,
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided in numerical relays to indicate the health of the device. AREVA T&D strongly recommends that these contacts are hardwired into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Safety Section
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 5 To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram. Protection Class I Equipment Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. When the protective (earth) conductor terminal (PCT) is also used to terminate cable screens, etc., it is essential that the integrity of the protective (earth) conductor is checked after the addition or removal of such functional earth connections. For M4 stud PCTs the integrity of the protective (earth) connections should be ensured by use of a locknut or similar.
SS
The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energizing the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of applicable); the protective conductor (earth) connection (where
Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.
Accidental touching of exposed terminals If working in an area of restricted space, such as a cubicle, where there is a risk of electric shock due to accidental touching of terminals which do not comply with IP20 rating, then a suitable protective barrier should be provided. Equipment use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts, which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA listed or recognized equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA listed or recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation.
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 6 Equipment operating conditions
Safety Section
The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.
SS
Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and PCB cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energized. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note: When a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fiber optic communication Where fiber optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energized. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.
Safety Section
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 7
5.
DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

De-commissioning The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to de-commissioning.
SS
Disposal It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of the equipment.
6.
6.1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. DANGER - CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.
6.2
Protective class IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.
6.3
Installation category IEC 60255-27: 2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Installation category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 s, 500 , 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.
6.4
Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet of housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree - Pollution Degree 2 Altitude - Operation up to 2000m IEC 60255-27:2005 EN 60255-27: 2006 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards.
P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 8
Safety Section
SS
Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK IT/A54
IT
INTRODUCTION
Date: Hardware Suffix: Software Version: Connection Diagrams:
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK IT/A54
IT
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-1
CONTENTS
(IT) 11. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2
MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM PRODUCT SCOPE

Functional overview Ordering options
3 5 6
6 9
IT
FIGURES
Figure 1: Functional diagram 8
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-2
IT
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-3
1.
MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE

The manual provides a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application. The section contents are summarized below: P63x/UK IT Introduction
A guide to the MiCOM range of relays and the documentation structure. General safety aspects of handling Electronic Equipment is discussed with particular reference to relay safety symbols. Also a general functional overview of the relay and brief application summary is given. P63x/UK TD Technical Data
IT
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with norms and international standards is quoted where appropriate. P63x/UK GS Getting Started
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start using it. This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database stored within the relay. P63x/UK ST Settings
List of all relay settings, including ranges, step sizes and defaults, together with a brief explanation of each setting. P63x/UK OP Operation
A comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protection and non-protection functions. P63x/UK AP Application Notes
This section includes a description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay. P63x/UK MR Measurements and Recording
Detailed description of the relays recording and measurements functions including the configuration of the event and disturbance recorder and measurement functions. P63x/UK FD Firmware Design
Overview of the operation of the relays hardware and software. This section includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay. P63x/UK CM Commissioning
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of the relay. P63x/UK MT Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined. P63x/UK TS Troubleshooting
Advice on how to recognize failure modes and the recommended course of action. Includes guidance on whom within AREVA T&D to contact for advice.
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-4 P63x/UK SC SCADA Communications
This section provides an overview regarding the SCADA communication interfaces of the relay. Detailed protocol mappings, semantics, profiles and interoperability tables are not provided within this manual. Separate documents are available per protocol, available for download from our website. P63x/UK SG Symbols and Glossary
List of common technical abbreviations found within the product documentation. P63x/UK IN Installation
IT
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided, incorporating earthing recommendations. All external wiring connections to the relay are indicated. P63x/UK VH Firmware and Service Manual Version History
History of all hardware and software releases for the product.
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-5
2.
INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA T&D. Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility. MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive communication capabilities, integrate it with your power supply control system. The components within MiCOM are: P range protection relays; C range control products; M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring; S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
IT
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state and behavior of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control center enabling remote monitoring and control to take place. For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website: www.areva-td.com www.areva-td.com/protectionrelays
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-6
3.
PRODUCT SCOPE
The P63x differential protection devices are designed for the fast and selective short-circuit protection of transformers, motors and generators and of other two-, three- or four-winding arrangements from distribution to transmission voltage levels. Four models are available. The P631 and P632 are designed for the protection of two-winding arrangements, the P633 and P634 for the protection of three- or four-winding arrangements, respectively. The relay also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with power system diagnosis and fault analysis.
IT
3.1
Functional overview The P63x differential protection devices contain a wide variety of protection functions. The protection features are summarized below: PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW BC_1 BC_2 BC_3 BC_4 CHECK COMM1 COMM2 CTS DIFF DTOC1 DTOC2 DTOC3 DVICE f<> FT_DA GROUP HMI IDMT1 IDMT2 IDMT3 INP IRIGB LED LIM_1 LIM_2 LIM_3 LIMIT LOGIC mA_OP MAIN Broken conductor detection 1 Broken conductor detection 2 Broken conductor detection 3 Broken conductor detection 4 Self testing and diagnostics Rear port communication Second rear port communication Current transformer supervision Differential protection Definite-time overcurrent protection 1 Definite-time overcurrent protection 2 Definite-time overcurrent protection 3 Device identification Frequency protection Fault data acquisition Setting group selection Local control panel Inverse-time overcurrent protection 1 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 2 Inverse-time overcurrent protection 3 Opto inputs IRIG-B time synchronization LEDs Phase current monitoring 1 Phase current monitoring 2 Phase current monitoring 3 Temperature and DC monitoring limits Programmable logic Analog output channel Main functions P631 * * 4 P632 * * P633 * * P634 * *
4 to 34 4 to 40 4 to 34
Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OVERVIEW MT_RC OL_DA OL_RC OP_RC OSCIL OUTP PC REF_1 REF_2 REF_3 RTDmA THRM1 THRM2 IEC V/f V<> Monitoring signal recording Overload data acquisition Overload recording Operating data recording Fault recording Output relays Local front port communication Restricted earth fault protection 1 Restricted earth fault protection 2 Restricted earth fault protection 3 Temperature and DC monitoring inputs Thermal overload protection 1 Thermal overload protection 2 Ethernet communication Overfluxing protection Under/overvoltage protection P631 P632
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-7 P633 P634
8 to 14 8 to 22 8 to 30 8 to 22 * * * *
IT
* - Optional communications items specified at time of order. In addition to the features listed above, the P63x models provide comprehensive self-monitoring as well as the following global functions: Setting group selection Operating data recording (time-tagged signal logging) Overload data acquisition Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging) Fault data acquisition Fault signal recording (time-tagged signal logging with fault value recording of the phase currents for each winding) Extended fault recording (fault recording of the neutral-point current for each winding as well as the voltage)
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-8 Application overview

Functions overview
87 87G 50 51 49 27/ 59 81 O/U DIFF REF_x DTOC_x IDMT_x THRMx V<> f<> V/f CTS MCM_x LIMIT / LIM_x LOGIC COMMx INP/OUTP MEASI/ MEASO Differential protection Restricted earth fault protection Definite-time O/C protection Inverse-time O/C protection Thermal overload protection Over/undervoltage protection Over/underfrequency protection Overexcitation protection Current transformer supervision Measuring circuit monitoring Limit value monitoring Programmable logic 2 Communication interfaces, IRIG-B Binary inputs and outputs (max. number) Analogue inputs and outputs (2 x 20 mA outputs, 20 mA input and RDT input) Measuring inputs Phase currents Residual current or star-point current 2x3 2x3 2 4x3 3
P631
2 wind. 2 2 1 Option 2 2 1 Option 4 / 14 -
P632
2 wind. 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 Option 2 2 1 Option 34 / 22 Option
P633
P634
IT
24
4x3 3
Communication
COMM1
COMM2
IEC
Inter MiCOM
IRIG-B
Iph V IY,a
to SCADA / Substation control / RTU / Modem ... via RS485 or Optical Fibre using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier resp. via RJ45 or Fibre Optics using IEC 61850
Self Monitoring
Recording and Data Acquisition
Overload rec.
LOGIC
LIM-3
LIM-2
LIM-1
Metering
Fault rec.
27, 59 V<>
81 f<>
24 V/f
IY,b
87G REF_3 87G REF_2 50 DTOC-3 50 DTOC-2 50 DTOC-1 51 IDMT-3 51 IDMT--2 51 IDMT--1 49 THRM2 49 THRM1 BC_4
BC _3
Iph IY,c Iph Iph
87 DIFF
87G REF_1
BC_2
BC_1
Ivirtual
RTD,mA mA_OP
always available optional or specific
Transformer Differential Protection P63x
Figure 1:
Functional diagram
Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 3.2 Ordering options
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-9
Information Required with Order - P631

MiCOM P631
Name Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 40TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8) 2) 2)
Order number P6313 4 9 0 0 0 0 -305 -4xx -403 -404 -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
3 4 8 9 3 4 6 7 8 9 (without order extension no.) -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
IT
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector For connection to glass fibre, ST connector Protocol IEC 61850: For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) Language: English (German) German (English) French (English) Polish (English) Spanish (English)
4) 4) 4) 4)
1 2 4 -94 6
(without order extension no.) -800 -801 (on request) (on request) (on request) (on request) -802 -803 -804 -805
Px40 English (English)

4) 4) 4)
Russian (English) 7) 2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters 8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-10 Information Required with Order - P632

MiCOM P632
Name Two Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 2) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) Additional binary I/O options: Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analogue module With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 8) 2)
Order number P6323 8 9 0 1 -305 -4xx -403 -404 -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
3 4 8 9 1 0 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 4 (without order extension no.) -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
IT
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector For connection to glass fibre, ST connector Protocol IEC 61850: For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) Language: English (German) 4) Px40 English (English) 4) German (English) 4) French (English)
4)
1 2 4 -94 6
Spanish (English) 4) Polish (English) 4) Russian (English) 7) 2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 4) Second included language in brackets
4)
Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Information Required with Order - P633
MiCOM P633
Name Three Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) 2) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 2) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analogue module With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) With analogue and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8) 2)
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-11
Order number P6333 7 8 9 9 1 0 0 -305 -4xx -404 -405 -406 -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
3 4 8 9 9 1 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 4 6 (without order extension no.) -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
IT
Additional binary I/O options:
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector For connection to glass fibre, ST connector Protocol IEC 61850: For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) Language: English (German)
4) 4)
1 2 4 -94 6
Px40 English (English) German (English) 4) French (English) 4) Spanish (English) Polish (English)
4) 4)
Russian (English) 4) 7) 2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 4) Second included language in brackets
P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-12 Information Required with Order - P634

MiCOM P634
Name Four Winding Transformer Diff. Prot. Basic device: Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays Mounting option and display: Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display Processor extension and Current transformer: With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T13 / T21...23) 2) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24) 2) Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T31...T34 / T41...43) 2) Voltage transformer: Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) Additional binary I/O options: Without With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) Power supply and additional outputs: VA,nom = 24 VDC VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays Further add. options: Without With analogue module With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) With analogue and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) Switching threshold on binary inputs: >18 V (standard variant) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) 8) 8)
Order number P6347 8 9 9 1 -305 -4xx -403 -404 -610 -46x -9x x -95 x -8xx
3 4 8 9 9 1 0 1 3 4 6 7 8 9 0 2 4 6 (without order extension no.) -461 -462 -463 -464 -90 0 -91 -92
IT
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) With communication / information interface: Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol can be switched between: IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) For connection to wire, RS485, isolated For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector For connection to glass fibre, ST connector Protocol IEC 61850: For connection to 100 MHz Ethernet, glass fibre SC and wire RJ45 and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103) Language: English (German)
4) 4)
1 2 4 -94 6
Px40 English (English) German (English) 4) French (English)

4) 4)
Spanish (English) Polish (English) 4)
Russian (English) 4) 7) 2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined! 4) Second included language in brackets
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK TD/A54
TD
TECHNICAL DATA
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK TD/A54
TD
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-1 Other Inputs and Outputs Threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection: Threaded terminal ends M3, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 or Threaded terminals M4 for ring-terminal connection
Technical Data
General Data
Design Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush mounted case for 19" cabinets and for control panels. Installation Position Vertical 30 Degree of Protection Per EN 60529 or IEC 529 IP 52; IP 20 for the rear connection area of the flush-mounted case Weight Case 40 TE: approx. 7 kg Case 84 TE: approx. 11 kg Dimensions See Installation - IN, Section 7. Terminal Connection Diagrams See Installation - IN, Section 8.
Tests
Type Test Tests according to EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Interference Suppression Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A 1MHz-Burst Disturbance Test Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III, Common-mode test voltage: 2,5 kV, Differential test voltage: 1,0 kV, Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, Level 3, Contact discharge, single discharges : > 10, Holding time: > 5 s, Test voltage: 6 kV, Test generator: 50...100 M, 150 pF/330 Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, Level 3, Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides, Test field strength, freq. band 80...1000 MHz: 10 V/m, Test using AM: 1 kHz/80 %, Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz/100 % Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements Per IEC 60255-22-4 Test severity Level 4, Rise time of one pulse t: 5 ns, Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns, Amplitude: 4 kV / 2 kV, resp., Burst duration: 15 ms, Burst period: 300 ms, Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz, Source impedance: 50
TD
Terminals
PC Interface (X6) DIN 41652 connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin Communication Interface Optical fibers (X7, X8): F-SMA-interface per DIN 47258 or IEC 874-2 per plastic fibers or BFOC-(ST)-interface 2.5 per DIN 47254-1 or IEC 874-10 per glass fiber or Leads (X9, X10, X33): Threaded terminal ends M2 for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm2 IRIG-B Interface (X11) BNC plug Current-Measuring Inputs (conventional) Threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection: Threaded terminal ends M5, self-centering with wire protection for conductor cross sections of 4 mm2 or Threaded terminals M4 for ring-terminal connection
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-2 Surge immunity Test Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, Level 4, Testing of power supply circuits, unsymmetrically/symmetrically operated lines, Open-circuit voltage front time/time to half-value: 1.2/50 s, Short-circuit current front time/time to half-value: 8/20 s, Amplitude: 4/2 kV, Pulse frequency: > 5/min, Source impedance: 12/42 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields Per EN 61000-4-6 or IEC 61000-4-6, Level 3, Disturbing test voltage: 10 V Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, Level 4, Frequency: 50 Hz, Test field strength: 30 A/m Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity Per IEC 255-11, 12 % Insulation Voltage Test Per IEC 255-5 or DIN EN 61010, 2 kV~, 60 s For the voltage test of the power supply inputs, direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used. The PC Interface must not be subjected to the voltage test. Creepage Distance and Clearance Per IEC 60255-27: 2005 and IEC 664-1, pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V, overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV Impulse Voltage Withstand Test Per IEC 255-5, Front time: 1.2 s, Time to half-value: 50 s, Peak value: 5 kV, Source impedance: 500 Mechanical Robustness Vibration Test Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, Test severity class 1, Frequency range in operation: 10..60 Hz, 0.035 mm, 60..150 Hz, 0.5 g, Frequency range during transport: 10...150 Hz, 1 g Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, Test severity class 1, Acceleration: 5 g/15 g, Pulse duration 11 ms
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Seismic Test Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 255-21-3, Test procedure A, Class 1, Frequency range: 5...8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 2 8...35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s 3 1 cycle Routine Test Test per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6 Voltage Test Per IEC 255-5, 2.2 kV AC, 1 s For the voltage test of the power supply inputs, direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used The PC Interface must not be subjected to the voltage test Additional Thermal Test 100 % controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
TD
EU Directives
EMC Compliance Per 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC: Compliance to the European Commission Directive on EMC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route. Product Specific Standards were used to establish conformity: EN50263: 2000 Product Safety Per 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC: Compliance with European Commission Low Voltage Directive. Compliance is demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards: EN60255-27: 2006 EN60255-5: 2001
73/23/EEC R&TTE Compliance Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 99/5/EC. Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, down to zero volts by reference to safety standards. Applicable to rear communications ports. ATEX Compliance ATEX Potentially Explosive Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, for equipment. The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, Ex e, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas. CAUTION - Equipment with this marking is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere. Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance.
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-3 Switching threshold (as per order option) Standard variant: 18V (VA,nom: 24 ... 250 V DC): Switching threshold range: 14 V ... 19 V DC Special variant with switching thresholds from 58 ... 72 % of the nominal supply voltage (VA,nom) (definitively "low" at VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage, definitively "high" at VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage): "Special variant 73 V": nominal supply voltage 110 V DC "Special variant 90 V": nominal supply voltage 127 V DC "Special variant 146 V": nominal supply voltage 220 V DC "Special variant 155 V": nominal supply voltage 250 V DC Power Consumption (as per order option): Standard variant: VA = 19...110V DC : 0.5 W 30% VA > 110V DC : VA 5 mA 30 % Special variants: VA > switching threshold: VA 5mA 30 % Analog Inputs and Outputs Direct Current Input Input current: 0...26 mA Value range: 0.00...1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA) Max. permissible continuous current: 50 mA Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V Input load: 100 Open-circuit monitoring: 0...10 mA (adjustable) Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA Zero suppression: 0.000...0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable) Resistance Temperature Detector For analog module only PT 100 permitted, Value range: -40...+215 C 3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor open and short-circuit input permitted Open circuit monitoring: > +215 C (or > +419 F) and < -40 C (or > -40 F) Direct Current Output Output current: 0 20 mA Maximum permissible load: 500 Maximum output voltage: 15 V IRIG-B Interface Min./max. input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp/20 Vpp Input impedance: 33 k at 1 kHz Galvanic isolation: 2 kV
II (2) G
Environmental Conditions
Ambient Temperature Range Recommended temperature range: -5 C...+55 C, or +23 F...+131 F Limit temperature range: -25 C...+70 C, or -13 F...+158 F Ambient Humidity Range 75 % relative humidity (annual mean), up to 56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40 C, condensation not permissible Solar Radiation Avoid exposure of the front panel to direct solar radiation
TD
Ratings
Measurement Inputs Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (settable) Operating range: 0.95...1.05 fnom Over/Underfrequency Protection: 4070 Hz Overexcitation Protection: 0.51.5 fnom Current Nominal current Inom: 1 A and 5 A (settable) Nominal consumption / phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom Load rating: continuous: 4 Inom for 10 s: 30 Inom for 1 s: 100 Inom Nominal surge current: 250 Inom Voltage Nominal voltage Vnom: 50...130 V AC (settable) Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC Load rating: continuous 150 V AC Binary Signal Inputs Max. permissible voltage: 300 V DC
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-4 Output Relays Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC Continuous current: 5 A Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms, 4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4 Power Supply Nominal Auxiliary Voltage VA,nom: 48250 V DC and 100...230 V AC or VA,nom: 24 V DC (depends on ordering)
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Plastic Fiber Connection Optical wavelength: typ. 660 nm Optical output: min. - 7.5 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. - 20 dBm Optical input: max. - 5 dBm 1) Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 Optical wavelength: typ. 820 nm Optical output: min. - 19,8 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. - 24 dBm Optical input: max. - 10 dBm Distance to be bridged: max. 400 m 1) Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125 Optical wavelength: typ. 820 nm Optical output: min. - 16 dBm Optical sensitivity: min. - 24 dBm Optical input: max. - 10 dBm Distance to be bridged: max. 1400 m 1) IRIG-B Interface Format B122, Amplitude modulated 1 kHz carrier signal, BCD time-of-year code
1)
TD
Operating Range For direct voltage: 0.81.1 VA,nom with a residual of up to 12 % of VA,nom for alternating current: 0.91.1 VA,nom Nominal Consumption At VA = 220 V DC and maximum number of modules fitted in case 40TE: Initial position approx.: 13 W Active position approx.: 29 W in case 84TE: Initial position approx.: 13 W Active position approx.: 37 W Start-Up Peak Current < 3 A, duration 0.25 ms Stored-Energy Time 50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC PC-Interface Transmission rate: 300...115200 Baud (settable) Communication Interface Communication Interface COMM1: Protocol per order either IEC 60870-5-103 or can be switched between IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0 (Option) Transmission speed: 300...64000 bit/s (settable) Communication Interface COMM2: Protocol per IEC 60870-5-103 Transmission speed: 300...57600 bit/s (settable) Wire Leads Per EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)422, 2 kV-isolation Distance to be bridged: peer to peer link: max. 1200 m multi-endpoint link: max. 100 m
Distance to be bridged for optical outputs and inputs that are equal on both ends, taking into account a system reserve of 3 dB and typical fiber attenuation.
Communication Interface IEC 61850: Ethernet communication, 100 Mbit/s. GSSE and GOOSE supported.
Typical Characteristic Data

Main Function Minimum output pulse for a trip command: 0.1 10 s (settable) Differential Protection Tripping time: 16 ms w/o inrush stabilization or (Idiff) > (Idiff>>) 32 ms with inrush stabilization Definite Time and Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Operate time inclusive of output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2 operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Reset time (measured variable from 0 to 2 operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Over/Undervoltage Protection Operate time inclusive of output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2 operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8 operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms Reset time (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2 operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8 operate value): 45 ms, approx. 30 ms Starting resetting ratio: settable hysteresis 1...10 % Overexcitation Protection Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-5
Deviations of the Timer Stages

Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the set value under reference conditions. Definite-Time Stages 1% + 20...40 ms Inverse-Time Stages 5 % + 10...25 ms (measured variable greater than 2 Iref) for IEC characteristic extremely inverse and for thermal overload protection and V/f characteristic: 7.5 % + 10...20 ms for frequency protection: 1% + up to 80 ms (depending on evaluation time setting)
TD
Deviations of the Operate Values

Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the set value under reference conditions. Differential Protection Measuring system at Id 0.2 Iref: 5 % Harmonic restraint: 10 % Restricted Earth Fault Protection Measuring system at Id 0.2 Iref: 5 % Overcurrent-Time Protection Operate Values: 5 % Thermal Overload Protection Operate Value : 5 % Over/Underfrequency Protection Operate Values f<>: 30mHz (fnom = 50 Hz) 40mHz (fnom = 60 Hz) Operate Values df/dt: 0.1Hz/s (fnom = 50 or 60 Hz) Over/Undervoltage Protection Operate Values V<>: 1 % (setting 0.61.4 Vnom) Overexcitation Protection Operate Values: 3 %
Deviations in Measured Data Acquisition

Reference Conditions Sinusoidal signals with nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient temperature 20C and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom. Deviation Deviation relative to the relevant nominal value under reference conditions. Operating Data Currents/measuring inputs: 1% Voltages/measuring inputs: 0.5 % Currents/internally calculated: 2 % Voltages/internally calculated: 2 % Frequency: 10 mHz Fault Data Phase and neutral/starpoint currents: 3 % Restraining and differential currents: 5 % Internal Clock With free running internal clock: < 1 min./ month With external synchronization via protocol, synch. interval 1 min: < 10 ms via IRIG-B signal input: 1 ms
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-6
Resolution in Fault Data Acquisition

Time Resolution 20 sampled values per period Currents Dynamic range: 33 Inom Amplitude resolution at Inom = 1 A: 2.0 mAr.m.s. at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mAr.m.s. Voltage Dynamic range: 150 V Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVr.m.s.
TD
Mechanical Robustness
Vibration Test Per IEC 60255-21-1: 1996: Response Class 2 Endurance Class 2 Shock and Bump Per IEC 60255-21-2: 1996: Shock response Class 2 Shock withstand Class 1 Bump Class 1 Seismic Test Per IEC 60255-21-3: 1995: Class 2
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-7 Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 1: see selection table Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 2: see selection table Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 3: see selection table Fct. Assig Trip Cmd. 4: see selection table tDWELL Trip Cmd 1: 0.10...10.00 s tDWELL Trip Cmd 2: 0.10...10.00 s tDWELL Trip Cmd 3: 0.10...10.00 s tDWELL Trip Cmd 4: 0.10...10.00 s Latching trip cmd. 1: No/Yes Latching trip cmd. 2: No/Yes Latching trip cmd. 3: No/Yes Latching trip cmd. 4: No/Yes Fct Assign Fault: see function table Setting Group Selection (GROUP): Control via USER: No/Yes Setting Grp Sel USER: Setting Group SG1 Setting Group SG2 Setting Group SG3 Setting Group SG4 Hold Timer: 0.000...65.000 s/Blocked Self-Monitoring (CHECK): Fct Assign. Alarm: see selection table Mon.Sig. Retention: 0...240 h/Blocked Fault Recording (OSCIL): Fct Assig. Trigger: see selection table Id>: 0.01...30.00 Iref/Blocked IR>: 0.01...30.00 Iref/Blocked Pre-Fault Time: 1...50 Cycles Post-Fault Time: 1...50 Cycles Max Record Time: 5...300 Cycles Common Settings Main Function (MAIN): Vn prim., end a: 0.1...1500.0 kV Vn prim., end b: 0.1...1500.0 kV Vn prim., end c: 0.1...1500.0 kV Vn prim., end d: 0.1...1500.0 kV Evaluation IN, end a: Calculated/Measured Evaluation IN, end b: Calculated/Measured Evaluation IN, end c: Calculated/Measured Current summation: Disabled End (a) + end (b) End (a) + end (c) End (a) + end (d) End (b) + end (c) End (b) + end (d) End (c) + end (d) End (a) + end (b) + end (c) End (a) + end (b) + end (d) End (a) + end (c) + end (d) End (b) + end (c) + end (d) End (a) end (b) End (a) end (c) End (a) end (d) End (b) end (c) End (b) end (d) End (c) end (d)
Address List
Function Settings
Global PC Link (PC): Command Blocking: No/Yes Sig./meas. val. Block.: No/Yes Communication Link 1 (COMM1): USER Command Block: No/Yes USER Sig/meas Block: No/Yes Communication Link 2 (COMM2): USER Command Block: No/Yes USER Sig/meas Block: No/Yes Binary and Analog Output (OUTP): USER Outp rel Block: No/Yes Main Function (MAIN): Protection Enabled: No (Disabled)/Yes (Enabled) USER Test Mode: No/Yes Frequency fn: 50 Hz/60 Hz Phase Rotation: A - B - C/A - C - B In CT. prim.,end a: 1...50000 A In CT. prim.,end b: 1...50000 A In CT. prim.,end c: 1...50000 A In CT. prim.,end d: 1...50000 A In CT. Y prim,end a: 1...50000 A In CT. Y prim,end b: 1...50000 A In CT. Y prim,end c: 1...50000 A Vn V.T. prim.: 0.1...1500.0 kV In Device, end a: 1.0 A/5.0 A In Device, end b: 1.0 A/5.0 A In Device, end c: 1.0 A/5.0 A In Device, end d: 1.0 A/5.0 A IY,nom device, end a: 1.0 A/5.0 A IY,nom device, end b: 1.0 A/5.0 A IY,nom device, end c: 1.0 A/5.0 A Vn VT. Sec.: 50...130 V CT Orientation Iph,a: Standard/Reversed CT Orientation Iph,b: Standard/Reversed CT Orientation Iph,c: Standard/Reversed CT Orientation Iph,d: Standard/Reversed CT Orientation IY,a: Standard/Reversed CT Orientation Iy,b: Standard/Reversed CT Orientation IY,c: Standard/Reversed Minimum Iph Measmt: 0.00...0.20 In Minimum I2 Measmt: 0.0000.200 In Minimum I1 Measmt: 0.0000.200 In Minimum IN Measmt: 0.000...0.200 In Minimum IY Measmt: 0.000...0.200 IN,n Minimum V Measmt: 0.00...0.20 Vn Time Const Iph Dem.: 0.1...60.0 min Fct. Assign. Block 1: see selection table Fct. Assign. Block 2: see selection table Fct. Assign. Block 3: see selection table Fct. Assign. Block 4: see selection table Trip Cmd.Block USER: No/Yes
TD
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-8 Hold Time Dyn.Settg.: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Differential Protection (DIFF): General Enable USER: No/Yes Rated Ref Power Sref: 0.1...5000.0 MVA Ref. Curr. Iref,a: 0.000...50.000 kA Ref. Curr. Iref,b: 0.000...50.000 kA Ref. Curr. Iref,c: 0.000...50.000 kA Ref. Curr. Iref,d: 0.000...50.000 kA Matching fact. kam,a: 0.000...5.000 Matching fact. kam,b: 0.000...5.000 Matching fact. kam,c: 0.000...5.000 Matching fact. kam,d: 0.000...5.000 Minimum Id Measmt: 0.000...0.200 Iref Minimum IR Measmt: 0.000...0.200 Iref Restricted Earth Fault Protection (REF_1, REF_2, REF_3): General Enable USER: No/Yes Select CT Input : End a/End b/End c Rated Ref Power Sref: 0.1...5000.0 MVA Ref. Curr. Iref: 0.000...50.000 kA Matching Fact. kam,N: 0.000...50.000 Matching Fact. kam,Y: 0.000...50.000 Minimum Id Measmt: 0.00...0.20 Iref Minimum IR Measmt: 0.00...0.20 Iref Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (DTOC1, DTOC2, DTOC3): General Enable USER: No/Yes Select CT Input: End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (IDMT1, IDMT2, IDMT3): General Enable USER: No/Yes Select CT Input: End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation Thermal Overload Protection (THRM1, THRM2): General Enable USER: No/Yes Select CT Input: End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation Operating Mode: Absolute Replica/Relative Replica O/T f Iref Persist x: -40300 C Over/Undervoltage Protection (V<>): General Enable USER: No/Yes Over/Underfrequency Protection (f<>): General Enable USER: No/Yes Evaluation time : 3...6 Cycles Undervolt. Block. V<: 0.20...1.00 Vn Overfluxing Protection (V/f): General Enable USER: No/Yes
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS): General Enable USER: No/Yes Broken Conductor Detection (BC_1, BC_2, BC_3, BC_4): General Enable USER: No/Yes Select CT input: End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation Limit Value Monitoring (LIMIT): General Enable USER: No/Yes IDC,lin>: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked IDC,lin>>: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked tIDC,lin>: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked tIDC,lin>>: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked IDC,lin<: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked IDC,lin<<: 0.100...1.100 IDC,nom/Blocked tIDC,lin<: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked tIDC,lin<<: 0.00...20.00 s/Blocked T>: -20...200 C T>>: -20...200 C tT>: 0...1000 s/Blocked tT>>: 0...1000 s/Blocked T<: -20...200 C T<<: -20...200 C tT<: 0...1000 s/Blocked tT<<: 0...1000 s/Blocked Limit Value Monitoring (LIM_1, LIM_2, LIM_3): General Enable USER: No/Yes Select CT Input: End a/End b/End c/End d/Current summation I>: 0.20...4.00 Inom/Blocked I>>: 0.20...4.00 Inom/Blocked tI>: 0...100 s/Blocked tI>>: 0...100 s/Blocked I<: 0.004.00 Inom I<<: 0.004.00 Inom tI<: 0...100 s/Blocked tI<<: 0...100 s/Blocked Programmable Logic (LOGIC): General Enable USER: No/Yes Valid for y = 1 to 8: Set y USER: No/Yes Valid for y = 1 to 32: Fct.Assignm. Outp. y: see selection table Op. Mode t Output y: Disabled Timer Stage PickUp & Reset Delay Pulse Delayed PickUp PickUp & Rst.Retrig Delayed Pulse Retrig Minimum Dwell Time t1 Output y: 0.00...600.00 s Time t2 Output y: 0.00...600.00 s Sig. Assig Outp. y: see selection table Sig.Assig.Outp. y(t): see selection table
TD
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Groups (valid for Setting Groups x = 1 to 4:) Differential Protection (DIFF): Enable SGx: No/Yes Vector Grp. ends b-a: 0...11 Vector Grp. ends c-a: 0...11 Vector Grp. ends d-a: 0...11 Idiff> SGx: 0.10...2.50 Iref Idiff>> SGx: 2.5...30 Iref Idiff>>> SGx: 2.5...30 Iref Idiff>(CTS) SGx: 0.10...30.00 Iref m1 SGx: 0.10...1.50 m2 SGx: 0.10...1.50 IR,m2 SGx: 1.5...10.0 Iref Op. Mode Inrush SGx: Disabled Not Phase-Selective Phase Selective nd Inrush 2 Harmon SGx: 10...50 % I0 filt a Enab SGx: No/Yes I0 filt b Enab SGx: No/Yes I0 filt c Enab SGx: No/Yes I0 filt d Enab SGx: No/Yes O/Flux Blk Enab SGx: No/Yes O/Flux 5th HarmonSGx: 10...80 % Op.del.,trip sig.SGx: 0.00100 s Hyst. Effective SGx: No/Yes Restricted Earth Fault Protection (REF_1, REF_2, REF_3): Enable SGx: No/Yes Operating Mode SGx: Low-Z Iph Sum Bias Low-Z Iph Max. Bias High Impedance CTS Effective SGx: No/Yes Idiff> SGx: 0.10...1.00 Iref Idiff>>> SGx: 2.5...30.0 Iref m1 SGx: 0.001.00 m2 SGx: 0.151.50 IR,m2 SGx: 0.101.50 Iref Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (DTOC1, DTOC2, DTOC3): Enable SGx: No/Yes Block Tim. st. IN SGx: Disabled For Single-Ph. Start For Multi-Ph. Start. Gen.Starting Mode SGx: W/o Start. IN/I2 With Start. IN/I2 tGS SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Inrush Restr Enab SGx: No/Yes Valid for y = >, >> & >>>: Iy SGx: 0.10...30.00 In/Blocked Iy dynamic SGx: 0.10...30.00 In/Blocked tIy SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked I2 y SGx: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked I2 y dynamic SGx: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked tI2 y: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked INy: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-9 INy dynamic: 0.10...8.00 In/Blocked tINy: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (IDMT1, IDMT2, IDMT3): Enable SGx: No/Yes Block Tim. st IN SGx: Disabled For Single-Ph. Start For Multi-Ph. Start. Gen.Starting Mode SGx: W/o Start. IN/I2 With Start. IN/I2 tGS SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Inrush Restr Enab SGx: No/Yes Valid for y = Ph, 2 & N: Iref,y SGx: 0.10...4.00 In/Blocked Iref,y dynamic SGx: 0.10...4.00 In/Blocked Iy Charac SGx: Definite Time/IEC Standard Inverse/IEC Very Inverse/IEC Extr. Inverse/IEC Long Time Inv./IEEE Moderately Inv./IEEE Very Inverse/IEEE Extremely Inv./ANSI Normally Inv./ANSI Short Time Inv./ANSI Long Time Inv./RI-Type Inverse/RXIDG-Type Inverse kt Time Dial/TMS SGx: 0.05...10.00 Min. Trip t Iy SGx: 0.0010 s Hold Time Iy SGx: 0.00...600.00 s Release y SGx: Instantaneous/Delayed as per Char. Thermal Overload Protection (THRM1, THRM2): Enable SGx: No/Yes Iref Rating SGx: 0.10...4.00 Inom Start Fact.OL_RC SGx: 1.05...1.50 Tim.const. 1 (heat) SGx: 1.0...1000.0 min Tim.const. 2 (cool) SGx: 1.0...1000.0 min Max perm obj tmp. SGx: 0...300 C Max perm cool tmp SGx: 0...70 C Select CT Ambient SGx: Default Temp. Value/From PT100/From 20 mA Input Default CT Amb SGx: -40...70 C Blk for CTA Fail SGx: No/Yes T> Alarm Reset,% SGx: 50200 % T> Trip Reset,% SGx: 50200 % Trip Hysteresis SGx: 230 % Pre-Trip Alarm SGx: 0.0...1000.0 min/Blocked Over/Undervoltage Protection (U<>): Enable SGx: No/Yes V> SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked V>> SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked tV> SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked tV>> SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked V< SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked V<< SGx: 0.20...1.50 Vnom/Blocked Vmin> SGx: 0.000.60 Vnom/Blocked tV< SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked tV<< SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked tTransient SGx: 0.00...100.00 s/Blocked Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx: 1...10 %
TD
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-10 Over/Underfrequency Protection (f<>): Enable SGx: No/Yes Valid for y = 1 to 4: Oper. Mode fy SGx: f/f with df/dt/f + Delta f/Delta t fy SGx: 40.00...70.00 Hz/Blocked tfy SGx: 0.00...10.00 s/Blocked dfy/dt SGx: 0.1...10.0 Hz/s/Blocked Delta fy SGx: 0.01...5.00 Hz/Blocked Delta ty SGx: 0.04...3.00 s Overfluxing Protection (V/f): Enable SGx: No/Yes V/f> (Alarm) SGx: 1.00...1.20 Vn/fn/Blocked V/f(t)> SGx: 1.05...1.50 Vn/fn/Blocked V/f>> SGx: 1.05...1.60 Vn/fn/Blocked tV/f> SGx: 0...10000 s/Blocked t at V/f=1.05 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.10 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.15 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.20 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.25 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.30 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.35 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.40 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.45 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.50 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.55 SGx: 1.01000.0 s t at V/f=1.60 SGx: 1.01000.0 s Reset Time SGx: 010000 s tV/f>> SGx: 010000 s/Blocked Current Transformer Supervision (CTS): Enable SGx: No/Yes I1> SGx: 0.054.00 Iref I2/I1> SGx: 0.051.00 I2/I1>> SGx: 0.051.00 t(Alarm) SGx: 0.0010.00 s t(Latch) SGx: 0.0010.00 s Broken Conductor Detection (BC_1, BC_2, BC_3, BC_4): Enable SGx: No/Yes I2/I1> SGx: 0.201.00 Operate Delay SGx: 0.10100.00 s
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Main Function (MAIN): Date: 01.01.1997...31.12.2096 dd.mm.yy Time of day: 00:00:00...23:59:59 hh:mm:ss Time Switching: Standard Time/Daylight Saving Time Frequency f: 40.00...70.00 Hz Valid for y = a to d: Iph, Max now, y prim.: 0...25000 A Iph Therm dem y prim: 0...25000 A Iph Therm pk y prim: 0...25000 A Current Imin, y prim: 0...25000 A Current IA,y prim.: 0...25000 A Current IB,y prim.: 0...25000 A Current IC y prim.: 0...25000 A Current I2 y prim.: 025000 A Current I1 y prim.: 025000 A Current IN,y prim.: 0...25000 A Current IY, a prim.:025000 A Current IY, b prim.:025000 A Current IY, c prim.:025000 A Voltage V prim.: 0,0...2500.0 kV Valid for y = a to d: Curr Iph,Max now,y pu.: 0.00...25.00 In Iph pu Thermal dem.y: 0.00...25.00 In Iph pu Thermal peaky: 0.00...25.00 In Current Imin,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In Current IA,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In Current IB,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In Current IC,y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In Current I2 y p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Current I1 y p.u.: 0.00...25.00 In Current IN,y p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In Current IY,a p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In Current IY,b p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In Current IY,c p.u.: 0.000...25.000 In Iph,max,add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Iph,min,add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Current IA,add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Current IB,add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Current IC,add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Curr. I2, add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Curr. I1, add p.u.: 0.0025.00 In Current IN,add p.u.: 0.00025.000 In Voltage V p.u.: 0.00...25.00 Vn Valid for y = a to d: Angle phi AB, end y: -180...180 Angle phi BC, end y: -180...180 Angle phi CA, end y: -180...180 Angle phi A, end b-a: -180...180 Angle phi B, end b-a: -180...180 Angle phi C, end b-a: -180...180 Angle phi A, end c-a: -180...180 Angle phi B, end c-a: -180...180 Angle phi C, end c-a: -180...180 Angle phi A, end d-a: -180...180 Angle phi B, end d-a: -180...180 Angle phi C, end d-a: -180...180 Angle phi NY, end a: -180...180 Angle phi NY, end b: -180...180 Angle phi NY, end c: -180...180
TD
Measurements
Measured Data Input (RTDmA): Current IDC: 0.00...24.00 mA Current IDC p.u.: 0.00...1.20 IDC,nom Curr. IDC, lin. p.u.: 0.00...1.20 IDC,nom Scaled Value IDC, lin: -32000...32000 Temperature: -40.0...215.0 C Temperature p.u.: -0.40...2.15 (100 C) Measured Data Output (mA_OP): Current A-1: 0.00...20.00 mA Current A-2: 0.00...20.00 mA
Technical Data MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Differential Protection (DIFF) Diff Current 1: 0.000...40.000 Iref Restrain Current 1: 0.000...40.000 Iref Diff Current 2: 0.000...40.000 Iref Restrain Current 2: 0.000...40.000 Iref Diff Current 3: 0.000...40.000 Iref Restrain Current 3: 0.000...40.000 Iref Restricted Earth Fault Protection (REF_1, REF_2, REF_3): Valid for x = 1 to 3: Diff. Current, REF_x: 0.00...20.00 Iref Restrain Curr., REF_x: 0.00...20.00 Iref Thermal Overload Protection (THRM1, THRM2) Valid for x = 1 to 2: Status Replica, THx: -25000...25000 % Object Temperat., THx: -40...300 C Coolant Temp. THx: -40...200 C Pre-Trip t. Left, THx: 0.0...1000.0 min Therm. Repl. p.u.THx: -25.00...25.00 Object Temp. p.u. x .: -0.04...0.30 100 C Coolant Temp. p.u. x: -0.04...0.20 100 C Temp. Offset Repl. x: -25000...25000 % Overfluxing Protection (V/f) Excitation V/f p.u.: 0.0010.00 Status Replica in %: 0100 % Status Replica p.u.: 0.001.00
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-11
TD
P63x/UK TD/A54 (TD) 2-12
TD
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK GS/A54
GS
GETTING STARTED
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK GS/A54
GS
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-1
CONTENTS
(GS) 31.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.1.1 1.2.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.7 1.8 1.8.1 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2 1.9.3 1.9.4 1.9.5
GETTING STARTED
User interfaces and menu structure Introduction to the relay Front panel LED indications Relay rear panel Relay connection and power-up Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options HMI Local control panel Display and keypad Display levels Display panels Menu tree and data points List data points Keys Actions via the HMI Changing between display levels Control at the panel level Password protected control actions Front communication port user interface Front IEC 60870-5-103 port MiCOM S1 relay communications basics PC requirements Connecting to the P63x relay using MiCOM S1 Open communication link with relay Off-line use of MiCOM S1 Viewing regional language english setting files in MiCOM S1
3
3 3 3 4 5 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 11 12 12 13 22 25 26 26 26 26 28 30 30
GS
Getting Started (GS) 3-2
P63x/UK GS/A54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Figure 6: Figure 7: Figure 8: Relay front view Relay rear view for 40TE variant Relay rear view for 84TE variant Example P63x relay label View of the front panel Display panels and the menu tree Basic menu tree structure Relay keypad Front port connection PC - relay signal connection 3 6 7 7 9 10 14 23 25 26
GS
Figure 9: Figure 10:
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-3
1.
1.1
GETTING STARTED
User interfaces and menu structure The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports. Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to start using the relay.
1.2 1.2.1
Introduction to the relay Front panel The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed. Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.
GS
Figure 1:
Relay front view
The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1: A 20-character by 4-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD) A 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (, , and ), an enter key (), a clear key () and a read key () 17 LEDs; 5 fixed function LEDs and 12 programmable function LEDs on the right hand side Under the top hinged cover: The relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information
Under the bottom hinged cover: A 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection
GS
1.2.1.1
LED indications Fixed Function The 5 fixed function LEDs on the left-hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: LED Number H4 H3 H2 H1 H17 Color Red Yellow Yellow Green Red TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY EDIT MODE Description Default Signals MAIN: Gen Trip Signal CHECK: Alarm (LED) MAIN: Blocked/Faulty Internal fixed Internal fixed
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED can be configured to be self-resetting)*. Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination, and will extinguish, when the alarms have been cleared. Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable. Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay. Edit Mode (Red) indicates the fact that the user is in the Edit Mode. In this mode, settings can be changed.
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Programmable LEDs
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-5
The 12 programmable LEDs on the right hand side are suitable for programming alarm indications. LED Number H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 1.2.2 Relay rear panel The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3 for two variants of the P63x relay. All current and voltage signals, digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay. Color Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red User programmable No default signals. Signals from selection table dependent upon relay configuration. Description Default Signals
GS
GS
P1925ENa
Figure 2:
Relay rear view for 40TE variant
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-7
GS
P1926ENa
Figure 3:
Relay rear view for 84TE variant
Refer to the wiring diagram in the Installation section for complete connection details. 1.3 Relay connection and power-up Before powering-up the relay, confirm that the relay auxiliary power supply voltage (Vx) and nominal ac signal magnitudes (In, Vn) are appropriate for your application. The relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information can be viewed under the top hinged cover. Model P6348481040NF00E09 Made in Europe Vx 48-250 100-230 ~ Hz
Variant P634-84881040-304-404-606-921-800 DIAG No.P634.404 SER No. 01591083/11/05 Figure 4: Example P63x relay label F 2.159108.3
In 1\5 A 50/60 Vn 50-130 V ~
The P63x design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the order number is given in the Introduction - IT section of this manual and in the Supporting Documents supplied with the unit. Once the ratings have been verified for the application, connect external power capable of delivering the requirements specified on the label to perform the relay familiarization procedures. Figure 2 and 3 indicates the location of the power supply terminals but please refer to the wiring diagrams in the Installation - IN section for complete installation details ensuring that the correct polarities are observed in the case of dc supply. 1.4 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options The relay has the following user interfaces: The front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad The front port which supports IEC 60870-5-103 communication An optional rear communications module which supports one protocol of either Courier, MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port is selected via settings. This module may also include a second rear port supporting IEC 60870-5-103 protocol only. An optional rear Ethernet communications module supporting IEC 61850 protocol
GS
1.5 1.5.1 HMI
Local control panel All data required for operation of the protection device are entered from the local control panel, and the data important for system management are read out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control panel: Readout and modification of settings Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic state signals Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short-circuits in the power system Resetting of the device and triggering of additional control functions designed to support testing and commissioning tasks
In addition, control via the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and the operating program S&R-103 for Windows. 1.5.2 Display and keypad Control and display elements The local control panel consists of an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters, seven function keys positioned below the display, and 17 LED indicators.
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-9
GS
Figure 5: 1.5.3
View of the front panel
Display levels All data relevant for operation as well as the device settings are displayed on two levels. At the Panel level, data such as measured operating data are displayed in display Panels that provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the Panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the READ key, .

MiCOM P63x
MiCOM P63x Settings
MiCOM P63x Measurements + Tests
MiCOM P63x Fault + Event Record
Set/ Device ID Set/ Configuration Set/ Function Settings
M+T/ Measurements M+T/ Control and Testing M+T/ Operating Data Rec.
Flt+Ev/ Fault,Event Counters Flt+Ev/ Fault, Oload Records Flt+Ev/ Disturbance Oscillo.
GS
Set/Func/ Global Set/Func/ Common Settings Set/Func/ Setting Group SG1 Set/Func/ Setting Group SG2 Set/Func/ Setting Group SG3 Set/Func/ Setting Group SG4
M+T/Meas/ Analogue Readings M+T/Meas/ I.O. Status Monitor M+T/Meas/ Log. State Signals
Figure 6: 1.5.4
Display panels and the menu tree
Display panels The P63x can display Measured Value Panels that can be called up at any given time, as appropriate. Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the design version of the given unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Operation Panel is always available.
1.5.5
Menu tree and data points All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a menu tree. As the user navigates through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LCD display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The data points are accessed at the lowest level of a menu tree branch. They are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically coded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line below.
1.5.6
List data points List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points generally have more than one value element associated with them. This category includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD display, indicating that there is another level below the displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data point are found at the lower level. In the case of a list setting, the individual value elements are linked by operators such as OR.
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.5.7 Keys Up and Down Keys Panel Level:
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-11
By pressing the Up and Down keys, the user can switch between the Measured Value Panels. Menu Tree Level: By pressing the Up and Down keys, the user can navigate up and down through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the Up and Down keys have a different function. Input mode: Setting values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED labeled EDIT MODE. By pressing the Up and Down keys, the user can then change the setting value. With list settings, the user can change the logic operator of the value element by pressing the Up and Down keys. Left and Right Keys Menu Tree Level: By pressing the Left and Right keys, the user can navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the Left and Right keys have a different function. Input mode: Setting values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the Left and Right keys are pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves to the next digit to the right or left. In the case of a list setting, the user can navigate through the list of items available for selection by pressing the Left and Right keys. Enter Key Panel Level: By pressing the ENTER key at the Panel level, the user can go to the menu tree. Menu Tree Level: To enter the input mode, press the ENTER key. Press the ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and leave the input mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active. Clear Key Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
GS
Getting Started (GS) 3-12 Input mode:
Press the CLEAR key to reject the changes entered and leave the input mode. Read Key Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level or from any other point in the menu tree. 1.6 Actions via the HMI The following, which show the individual control steps, specify the displays that can be changed by pressing specific keys. In these charts, a small black square to the right of the ENTER key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. The examples shown here merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved. 1.6.1 Changing between display levels After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed. Going from the menu tree level to the Panel level Step 0 Description From the menu tree level, the user can go to the Panel level from any position within the menu tree. First press the Up key and hold it down while pressing the CLEAR key. Note: It is important to press the Up key first and release it last to avoid unintentional resetting of stored data. Action Display Set/Func/Glob/MAIN Protection Enabled Yes (Enabled)
GS
Current IA,a prim. 350 A

and
Current IA,b prim. 1050 A
Going from the Panel level to the menu tree level Step 0 1 Description Example of a Measured Value Panel. By pressing the ENTER key the user can go from the Panel level to the menu tree level. Action Display Current IA,a prim. 350 A Current IA,b prim. 1050 A
MiCOM P634
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: Set/Conf/HMI), the display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been configured. Illumination of the Display If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set return time has elapsed (return time illumination setting in the menu tree at Set/Conf/HMI). The display illumination is turned on again by pressing one of the control keys. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by the key will not be Executed. Reactivation of display illumination is also possible by way of a binary input. If continuous illumination is desired, the user can set the return time illumination function to blocked.
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.6.2 Control at the panel level
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-13
The measured values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be selected at Set/Conf/HMI in the menu tree. The user can select different sets of measured values for the Measurements + Tests Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel, and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the design version of the given unit and its associated range of functions are actually available. The Measurements + Tests Panel can be selected at any time. Please see Setting a List Setting for instructions regarding selection. If the user has selected MAIN: Disabled for a Panel, then this Panel will be inactive. The Measured Value Panels are called up in accordance with system conditions. If, for example, the unit detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation exists. If the unit detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset - by pressing the CLEAR key, for example. Step 0 Description Up to 6 selected measured values can be displayed sequentially on the LCD display. If more than two measured values have been selected, the user can scroll through the measured values page by page by pressing the Up or Down keys. Likewise, the next page will be displayed after the set Panel Hold-Time has elapsed. Action Display Current IA,a prim. 350 A Current IA,b prim. 1050 A
GS
Current IA,c prim. 350 A

Frequency f 50.00 Hz or
Control at the Menu Tree Level Navigation in the Menu Tree Folders and Function Groups All data points are grouped in function groups according to the function they are associated with and are also organized in different folders based on practical control requirements. The menu tree begins with the device type at the top and then branches out below into the three main folders entitled Settings, Measurements + Tests, and Fault + Event Record, which form the first folder level. Below the first folder level are two more folder levels, so that the entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels. At the bottom of each branch of folders, below the folder levels, are the various function groups in which the individual data points are combined.

MiCOM P63x
MiCOM P63x Settings
MiCOM P63x Measurements + Tests
MiCOM P63x Fault + Event Record
Set/ Device ID Set/ Configuration Set/ Function Settings
M+T/ Measurements M+T/ Control and Testing M+T/ Operating Data Rec.
Flt+Ev/ Fault,Event Counters Flt+Ev/ Fault, Oload Records Flt+Ev/ Disturbance Oscillo.
GS
Set/Func/ Global Set/Func/ Common Settings Set/Func/ Setting Group SG1 Set/Func/ Setting Group SG2 Set/Func/ Setting Group SG3 Set/Func/ Setting Group SG4
M+T/Meas/ Analogue Readings M+T/Meas/ I.O. Status Monitor M+T/Meas/ Log. State Signals
Figure 7:
Basic menu tree structure
Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows setting settings, signals, and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the setting settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in only plain text mode. Step 0 Description In this example the user switches from text mode to address mode. Press the CLEAR key and either the Left or Right key simultaneously. This may be done at any point in the menu tree. Action Display Set/Func/Glob/MAIN Protection Enabled Yes (Enabled) Set/Func/Glob/MAIN 003.030 1
+
or
Change-Enabling Function Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 There are two ways to enter the input mode. Global Change-Enabling Function
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-15
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the Param. Change Enabl. setting to Yes (menu tree: M+T/C+Test/HMI). The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all further changes - with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the section entitled Password-Protected Control Actions) - are enabled without entering the password.
Selective Change-Enabling Function

Password input prior to any setting change. The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. The following example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled Changing the Password), the following description (next page) will apply analogously.
Step 0
Description In the menu tree M+T/C+Test/HMI select the Param. Change Enabl. Setting. Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line. Press the following keys in sequence: Left Right Up Down The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Now press the ENTER key. The EDIT MODE LED will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the Up or Down keys. If an invalid password has been entered, the display shown in step 1 appears.
Action
Display M+T/C+Test/HMI Param. Change Enabl. No Param. Change Enabl. No ********
GS
M+T/C+Test/HMI
M+T/C+Test/HMI
Param. Change Enabl. No * M+T/C+Test/HMI Param. Change Enabl. No
Change the setting to Yes.
M+T/C+Test/HMI
or
Param. Change Enabl. Yes
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED will go out. The device is enabled for further setting changes.
M+T/C+Test/HMI
Param. Change Enabl. Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been activated.
Getting Started (GS) 3-16 Automatic Return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu tree Set/Conf/HMI) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed. Forced Return The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first pressing the Up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key. Note: It is important to press the Up key first and release it last in order to avoid unintentional deletion of stored data.
GS
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree: Set/Func/Glob/MAIN, Protection Enabled). Such settings include the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The following entries in the Change column of the address list (see appendix) indicate whether values can be changed or not:

"on": "off": "-":
The value can be changed even when the protective function is enabled. The value can only be changed when the protective function is disabled. The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protection functions are disabled. Changing Settings If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can be entered. Step 0 Description Example of a display. In this example the changeenabling function is activated and the protection is disabled, if necessary. 1 Select the desired setting by pressing the arrow keys. Action Display M+T/C+Test/HMI Param. Change Enabl. Yes
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time 60 s
Press the ENTER key. The EDIT MODE LED will light up. The last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor (underlined). Press the Left or Right keys to move the cursor to the left or right. Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing the Up and Down keys. In the meantime the device will continue to operate with the old value.
Set/Conf/HMI
Auto Return Time 60 s Set/Conf/HMI Auto Return Time 60 s
or
Set/Conf/HMI
or
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Step 5 Description Press the ENTER key. The EDIT MODE LED will go out and the device will now operate with the new value. Press the keys to select another setting for a value change. If you wish to reject the new setting while entering it (EDIT MODE LED is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and the device will continue to operate with the old value. A further setting can be selected for a value change by pressing the arrow keys. Action
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-17 Display Auto Return Time 70 s
Set/Conf/HMI
Set/Conf/HMI
Setting a List Setting Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measured values that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number m that can be selected out of the total number n of the set is given in the address list in the Remarks column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an OR operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an example to illustrate the setting of a list setting. Step 0 Description Select a list setting (in this example, the setting 'Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1' at Set/Func/Glob/ MAIN in the menu tree). The down arrow () indicates that a list setting has been selected. Press the Down key. The first function and the first selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol #01 in the display indicates the first item of the selection. If MAIN: Disabled appears for the first item, then this means that no function assignment has been made yet. Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing the Left and Right keys. Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown on the right will appear. 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The EDIT MODE LED will light up. Action Display Set/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
GS
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 #01 DIFF Trip Signal
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 OR #02 REF_1 Trip Signal Set/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 #03 MAIN ????? Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 #03 MAIN Disabled
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Getting Started (GS) 3-18 Step 4 Description Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the Left and Right keys in the input mode. Select the operator or the class using the Up and Down keys. In this particular case, only the OR operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the selection of classes. Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The assignment has been made. The device will now operate with the new settings. If no operator has been selected, the OR operator is always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes. 7 Press the Up key to exit the list at any point in the list. Action
P63x/UK GS/A54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Display Set/Func/Glob/MAIN Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 #03 MAIN Manual Trip Signal Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 #03 MAIN Manual Trip Signal
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN OR
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 OR #03 MAIN Manual Trip Signal
GS
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still entering it (EDIT MODE LED is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out.
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1 #03 MAIN ?????
Deleting a List Setting If MAIN: Disabled is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted. Memory Readout After a memory is entered, the memory can be read out at the entry point. It is not necessary to activate the change-enabling function or even to disable the protective function. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible. The following memories are available:

In the menu tree M+T/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory In the menu tree M+T/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory Event memories

In the menu tree Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL: Fault Recording 1 to 8 In the menu tree Flt+Ev/Oscil/OL_RC: Overload Recording 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit. A given unit may contain only some of them or even none at all, depending on the device type. Readout of the Operating Data Memory The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Step 0 Description Select the entry point for the operating data memory. Action
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-19 Display M+T/Rec/OP_RC Operat. Data Record.
Press the Down key to enter the operating data memory. The latest entry is displayed. Press the Left key repeatedly to display the entries one after the other in chronological order. Once the end of the operating data memory has been reached, pressing the Left key again will have no effect. Press the Right key to display the previous entry.
Operat. Data Record.

01.01.97 12:05 MAIN Manual Trip Signal End
Operat. Data Record. 01.01.97 12:05 MAIN Manual Trip Signal Start
Operat. Data Record. 01.01.97 12:05 MAIN Manual Trip Signal End Operat. Data Record.
GS
Press the Up key at any point within the operating data memory to return to the entry point.
M+T/Rec/OP_RC
Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines, or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible. After that an Overflow signal is issued. Step 0 Description Select the entry point for the monitoring signal memory. Action Display M+T/Rec/MT_RC Mon. Signal Record.
Press the Down key to enter the monitoring signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
Mon. Signal Record.
01.01.97 12:05 CHECK Cold Rest /SW Update
Press the Right key repeatedly to display the entries one after the other in chronological order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last reset, the overflow signal is displayed as the last entry. Press the Left key to display the previous entry.
Mon. Signal Record. 01.01.97 12:04 CHECK Checksum error param
Mon. Signal Record. 01.01.97 12:05 CHECK Cold Rest /SW Update
Getting Started (GS) 3-20 Step 4 Description If the Down key is held down while a monitoring signal is being displayed, the following additional information will be displayed: First: Active: Time when the signal first occurred The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring function. The fault was no longer detected by the selfmonitoring function and has been reset (Yes). Action
P63x/UK GS/A54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Display Mon. Signal Record. 01.01.97 12:05 CHECK Cold Rest/SW Update 12:05:59.744 Yes No 1
First
Active Cancel Number
Reset:
GS
5
Number: The signal occurred x times. Press the Up key at any point within the monitoring signal memory to return to the entry point.
M+T/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. Signal Record.
Readout of the Event Memories There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth. Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example. Step 0 Description Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for example. If the memory contains entries, the third line of the display will show the date and time the fault began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries in the fault memory. Press the Down key to enter the fault memory. First, the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd fault since the last reset. Press the Right key repeatedly to see first the measured fault data and then the binary signals in chronological order. The time shown in the second line is the relative time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which the value was measured or the binary signal started or ended. Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the Right key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the Right key again will have no effect. Action Display Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL Fault Recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33
Fault Recording 1
Event 22
OSCIL
Fault Recording 1 200 ms FT_DA Running Time 0.17 s Fault Recording 1 0 ms OSCIL Record. in Progress Start Fault Recording 1 241 ms OSCIL Record. in Progress End
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Step 3 Description Press the Left key to see the previous measured value or the previous signal. Press the Up key at any point within the fault memory to return to the entry point. Action
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-21 Display Fault Recording 1 0 ms OSCIL Record. in Progress Start Fault Recording 1 01.01.99 10:00:33
Flt+Ev/Oscil/OSCIL
Resetting All information memories - including the event memories and the monitoring signal memory and also the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault - provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected - so that they always indicate the latest fault. The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably prevented. Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be the case after functional testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting. The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example. In this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated. Step 0 Description Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this example. Press the ENTER key. The EDIT MODE LED will light up. Action Display M+T/C+Test/OSCIL Reset Recording 10
GS
M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
Reset Recording 10 Dont Execute
Press the Up or Down keys to change the setting to Execute.
M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
Reset Recording 10 Execute or Reset Recording 0 Reset Recording 10
Press the ENTER key. The EDIT MODE LED will go out. The value in line 3 is reset to 0. To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings after leaving the standard control mode (the EDIT MODE LED is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED will go out, and the fault recordings remain stored in the device unchanged. Any setting can be selected again for a value change by pressing the keys.
M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
M+T/C+Test/OSCIL
Getting Started (GS) 3-22 1.7 Password protected control actions
Certain actions from the local HMI (such as a manual trip command for testing purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password. This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. The following example illustrates the password-protected output of a manual trip command using the factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled Changing the Password), the following description will apply analogously. Step 0 Description In the menu tree M+T/C+Test/MAIN select setting Man. Trip Cmd. USER Press the Enter key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display. Press the following keys in sequence: Left Right Up Down Action Display M+T/C+Test/MAIN Man. Trip Cmd. USER Dont Execute Man. Trip Cmd. USER Dont Execute ********
GS
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man. Trip Cmd. USER Dont Execute *
The display will change as shown in the column on the right. Now press the Enter key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting can now be changed by pressing the Up or Down keys. 3 Change the setting to Execute.
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man. Trip Cmd. USER Dont Execute
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
or
Man. Trip Cmd. USER Execute
4 Press the Enter key again. The LED indicator will go out and the unit will execute the command. As long as the EDIT MODE LED is on, the control action can be terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The LED will go out.
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man. Trip Cmd. USER Dont Execute Man. Trip Cmd. USER Dont Execute
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Changing the Password The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within a specific time interval. The Left, Right, Up and Down keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-23
GS
Figure 8: Relay keypad The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password. Step 0 Description In the menu tree Set/Conf/HMI select setting Password Press the Enter key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line of the display. Press the following keys in sequence: Left Right Up Down Action Display Set/Conf/HMI Password ******** Password ******** ********
Set/Conf/HMI
Set/Conf/HMI
Password ******** *
The display will change as shown in the column on the right. 3 Now press the Enter key. The EDIT MODE LED will light up. The third line shows a cursor (_) as the prompt for entering a new password. Enter the new password, which in this example is done by pressing the Up followed by the Down key.
Set/Conf/HMI
Password _
Set/Conf/HMI
then Password **
Getting Started (GS) 3-24 Step 5 Description Press the Enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third line and a cursor in the fourth prompts the user to enter the new password again. Re-enter the password. Action Password ** _
P63x/UK GS/A54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Display
Set/Conf/HMI
Set/Conf/HMI
then Password ** ** Password ********
7a
GS
Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been entered correctly, the EDIT MODE LED goes out and the display appears on the right as shown. The new password is now valid. If the password is re-entered incorrectly, the EDIT MODE LED remains on and display at right is shown. The password needs to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change in password by pressing the CLEAR key (see step 8). The change in password can be canceled at any time before step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is done, the original password continues to be valid.
Set/Conf/HMI
7b
Set/Conf/HMI
then Password ** _
Set/Conf/HMI
Password ********
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6 without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled Change-Enabling Function). If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again. Step 0 1 Description Turn off the device. Turn the device on. At the beginning of device startup, press the 4 arrow keys and hold them down. When this condition is detected during startup, the password is displayed. Action Display
TEST Password
1234 >>>
After the 4 keys are released, startup will continue.
TEST >>>>>>>>>>>>
Getting Started MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.8 Front communication port user interface
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-25
The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in Figure 7. This port supports the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol only. The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 that is a Windows 98, Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000 or Windows XP based software package.
MiCOM relay
Laptop
GS
SK2 SK1
25 pin download/monitor port
Battery
9 pin front comms port Serial data connector (up to 15m)
Serial communication port (COM 1 or COM 2)

P0107ENb
Figure 9:
Front port connection
The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Tx Transmit data Rx Receive data 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): 25 Way Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 3 2 7 9 Way 2 3 5 Rx Receive data Tx Transmit data 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC, as shown in Figure 7. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx. This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the relay.

MiCOM relay

PC
DCE Pin 2 Tx Pin 3 Rx Pin 5 0V
Serial data connector
DTE Pin 2 Rx Pin 3 Tx Pin 5 0V
Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port

P0108ENc
Figure 10: PC - relay signal connection Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays communication settings for the front port are set via the settings in menu tree Set/Conf/PC. Refer to Settings - ST section for details of these settings. 1.8.1 Front IEC 60870-5-103 port The front EIA(RS)232 1 9 pin port supports the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol for one to one communication. It is designed for use during installation and commissioning/maintenance and is not suitable for permanent connection. 1.9 MiCOM S1 relay communications basics The front port is particularly designed for use with the relay settings program MiCOM S1 that is a Windows 98, Windows NT4.0, Windows 2000 or Windows XP based software package. MiCOM S1 is the universal MiCOM IED Support Software and provides users a direct and convenient access to all stored data in any MiCOM IED using the EIA(RS)232 front communication port. MiCOM S1 provides full access to: 1.9.1 MiCOM Px20, Px30, Px40 relays MiCOM Mx20 measurements units
GS
PC requirements The following minimum requirements must be met for the MiCOM S1 software to properly work on a PC. IBM PC or 100% compatible Windows 98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system 64MB RAM Intel Pentium II 300MHz 1.60GB free hard disk for the full installation, with 30MB minimum free on C:\ CD-ROM drive or network connection
1.9.2
Connecting to the P63x relay using MiCOM S1 Before starting, verify that the EIA(RS)232 serial cable is properly connected to the EIA(RS)232 port on the front panel of the relay. Please follow the instructions in section 1.8 to ensure a proper connection is made between the PC and the relay before attempting to communicate with the relay.
1 This port is actually compliant to EIA(RS)574; the 9-pin version of EIA(RS)232, see www.tiaonline.org.
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-27
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using MiCOM S1 and assumes you have a copy of MiCOM S1 installed on your PC. Please refer to the MiCOM S1 User Manual for more detailed information. To start MiCOM S1, click on the icon: In the "Programs" menu, select "MiCOM S1" then "MiCOM S1 Start-up".
GS
WARNING:
CLICKING ON "UNINSTALL MICOM S1", WILL UNINSTALL MiCOM S1, AND ALL DATA AND RECORDS USED IN MiCOM S1.
You access the MiCOM S1 launcher screen.
The MiCOM S1 launcher is the software that gives access to the different application programs: MiCOM S1 for MiCOM M/Px20 IEDs MiCOM S1 for MiCOM Px30 IEDs MiCOM S1 for MiCOM Px40 IEDs MiCOM S1 disturbance record viewer for COMTRADE files
To access these different programs, use the blue arrows,
Click on the desired type of access
GS
and click on the required MiCOM Px30 series
1.9.3
Open communication link with relay To open the communications link from S1 to the P63x relay the following procedure must be followed: Choose Identify Device... from the Communication menu.
Select the ranges for baud rate and device address, select the parity and click the Identify button. These settings can be checked and modified in the device in the menu tree Set/Conf/PC. The default settings are Baud Rate: 19200, Bay Address: 1, Parity: Even.
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-29
If a device is identified, the Device dialog box with information on this device is displayed.
GS
Click the Settings File button. This creates a new default settings file suitable for the data model of the identified device.
To read out the current settings of the device, click Yes in the dialogue shown above. This will update the default file with the device information and current settings. Note: The default file will contain all possible hardware and software options for the device. Reading out the active settings will configure the file to show only those options available in the currently connected device.
Highlight the folder in the left part of the setting data window or highlight the setting you want to read out and choose Read Value... from the Communication menu. If the first entry is highlighted in the left part of the setting data window, that is the name of the IED, the complete setting will be read out e.g.
Getting Started (GS) 3-30 1.9.4 Off-line use of MiCOM S1
As well as being used for the on-line editing of settings, MiCOM S1 can also be used as an off-line tool to prepare settings without access to the relay. In order to open a default setting file for modification, in the File menu, select New and then Settings File.
GS
Select the relay type and firmware version required. e.g. a P634 relay, with firmware version 606 in the figure shown below. The language (in brackets) indicates the Regional Language variant of the file. The customized English version on which this documentation is based is indicated by (English), also as shown in figure below.
1.9.5
Viewing regional language english setting files in MiCOM S1 The MiCOM S&R-103 editor allows viewing of setting files in either the Reference Language or the Regional Language of the data model. To view the Regional Language English settings and text: Select Program Settings from the Tools menu.
In the dialogue box, select Regional Language as shown below.
P63x/UK GS/A54 (GS) 3-31
GS
To set the relay to display the Regional Language English on the HMI, go to Par/Conf/LOC: Language (003.020) and set to 2nd language. This setting will then be displayed as Set/Conf/HMI: Language in the Regional Language English. Refer to the MiCOM S1 Technical Guide section S1V23/EN HI/A21 for more information on using the S1 S&R-103 setting software.
GS
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK ST/A54
ST
SETTINGS
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK ST/A54
ST
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-1
CONTENTS
(ST) 41.
1.1 1.1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 1.2.10 1.2.11 1.2.12 1.2.13 1.2.14 1.2.15 1.2.16 1.2.17 1.2.18 1.2.19 1.2.20 1.2.21 1.2.22 1.2.23 1.2.24 1.2.25 1.2.26 1.2.27
SETTINGS
Device ID Device identification (DVICE) Configuration Local control panel configuration (HMI) Local front port communication configuration (PC) Rear port communication configuration (COMM1) 2nd rear port communication configuration (COMM2) Communication interface IEC 61850 (IEC) Communication interface GOOSE Communication interface GSSE Enabling IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB) Opto input assignment and operating mode configuration (INP) Temperature & DC monitoring inputs configuration (RTDmA) Output relay assignment and operating mode configuration (OUTP) Analog output channel configuration (mA_OP) LED assignment and operating mode configuration (LED) Communication and time synchronization channel assignment (MAIN) Disturbance recorder channel configuration (OSCIL) Cancelling a protection function Enabling differential protection (DIFF) Enabling restricted earth fault protection (REF_) Enabling definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC) Enabling inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT) Enabling thermal overload protection (THRM) Enabling under/overvoltage protection (V<>) Enabling frequency protection (f<>) Enabling overfluxing protection (V/f) Enabling current transformer supervision (CTS) Enabling broken conductor detection (BC_) Enabling temperature & DC monitoring (LIMIT)
5
5 5 9 9 10 12 21 23 26 31 34 35 37 38 40 43 45 46 47 47 48 48 48 49 49 49 50 50 50 51
ST
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-2 1.2.28 1.2.29 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 1.3.1.2 1.3.1.3 1.3.1.4 1.3.1.5 1.3.1.6 1.3.1.7 1.3.1.8 Enabling phase current monitoring (LIM_) Enabling programmable logic (LOGIC) Function settings Global Front port communication blocking (PC) Rear port communication blocking (COMM1) Rear port communication blocking (COMM2) Output relay blocking (OUTP) Main global settings (MAIN) Setting group selection (GROUP) Self testing & diagnostics (CHECK) Disturbance recorder settings (OSCIL) Common settings Main common settings (MAIN) Differential protection common settings (DIFF) Restricted earth fault protection common settings (REF_) Definite time overcurrent protection common settings (DTOC) Inverse time overcurrent protection common settings (IDMT) Thermal overload protection common settings (THRM) Under/overvoltage protection common settings (V<>) Frequency protection common settings (f<>) Overfluxing protection common settings (V/f)
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 51 51 52 52 52 52 52 53 53 59 59 60 61 61 62 63 66 66 67 68 68 69 69 69 70 72 74 77 78 78 81 83 90 97 100
ST
1.3.2 1.3.2.1 1.3.2.2 1.3.2.3 1.3.2.4 1.3.2.5 1.3.2.6 1.3.2.7 1.3.2.8 1.3.2.9
1.3.2.10 Current transformer supervision common settings (CTS) 1.3.2.11 Broken conductor detection common settings (BC_) 1.3.2.12 Temperature & DC monitoring settings (LIMIT) 1.3.2.13 Phase current monitoring settings (LIM_) 1.3.2.14 Programmable logic settings (LOGIC) 1.3.3 1.3.3.1 1.3.3.2 1.3.3.3 1.3.3.4 1.3.3.5 1.3.3.6 1.3.3.7 Setting group SGx (x = 1 to 4) Phase reversal logic (MAIN) Differential protection (DIFF) Restricted earth fault protection (REF_) Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC) Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT) Thermal overload protection (THRM) Under/overvoltage protection (V<>)
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.3.3.8 1.3.3.9 Frequency protection (f<>) Overfluxing protection (V/f)
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-3 101 103 105 106
1.3.3.10 Current transformer supervision (CTS) 1.3.3.11 Broken conductor detection (BC_)
ST
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-4
ST
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-5
1.
1.1 1.1.1
SETTINGS
Device ID Device identification (DVICE) Menu Text Settings\Device ID DVICE: Device Type
000 000
Default Setting
Setting Range Min. Max.
Step Size
As per relay
631
Read only
762
The device type is displayed. DVICE: Software Version

002 120
As per relay
Not Measured/ 0.00

Read only
655.35/ Overflow
0.01
Firmware version of the device. DVICE: SW Date

002 122
ST
01.01.97
Read only
As per relay
dd.mm.yy
Release date of the firmware. DVICE: SW Version Communic.

002 103
As per relay
Not Measured/ 0.00

Read only
655.35/ Overflow
0.01
Firmware version of the communication module. DVICE: Language Version

002 123
As per relay
0.0
Read only
899.9
0.1
Language version of the device. DVICE: Text Vers Data Model

002 121
As per relay
0
Read only
255
Using the text replacement feature of S&R-103, the user can change the setting names and descriptions contained within the data model and download them into the device. The customized data models have a numeric Text Version field that can be updated to indicate a customized data model. Standard data models have a factory-set default value of 0. DVICE: Serial Number
002 124
As per relay
0.000000.0
Read only
Serial number of the device. DVICE: Order No.

000 001
As per relay
00000000
Read only
Order number of the device
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-6
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0 999 Max. 1
Menu Text DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 ( 27) 0
Default Setting
Step Size
See table below for setting addresses. Order extension numbers of the device. These settings can be modified by sending each value to the device individually or via the front panel display.
Setting
Order ext. No. 1 Order ext. No. 2 Order ext. No. 3 Order ext. No. 4 Order ext. No. 5 Order ext. No. 6 Order ext. No. 7
Address
000 003 000 004 000 005 000 006 000 007 000 008 000 009 000 010 000 011
Setting
Order ext. No. 10 Order ext. No. 11 Order ext. No. 12 Order ext. No. 13 Order ext. No. 14 Order ext. No. 15 Order ext. No. 16 Order ext. No. 17 Order ext. No. 18
Address
000 012 000 013 000 014 000 015 000 016 000 017 000 018 000 019 000 020
Setting
Order ext. No. 19 Order ext. No. 20 Order ext. No. 21 Order ext. No. 22 Order ext. No. 23 Order ext. No. 24 Order ext. No. 25 Order ext. No. 26 Order ext. No. 27
Address
000 021 000 022 000 023 000 024 000 025 000 026 000 027 000 028 000 029
ST
Order ext. No. 8 Order ext. No. 9
DVICE: Module var. slot 1 ( 21)
As per relay
Module A: Module B: Module L: Module N: Module P: Module T: Module V: Module X: Module Y: Not fitted
See table below for setting addresses.
Read only
Stock number of the module fitted in the respective slot.

Setting
Module var. slot 1 Module var. slot 2 Module var. slot 3 Module var. slot 4 Module var. slot 5 Module var. slot 6 Module var. slot 7
Address
086 050 086 051 086 052 086 053 086 054 086 055 086 056
Setting
Address
086 057 086 058 086 059 086 060 086 061 086 062 086 063
Setting
Address
086 064 086 065 086 066 086 067 086 068 086 069 086 070
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Version A Version Z Not Fitted
Read only
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-7
Menu Text
Default Setting
Max.
Step Size
DVICE: Module vers. Slot 1 ( 21)
As per relay
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
Setting
Module vers. Slot 1 Module vers. Slot 2 Module vers. Slot 3 Module vers. Slot 4 Module vers. Slot 5 Module vers. Slot 6 Module vers. Slot 7
Address
086 193 086 194 086 195 086 196 086 197 086 198 086 199
Setting
Address
086 200 086 201 086 202 086 203 086 204 086 205 086 206
Setting
Address
086 207 086 208 086 209 086 210 086 211 086 212 086 213
DVICE: Variant of Module A

086 047
ST
As per relay
Not fitted
Read only
Module A:
Stock number of Module A in this design version. DVICE: Variant of Module L

086 048
As per relay
Not fitted
Read only
Module L:
Stock number of Module L in this design version. DVICE: Version of Module A

086 190
As per relay
Version A Version Z Not Fitted

Read only
Index letter specifying the version of Module A. DVICE: Version of Module L

086 191
As per relay

Read only
Index letter specifying the version of Module L. DVICE: Variant of Module B

086 049
As per relay
Not fitted
Read only
Module B:
Item number of digital bus Module B in this design version. DVICE: Version of Module B
086 192
As per relay

Read only
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus Module B.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-8
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Not fitted
Read only
Menu Text DVICE: Variant of Module B (a)

086 046
Default Setting As per relay
Max. Module B: -
Step Size
Stock number of the analog bus Module B in this design version. DVICE: Version of Module B (a)
086 189
As per relay

Read only
Index letter specifying the version of the analog bus Module B. DVICE: MAC Address Module A
104 061
As per relay
Read only
ST
MAC address for Ethernet module, where fitted. DVICE: Customer ID Data 1 ( 8) 0.00 0.00 99.99 0.01
Customer configurable fields.

Setting
Customer ID Data 1 Customer ID Data 2 Customer ID Data 3
Address
000 040 000 041 000 042
Setting
Customer ID Data 4 Customer ID Data 5 Customer ID Data 6
Address
000 043 000 044 000 045
Setting
Customer ID Data 7 Customer ID Data 8
Address
000 046 000 047
DVICE: Device ID
000 035
9999
Customer configurable fields. DVICE: Substation ID

000 036
9999
Customer configurable fields. DVICE: Feeder ID

000 037
9999
Customer configurable fields. DVICE: Password Level 1

000 048
9999
DVICE: Password Level 2

000 049
9999
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2 1.2.1 Configuration Local control panel configuration (HMI) Menu Text Settings\Configuration HMI: Language
003 020
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-9
Default Setting
Step Size
Reference Language
English Reference Language
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel. Note: This Technical Manual is based on the 2nd Language or English setting of this field. Relays with this data model will have a -800 order code in the model number. HMI: Decimal Separator
003 021
Decimal Point
Decimal Point Comma
ST
Displayed on HMI only (not in setting file).
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the HMI. HMI: Password

003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the HMI can be defined here. Refer to Getting Started - GS for more information on entering/changing the password from the HMI. HMI: Read Key Assignment
080 110
Disabled
Signals from selection table dependent upon relay configuration.
Selection of the event recording to be displayed when the read key is pressed. HMI: Operation Panel fct
053 007
Disabled
OP Fig. 83
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel referred to as the Operation Panel. This panel will be displayed during normal operation i.e. during normal load conditions. HMI: Overload Panel fct
053 005
Disabled
OP Fig. 85
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel. This panel will be displayed during overload conditions. HMI: Fault Panel fct
053 003
Disabled
OP Fig. 84
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel. This panel will be displayed during and after fault conditions.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-10
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 1s Max. 10 s
Menu Text HMI: Panel Hold-Time

031 075
Default Setting 5s
Step Size 1s
OP Fig. 83
Setting for the time period for which a panel is displayed before the unit switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected for display than can be shown on the LCD display at one time. HMI: Auto Return Time
003 014
60 s
60 s
60000 s
1s
OP Fig. 83
If the user does not press a key on the HMI during this set time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated and the Operation Panel is called up provided that values have been assigned to the Operation Panel and that there is no other event. HMI: Backlight Time 60 s Blocked/ 60 s 60000 s 1s
ST
1.2.2
003 023
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off. Local front port communication configuration (PC) Menu Text Settings\Configuration PC: Manufacturer
003 183
Default Setting
Step Size
ALSTOM D
ALSTOM AEG ALSTOM D
OP Fig. 86
Setting for the name of the device manufacturer. Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility. PC: Bay Address
003 068
254
1
OP Fig. 86
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC (local front EIA(RS)232 port) interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. PC: Relay Address
003 069
255
1
OP Fig. 86
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via the PC (local front EIA(RS)232 port) interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. 300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19.2 kBaud 38.4 kBaud 57.6 kBaud 115.2 kBaud
PC: Baud Rate
19.2 kBaud
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Max.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-11
Menu Text
003 081
Default Setting
Step Size
OP Fig. 86
Baud rate of the PC (local front EIA(RS)232 port) interface. PC: Parity Bit
003 181
Even
Disabled Even
OP Fig. 86
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P63x. PC: Spontan. Sig. Enable
003 187
None
None VDEW Only VDEW + Selected Sig. All
OP Fig. 86
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface. PC: Select. Spontan.Sig.
003 189
Disabled
OP Fig. 86
ST
Selection of the spontaneous signals to be transmitted via the PC interface. Disabled ASDU 3.1 per IEC ASDU 3.2 per IEC ASDU 3.3 per IEC ASDU 3.4 per IEC ASDU 9 per IEC ILS Message ASDU 3.1 & 3.4 IEC ASDU 3.2 & 3.4 IEC ASDU 3.3 & 3.4 IEC ASDU 9 & 3.4 per IEC ASDU 9 & ILS telegr.
PC: Transm Enab Cycl Dat
Disabled
003 084
OP Fig. 86
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface. PC: Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
003 185
Disabled
OP Fig. 86
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined message via the PC interface. PC: Delta V
003 055
3.0 %Vn
0.0 %Vn
15.0 %Vn
0.1 %Vn
OP Fig. 86
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta I
003 056
3.0 %In
0.0 %In
15.0 %In
0.1 %In
OP Fig. 86
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-12
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0.0 %fn Max. 2.0 %fn
Menu Text PC: Delta f

003 057
Default Setting 2.0 %fn
Step Size 0.1 %fn

OP Fig. 86
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel
003 155
3.0
0.0
15.0
0.1
OP Fig. 86
The message is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. PC: Delta t
003 058
1 min
0 min
15 min
1 min
OP Fig. 86
All measured data are transmitted again through the PC interface after this time period has elapsed - provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.
ST
1.2.3
PC: Time-Out
003 188
1 min
1 min
60 min
1 min
OP Fig. 86
Time-out setting for the PC interface. Rear port communication configuration (COMM1) Menu Text Settings\Configuration COMM1: Remote Comms Port1
056 026
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the COMM1 function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. COMM1: General Enable USER
003 170
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
Disabling or enabling the communication interface. COMM1: IEC870-5 Enabled

003 215
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 87
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx. COMM1: Addit. -101 Enable
003 216
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 87
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on IEC 870-5-101. COMM1: Addit. ILS Enable
003 217
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 87
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. No Max. Yes
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-13
Menu Text COMM1: MODBUS Enable

003 220
Default Setting No
Step Size OP Fig. 87
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol. COMM1: DNP3 Enable
003 231
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 87
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol. COMM1: COURIER Enable
103 040
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 87
Enabling settings relevant for the Courier protocol. COMM1: Communicat Protocol
003 167
Disabled
OP Fig. 87
ST
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. COMM1: MODBUS Variant ALSTOM ALSTOM ALSTOM D
MODBUS protocol only
OP Fig. 91
Select between the ALSTOM D and the ALSTOM variant of the MODBUS protocol. COMM1: Line Idle State
003 165
Light On / High
Light Off / Low Light On / High
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
Setting for the line idle state indication. 300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19.2 kBaud 38.4 kBaud 57.6 kBaud 64.0 kBaud
COMM1: Baud Rate
19.2 kBaud
003 071
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM1: Parity Bit

003 171
Even
Disabled Odd Even
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control unit connected to the P63x.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-14
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. No Max. Yes OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
Menu Text COMM1: Dead Time Monitoring

003 176
Default Setting Yes
Step Size
The P63x monitors message transmission to make sure that no pause within a message exceeds 33 bits. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. This setting is only necessary for modem transmission. COMM1: Mon. Time Polling
003 202
25 s
Blocked/ 3s
254 s
1s
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here.
ST
COMM1: Octet Comm. Address

003 072
254
1
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 92
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. COMM1: Octet 2 Com.Add DNP3 0 0
DNP3 protocol only
255
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16 bit address is used to identify the devices. The address set here is the higher-order octet. The address set under COMM1: Octet Comm. Address is the lower-order octet of the DNP address. COMM1: Test Monitor On
003 166
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90, 91, 92
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities. COMM1: Manufacturer
003 161
ALSTOM D
ALSTOM AEG ALSTOM D

IEC 870-5 protocol only
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
Setting for the name of the device manufacturer. COMM1: Octet Address ASDU
003 073
0
255
1
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. COMM1: Spontan. Sig. Enable None VDEW Only VDEW + Selected Sig. All
All
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-15
Menu Text
003 177
Default Setting
Step Size
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. COMM1: Select. Spontan.Sig.
003 179
Disabled

OP Fig. 88
Selection of the spontaneous signals to be transmitted via the COMM1 interface. COMM1: Transm Enab Cycl Dat
003 074
Disabled
Disabled ILS Message

OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication interface. COMM1: Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
003 175
Disabled

OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
ST
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined message via the communication interface. COMM1: Delta V
003 050
3.0 %Vn
0.0 %Vn
15.0 %Vn
0.1 %Vn
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM1: Delta I
003 051
3.0 %In
0.0 %In
15.0 %In
0.1 %In
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM1: Delta f
003 052
2.0 %fn
0.0 %fn
2.0 %fn
0.1 %fn
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
The measured frequency is transmitted via the communication interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM1: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel
003 150
3.0
0.0
15.0
0.1
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
The message is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM1: Delta t
003 053
1 min
0 min
15 min
1 min
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
All measured data are transmitted again through the communication interface after this time period has elapsed - provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-16
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Blocked/ 10 s
Menu Text COMM1: Contin. General Scan

003 077
Default Setting Blocked
Max. 9000 s
Step Size 1s
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
A continuous or background general scan means that the P63x transmits all settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two messages. COMM1: Comm. Address Length
003 201
1 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
OP Fig. 89
IEC 870-5-101 protocol only
Setting for the communication address length. COMM1: Octet 2 Comm. Addr.
003 200
255
1
OP Fig. 89
ST
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address. COMM1: Cause Transm. Length
003 192
W/o Source Address
W/o Source Address With Source Address
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission. COMM1: Address Length ASDU
003 193
1 Byte
1 Byte
2 Byte
1 Byte
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of message structures. COMM1: Octet 2 Addr. ASDU
003 194
255
1
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of message structures. COMM1: Addr. Length Inf.Obj
003 196
2 Byte
2 Byte
3 Byte
1 Byte
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the length of the address for information objects. COMM1: Oct.3 Addr. Inf.Obj.
003 197
255
1
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects. COMM1: Inf.No.<-> Funct.Type
003 195
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 89
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be reversed in the object address.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 3 Byte Max. 7 Byte
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-17
Menu Text COMM1: Time Tag Length

003 198
Default Setting 3 Byte
Step Size 1 Byte

OP Fig. 89
Setting for the time tag length. COMM1: ASDU1/ASDU20 Conv.

003 190
Single Channel
Single Channel Dual Channel
OP Fig. 89
Setting specifying whether message structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. COMM1: ASDU2 Conversion
003 191
Single Channel
Single Channel Dual Channel Protection Event
OP Fig. 89
Setting specifying whether message structure 2 shall be converted as a single signal or double signal. COMM1: Initializ Signal
003 199
ST
Yes
No
Yes
OP Fig. 89
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued. COMM1: Balanced Operation
003 226
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 89
Setting specifying whether communication shall be operated in full duplex mode (simultaneous transmission and reception). COMM1: Direction Bit
003 227
1
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the control direction. As a rule, this value should be set to 1 in the control center and to 0 in the substation. COMM1: Time-out Interval
003 228
0.40 s
0.10 s
2.55 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 89
Setting for the maximum time before the status signal is issued for the acknowledge command. COMM1: Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds
003 210
Disabled

OP Fig. 91
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no. 00302, etc.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-18
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Max. OP Fig. 91
Menu Text COMM1: Reg.asg. Selec. Sig.

003 211
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled

MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc. COMM1: Reg.asg. Sel. m.val.
003 212
Disabled

OP Fig. 91
MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register no. 30302, etc.
ST
COMM1: Reg.asg. Sel. Param.

003 213
Disabled

OP Fig. 91
MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first measured value is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no. 40302, etc. COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS)
003 152
5s
1s
120 s
1s
OP Fig. 91
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication interface after this time has elapsed. COMM1: Autom Event Confirm.
003 249
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 91
Setting as to whether an event confirmation by the master is necessary to delete an event from the event queue. COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay
003 241
0 Bit
0 Bit
DNP3 protocol only
254 Bit
1 Bit
OP Fig. 92
Number of bits to be awaited from receiving the "Requests" to sending the "Response". COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout
003 242
40 Bit
0 Bit
DNP3 protocol only
254 Bit
1 Bit
OP Fig. 92
Number of bits that can be missing in the message without receive interrupt. COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode
003 243
Multi-Frame Fragment
Never Multi-Frame Fragment All Frames

DNP3 protocol only
OP Fig. 92
Setting for the acknowledgement mode for confirmation within the link layer.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0.05 s
DNP3 protocol only
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-19
Menu Text COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout

003 244
Default Setting 0.10 s
Max. 2.54 s
Step Size 0.01 s

OP Fig. 92
Setting for the link layer timeout period. Within the link layer, the master needs to acknowledge (confirm) within this period. COMM1: Link Max. Retries
003 245
1
DNP3 protocol only
10
1
OP Fig. 92
Number of repetitions performed within the link layer after the occurrence of errors during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge). COMM1: Appl Confirm.Timeout
003 246
5.0 s
0.5 s
DNP3 protocol only
25.4 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 92
Setting for the application layer timeout period. Within the application layer, the master needs to acknowledge (confirm) within this period. COMM1: Appl Need Time Del.
003 247
ST
60 s
5s
DNP3 protocol only
254 s
1s
OP Fig. 92
Within the time interval set here, the slave cyclically issues a clock synchronization request to the master. COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. Inputs
003 232
Disabled

DNP3 protocol only
OP Fig. 92
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 - binary inputs. Indices are assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.Outputs
003 233
Disabled

DNP3 protocol only
OP Fig. 92
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 - binary outputs. assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. COMM1: Ind./cl. Analog Inp.
003 235
Indices are
Disabled

DNP3 protocol only
OP Fig. 92
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 - analog inputs. assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0. COMM1: Ind./cl. Analog Outp
003 236
Indices are
Disabled

DNP3 protocol only
OP Fig. 92
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 - analog outputs. assigned in the sequence of the selection and beginning with 0.
Indices are
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-20
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0

DNP3 protocol only
Menu Text COMM1: Ph-Ph Meas v. (DNP3)

003 250
Default Setting 16
Max. 255 1
Step Size
OP Fig. 92
Initialization value of the thresholds for the transmission of measured data in object 30. The threshold values may be changed separately by the master for each measured value by writing to object 34, "Analog Input Reporting Deadband". COMM1: Phase Phase t (DNP3)
003 248
5s
1s
DNP3 protocol only
120 s
1s
OP Fig. 92
Cycle time of updating the DNP objects 30 (analog inputs). COMM1: Command Selection
103 042
Disabled

Courier protocol only
OP Fig. 93
ST
This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary commands (read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. Device online). COMM1: Signal Selection
103 043
Disabled

OP Fig. 93
This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary signals (read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. Starting I>). COMM1: Meas. val. Selection
103 044
Disabled

OP Fig. 93
This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. Running time). COMM1: Parameter Selection
103 045
Disabled

OP Fig. 93
This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog settings (read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. tI>). COMM1: Delta t (COURIER)
103 046
5s
1s
120 s
1s
OP Fig. 93
All Courier registers are transmitted again through the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2.4 2nd rear port communication configuration (COMM2) Menu Text Settings/Configuration COMM2: Remote Comms Port2
056 057
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-21
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the COMM2 function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. COMM2: General Enable USER
103 170
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 95
Disabling or enabling the communication interface. COMM2: Line Idle State

103 165
Light On/High
Light Off/Low Light On/High
OP Fig. 95
ST
Setting for the line idle state indication. 300 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud 9600 Baud 19.2 kBaud 38.4 kBaud 57.6 kBaud
COMM2: Baud Rate
19.2 kBaud
103 071
OP Fig. 95
Baud rate of the communication interface. COMM2: Parity Bit

103 171
Even
Disabled Odd Even
OP Fig. 95
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control unit connected to the P63x. COMM2: Dead Time Monitoring
103 176
Yes
No
Yes
OP Fig. 95
The P63x monitors message transmission to make sure that no pause within a message exceeds 33 bits. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not required. This setting is only necessary for modem transmission. COMM2: Mon. Time Polling
103 202
25 s
Blocked/3 s
254 s
1s
OP Fig. 95
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less than the time set here.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-22
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0 254 Max. 1
OP Fig. 95
Menu Text COMM2: Octet Comm. Address

103 072
Default Setting 1
Step Size
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. COMM2: Manufacturer
103 161
ALSTOM D
ALSTOM AEG ALSTOM D
OP Fig. 95
Setting for the name of the device manufacturer. COMM2: Octet Address ASDU
103 073
255
1
OP Fig. 95
ST
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses. COMM2: Spontan. Sig. Enable
103 177
All
None VDEW Only VDEW + Selected Sig. All
OP Fig. 95
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication interface. COMM2: Select. Spontan.Sig.
103 179
Disabled
OP Fig. 95
Selection of the spontaneous signals to be transmitted via the COMM1 interface. Disabled ASDU 3.1 per IEC ASDU 3.2 per IEC ASDU 3.3 per IEC ASDU 3.4 per IEC ASDU 9 per IEC ILS Message ASDU 3.1 & 3.4 IEC ASDU 3.2 & 3.4 IEC ASDU 3.3 & 3.4 IEC ASDU 9 & 3.4 per IEC ASDU 9 & ILS telegr.
COMM2: Transm Enab Cycl Dat
Disabled
103 074
OP Fig. 95
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the COMM2 interface. COMM2: Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
103 175
Disabled
OP Fig. 95
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined message via the COMM2 interface.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0.0 %Vn Max. 15.0 %Vn
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-23
Menu Text COMM2: Delta V

103 050
Default Setting 3.0 %Vn
Step Size 0.1 %Vn

OP Fig. 95
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the COMM2 interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta I
103 051
3.0 %In
0.0 %In
15.0 %In
0.1 %In
OP Fig. 95
A measured current value is transmitted via the COMM2 interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta f
103 052
2.0 %fn
0.0 %fn
2.0 %fn
0.1 %fn
OP Fig. 95
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the COMM2 interface if it differs by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel
103 150
3.0
0.0
15.0
0.1
OP Fig. 95
ST
The message is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted. COMM2: Delta t
103 053
1 min
0 min
15 min
1 min
OP Fig. 95
All measured data are transmitted again through the COMM2 interface after this time period has elapsed - provided that transmission has not been triggered by the other delta conditions. 1.2.5 Communication interface IEC 61850 (IEC) Menu Text Settings\Configuration IEC: IEC Communication
056 059
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling or disabling Ethernet IEC 61850 communication. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. IEC: General Enable USER
104 000
No
No
Yes
Enabling and disabling IEC 61850. IEC: Enable Configuration

104 058
Dont Execute
Dont Execute Execute
This setting can only be sent individually. In order to maintain consistency of all settings in the function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE, they are all enabled mutually by this parameter.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-24
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 1 min Max. 30 min
Menu Text IEC: Inactivity Timer

104 050
Default Setting 15 min
Step Size 1 min
Additional communication monitor for Ethernet. Should a logged-on client issue no further request message, after this time period has elapsed that client will automatically be logged-off, i.e. no further reports will be issued to it. To re-establish communication the client is required to perform a new log-on procedure with the device (IED). IEC: Ethernet Media
104 056
Copper
Copper Fiber
Selecting the physical communication channel from either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering option). IEC: IED Name
104 057
Template
Text string up to 20 characters
ST
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous. All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names. IEC: IP Address
104 001
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address for the device (IED has server function). IEC: Subnet Mask
104 005
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network. IEC: Number of Routes
104 010
Number of network routes, that can be contacted outside of the sub-network, between the device (IED) and a client or server, communicating with this device, and situated in an exterior target network. Such a configuration is required only then when this device must contact an external client/server direct without having its own network router to convert an IP address. Addressing of the router and the target network however are always necessary. Up to four such external target networks can be contacted. IEC: Router Address 1
104 011
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address of network router # 1. IEC: Target Network 1

104 015
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address of target network # 1.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. 0.0.0.0 Max. 255.255.255 .255
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-25
Menu Text IEC: Router Address 2

104 019
Default Setting 0.0.0.0
Step Size -

104 023
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address of target network # 2. IEC: Router Address 3

104 027
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255

104 031
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
ST
IP address of target network # 3. IEC: Router Address 4

104 035
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255

104 039
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address of target network # 4. IEC: SNTP Operating Mode

104 200
Request from Server
Request from Server Broadcast
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization signal after its own cycle time. IEC: SNTP Poll Cycle Time
104 201
60 s
20 s
600 s
1s
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode is set to Request from Server. IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP
104 202
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address of the first synchronizing clock server. IEC: SNTP Server 2 IP

104 202
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
255.255.255 .255
IP address of the second synchronizing clock server.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-26
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. -1440 min Max. + 1440 min
Menu Text IEC: Diff. Local Time

104 206
Default Setting 0
Step Size 1 min
Time difference between UTC (Coordinated Universal Time/GMT) and local time at installation site. IEC: Diff. Dayl. Sav. Time
104 207
60 min
-1440 min
+ 1440 min
1 min
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time. IEC: Deadband Value
104 051
100
10000
Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
ST
IEC: Update Cycle Energy

104 060
Blocked
10
3600
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB transmission with setting to blocked! 1.2.6 Communication interface GOOSE Menu Text GOOSE:
Gen.Obj.Or.SubstEvent 056 068
Default Setting Disabled
Setting Range Min. Enabled/Disabled Max. -
Step Size
The parameters of this function group are only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter IEC: Enable configuration or by switching the device off-line/on-line. GOOSE: General Enable USER
106 001
No
No/Yes
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE. GOOSE: Multic. MAC Address
106 003
01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED). GOOSE: Application ID
106 004
12288
016383
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-27
Menu Text GOOSE: GOOSE ID

106 002
Default Setting -
Step Size -
GOOSE ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with 32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the maximum of 10 monitored external devices. GOOSE: VLAN Identifier
106 006
04094
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the network if they do not include a VLAN identifier. GOOSE: VLAN Priority
106 007
07
ST
VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN priority makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a function. GOOSE: GOOSE Out 1 ( 32) fct.assig. Disabled -
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured Dataset of GOOSE.
Setting
GOOSE Out 1 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 2 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 3 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 4 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 5 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 6 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 7 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 8 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 9 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 10 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 11 Fct.assig.
Address
106 011 106 013 106 015 106 017 106 019 106 021 106 023 106 025 106 027 106 029 106 031
Setting
GOOSE Out 12 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 13 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 14 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 15 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 16 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 17 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 18 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 19 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 20 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 21 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 22 Fct.assig.
Address
106 033 106 035 106 037 106 039 106 041 106 043 106 045 106 047 106 049 106 051 106 053
Setting
GOOSE Out 23 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 24 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 25 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 26 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 27 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 28 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 29 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 30 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 31 Fct.assig. GOOSE Out 32 Fct.assig.
Address
106 055 106 057 106 059 106 061 106 063 106 065 106 067 106 069 106 071 106 073
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-28
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Max. -
Menu Text GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) Applic. ID
Default Setting
Step Size
Blocked
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 2 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 3 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 4 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 5 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 6 Applic. ID
Address
107 000 107 010 107 020 107 030 107 040 107 050 107 060 107 070 107 080 107 090 107 100
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 13Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 14 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 15 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 16 Applic. ID
Address
107 110 107 120 107 130 107 140 107 150
ST
GOOSE Inp 7 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 8 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 9 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 10 Applic. ID GOOSE Inp 11 Applic. ID
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) GOOSE ID
Disabled
GOOSE ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 2 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 3 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 4 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 5 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 6 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 7 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 8 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 9 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 10 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 11 GOOSE ID
Address
107 001 107 011 107 021 107 031 107 041 107 051 107 061 107 071 107 081 107 091 107 101
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 13 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 14 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 15 GOOSE ID GOOSE Inp 16 GOOSE ID
Address
107 111 107 121 107 131 107 141 107 151
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-29
Menu Text GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) DataSetRef
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
'DataSetReference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. 'DataSetReference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) with which the P63x corresponds with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 2 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 3 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 4 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 5 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 6 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 7 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 8 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 9 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 10 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 11 DataSetRef
Address
107 002 107 012 107 022 107 032 107 042 107 052 107 062 107 072 107 082 107 092 107 102
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 13 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 14 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 15 DataSetRef GOOSE Inp 16 DataSetRef
Address
107 112 107 122 107 132 107 142 107 152
ST
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) DataObj Ind
Disabled
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 2 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 3 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 4 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 5 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 6 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 7 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 8 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 9 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 10 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 11 DataObj Ind
Address
107 003 107 013 107 023 107 033 107 043 107 053 107 063 107 073 107 083 107 093 107 103
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 13 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 14 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 15 DataObj Ind GOOSE Inp 16 DataObj Ind
Address
107 113 107 123 107 133 107 143 107 153
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-30
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. Max. -
Menu Text GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) DatAttr Ind
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 2 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 3 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 4 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 5 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 6 DatAttr Ind
Address
107 004 107 014 107 024 107 034 107 044 107 054 107 064 107 074 107 084 107 094 107 104
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 13 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 14 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 15 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 16 DatAttr Ind
Address
107 114 107 124 107 134 107 144 107 154
ST
GOOSE Inp 7 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 8 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 9 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 10 DatAttr Ind GOOSE Inp 11 DatAttr Ind
GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) default
Disabled
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual binary GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 default GOOSE Inp 2 default GOOSE Inp 3 default GOOSE Inp 4 default GOOSE Inp 5 default GOOSE Inp 6 default GOOSE Inp 7 default GOOSE Inp 8 default GOOSE Inp 9 default GOOSE Inp 10 default GOOSE Inp 11 default
Address
107 005 107 015 107 025 107 035 107 045 107 055 107 065 107 075 107 085 107 095 107 105
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12 default GOOSE Inp 13 default GOOSE Inp 14 default GOOSE Inp 15 default GOOSE Inp 16 default
Address
107 115 107 125 107 135 107 145 107 155
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-31
Menu Text GOOSE: GOOSE Inp 1 ( 16) fct.assig.
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was received with the Dataset of GOOSE.
Setting
GOOSE Inp 1 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 2 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 3 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 4 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 5 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 6 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 7 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 8 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 9 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 10 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 11 fct.assig.
Address
107 006 107 016 107 026 107 036 107 046 107 056 107 066 107 076 107 086 107 096 107 106
Setting
GOOSE Inp 12 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 13 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 14 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 15 fct.assig. GOOSE Inp 16 fct.assig.
Address
107 116 107 126 107 136 107 146 107 156
ST
1.2.7
Communication interface GSSE Menu Text GSSE: Gen.Subst.Stat.Event

056 060
Default Setting Disabled
Setting Range Min. Enabled/Disabled Max. -
Step Size
GSSE: General Enable User

104 049
No
No/Yes
GSSE: GSSE Min. Cycle

104 052
10 ms
1 ms
60 ms
1 ms
GSSE: GSSE Max. Cycle

104 053
1s
1s
60 s
1s
GSSE: GSSE Increment

104 054
900
999
GSSE: GSSE Startup

104 055
Promiscuous
Promiscuous Broadcast
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-32
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min. No selection/ IED 0 IED 32 Max.
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
GSSE: GSSE IED Name

104 057
IED 0
GSSE: GSSE Out 1 ( 32) BitPair
No selection
No selection/ User Bit Pair 01 User Bit Pair 96
See table below for setting addresses. Setting

GSSE Out 1 BitPair GSSE Out 2 BitPair GSSE Out 3 BitPair
Address
104 101 104 104 104 107 104 110 104 113 104 116 104 119 104 122 104 125 104 128 104 131
Setting
GSSE Out 12 BitPair GSSE Out 13 BitPair GSSE Out 14 BitPair GSSE Out 15 BitPair GSSE Out 16 BitPair GSSE Out 17 BitPair GSSE Out 18 BitPair GSSE Out 19 BitPair GSSE Out 20 BitPair GSSE Out 21 BitPair GSSE Out 22 BitPair
Address
104 134 104 137 104 140 104 143 104 146 104 149 104 152 104 155 104 158 104 161 104 164
Setting
GSSE Out 23 BitPair GSSE Out 24 BitPair GSSE Out 25 BitPair GSSE Out 26 BitPair GSSE Out 27 BitPair GSSE Out 28 BitPair GSSE Out 29 BitPair GSSE Out 30 BitPair GSSE Out 31 BitPair GSSE Out 32 BitPair
Address
104 167 104 170 104 173 104 176 104 179 104 182 104 185 104 188 104 191 104 194
ST
GSSE Out 4 BitPair GSSE Out 5 BitPair GSSE Out 6 BitPair GSSE Out 7 BitPair GSSE Out 8 BitPair GSSE Out 9 BitPair GSSE Out 10 BitPair GSSE Out 11 BitPair
GSSE: GSSE Out 1 ( 32) fct.assig.
Disabled

GSSE Out 1 fct.assig. GSSE Out 2 fct.assig. GSSE Out 3 fct.assig. GSSE Out 4 fct.assig. GSSE Out 5 fct.assig. GSSE Out 6 fct.assig. GSSE Out 7 fct.assig. GSSE Out 8 fct.assig. GSSE Out 9 fct.assig. GSSE Out 10 fct.assig. GSSE Out 11 fct.assig.
Address
104 102 104 105 104 108 104 111 104 114 104 117 104 120 104 123 104 126 104 129 104 132
Setting
GSSE Out 12 fct.assig. GSSE Out 13 fct.assig. GSSE Out 14 fct.assig. GSSE Out 15 fct.assig. GSSE Out 16 fct.assig. GSSE Out 17 fct.assig. GSSE Out 18 fct.assig. GSSE Out 19 fct.assig. GSSE Out 20 fct.assig. GSSE Out 21 fct.assig. GSSE Out 22 fct.assig.
Address
104 135 104 138 104 141 104 144 104 147 104 150 104 153 104 156 104 159 104 162 104 165
Setting
GSSE Out 23 fct.assig. GSSE Out 24 fct.assig. GSSE Out 25 fct.assig. GSSE Out 26 fct.assig. GSSE Out 27 fct.assig. GSSE Out 28 fct.assig. GSSE Out 29 fct.assig. GSSE Out 30 fct.assig. GSSE Out 31 fct.assig. GSSE Out 32 fct.assig.
Address
104 168 104 171 104 174 104 177 104 180 104 183 104 186 104 189 104 192 104 195
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-33
Menu Text GSSE: GSSE Inp 1 ( 32) bit pair
Default Setting No selection
Step Size

GSSE Inp 1 bit pair GSSE Inp 2 bit pair GSSE Inp 3 bit pair GSSE Inp 4 bit pair GSSE Inp 5 bit pair GSSE Inp 6 bit pair GSSE Inp 7 bit pair GSSE Inp 8 bit pair GSSE Inp 9 bit pair GSSE Inp 10 bit pair GSSE Inp 11 bit pair
Address
105 001 105 006 105 011 105 016 105 021 105 026 105 031 105 036 105 041 105 046 105 051
Setting
GSSE Inp 12 bit pair GSSE Inp 13 bit pair GSSE Inp 14 bit pair GSSE Inp 15 bit pair GSSE Inp 16 bit pair GSSE Inp 17 bit pair GSSE Inp 18 bit pair GSSE Inp 19 bit pair GSSE Inp 20 bit pair GSSE Inp 21 bit pair GSSE Inp 22 bit pair
Address
105 056 105 061 105 066 105 071 105 076 105 081 105 086 105 091 105 096 105 101 105 106
Setting
GSSE Inp 23 bit pair GSSE Inp 24 bit pair GSSE Inp 25 bit pair GSSE Inp 26 bit pair GSSE Inp 27 bit pair GSSE Inp 28 bit pair GSSE Inp 29 bit pair GSSE Inp 30 bit pair GSSE Inp 31 bit pair GSSE Inp 32 bit pair
Address
105 111 105 116 105 121 105 126 105 131 105 136 105 141 105 146 105 151 105 156
ST
GSSE: GSSE Inp 1 ( 32) IED name
No selection

GSSE Inp 1 IED name GSSE Inp 2 IED name GSSE Inp 3 IED name GSSE Inp 4 IED name GSSE Inp 5 IED name GSSE Inp 6 IED name GSSE Inp 7 IED name GSSE Inp 8 IED name GSSE Inp 9 IED name GSSE Inp 10 IED name GSSE Inp 11 IED name
Address
105 002 105 007 105 012 105 017 105 022 105 027 105 032 105 037 105 042 105 047 105 052
Setting
GSSE Inp 12 IED name GSSE Inp 13 IED name GSSE Inp 14 IED name GSSE Inp 15 IED name GSSE Inp 16 IED name GSSE Inp 17 IED name GSSE Inp 18 IED name GSSE Inp 19 IED name GSSE Inp 20 IED name GSSE Inp 21 IED name GSSE Inp 22 IED name
Address
105 057 105 062 105 067 105 072 105 077 105 082 105 087 105 092 105 097 105 102 105 107
Setting
GSSE Inp 23 IED name GSSE Inp 24 IED name GSSE Inp 25 IED name GSSE Inp 26 IED name GSSE Inp 27 IED name GSSE Inp 28 IED name GSSE Inp 29 IED name GSSE Inp 30 IED name GSSE Inp 31 IED name GSSE Inp 32 IED name
Address
105 112 105 117 105 122 105 127 105 132 105 137 105 142 105 147 105 152 105 157
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-34
Menu Text GSSE: GSSE Inp 1 ( 32) default 0
Default Setting
Step Size

GSSE Inp 1 default GSSE Inp 2 default GSSE Inp 3 default GSSE Inp 4 default GSSE Inp 5 default GSSE Inp 6 default GSSE Inp 7 default GSSE Inp 8 default GSSE Inp 9 default
Address
105 003 105 008 105 013 105 018 105 023 105 028 105 033 105 038 105 043 105 048 105 053
Setting
GSSE Inp 12 default GSSE Inp 13 default GSSE Inp 14 default GSSE Inp 15 default GSSE Inp 16 default GSSE Inp 17 default GSSE Inp 18 default GSSE Inp 19 default GSSE Inp 20 default GSSE Inp 21 default GSSE Inp 22 default
Address
105 058 105 063 105 068 105 073 105 078 105 083 105 088 105 093 105 098 105 103 105 108
Setting
GSSE Inp 23 default GSSE Inp 24 default GSSE Inp 25 default GSSE Inp 26 default GSSE Inp 27 default GSSE Inp 28 default GSSE Inp 29 default GSSE Inp 30 default GSSE Inp 31 default GSSE Inp 32 default
Address
105 113 105 118 105 123 105 128 105 133 105 138 105 143 105 148 105 153 105 158
ST
GSSE Inp 10 default GSSE Inp 11 default
GSSE: GSSE Inp 1 ( 32) fct.assig.
Disabled

GSSE Inp 1 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 2 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 3 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 4 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 5 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 6 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 7 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 8 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 9 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 10 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 11 fct.assig.
Address
105 004 105 009 105 014 105 019 105 024 105 029 105 034 105 039 105 044 105 049 105 054
Setting
GSSE Inp 12 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 13 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 14 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 15 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 16 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 17 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 18 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 19 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 20 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 21 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 22 fct.assig.
Addres s
105 059 105 064 105 069 105 074 105 079 105 084 105 089 105 094 105 099 105 104 105 109
Setting
GSSE Inp 23 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 24 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 25 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 26 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 27 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 28 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 29 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 30 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 31 fct.assig. GSSE Inp 32 fct.assig.
Address
105 114 105 119 105 124 105 129 105 134 105 139 105 144 105 149 105 154 105 159
1.2.8
Enabling IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB) Menu Text Settings\Configuration IRIGB: IRIG-B Time Synch
056 072
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the IRIGB function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. IRIGB: General Enable USER
023 200
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 97
Disabling and enabling the IRIG-B interface function.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2.9 Opto input assignment and operating mode configuration (INP)
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-35
The P63x has optical coupler (opto) inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the terminal connection diagrams in the Installation - IN section. The P63x identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not fitted or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree. When configuring binary inputs one should keep in mind the fact that the same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several control points having different signal voltages. In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or absence (active low mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal. Menu Text Settings\Configuration INP: Fct. U 701 ( 2004) Assign Disabled Signals from selection table dependent upon relay configuration. OP Fig. 98
Default Setting
Step Size
ST
Assignment of opto inputs to internal relay signals. Any of the available signals can be configured to any of the opto inputs. The addresses for opto input function assignment are displayed in the following table:
Setting
Fct. U 701 Assign Fct. U 702 Assign Fct. U 703 Assign Fct. U 704 Assign Fct. U 705 Assign Fct. U 706 Assign Fct. U 801 Assign Fct. U 802 Assign Fct. U 803 Assign Fct. U 804 Assign Fct. U 805 Assign Fct. U 806 Assign Fct. U 807 Assign Fct. U 808 Assign Fct. U 809 Assign Fct. U 810 Assign Fct. U 811 Assign Fct. U 812 Assign Fct. U 813 Assign Fct. U 814 Assign Fct. U 815 Assign
Address
152 109 152 112 152 115 152 118 152 121 152 124 184 002 184 006 184 010 184 014 184 018 184 022 184 026 184 030 184 034 184 038 184 042 184 046 184 050 184 054 184 058
Setting
Address
184 082 184 086 184 090 184 094 152 145 152 148 152 151 152 154 152 163 152 166 152 169 152 172 152 175 152 178 152 199 152 202 152 205 152 208 190 002 190 006 190 010
Setting
Address
190 034 190 038 190 042 190 046 190 050 190 054 190 058 190 062 190 066 190 070 190 074 190 078 190 082 190 086 190 090 190 094 192 002 192 006 192 010 192 014 192 018
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-36
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min.

190 014 190 018 190 022 190 026 190 030
Menu Text
Fct. U 816 Assign Fct. U 817 Assign Fct. U 818 Assign Fct. U 819 Assign Fct. U 820 Assign
Default Setting
184 062 184 066 184 070 184 074 184 078 Fct. U 1404 Assign Fct. U 1405 Assign Fct. U 1406 Assign Fct. U 1407 Assign Fct. U 1408 Assign
Max.
Fct. U 1606 Assign Fct. U 2001 Assign Fct. U 2002 Assign Fct. U 2003 Assign Fct. U 2004 Assign
Step Size
192 022 153 087 153 090 153 093 153 096
INP: Oper. Mode U 701 ( 2004)
Active High
Active Low Active High
OP Fig. 98
Selection of the operating mode for the opto inputs. operating mode are displayed in the following table:
Setting
Oper. Mode U 701 Oper. Mode U 702
The addresses for opto input

Setting
Oper. Mode U 1409 Oper. Mode U 1410 Oper. Mode U 1411 Oper. Mode U 1412 Oper. Mode U 1413 Oper. Mode U 1414 Oper. Mode U 1415 Oper. Mode U 1416 Oper. Mode U 1417 Oper. Mode U 1418 Oper. Mode U 1419 Oper. Mode U 1420 Oper. Mode U 1421 Oper. Mode U 1422 Oper. Mode U 1423 Oper. Mode U 1424 Oper. Mode U 1601 Oper. Mode U 1602 Oper. Mode U 1603 Oper. Mode U 1604 Oper. Mode U 1605 Oper. Mode U 1606 Oper. Mode U 2001 Oper. Mode U 2002 Oper. Mode U 2003 Oper. Mode U 2004
Address
152 110 152 113 152 116 152 119 152 122 152 125 184 003 184 007 184 011 184 015 184 019 184 023 184 027 184 031 184 035 184 039 184 043 184 047 184 051 184 055 184 059 184 063 184 067 184 071 184 075 184 079
Setting
Oper. Mode U 821 Oper. Mode U 822 Oper. Mode U 823 Oper. Mode U 824 Oper. Mode U 901 Oper. Mode U 902 Oper. Mode U 903 Oper. Mode U 904 Oper. Mode U 1001 Oper. Mode U 1002 Oper. Mode U 1003 Oper. Mode U 1004 Oper. Mode U 1005 Oper. Mode U 1006 Oper. Mode U 1201 Oper. Mode U 1202 Oper. Mode U 1203 Oper. Mode U 1204 Oper. Mode U 1401 Oper. Mode U 1402 Oper. Mode U 1403 Oper. Mode U 1404 Oper. Mode U 1405 Oper. Mode U 1406 Oper. Mode U 1407 Oper. Mode U 1408
Address
184 083 184 087 184 091 184 095 152 146 152 149 152 152 152 155 152 164 152 167 152 170 152 173 152 176 152 179 152 200 152 203 152 206 152 209 190 003 190 007 190 011 190 015 190 019 190 023 190 027 190 031
Address
190 035 190 039 190 043 190 047 190 051 190 055 190 059 190 063 190 067 190 071 190 075 190 079 190 083 190 087 190 091 190 095 192 003 192 007 192 011 192 015 192 019 192 023 153 088 153 091 153 094 153 097
ST
Oper. Mode U 703 Oper. Mode U 704 Oper. Mode U 705 Oper. Mode U 706 Oper. Mode U 801 Oper. Mode U 802 Oper. Mode U 803 Oper. Mode U 804 Oper. Mode U 805 Oper. Mode U 806 Oper. Mode U 807 Oper. Mode U 808 Oper. Mode U 809 Oper. Mode U 810 Oper. Mode U 811 Oper. Mode U 812 Oper. Mode U 813 Oper. Mode U 814 Oper. Mode U 815 Oper. Mode U 816 Oper. Mode U 817 Oper. Mode U 818 Oper. Mode U 819 Oper. Mode U 820
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2.10 Temperature & DC monitoring inputs configuration (RTDmA) Menu Text Settings\Configuration RTDmA: RTD, Curr. Loop mA IN
056 030
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-37
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the RTDmA function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. RTDmA: General Enable USER
011 100
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 99
Disabling or enabling temperature and DC monitoring inputs. RTDmA: Enable IDC p.u.
037 190
0.000 IDC, nom
0.000 IDC, nom
0.200 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom

OP Fig. 101, 102
ST
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P63x to display a measured value > 0 (zero suppression). RTDmA: IDC< Open Circuit
037 191
3.0mA
Blocked/ 0.0 mA
10.0 mA
0.1 mA
OP Fig. 102
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P63x will issue an open circuit signal. IDC 1 = 0.000 IDC, nom IDC 2 19 = Blocked IDC 20 = 1.200 IDC, nom
RTDmA: IDC 1 ( 20)
Blocked/ 0.000 IDC, nom
0.200 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom
OP Fig. 100, 101, 102
Setting for the input currents IDC xx that will pair up with the linearized values IDC, lin xx to form the interpolation points of the characteristic for the linearization of direct current inputs. Note: IDC 1 and IDC 20 are the two end points of the characteristic and can not be blocked.
Setting
RTDmA: IDC 1 RTDmA: IDC 2 RTDmA: IDC 3 RTDmA: IDC 4 RTDmA: IDC 5 RTDmA: IDC 6 RTDmA: IDC 7
Address
037 150 037 152 037 154 037 156 037 158 037 160 037 162
Setting
RTDmA: IDC 8 RTDmA: IDC 9 RTDmA: IDC 10 RTDmA: IDC 11 RTDmA: IDC 12 RTDmA: IDC 13 RTDmA: IDC 14
Address
037 164 037 166 037 168 037 170 037 172 037 174 037 176
Setting
RTDmA: IDC 15 RTDmA: IDC 16 RTDmA: IDC 17 RTDmA: IDC 18 RTDmA: IDC 19 RTDmA: IDC 20
Address
037 178 037 180 037 182 037 184 037 186 037 188
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-38
Menu Text
Default Setting IDC, lin 1 = 0.000 IDC, nom IDC, lin 2 19 = Blocked IDC, lin 20 = 1.200 IDC, nom
Step Size
RTDmA: IDC, lin 1 ( 20)
0.200 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom
OP Fig. 100, 101, 102
Setting for the input currents IDC, lin xx that will pair up with the linearized values IDC xx to form the interpolation points of the characteristic for the linearization of direct current inputs. Note: IDC, lin 1 and IDC, lin 20 are the two end points of the characteristic and can not be blocked.
Setting Address
037 151 037 153 037 155 037 157 037 159 037 161 037 163
Setting
RTDmA: IDC, lin 8 RTDmA: IDC, lin 9 RTDmA: IDC, lin 10 RTDmA: IDC, lin 11 RTDmA: IDC, lin 12 RTDmA: IDC, lin 13 RTDmA: IDC, lin 14
Address
037 165 037 167 037 169 037 171 037 173 037 175 037 177
Setting
RTDmA: IDC, lin 15 RTDmA: IDC, lin 16 RTDmA: IDC, lin 17 RTDmA: IDC, lin 18 RTDmA: IDC, lin 19 RTDmA: IDC, lin 20
Address
037 179 037 181 037 183 037 185 037 187 037 189
ST
RTDmA: IDC, lin 1 RTDmA: IDC, lin 2 RTDmA: IDC, lin 3 RTDmA: IDC, lin 4 RTDmA: IDC, lin 5 RTDmA: IDC, lin 6 RTDmA: IDC, lin 7
RTDmA: Scaled val. IDC, lin1

037 192
-32768
32767
1
OP Fig. 102, 103
Setting for the scaled value of IDC, lin 1. RTDmA: Scaled val. IDC, lin20
037 193
1200
-32768
32767
1
OP Fig. 102, 103
Setting for the scaled value of IDC, lin 20. 1.2.11 Output relay assignment and operating mode configuration (OUTP) The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams in the Installation - IN section. The P63x identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not fitted or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree. The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as command relays or as signal relays. One signal can also be assigned to several output relays simultaneously for the purpose of contact multiplication. An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either follower mode or an inverted mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Note:
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-39 For relays with make contacts, the Follower mode corresponds to normally-open operation. The Inverted mode means that the polarity of the driving signal is inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover contacts, these more common descriptions are not applicable. Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
Menu Text Settings\Configuration OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 701 ( 2008)
Disabled
OP Fig. 105
Assignment of functions to output relays.

Setting
Fct. Assignm. K 701 Fct. Assignm. K 702 Fct. Assignm. K 703 Fct. Assignm. K 704 Fct. Assignm. K 705 Fct. Assignm. K 706 Fct. Assignm. K 707 Fct. Assignm. K 708 Fct. Assignm. K 801 Fct. Assignm. K 802 Fct. Assignm. K 901 Fct. Assignm. K 902 Fct. Assignm. K 903 Fct. Assignm. K 904 Fct. Assignm. K 905 Fct. Assignm. K 906 Fct. Assignm. K 907
Address
150 145 150 148 150 151 150 154 150 157 150 160 150 163 150 166 150 169 150 172 150 193 150 196 150 199 150 202 150 205 150 208 150 211
Setting
Fct. Assignm. K 908 Fct. Assignm. K 1001 Fct. Assignm. K 1002 Fct. Assignm. K 1003 Fct. Assignm. K 1004 Fct. Assignm. K 1005 Fct. Assignm. K 1006 Fct. Assignm. K 1007 Fct. Assignm. K 1008 Fct. Assignm. K 1201 Fct. Assignm. K 1202 Fct. Assignm. K 1601 Fct. Assignm. K 1602 Fct. Assignm. K 1603 Fct. Assignm. K 1604 Fct. Assignm. K 1605 Fct. Assignm. K 1606
Address
150 214 150 217 150 220 150 223 150 226 150 229 150 232 150 235 150 238 151 009 151 012 171 002 171 006 171 010 171 014 171 018 171 022
Setting
Fct. Assignm. K 1607 Fct. Assignm. K 1608 Fct. Assignm. K 1801 Fct. Assignm. K 1802 Fct. Assignm. K 1803 Fct. Assignm. K 1804 Fct. Assignm. K 1805 Fct. Assignm. K 1806 Fct. Assignm. K 2001 Fct. Assignm. K 2002 Fct. Assignm. K 2003 Fct. Assignm. K 2004 Fct. Assignm. K 2005 Fct. Assignm. K 2006 Fct. Assignm. K 2007 Fct. Assignm. K 2008
Address
171 026 171 030 173 002 173 006 173 010 173 014 173 018 173 022 151 201 151 204 151 207 151 210 151 213 151 216 151 219 151 222
ST
OUTP: Oper. Mode K 701 ( 2008)
Follower
Follower Follower Latching Follower Rst on Flt Follower Rst onStart Inverted Inverted Latching
OP Fig. 105
Selection of operating mode for output relays.

Setting
Oper. Mode K 701 Oper. Mode K 702 Oper. Mode K 703 Oper. Mode K 704 Oper. Mode K 705 Oper. Mode K 706
Address
150 146 150 149 150 152 150 155 150 158 150 161
Setting
Address
150 215 150 218 150 221 150 224 150 227 150 230
Setting
Address
171 027 171 031 173 003 173 007 173 011 173 015
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-40
Settings MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Setting Range Min.

150 233 150 236 150 239 151 010 151 013 171 003 171 007 171 011 171 015 171 019 171 023
Menu Text
Oper. Mode K 707 Oper. Mode K 708 Oper. Mode K 801 Oper. Mode K 802 Oper. Mode K 901 Oper. Mode K 902 Oper. Mode K 903 Oper. Mode K 904 Oper. Mode K 905 Oper. Mode K 906 Oper. Mode K 907
Default Setting
150 164 150 167 150 170 150 173 150 194 150 197 150 200 150 203 150 206 150 209 150 212 Oper. Mode K 1006 Oper. Mode K 1007 Oper. Mode K 1008 Oper. Mode K 1201 Oper. Mode K 1202 Oper. Mode K 1601 Oper. Mode K 1602 Oper. Mode K 1603 Oper. Mode K 1604 Oper. Mode K 1605 Oper. Mode K 1606
Max.
Oper. Mode K 1805 Oper. Mode K 1806 Oper. Mode K 2001 Oper. Mode K 2002 Oper. Mode K 2003 Oper. Mode K 2004 Oper. Mode K 2005 Oper. Mode K 2006 Oper. Mode K 2007 Oper. Mode K 2008
Step Size
173 019 173 023 151 202 151 205 151 208 151 211 151 214 151 217 151 220 151 223
1.2.12
Analog output channel configuration (mA_OP) Menu Text Settings\Configuration mA_OP: Current Loop mA outp
056 020
ST
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the mA_OP function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. mA_OP: General Enable USER
031 074
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 107
Disabling and enabling the measured data output function. mA_OP: Fct. Assignm. BCD
053 002
Disabled
OP Fig. 110
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD-coded form. mA_OP: Hold Time Output BCD
010 010
0.10 s
Blocked/ 0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 110
Setting for the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in BCD-coded form. mA_OP: Scale BCD
016 082
1.00
0.01
100.00
0.01
OP Fig. 110
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-41
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD-coded form. The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula: M x,max scaling factor = M x,scal Where:
M x,scal : Scaled measured value M x,max : Maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value mA_OP: Fct. Assignm. A-1
053 000
Disabled
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Fct. Assignm. A-2

053 001
Disabled
ST
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form. mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-1
010 114
0.1 s
Blocked/ 0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-2

010 115
0.1 s
Blocked/ 0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
Setting for the time period for output of the selected measured value. mA_OP: Scaled Min. val. A-1
037 104
0.000
0.000
1.000
0.001
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Scaled Min. val. A-2

037 110
0.000
0.000
1.000
0.001
OP Fig. 112
Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,scal,min = M x,min M x,RL
Where: Mx,min : Minimum transmitted value of the selected measured value M x,RL : Range limit of the selected measured value mA_OP: Scaled Knee val. A-1
037 105
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.000
1.000
0.001
OP Fig. 112
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-42
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
mA_OP: Scaled Knee val. A-2

037 111
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.000
1.000
0.001
OP Fig. 112
Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula: M x,knee M x,scal,knee = M x,RL Where: M x,knee : Knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured value M x,RL : Range limit value of selected measured value mA_OP: Scaled Max. val. A-1 1.000 0.000 1.000 0.001
OP Fig. 112
ST
037 106
mA_OP: Scaled Max. val. A-2

037 112
1.000
0.000
1.000
0.001
OP Fig. 112
Setting for the maximum scaled measured value to be output. The value to be set is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,scal,max = M x,max M x,RL
Where: Mx,max : Maximum value to be transmitted for selected measured value M x,RL : Range limit value of selected measured value mA_OP: AnOut Min. val. A-1
037 107
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: AnOut Min. val. A-2

037 113
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values less than or equal to the minimum measured value to be transmitted. mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-1
037 108
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-43
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-2

037 114
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is in the knee point of the characteristic. mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-1
037 109
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-2

037 115
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller than or equal to the maximum measured value to be transmitted. mA_OP: Output Value 1
037 120
ST
0.00 %
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.01 %
OP Fig. 110, 112
mA_OP: Output Value 2

037 121
0.00 %
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.01 %
OP Fig. 110, 112
mA_OP: Output Value 3

037 122
0.00 %
0.00 %
100.00 %
0.01 %
OP Fig. 110, 112
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be output. 1.2.13 LED assignment and operating mode configuration (LED) The P63x has a total of 17 LED indicators for display of binary signals. The following table provides an overview of the operation of the LEDs.
LED
H1
Label
HEALTHY
Configuration
Not configurable. H 1 signals the operational readiness of the device (supply voltage present). Not configurable. H 17 signals the fact that the user is in the EDIT MODE. In this mode, parameter values can be changed. Permanently assigned to the function MAIN: Blocked/Faulty. Permanently assigned to the function CHECK: Alarm (LED). Default assignment to the function MAIN: Gen Trip Signal. The user has the option of assigning functions to these LED indicators.
H 17
EDIT MODE
H2 H3 H4 H 5 to H 16
OUT OF SERVICE ALARM TRIP
The arrangement of the LED indicators on the HMI panel is illustrated in the dimensional drawings of the Installation - IN section.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-44
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the selected operating mode, the LED will operate in either Follower mode or Inverted mode as either latching or non-latching indicators. For LED indicators operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Min. Max. Step Size
Settings\Configuration LED: Fct. Assignm. H 2

085 001
MAIN Blocked/Faulty
MAIN Blocked/Faulty
OP Fig. 113
Read only
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2 (OUT OF SERVICE). The MAIN: Blocked/Faulty function is permanently assigned to this LED. LED: Fct. Assignm. H 3
085 004
CHECK Alarm (LED)
CHECK Alarm (LED)
OP Fig. 113
Read only
ST
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3 (ALARM). The CHECK: Alarm (LED) function is permanently assigned to this LED. LED: Fct. Assignm. H 4
085 007
MAIN Gen Trip Signal
OP Fig. 113
Default assignment to the function MAIN: Gen Trip Signal. LED: Fct. Assignm. H 5 ( 16) Disabled
OP Fig. 113
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

Setting
Fct. Assignm. H 5 Fct. Assignm. H 6 Fct. Assignm. H 7 Fct. Assignm. H 8
Address
085 010 085 013 085 016 085 019
Setting
Address
085 022 085 025 085 028 085 031
Setting
Address
085 034 085 037 085 040 085 043
LED: Operating Mode H 2

085 002
Follower
Follower
Read only
OP Fig. 113

085 005
Follower
Follower
Read only
OP Fig. 113
Follower Rst on Flt
Follower Follower Latching Follower Rst on Flt Follower Rst onStart Inverted Inverted Latching
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-45
Menu Text
085 008
Default Setting
Step Size
The TRIP LED may be set as a Follower or Inverted mode of operation. It can also be set for latching. Reset of latching may be performed either via a user command, automatically at the onset of the next fault or at the start of a system disturbance (any protection element start). LED: Operating Mode H 5 ( 16) Follower
As per LED: Operating Mode H 4
OP Fig. 113
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.

Setting
Operating Mode H 5 Operating Mode H 6 Operating Mode H 7 Operating Mode H 8
Address
085 011 085 014 085 017 085 020
Setting
Address
085 023 085 026 085 029 085 032
Setting
Address
085 035 085 038 085 041 085 044
ST
1.2.14
Communication and time synchronization channel assignment (MAIN)

Settings\Configuration MAIN: Chann Assign. Comm1/2

003 169
COMM1->Chann.1, (2-2)
COMM1->Chann.1, (2-2) COMM1->Chann.2, (2-1)
OP Fig. 137
Assignment of logical communications function groups COMM1 and COMM2 to physical rear communications ports. This setting allows the main rear SCADA port (COMM1) to be selected as either fiber or EIA(RS)485, with COMM2 assigned to the other physical port where the two rear port -922 or -924 order options are present. MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
103 210
COMM1
COMM1 COMM2/PC IRIG-B Minute-pulse input
Selection of the primary time synchronization source. The source is monitored for valid time synchronization commands and will be used whenever available. MAIN: BackupSource TimeSync
103 211
COMM2/PC
As per MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
Selection of a backup time synchronization source. This source will be used when the primary source above is not available. MAIN: Time Sync. Time-Out
103 212
Blocked
Blocked / 1 min
60 min
1 min
Time out setting for valid time synchronization commands. If set to Blocked, primary source only will be used.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-46
1.2.15
Disturbance recorder channel configuration (OSCIL)

Settings\Configuration OSCIL: Dist Rec Analog Ch1

035 160
Current IA, end a
Current IA, end a
OP Fig. 157
Read only
OSCIL: Dist Rec Analog Ch2

035 161
Current IB, end a
Current IB, end a
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 162
Current IC, end a
Current IC, end a
OP Fig. 157
Read only
ST

035 163
Current IY, end a
Current IN, end a Current IY, end a
OP Fig. 157

035 164
Current IA, end b
Current IA, end b
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 165
Current IB, end b
Current IB, end b
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 166
Current IC, end b
Current IC, end b
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 167
Current IY, end b
Current IN, end b Current IY, end b
OP Fig. 157

035 168
Voltage V
Voltage V
Read only
OP Fig. 157

035 169
Current IA, end c
Current IA, end c
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 170
Current IB, end c
Current IB, end c
OP Fig. 157
Read only
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-47
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size

035 171
Current IC, end c
Current IC, end c
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 172
Current IY, end c
Current IN, end c Current IY, end c
OP Fig. 157

035 173
Current IA, end d
Current IA, end d
OP Fig. 157
Read only

035 174
Current IB, end d
Current IB, end d
OP Fig. 157
Read only
ST

035 175
Current IC, end d
Current IC, end d
OP Fig. 157
Read only
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded. 1.2.16 Cancelling a protection function The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all others (removing them from the device configuration). The following conditions must be met before canceling a protection function:

The protection function in question must be disabled None of the functions of the protection function to be cancelled may be assigned to a binary input None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or an LED indicator None of the signals of the protection function may be linked to other signals by way of an m out of n parameter
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT). 1.2.17 Enabling differential protection (DIFF)
Settings\Configuration DIFF: Differential PR (87)

056 027
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 1
Enabling the DIFF function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-48
1.2.18
Enabling restricted earth fault protection (REF_)

Settings\Configuration REF_1: Restricted EF_1 (64)

056 037
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 14
REF_2: Restricted EF_2 (64)

056 038
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 14
REF_3: Restricted EF_3 (64)

056 039
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 14
ST
1.2.19
Enabling the REF_1 to REF_3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Restricted earth fault protection is not available in the P631. group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. Enabling definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
Function
Settings\Configuration DTOC1: I> Winding 1 (50/51)

056 031
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 22
DTOC2: I> Winding 2 (50/51)

056 032
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 22
DTOC3: I> Winding 3 (50/51)

056 053
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 22
Enabling the DTOC1 to DTOC3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. 1.2.20 Enabling inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT)
Settings\Configuration IDMT1: IDMT Winding 1 (51)

056 051
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 29
IDMT2: IDMT Winding 2 (51)

056 061
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 29
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-49
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT3: IDMT Winding 3 (51)

056 071
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 29
Enabling the IDMT1 to IDMT3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. 1.2.21 Enabling thermal overload protection (THRM)
Settings\Configuration THRM1: Thermal Oload 1 (49)

056 054
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 41
ST
THRM2: Thermal Oload 2 (49)

056 055
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 41
Enabling the THRM1 to THRM2 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. 1.2.22 Enabling under/overvoltage protection (V<>)
Settings\Configuration V<>: Under Over Volts V<>

056 010
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 47
Enabling the V<> function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Time-voltage protection is not available in the P631. 1.2.23 Enabling frequency protection (f<>)
Settings\Configuration f<>: Frequency Prot. (81)

056 033
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 50
Enabling the f<> function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Over/underfrequency is not available in the P631.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-50
1.2.24
Enabling overfluxing protection (V/f)

Settings\Configuration V/f: Overfluxing V/f (24)

056 056
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 54
Enabling the V/f function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Overfluxing protection is not available in the P631. 1.2.25 Enabling current transformer supervision (CTS)
ST
Settings\Configuration CTS: CT Supervision

056 077
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 64
Enabling the CTS function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: CTS is only available if the DSP coprocessor is selected as an order option. 1.2.26 Enabling broken conductor detection (BC_) Menu Text Settings\Configuration BC_1: Broken Conductor 1
056 073
Default Setting
Step Size
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 62
BC_2: Broken Conductor 2

056 074
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 62

056 075
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 62

056 076
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
OP Fig. 62
Enabling the broken conductor detection function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-51
1.2.27
Enabling temperature & DC monitoring (LIMIT)

Settings\Configuration LIMIT: Limit Thresholds I<>

056 025
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the LIMIT function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. 1.2.28 Enabling phase current monitoring (LIM_)
Settings\Configuration LIM_1: Limits I<> Winding 1

056 042
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
ST
LIM_2: Limits I<> Winding 2

056 043
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
LIM_3: Limits I<> Winding 3

056 050
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the LIM_1 to LIM_3 functions or disabling them in the configuration. If a function group is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Note: Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. 1.2.29 Enabling programmable logic (LOGIC)
Settings\Configuration LOGIC: Programmable LOGIC

056 017
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabling the LOGIC function or disabling it in the configuration. If the function is disabled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-52 1.3 Function settings
1.3.1 1.3.1.1
Global Front port communication blocking (PC)

Settings\Function Settings\Global PC: Command Blocking

003 182
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 86
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC interface. PC: Sig/meas. val. Block
003 086
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 86
ST
1.3.1.2
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the PC interface. Rear port communication blocking (COMM1)
Settings\Function Settings\Global COMM1: USER Command Block

003 172
Yes
No
Yes
OP Fig. 87
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the communication interface. COMM1: USER Sig/meas Block
003 076
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the communication interface. 1.3.1.3 Rear port communication blocking (COMM2)
Settings\Function Settings\Global COMM2: USER Command Block

103 172
Yes
No
Yes
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the communication interface.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-53
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
COMM2: USER Sig/meas Block

103 076
No
No
Yes
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured data are transmitted through the communication interface. 1.3.1.4 Output relay blocking (OUTP)
Settings\Function Settings\Global OUTP: USER Outp Rel Block

021 014
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 105
ST
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked. 1.3.1.5 Main global settings (MAIN)
Settings\Function Settings\Global MAIN: Protection Enabled

003 030
No (Disabled)
No (Disabled)
Yes (Enabled)
OP Fig. 129
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked off in the Address List can only be changed when the device is off-line. MAIN: USER Test Mode
003 012
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 141
When the test mode is activated, signals or measured data for PC and communication interfaces are labeled test mode. MAIN: Frequency fn
010 030
50 Hz
50 Hz 60 Hz
OP Fig. 53
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system. MAIN: Phase Rotation
010 049
ABC
ABC ACB
OP Fig. 5
Setting for the phase rotation of the protection system, either A-B-C (standard) or A-C-B (reverse). MAIN: In CT. prim., end a
019 020
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-54
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
MAIN: In CT. prim., end b

019 021
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: In CT. prim., end c

019 022
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: In CT. prim., end d

019 026
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase currents) of end a, b, c or d.
ST
MAIN: In CT.Y prim, end a

019 027
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: In CT.Y prim, end b

019 028
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: In CT.Y prim, end c

019 029
200 A
1A
50000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at the neutral-point-to-earth connection. MAIN: Vn V.T. prim.
010 002
100.0 kV
0.1 kV
1500.0 kV
0.1 kV
OP Fig. 124
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer. MAIN: In Device, end a
010 024
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: In Device, end b

010 025
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: In Device, end c

010 029
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-55
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
MAIN: In Device, end d

010 047
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of the phase currents of ends a, b, c and d. This current corresponds to the nominal current of the device. MAIN: IY, nom device, end a
010 142
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: IY, nom device, end b

010 143
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: IY, nom device, end c

010 144
1A
1A
5A
4A
OP Fig. 115, 116
ST
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for measurement of the neutral-point-to-earth connection current of ends a, b, and c. MAIN: Vn VT. Sec.
010 009
100 V
50 V
130 V
1V
OP Fig. 124
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for voltage measurement. MAIN: CT Orientation Iph, a
010 140
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: CT Orientation Iph, b

010 150
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: CT Orientation Iph, c

010 160
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: CT Orientation Iph, d

010 170
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
Instead of accounting for connection reversal applied to one end in the settings for DIFF: Vector Grp. ends z1-z2 (where z1-z2 stands for b-a, c-a or d-a), it is possible to account for it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the neutral/point current circuits, ends a to d, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the connection scheme shown in the Installation - IN section, else as Reversed.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-56
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
MAIN: CT Orientation IY, a

010 141
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: CT Orientation IY, b

010 151
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
MAIN: CT Orientation IY, c

010 161
Standard
Standard Reversed
OP Fig. 115, 116
ST
Connection reversal applied to one end is accounted for it in the settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the wye/neutral current circuits, ends a to c, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the connection scheme shown in the Installation - IN section, else as Reversed. MAIN: Minimum Iph Measmt
011 030
0.00 In
0.00 In
0.20 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 123
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the phase currents to be displayed. MAIN: Minimum I2 Measmt
011 048
0.000 In
0.000 In
0.200 In
0.001 In
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the calculated values of the negative sequence currents to be displayed. MAIN: Minimum I1 Measmt
011 058
0.000 In
0.000 In
0.200 In
0.001 In
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the calculated values of the positive sequence currents to be displayed. MAIN: Minimum IN Measmt
011 031
0.000 In
0.000 In
0.200 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 121, 122, 123
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating value of the residual current to be displayed. MAIN: Minimum IY Measmt
011 036
0.000 IN, nom
0.000 IN, nom
0.200 IN, nom
0.001 IN, nom

OP Fig. 121
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the currents in the neutral-point-to-earth connection to be displayed.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-57
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
MAIN: Minimum V Measmt

011 032
0.00 Vn
0.00 Vn
0.20 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 124
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the measured operating values of the voltage to be displayed. MAIN: Time Const Iph Dem.
010 113
15.0 min
0.1 min
60.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 119, 120
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall reach 95% of the maximum current IP, max. MAIN: Fct.Assign. Block 1
021 021
Disabled
OP Fig. 131
ST
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Block 2

021 022
Disabled
OP Fig. 131

021 048
Disabled
OP Fig. 131

021 049
Disabled
OP Fig. 131
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1, 2, 3 or 4 is activated e.g. for blocking input 1 (MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT). MAIN: Trip Cmd. Block USER
021 012
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 135
Blocking of the trip commands from the local control panel. MAIN: Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
021 001
Disabled
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.2

021 002
Disabled
OP Fig. 135
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-58
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size

021 046
Disabled
OP Fig. 135

021 047
Disabled
OP Fig. 135
Assignment of the signals that trigger Trip Command 1, 2, 3 or 4. MAIN: tDWELL Trip Cmd 1
021 003
0.25 s
0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 135
ST
MAIN: tDWELL Trip Cmd 2

021 004
0.25 s
0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 135

021 032
0.25 s
0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 135

021 033
0.25 s
0.10 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 135
Setting for the minimum duration of Trip Command 1, 2, 3 or 4. MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1
021 023
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2

021 024
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 135

021 025
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 135

021 026
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 135
Specification as to whether Trip Command 1, 2, 3 or 4 should latch.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-59
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
MAIN: Fct Assign Fault

021 031
Disabled
OP Fig. 132
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in a Blocked/Faulty indication. Signals that lead to blocking of the device are not configurable and always result in a Blocked/Faulty indication. 1.3.1.6 Setting group selection (GROUP)
Settings\Function Settings\Global GROUP: Control via USER

003 100
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 142
ST
If setting group selection is to be handled from the integrated local control panel rather than via the binary signal inputs, choose the Yes setting. GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER
003 060
Setting Group SG1
Setting Group SG1 Setting Group SG2 Setting Group SG3 Setting Group SG4
OP Fig. 142
Selection of the setting group from the local control panel. GROUP: Hold Timer
003 063
Blocked
Blocked / 0.000 s
65.000 s
0.001 s
OP Fig. 142
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if setting group selection is carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary signal input has yet been set, then the setting group selected from the local control panel shall apply. 1.3.1.7 Self testing & diagnostics (CHECK)
Settings\Function Settings\Global CHECK: Fct Assign. Alarm

021 030
Disabled
OP Fig. 143
This setting defines the monitoring signals that will be entered in the monitoring signal memory. Signals resulting from internal device faults are not configurable and always result in a warning.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-60
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
CHECK: Mon.Sig. Retention

021 018
Blocked
Blocked / 0 hrs
240 hrs
1 hrs
Retention time of monitoring signals in the memory. After this time has elapsed any recurrence of the signal will be processed in the same way as if it were a first occurrence. 1.3.1.8 Disturbance recorder settings (OSCIL)
Settings\Function Settings\Global OSCIL: Fct Assig. Trigger Disabled

OP Fig. 155
ST
003 085
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording. OSCIL: Id>
016 018
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.01 Iref
30.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 155
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will trigger fault recording. OSCIL: IR>
016 019
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.01 Iref
30.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 155
This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will trigger fault recording. OSCIL: Pre-Fault Time
003 078
5 Cycles
1 Cycles
50 Cycles
1 Cycles
OP Fig. 157
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a fault (pre-fault recording time). OSCIL: Post-Fault Time
003 079
2 Cycles
1 Cycles
50 Cycles
1 Cycles
OP Fig. 157
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault (post-fault recording time). OSCIL: Max Record Time
003 075
50 Cycles
5 Cycles
300 Cycles
1 Cycles
OP Fig. 157
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and post-fault recording times.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-61
1.3.2 1.3.2.1
Common settings Main common settings (MAIN)

Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings MAIN: Vn prim., end a

019 017
110.0 kV
0.1 kV
1500.0 kV
0.1 kV
OP Fig. 2, 15
MAIN: Vn prim., end b

019 018
110.0 kV
0.1 kV
1500.0 kV
0.1 kV
OP Fig. 2
MAIN: Vn prim., end c

019 019
110.0 kV
0.1 kV
1500.0 kV
0.1 kV
OP Fig. 2
MAIN: Vn prim., end d

019 037
ST
110.0 kV
0.1 kV
1500.0 kV
0.1 kV
OP Fig. 2
Setting for the primary nominal voltage (phase to phase = line) for each end of the protected transformer. MAIN: Evaluation IN, end a
016 096
Calculated (Derived)
Calculated (Derived) Measured
OP Fig. 117
MAIN: Evaluation IN, end b

016 097
OP Fig. 117
MAIN: Evaluation IN, end c

016 098
OP Fig. 117
This setting specifies which current will be used by the P63x as the residual current: either the calculated residual current based on the sum of the phase currents or the residual current measured at the neutral transformer input.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-62
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
MAIN: Current Summation
Without
Without End(a) +end(b) End(a) +end(c) End(a) +end(d) End(b) +end(c) End(b) +end(d) End(c) +end(d) End(a) +end(b) +end(c) End(a) +end(b) +end(d) End(a) +end(c) +end(d) End(b) +end(c) +end(d) End(a) -end(b) End(a) -end(c) End(a) -end(d) End(b) -end(c) End(b) -end(d) End(c) -end(d)
ST
019 099
OP Fig. 118
Where a transformer winding is energized from two or three infeeds, such as is the case in mesh, ring-bus, or breaker and a half feeding, the relay can summate currents to obtain the total current for that winding. The currents for each phase and the residual currents can be combined. This setting specifies the CT ends to be involved. Note: This setting is available for the P633 and P634 only. MAIN: Hold Time Dyn.Settg
018 009
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 130
Setting for the hold time of the dynamic settings. During this period, the dynamic thresholds are active in place of the normal thresholds. 1.3.2.2 Differential protection common settings (DIFF)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings DIFF: General Enable USER

019 080
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 1
Disabling and enabling the differential protection function. DIFF: Rated Ref Power Sref
019 016
38.1 MVA
0.1 MVA
5000.0 MVA
0.1 MVA
OP Fig. 2
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power. DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,a
019 023
Not Measured
0.000 kA
Read only
50.000 kA
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 2
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,b

019 024
Not Measured
0.000 kA
Read only
50.000 kA
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 2
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,c

019 025
Not Measured
0.000 kA
Read only
50.000 kA
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 2
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-63
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DIFF: Ref. Curr. Iref,d

019 038
Not Measured
0.000 kA
Read only
50.000 kA
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 2
Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x for each end. Note: These values are automatically updated by the device itself only. In an off-line setting file the value is not updated. DIFF: Matching fact. Kam, a
004 105
Not Measured
0.000
Read only
50.000
0.001
OP Fig. 2
DIFF: Matching fact. Kam, b

004 106
Not Measured
0.000
Read only
50.000
0.001
OP Fig. 2
DIFF: Matching fact. Kam, c

004 127
Not Measured
0.000
Read only
50.000
0.001
OP Fig. 2
ST
DIFF: Matching fact. Kam, d

004 168
Not Measured
0.000
Read only
50.000
0.001
OP Fig. 2
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for each end. Note: These values are automatically updated by the device itself only. In an off-line setting file the value is not updated. DIFF: Minimum Id Measmt
011 037
0.000 Iref
0.000 Iref
0.200 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data. DIFF: Minimum IR Measmt
011 038
0.000 Iref
0.000 Iref
0.200 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data. 1.3.2.3 Restricted earth fault protection common settings (REF_)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings REF_1: General Enable USER

019 050
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 14
REF_2: General Enable USER

019 150
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 14
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-64
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
REF_3: General Enable USER

019 250
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 14
Disabling and enabling the ground differential protection function. Note: Function group REF_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. REF_1: Select CT Input
019 100
End a
End a
Read only
REF_2: Select CT Input

019 101
End b
End b
Read only
REF_3: Select CT Input
End c
End c
Read only
ST
019 102
Display of the measuring input that provides the measured variables evaluated by the ground differential protection function. REF_1: Rated Ref Power Sref
019 031
38.1 MVA
0.1 MVA
5000.0 MVA
0.1 MVA
OP Fig. 15
REF_2: Rated Ref Power Sref

019 032
38.1 MVA
0.1 MVA
5000.0 MVA
0.1 MVA
OP Fig. 15
REF_3: Rated Ref Power Sref

019 033
38.1 MVA
0.1 MVA
5000.0 MVA
0.1 MVA
OP Fig. 15
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for the relevant transformer end. REF_1: Ref. Curr. Iref
019 034
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000 kA

Read only
50.000 kA/ Overflow
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 15
REF_2: Ref. Curr. Iref

019 035
Not Measured

Read only
50.000 kA/ Overflow
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 15
REF_3: Ref. Curr. Iref

019 036
Not Measured

Read only
50.000 kA/ Overflow
0.001 kA
OP Fig. 15
Display of the reference current calculated by the P63x. Note: These values are automatically updated by the device itself only. In an off-line setting file the value is not updated. REF_1: Matching Fact. kam, N
004 160
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000

Read only
50.000/ Overflow
0.001
OP Fig. 15
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-65
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
REF_2: Matching Fact. kam, N

004 161
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000

Read only
50.000/ Overflow
0.001
OP Fig. 15
REF_3: Matching Fact. kam, N

004 162
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000

Read only
50.000/ Overflow
0.001
OP Fig. 15
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the vector sum of the phase currents. Note: These values are automatically updated by the device itself only. In an off-line setting file the value is not updated. REF_1: Matching Fact.kam, Y
004 163
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000

Read only
50.000/ Overflow
0.001
OP Fig. 15
ST
REF_2: Matching Fact.kam, Y

004 164
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000

Read only
50.000/ Overflow
0.001
OP Fig. 15
REF_3: Matching Fact.kam, Y

004 165
Not Measured
Not Measured/ 0.000

Read only
50.000/ Overflow
0.001
OP Fig. 15
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P63x for the neutral-point current. Note: These values are automatically updated by the device itself only. In an off-line setting file the value is not updated. REF_1: Minimum Id Measmt
011 039
0.00 Iref
0.00 Iref
0.20 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
REF_2: Minimum Id Measmt

011 044
0.00 Iref
0.00 Iref
0.20 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
REF_3: Minimum Id Measmt

011 045
0.00 Iref
0.00 Iref
0.20 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the differential currents as measured operating data. REF_1: Minimum IR Measmt
011 040
0.00 Iref
0.00 Iref
0.20 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
REF_2: Minimum IR Measmt

011 046
0.00 Iref
0.00 Iref
0.20 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-66
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
REF_3: Minimum IR Measmt

011 047
0.00 Iref
0.00 Iref
0.20 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for the P63x to display the restraining currents as measured operating data. 1.3.2.4 Definite time overcurrent protection common settings (DTOC)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings DTOC1: General Enable USER

031 135
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 22
ST
DTOC2: General Enable USER

031 136
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 22
DTOC3: General Enable USER

031 139
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 22
Disabling and enabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function. Note: Function group DTOC3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. End a End b End c End d Current Summation
DTOC1: Select CT Input
End a
019 103
OP Fig. 21

019 104
End b
As per DTOC1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 21

019 105
End c
As per DTOC1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 21
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by the definite-time overcurrent protection function. 1.3.2.5 Inverse time overcurrent protection common settings (IDMT)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings IDMT1: General Enable USER

031 141
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 29
IDMT2: General Enable USER

031 142
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 29
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-67
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT3: General Enable USER

031 143
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 29
Disabling and enabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. Note: Function group IDMT3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. End a End b End c End d Current Summation
IDMT1: Select CT Input
End a
019 106
OP Fig. 28

019 116
End b
As per IDMT1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 28

019 126
End c
As per IDMT1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 28
ST
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. 1.3.2.6 Thermal overload protection common settings (THRM)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings THRM1: General Enable USER

031 144
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 41
THRM2: General Enable USER

031 145
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 41
Disabling and enabling the thermal overload protection function. Note: Function group THRM2 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. End a End b End c End d Current Summation
THRM1: Select CT Input
End b
019 109
OP Fig. 40
THRM2: Select CT Input

019 110
End c
As per THRM1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 40
Selection of the current relevant for thermal overload protection. Select from the currents measured at the measuring input for end a, b, c, d. For the P633 and the P634, there is an additional option, namely the selection of the value obtained according to the setting at MAIN: Current summation.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-68
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
THRM1: Operating Mode

039 121
Relative Replica
Absolute Replica Relative Replica
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Operating Mode

039 181
Relative Replica
Absolute Replica Relative Replica
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection. Select between Absolute replica and Relative replica. THRM1: O/T f Iref Persist 1
004 152
Not Measured
Not Measured/ -40 C

Read only
300 C/ Overflow
1 C
ST
THRM2: O/T f Iref Persist 2

004 172
Not Measured
Not Measured/ -40 C

Read only
300 C/ Overflow
1 C
Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant. 1.3.2.7 Under/overvoltage protection common settings (V<>)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings V<>: General Enable USER

023 030
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 47
Disabling and enabling the time-voltage protection function. Note: Time-voltage protection is not available with the P631. 1.3.2.8 Frequency protection common settings (f<>)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings f<>: General Enable USER

023 031
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 50
Disabling and enabling the over/underfrequency protection function. Note: Over/underfrequency protection is not available with the P631. f<>: Evaluation Time
018 201
4 Cycles
3 Cycles
6 Cycles
1 Cycles
OP Fig. 51
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for this length of time for a signal to be issued.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-69
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
f<>: Undervolt. Block. V<

018 200
0.90 Vn
0.20 Vn
1.00 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 51
Setting for the threshold of the undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this threshold, the over/underfrequency protection function will be blocked. 1.3.2.9 Overfluxing protection common settings (V/f)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings V/f: General Enable USER

019 097
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 54
Disabling and enabling the overfluxing protection function. Note: Overfluxing protection is not available with the P631. 1.3.2.10 Current transformer supervision common settings (CTS)
ST
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings CTS: General Enable USER

031 085
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 64
Disabling and enabling the CT supervision function. Note: CT Supervision is only available with DSP coprocessor order option. 1.3.2.11 Broken conductor detection common settings (BC_)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings BC_1: General Enable USER

031 146
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62
BC_2: General Enable USER

031 147
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62

031 148
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62

031 149
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62
Disabling and enabling the broken conductor detection function.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-70
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
BC_1: Select CT Input

031 150
End a
End a
Read only

031 151
End b
End b
Read only

031 152
End c
End c
Read only

031 153
End d
End d
Read only
Indication of the CT set monitored by the broken conductor detection function.
ST
1.3.2.12 Temperature & DC monitoring settings (LIMIT)

Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings LIMIT: General Enable USER

014 010
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 71
Enabling or disabling limit value monitoring. LIMIT: IDC, lin>

014 110
Blocked
1.100 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom

OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: IDC, lin>>
014 111
Blocked
1.100 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom

OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin>> for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC, lin>
014 112
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 s
20.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDClin>. LIMIT: tIDC, lin>>
014 113
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 s
20.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDClin>>. LIMIT: IDC, lin<
014 114
Blocked
1.100 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom

OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin< for monitoring the linearized direct current.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-71
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
LIMIT: IDC, lin<<

014 115
Blocked
1.100 IDC, nom
0.001 IDC, nom

OP Fig. 71
Setting for operate value IDClin<< for monitoring the linearized direct current. LIMIT: tIDC, lin<
014 116
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 s
20.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDClin<. LIMIT: tIDC, lin<<
014 117
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 s
20.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 71
Setting for the operate delay of the undercurrent stage IDClin<<. LIMIT: T>
014 100
200 C
-20 C
200 C
1 C
OP Fig. 72
ST
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: T>>
014 101
200 C
-20 C
200 C
1 C
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: tT>
014 103
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
1000 s
1s
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>. LIMIT: tT>>
014 104
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
1000 s
1s
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>. LIMIT: T<
014 105
-20 C
-20 C
200 C
1 C
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: T<<
014 106
-20 C
-20 C
200 C
1 C
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<. LIMIT: tT<
014 107
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
1000 s
1s
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<. LIMIT: tT<<
014 108
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
1000 s
1s
OP Fig. 72
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-72
1.3.2.13 Phase current monitoring settings (LIM_)

Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings LIM_1: General Enable USER

014 014
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: General Enable USER

014 015
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: General Enable USER

014 017
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 74
Disabling and enabling the limit value monitoring function.
ST
Note: Function group LIM_3 is available with the P633 and the P634 only. End a End b End c End d Current Summation
LIM_1: Select CT Input
End a
019 111
OP Fig. 73

019 112
End b
As per LIM_1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 73

019 113
End c
As per LIM_1: Select CT Input
OP Fig. 73
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables monitored by limit value monitoring function 1, 2 or 3, respectively. LIM_1: I>
015 116
1.20 In
Blocked/ 0.20 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: I>
016 116
1.20 In
Blocked/ 0.20 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: I>
017 114
1.20 In
Blocked/ 0.20 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I>. LIM_1: I>>

015 117
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.20 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: I>>
016 117
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.20 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-73
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
LIM_3: I>>
017 117
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.20 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I>>. LIM_1: tI>

015 120
5s
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: tI>
016 120
5s
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI>
017 120
5s
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I>. LIM_1: tI>>

015 121
ST
Blocked/ 0s 100 s 1s
OP Fig. 74
Blocked
LIM_2: tI>>
016 121
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI>>
017 121
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I>>. LIM_1: I<

015 118
0.10 In
Blocked/ 0.00 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: I<
016 118
0.10 In
Blocked/ 0.00 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: I<
017 118
0.10 In
Blocked/ 0.00 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I<. LIM_1: I<<

015 119
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: I<<
016 119
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: I<<
017 119
Blocked
Blocked/ 0.00 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate value of I<<.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-74
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
LIM_1: tI<
015 122
5s
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: tI<
016 122
5s
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI<
017 122
5s
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I<. LIM_1: tI<<

015 123
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
ST
LIM_2: tI<<
016 123
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI<<
017 123
Blocked
Blocked/ 0s
100 s
1s
OP Fig. 74
Setting for the operate delay of I<<. 1.3.2.14 Programmable logic settings (LOGIC)
Settings\Function Settings\Common Settings LOGIC: General Enable USER

031 099
No
No
Yes
OP Fig. 76
Disabling or enabling the logic function. LOGIC: Set 1 ( 8) USER No No Yes OP Fig. 75, 76
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
Setting
Set 1 USER Set 2 USER Set 3 USER
Address
034 030 034 031 034 032
Setting
Set 4 USER Set 5 USER Set 6 USER
Address
034 033 034 034 034 035
Setting
Set 7 USER Set 8 USER
Address
034 036 034 037
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-75
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. 1 ( 32)
Disabled
OP Fig. 76
These settings assign functions to the outputs.

Setting
Fct.Assignm. Outp. 1 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 2 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 3 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 4 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 5 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 6 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 7 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 8 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 9 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 10 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 11
Address
030 000 030 004 030 008 030 012 030 016 030 020 030 024 030 028 030 032 030 036 030 040
Setting
Fct.Assignm. Outp. 12 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 13 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 14 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 15 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 16 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 17 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 18 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 19 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 20 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 21 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 22
Address
030 044 030 048 030 052 030 056 030 060 030 064 030 068 030 072 030 076 030 080 030 084
Setting
Fct.Assignm. Outp. 23 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 24 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 25 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 26 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 27 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 28 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 29 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 30 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 31 Fct.Assignm. Outp. 32
Address
030 088 030 092 030 096 031 000 031 004 031 008 031 012 031 016 031 020 031 024
ST
LOGIC: Op. Mode t Output 1 ( 32)
Without Timer Stage
Without Timer Stage PickUp & Reset Delay Pulse Delayed PickUp PickUp & Rst.Retrig Delayed Pulse Retrig Minimum Dwell
OP Fig. 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
Setting
Op. Mode t Output 1 Op. Mode t Output 2 Op. Mode t Output 3 Op. Mode t Output 4 Op. Mode t Output 5 Op. Mode t Output 6 Op. Mode t Output 7 Op. Mode t Output 8 Op. Mode t Output 9 Op. Mode t Output 10 Op. Mode t Output 11
Address
030 001 030 005 030 009 030 013 030 017 030 021 030 025 030 029 030 033 030 037 030 041
Setting
Op. Mode t Output 12 Op. Mode t Output 13 Op. Mode t Output 14 Op. Mode t Output 15 Op. Mode t Output 16 Op. Mode t Output 17 Op. Mode t Output 18 Op. Mode t Output 19 Op. Mode t Output 20 Op. Mode t Output 21 Op. Mode t Output 22
Address
030 045 030 049 030 053 030 057 030 061 030 065 030 069 030 073 030 077 030 081 030 085
Setting
Op. Mode t Output 23 Op. Mode t Output 24 Op. Mode t Output 25 Op. Mode t Output 26 Op. Mode t Output 27 Op. Mode t Output 28 Op. Mode t Output 29 Op. Mode t Output 30 Op. Mode t Output 31 Op. Mode t Output 32
Address
030 089 030 093 030 097 031 001 031 005 031 009 031 013 031 017 031 021 031 025
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-76
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
LOGIC: Time t1 Output 1 ( 32)
0.00 s
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81
Settings for timer stage t1 of the respective outputs.

Setting
Time t1 Output 1 Time t1 Output 2 Time t1 Output 3 Time t1 Output 4 Time t1 Output 5 Time t1 Output 6
Address
030 002 030 006 030 010 030 014 030 018 030 022 030 026 030 030 030 034 030 038 030 042
Setting
Time t1 Output 12 Time t1 Output 13 Time t1 Output 14 Time t1 Output 15 Time t1 Output 16 Time t1 Output 17 Time t1 Output 18 Time t1 Output 19 Time t1 Output 20 Time t1 Output 21 Time t1 Output 22
Address
030 046 030 050 030 054 030 058 030 062 030 066 030 070 030 074 030 078 030 082 030 086
Setting
Time t1 Output 23 Time t1 Output 24 Time t1 Output 25 Time t1 Output 26 Time t1 Output 27 Time t1 Output 28 Time t1 Output 29 Time t1 Output 30 Time t1 Output 31 Time t1 Output 32
Address
030 090 030 094 030 098 031 002 031 006 031 010 031 014 031 018 031 022 031 026
ST
Time t1 Output 7 Time t1 Output 8 Time t1 Output 9 Time t1 Output 10 Time t1 Output 11
LOGIC: Time t2 Output 1 ( 32)
0.00 s
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81
Settings for timer stage t2 of the respective outputs. Note: This setting has no effect in the Minimum Dwell operating mode.
Setting
Address
030 003 030 007 030 011 030 015 030 019 030 023 030 027 030 031 030 035 030 039 030 043
Setting
Address
030 047 030 051 030 055 030 059 030 063 030 067 030 071 030 075 030 079 030 083 030 087
Setting
Time t2 Output 23 Time t2 Output 24 Time t2 Output 25 Time t2 Output 26 Time t2 Output 27 Time t2 Output 28 Time t2 Output 29 Time t2 Output 30 Time t2 Output 31 Time t2 Output 32
Address
030 091 030 095 030 099 031 003 031 007 031 011 031 015 031 019 031 023 031 027
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-77
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp. 1 ( 32)
Disabled
OP Fig. 82
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.
Setting
Sig. Assig Outp. 1 Sig. Assig Outp. 2 Sig. Assig Outp. 3 Sig. Assig Outp. 4 Sig. Assig Outp. 5 Sig. Assig Outp. 6 Sig. Assig Outp. 7 Sig. Assig Outp. 8 Sig. Assig Outp. 9 Sig. Assig Outp. 10 Sig. Assig Outp. 11
Address
044 000 044 002 044 004 044 006 044 008 044 010 044 012 044 014 044 016 044 018 044 020
Setting
Sig. Assig Outp. 12 Sig. Assig Outp. 13 Sig. Assig Outp. 14 Sig. Assig Outp. 15 Sig. Assig Outp. 16 Sig. Assig Outp. 17 Sig. Assig Outp. 18 Sig. Assig Outp. 19 Sig. Assig Outp. 20 Sig. Assig Outp. 21 Sig. Assig Outp. 22
Address
044 022 044 024 044 026 044 028 044 030 044 032 044 034 044 036 044 038 044 040 044 042
Setting
Sig. Assig Outp. 23 Sig. Assig Outp. 24 Sig. Assig Outp. 25 Sig. Assig Outp. 26 Sig. Assig Outp. 27 Sig. Assig Outp. 28 Sig. Assig Outp. 29 Sig. Assig Outp. 30 Sig. Assig Outp. 31 Sig. Assig Outp. 32
Address
044 044 044 046 044 048 044 050 044 052 044 054 044 056 044 058 044 060 044 062
ST
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp. 1 ( 32) (t)
Disabled
OP Fig. 82
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the logic equation.
Setting
Sig. Assig Outp. 1 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 2 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 3 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 4 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 5 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 6 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 7 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 8 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 9 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 10 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 11 (t)
Address
044 001 044 003 044 005 044 007 044 009 044 011 044 013 044 015 044 017 044 019 044 021
Setting
Sig. Assig Outp. 12 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 13 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 14 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 15 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 16 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 17 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 18 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 19 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 20 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 21 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 22 (t)
Address
044 023 044 025 044 027 044 029 044 031 044 033 044 035 044 037 044 039 044 041 044 043
Setting
Sig. Assig Outp. 23 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 24 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 25 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 26 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 27 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 28 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 29 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 30 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 31 (t) Sig. Assig Outp. 32 (t)
Address
044 045 044 047 044 049 044 051 044 053 044 055 044 057 044 059 044 061 044 063
1.3.3
Setting group SGx (x = 1 to 4) The device provides four setting groups containing identical settings that may be enabled and configured independently. The setting address for each setting differs between the groups and is displayed in the line below the setting in the order SG1, SG2, SG3, SG4. As an example, for the DIFF: Enable SGx setting immediately below the addresses are read as: Address: 072 152 Address: 073 152 Address: 074 152 DIFF: Enable SG1 DIFF: Enable SG2 DIFF: Enable SG3
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-78
Address: 075 152 1.3.3.1
DIFF: Enable SG4
Phase reversal logic (MAIN)

Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx MAIN: Reversal end a SGx

010 200 010 201
No Swap
No Swap A-B Swapped B-C Swapped C-A Swapped
010 202
010 203
Setting to determine if CT input phase-swapping shall apply in pumped storage applications, when in motoring (pump) mode. Setting available for each CT set, in this case for end a. MAIN: Reversal end b SGx
010 204 010 205
No Swap
ST
010 206
010 207
MAIN: Reversal end c SGx

010 208 010 209
No Swap
010 210
010 211
MAIN: Reversal end d SGx

010 212 010 213
No Swap
010 214
010 215
1.3.3.2
Differential protection (DIFF)

Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx DIFF: Enable SGx

072 152 073 152
No
074 152 075 152
No
Yes
OP Fig. 1
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for differential protection. DIFF: Vec. Gr. ends b-a SGx
019 010 019 040
0
019 041 019 042
11
1
OP Fig. 5
DIFF: Vec. Gr. ends c-a SGx

019 011 019 043
0
019 044 019 045
11
1
OP Fig. 5
DIFF: Vec. Gr. ends d-a SGx

019 014 019 046
0
019 047 019 048
11
1
OP Fig. 6
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-79
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
The vector group is read from the transformer rating plate, taking end "a" as the HV reference. In the case of a Yd1 transformer, with end "b" as the delta winding the clock notation setting required will be 1 for end b-a. If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged or if the connection of the measuring circuits is not accounted for by the settings at MAIN: CT Orientation IPh, z (where z is end a, b, c or d) then the algorithm is: Setting = 12 - ID If a reverse phase rotation is present (phase sequence A-C-B) then this should be entered as a setting at the P63x. In this case, the P63x will automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 - set ID). For application of the P63x as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or 6 depending on the current transformer connection. DIFF: Idiff> SGx
072 142 073 142
0.20 Iref
074 142 075 142
0.10 Iref
2.50 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 9
Minimum pickup value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference current of the relevant transformer end. DIFF: Idiff>> SGx
072 143 073 143
ST
15.0 Iref
074 143 075 143
2.5 Iref
30.0 Iref
0.1 Iref
OP Fig. 9
Threshold value of the differential current for deactivation of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint. Note: If the threshold is set too high, it is possible for the P63x not to trip in the presence of internal faults with transformer saturation. DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx
072 144 073 144
30.0 Iref
074 144 075 144
Blocked/ 2.5 Iref
30.0 Iref
0.1 Iref
OP Fig. 9
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the differential protection function independent of restraining variable, harmonic restraint, overfluxing restraint and saturation detector. Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P63x can trip in the presence of external faults with transformer saturation. DIFF: Idiff> (CTS) SGx
080 000 081 000
0.20 Iref
082 000 083 000
0.10 Iref
30.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 68
Low set threshold of differential protection when a CTS condition is detected. DIFF: m1 SGx
072 145 073 145
0.30
074 145 075 145
0.10
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 9
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range: 0.5 Idiff >< IR IR,m2 DIFF: m2 SGx
072 146 073 146
0.70
074 146 075 146
0.10
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 9
Gradient of the tripping characteristic of differential protection in the range: IR > IR,m2
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-80
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DIFF: IR, m2 SGx

072 147 073 147
4.0 Iref
074 147 075 147
1.5 Iref
10.0 Iref
0.1 Iref
OP Fig. 9
This setting defines the second knee of the tripping characteristic. Above this knee, the gradient is m2. DIFF: Op. Mode Inrush SGx
072 148 073 148
Not Phase-Selective
075 148
Disabled Not Phase-Selective Phase-Selective
OP Fig. 9
074 148
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic blocking or harmonic restraint). For application of the P63x as machine protection, the harmonic restraint can be deactivated by way of this setting. For application of the P63x as transformer protection, the user can select whether the harmonic restraint should operate in cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring system. DIFF: Inrush 2nd Harmon SGx
072 159 073 159
ST
20 %
074 159 075 159
10 %
50 %
1%
OP Fig. 10
Operate value of the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential protection, as ratio of the second harmonic component to the fundamental for the differential current, in percent. DIFF: I0 filt a Enab SGx
072 155 073 155
Yes
074 155 075 155
No
Yes
OP Fig. 5
DIFF: I0 filt b Enab SGx

072 156 073 156
Yes
074 156 075 156
No
Yes
OP Fig. 5
DIFF: I0 filt c Enab SGx

072 157 073 157
Yes
074 157 075 157
No
Yes
OP Fig. 5
DIFF: I0 filt d Enab SGx

072 154 073 154
Yes
074 154 075 154
No
Yes
OP Fig. 6
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding a, b, c or d. DIFF: O/Flux Blk Enab SGx
072 158 073 158
No
075 158
No
Yes
OP Fig. 12
074 158
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint. DIFF: O/Flux 5th Harmon SGx
072 160 073 160
20 %
074 160 075 160
10 %
80 %
1%
OP Fig. 12
Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of the fifth harmonic component to the fundamental for the differential current, in percent.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-81
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DIFF: Op.del., trip sig. SGx

010 162 010 163
0.00 s
010 164 010 165
0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
Tripping of the restraint differential protection may be delayed via a settable timer stage. DIFF: Hyst. Effective SGx
072 006 073 006
Yes
075 006
No
Yes
074 006
Hysteresis of the tripping characteristic at the rate of 10% be disabled. 1.3.3.3 Restricted earth fault protection (REF_)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx REF_1: Enable SGx

072 141 073 141
No
074 141 075 141
No
Yes
OP Fig. 14
ST
OP Fig. 14
REF_2: Enable SGx

072 161 073 161
No
074 161 075 161
No
Yes
REF_3: Enable SGx

072 031 073 031
No
074 031 075 031
No
Yes
OP Fig. 14
This setting allows restricted earth fault protection to be enabled or disabled on the associated winding for each setting group. REF_1: Operating Mode SGx
072 149 073 149
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias

075 149
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias Low-Z Iph Max. Bias High Impedance
OP Fig. 16, 18, 19
074 149
REF_2: Operating Mode SGx

072 169 073 169
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias

075 169
OP Fig. 16, 18, 19
074 169
REF_3: Operating Mode SGx

072 049 073 049
Low-Z Iph Sum Bias

075 049
OP Fig. 16, 18, 19
074 049
This setting specifies the mode of operation for the restricted earth fault protection. The protection may be biased by residual current or the maximum phase current. Alternatively, operation as a high impedance element may be selected. REF_1: CTS Effective SGx
080 003 081 003
No
082 003 083 003
No
Yes
REF_2: CTS Effective SGx

080 004 081 004
No
082 004 083 004
No
Yes
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-82
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
REF_3: CTS Effective SGx

080 005 081 005
No
082 005 083 005
No
Yes
Blocking of REF protection when a CTS condition is detected. REF_1: Idiff> SGx
072 150 073 150
0.20 Iref
074 150 075 150
0.10 Iref
1.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 17
REF_2: Idiff> SGx

072 170 073 170
0.20 Iref
074 170 075 170
0.10 Iref
1.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 17
REF_3: Idiff> SGx

072 040 073 040
0.20 Iref
074 040 075 040
0.10 Iref
1.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 17
Pickup value of the restricted earth fault protection as referred to the reference current of the relevant transformer end.
ST
REF_1: Idiff>>> SGx

072 151 073 151
10.0 Iref
075 151
Blocked/ 2.5 Iref
30.0 Iref
0.1 Iref
OP Fig. 17
074 151
REF_2: Idiff>>> SGx

072 171 073 171
10.0 Iref
075 171
Blocked/ 2.5 Iref
30.0 Iref
0.1 Iref
OP Fig. 17
074 171
REF_3: Idiff>>> SGx

072 041 073 041
10.0 Iref
075 041
Blocked/ 2.5 Iref
30.0 Iref
0.1 Iref
OP Fig. 17
074 041
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the restricted earth fault protection independent of restraint current. REF_1: m1 SGx
072 162 073 162
0.20
074 162 075 162
0.00
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 18
REF_2: m1 SGx
072 172 073 172
0.20
074 172 075 172
0.00
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 18
REF_3: m1 SGx
072 192 073 192
0.20
074 192 075 192
0.00
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 18
Lower slope gradient of tripping characteristic for restricted earth fault protection when operating in a low impedance biased mode. REF_1: m2 SGx
072 163 073 163
1.50
074 163 075 163
0.15
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 18
REF_2: m2 SGx
072 165 073 165
1.50
074 165 075 165
0.15
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 18
REF_3: m2 SGx
072 193 073 193
1.50
074 193 075 193
0.15
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 18
Upper slope gradient of tripping characteristic for restricted earth fault protection when operating in a low impedance biased mode. REF_1: IR, m2 SGx
072 164 073 164
1.00 Iref
074 164 075 164
0.10 Iref
1.50 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 18
REF_2: IR, m2 SGx

072 166 073 166
1.00 Iref
074 166 075 166
0.10 Iref
1.50 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 18
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-83
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
REF_3: IR, m2 SGx

072 194 073 194
1.00 Iref
074 194 075 194
0.10 Iref
1.50 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 18
Bias current threshold setting above which the gradient of the tripping characteristic is m2 for restricted earth fault protection when operating in a low impedance biased mode. 1.3.3.4 Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx DTOC1: Enable SGx

076 050 077 050
No
079 050
No
Yes
078 050
DTOC2: Enable SGx

076 070 077 070
No
079 070
No
Yes
078 070
DTOC3: Enable SGx

076 180 077 180
No
079 180
No
Yes
ST
078 180
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for definite-time overcurrent protection. DTOC1: Block Tim. st IN SGx
076 067 077 067
Disabled
079 067
Disabled For Single-Ph. Start For Multi-Ph. Start.
OP Fig. 25
078 067
DTOC2: Block Tim. st IN SGx

076 087 077 087
Disabled
079 087
OP Fig. 25
078 087
DTOC3: Block Tim. st IN SGx

076 108 077 108
Disabled
079 108
OP Fig. 25
078 108
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting. DTOC1: Gen.Starting Mode SGx
076 066 077 066
With Start. IN/I2

079 066
W/o Start. IN/I2 With Start. IN/I2
OP Fig. 26
078 066
DTOC2: Gen.Starting Mode SGx

076 086 077 086
With Start. IN/I2

079 086
OP Fig. 26
078 086
DTOC3: Gen.Starting Mode SGx

076 106 077 106
With Start. IN/I2

079 106
OP Fig. 26
078 106
This setting defines whether starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages will be included in the general starting signal of DTOC protection. DTOC1: tGS SGx
076 065 077 065
0.00 s
078 065 079 065
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 26
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-84
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC2: tGS SGx

076 085 077 085
0.00 s
078 085 079 085
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 26
DTOC3: tGS SGx

076 107 077 107
0.00 s
078 107 079 107
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 26
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC protection. DTOC1: Inrush Restr Enab SGx
076 063 077 063
No
079 063
No
Yes
OP Fig. 24
078 063
DTOC2: Inrush Restr Enab SGx

076 083 077 083
No
079 083
No
Yes
OP Fig. 24
078 083
ST
DTOC3: Inrush Restr Enab SGx

076 193 077 193
No
079 193
No
Yes
OP Fig. 24
078 193
Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent protection function. DTOC1: I> SGx
076 051 077 051
1.00 In
078 051 079 051
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: I> SGx

076 071 077 071
1.00 In
078 071 079 071
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: I> SGx

076 081 077 081
1.00 In
078 081 079 081
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>. DTOC1: I>> SGx

076 052 077 052
4.00 In
078 052 079 052
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: I>> SGx

076 072 077 072
4.00 In
078 072 079 072
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: I>> SGx

076 082 077 082
4.00 In
078 082 079 082
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>>. DTOC1: I>>> SGx

076 053 077 053
Blocked
078 053 079 053
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: I>>> SGx

076 163 077 163
Blocked
078 163 079 163
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-85
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC3: I>>> SGx

076 183 077 183
Blocked
078 183 079 183
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>>>. DTOC1: I> dynamic SGx
076 151 077 151
1.00 In
078 151 079 151
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: I> dynamic SGx

076 161 077 161
1.00 In
078 161 079 161
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: I> dynamic SGx

076 181 077 181
1.00 In
078 181 079 181
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: I>> dynamic SGx
076 152 077 152
ST
1.00 In
078 152 079 152
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: I>> dynamic SGx

076 162 077 162
1.00 In
078 162 079 162
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: I>> dynamic SGx

076 182 077 182
1.00 In
078 182 079 182
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: I>>> dynamic SGx
076 153 077 153
1.00 In
078 153 079 153
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: I>>> dynamic SGx

076 173 077 173
1.00 In
078 173 079 173
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: I>>> dynamic SGx

076 109 077 109
1.00 In
078 109 079 109
Blocked/ 0.10 In
30.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: tI> SGx
076 057 077 057
1.00 s
078 057 079 057
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: tI> SGx

076 077 077 077
1.00 s
078 077 079 077
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-86
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC3: tI> SGx

076 187 077 187
1.00 s
078 187 079 187
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate delay of the I> stage. DTOC1: tI>> SGx
076 058 077 058
0.50 s
078 058 079 058
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: tI>> SGx

076 078 077 078
0.50 s
078 078 079 078
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: tI>> SGx

076 188 077 188
0.50 s
078 188 079 188
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
ST
Setting for the operate delay of the I>> stage. DTOC1: tI>>> SGx
076 059 077 059
0.50 s
078 059 079 059
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: tI>>> SGx

076 169 077 169
0.50 s
078 169 079 169
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: tI>>> SGx

076 189 077 189
0.50 s
078 189 079 189
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 23
Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage. DTOC1: I2> SGx
076 197 077 197
0.25 In
078 197 079 197
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: I2> SGx

076 207 077 207
0.25 In
078 207 079 207
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: I2> SGx

076 217 077 217
0.25 In
078 217 079 217
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2> stage for negative sequence current. DTOC1: I2>> SGx
076 198 077 198
Blocked
078 198 079 198
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: I2>> SGx

076 208 077 208
Blocked
078 208 079 208
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: I2>> SGx

076 218 077 218
Blocked
078 218 079 218
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>> stage for negative sequence current.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-87
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC1: I2>>> SGx

076 199 077 199
Blocked
078 199 079 199
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: I2>>> SGx

076 209 077 209
Blocked
078 209 079 209
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: I2>>> SGx

076 219 077 219
Blocked
078 219 079 219
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>>> stage for negative sequence current. DTOC1: I2> dynamic SGx
076 200 077 200
1.00 In
078 200 079 200
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: I2> dynamic SGx

076 210 077 210
1.00 In
078 210 079 210
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
ST
DTOC3: I2> dynamic SGx

076 220 077 220
1.00 In
078 220 079 220
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2> stage for negative sequence current in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: I2>> dynamic SGx
076 201 077 201
1.00 In
078 201 079 201
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: I2>> dynamic SGx

076 211 077 211
1.00 In
078 211 079 211
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: I2>> dynamic SGx

076 221 077 221
1.00 In
078 221 079 221
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>> stage for negative sequence current in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: I2>>> dynamic SGx
076 202 077 202
1.00 In
078 202 079 202
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: I2>>> dynamic SGx

076 212 077 212
1.00 In
078 212 079 212
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: I2>>> dynamic SGx

076 222 077 222
1.00 In
078 222 079 222
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate value of the I2>>> stage for negative sequence current in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-88
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC1: tI2> SGx

076 203 077 203
1.00 s
078 203 079 203
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: tI2> SGx

076 213 077 213
1.00 s
078 213 079 213
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: tI2> SGx

076 223 077 223
1.00 s
078 223 079 223
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate delay of the I2> stage for negative sequence current. DTOC1: tI2>> SGx
076 204 077 204
0.50 s
078 204 079 204
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
ST
DTOC2: tI2>> SGx

076 214 077 214
0.50 s
078 214 079 214
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: tI2>> SGx

076 224 077 224
0.50 s
078 224 079 224
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate delay of the I2>> stage for negative sequence current. DTOC1: tI2>>> SGx
076 205 077 205
0.50 s
078 205 079 205
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: tI2>>> SGx

076 215 077 215
0.50 s
078 215 079 215
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: tI2>>> SGx

076 225 077 225
0.50 s
078 225 079 225
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 24
Setting for the operate delay of the I2>>> stage for negative sequence current. DTOC1: IN> SGx
076 054 077 054
0.25 In
078 054 079 054
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: IN> SGx

076 164 077 164
0.25 In
078 164 079 164
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: IN> SGx

076 184 077 184
0.25 In
078 184 079 184
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN> for residual current. DTOC1: IN>> SGx
076 055 077 055
Blocked
078 055 079 055
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-89
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC2: IN>> SGx

076 165 077 165
Blocked
078 165 079 165
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: IN>> SGx

076 185 077 185
Blocked
078 185 079 185
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>> for residual current. DTOC1: IN>>> SGx
076 056 077 056
Blocked
078 056 079 056
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: IN>>> SGx

076 166 077 166
Blocked
078 166 079 166
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: IN>>> SGx

076 186 077 186
Blocked
078 186 079 186
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
ST
Setting for the operate value IN>>> for residual current. DTOC1: IN> dynamic SGx
076 154 077 154
1.00 In
078 154 079 154
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: IN> dynamic SGx

076 174 077 174
1.00 In
078 174 079 174
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: IN> dynamic SGx

076 194 077 194
1.00 In
078 194 079 194
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN> for residual current in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: IN>> dynamic SGx
076 155 077 155
1.00 In
078 155 079 155
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: IN>> dynamic SGx

076 175 077 175
1.00 In
078 175 079 175
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: IN>> dynamic SGx

076 195 077 195
1.00 In
078 195 079 195
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>> for residual current in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: IN>>> dynamic SGx
076 156 077 156
1.00 In
078 156 079 156
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: IN>>> dynamic SGx

076 176 077 176
1.00 In
078 176 079 176
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-90
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
DTOC3: IN>>> dynamic SGx

076 196 077 196
1.00 In
078 196 079 196
Blocked/ 0.10 In
8.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate value IN>>> for residual current in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. DTOC1: tIN> SGx
076 060 077 060
1.00 s
078 060 079 060
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: tIN> SGx

076 170 077 170
1.00 s
078 170 079 170
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: tIN> SGx
1.00 s
078 190 079 190
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
ST
076 190
077 190
Setting for the operate delay of the IN> for residual current stage. DTOC1: tIN>> SGx
076 061 077 061
0.50 s
078 061 079 061
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: tIN>> SGx

076 171 077 171
0.50 s
078 171 079 171
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: tIN>> SGx

076 191 077 191
0.50 s
078 191 079 191
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> for residual current stage. DTOC1: tIN>>> SGx
076 062 077 062
0.50 s
079 062
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
078 062
DTOC2: tIN>>> SGx

076 172 077 172
0.50 s
079 172
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
078 172
DTOC3: tIN>>> SGx

076 192 077 192
0.50 s
079 192
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 25
078 192
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> for residual current stage. 1.3.3.5 Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx IDMT1: Enable SGx

081 050 082 050
No
083 050 084 050
No
Yes
OP Fig. 29
IDMT2: Enable SGx

081 170 082 170
No
083 170 084 170
No
Yes
OP Fig. 29
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-91
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT3: Enable SGx

081 190 082 190
No
083 190 084 190
No
Yes
OP Fig. 29
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for inverse-time overcurrent protection. IDMT1: Block Tim. st IN SGx
081 068 082 068
Disabled
084 068
OP Fig. 36
083 068
IDMT2: Block Tim. st IN SGx

081 188 082 188
Disabled
084 188
OP Fig. 36
083 188
IDMT3: Block Tim. st IN SGx

081 208 082 208
Disabled
084 208
ST
OP Fig. 36
083 208
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting. IDMT1: Gen.Starting Mode SGx
081 059 082 059
With Start. IN/I2

084 059
OP Fig. 35, 36, 38
083 059
IDMT2: Gen.Starting Mode SGx

081 179 082 179
With Start. IN/I2

084 179
OP Fig. 35, 36, 38
083 179
IDMT3: Gen.Starting Mode SGx

081 199 082 199
With Start. IN/I2

084 199
OP Fig. 35, 36, 38
083 199
This setting defines whether starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages will be included in the general starting signal of IDMT protection. IDMT1: tGS SGx
081 058 082 058
0.00 s
083 058 084 058
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 38
IDMT2: tGS SGx

081 178 082 178
0.00 s
083 178 084 178
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 38
IDMT3: tGS SGx

081 198 082 198
0.00 s
083 198 084 198
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 38
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT protection. IDMT1: Inrush Restr Enab SGx
081 060 082 060
No
083 060 084 060
No
Yes
OP Fig. 34, 35
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-92
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT2: Inrush Restr Enab SGx

081 180 082 180
No
083 180 084 180
No
Yes
OP Fig. 34, 35
IDMT3: Inrush Restr Enab SGx

081 200 082 200
No
083 200 084 200
No
Yes
OP Fig. 34, 35
Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be able to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function. IDMT1: Iref, Ph SGx
081 051 082 051
1.00 In
083 051 084 051
Blocked/ 0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 34
ST
IDMT2: Iref, Ph SGx

081 171 082 171
1.00 In
083 171 084 171
Blocked/ 0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Iref, Ph SGx

081 191 082 191
1.00 In
083 191 084 191
Blocked/ 0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 34
Setting for the reference current (phase overcurrent pickup). IDMT1: Iref, Ph dynamic SGx
081 052 082 052
1.00 In
084 052
Blocked/ 0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 34
083 052
IDMT2: Iref, Ph dynamic SGx

081 172 082 172
1.00 In
084 172
Blocked/ 0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 34
083 172
IDMT3: Iref, Ph dynamic SGx

081 192 082 192
1.00 In
084 192
Blocked/ 0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 34
083 192
Setting for the reference current (phase overcurrent pickup) in dynamic mode. threshold value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. Definite Time IEC Standard Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Extr. Inverse IEC Long Time Inv. IEEE Moderately Inv. IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Extr. Inverse ANSI Normally Inv. ANSI Short Time Inv. ANSI Long Time Inv. RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
This
IDMT1: Phase Charac SGx
Definite Time
081 053
082 053
083 053
084 053
OP Fig. 34

081 173 082 173
Definite Time
083 173 084 173
As per IDMT1: Phase Charac SGx
OP Fig. 34
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-93
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size

081 193 082 193
Definite Time
083 193 084 193
As per IDMT1: Phase Charac SGx
OP Fig. 34
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system). IDMT1: kt Time Dial/TMS SGx
081 054 082 054
1.00
083 054 084 054
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: kt Time Dial/TMS SGx

081 174 082 174
1.00
083 174 084 174
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 34

081 194 082 194
1.00
083 194 084 194
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 34
TMS or time dial setting of the starting characteristic (phase current system). IDMT1: Min. Trip t Ph SGx
081 057 082 057
ST
0.01 s
OP Fig. 34
1.00 s
083 057 084 057
0.00 s
10.00 s
IDMT2: Min. Trip t Ph SGx

081 177 082 177
1.00 s
083 177 084 177
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Min. Trip t Ph SGx

081 197 082 197
1.00 s
083 197 084 197
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 34
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system). IDMT1: Hold Time Ph SGx
081 055 082 055
0.00 s
083 055 084 055
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: Hold Time Ph SGx

081 175 082 175
0.00 s
083 175 084 175
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Hold Time Ph SGx

081 195 082 195
0.00 s
083 195 084 195
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 34
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (phase current system). IDMT1: Release Ph SGx
081 056 082 056
Instantaneous
083 056 084 056
Instantaneous Delayed as per Char.
OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: Release Ph SGx

081 176 082 176
Instantaneous
083 176 084 176
OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Release Ph SGx

081 196 082 196
Instantaneous
083 196 084 196
OP Fig. 34
Setting for the release characteristic (phase current system).
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-94
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT1: Iref, I2 SGx

081 111 082 111
Blocked
083 111 084 111
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 35
IDMT2: Iref, I2 SGx

081 121 082 121
Blocked
083 121 084 121
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 35
IDMT3: Iref, I2 SGx

081 131 082 131
Blocked
083 131 084 131
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 35
Setting for the pickup current (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Iref, I2 dynamic SGx
081 112 082 112
Blocked
083 112 084 112
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 35
ST
IDMT2: Iref, I2 dynamic SGx

081 122 082 122
Blocked
083 122 084 122
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 35
IDMT3: Iref, I2 dynamic SGx

081 132 082 132
Blocked
083 132 084 132
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 35
Setting for the pickup current (negative-sequence current system). This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. Definite Time IEC Standard Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Extr. Inverse IEC Long Time Inv. IEEE Moderately Inv. IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Extr. Inverse ANSI Normally Inv. ANSI Short Time Inv. ANSI Long Time Inv. RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
IDMT1: I2 Charac SGx
Definite Time
081 113
082 113
083 113
084 113
OP Fig. 35

081 123 082 123
Definite Time
083 123 084 123
As per IDMT1: I2 Charac SGx
OP Fig. 35

081 133 082 133
Definite Time
083 133 084 133
As per IDMT1: I2 Charac SGx
OP Fig. 35
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: kt Time Dial/TMS SGx
081 114 082 114
1.00
083 114 084 114
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 35

081 124 082 124
1.00
083 124 084 124
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 35
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-95
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size

081 134 082 134
1.00
083 134 084 134
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 35
TMS or time dial setting of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Min. Trip t I2 SGx
081 117 082 117
1.00 s
083 117 084 117
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 35
IDMT2: Min. Trip t I2 SGx

081 127 082 127
1.00 s
083 127 084 127
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 35
IDMT3: Min. Trip t I2 SGx

081 137 082 137
1.00 s
083 137 084 137
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 35
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Hold Time I2 SGx
081 115 082 115
ST
0.00 s
083 115 084 115
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 35
IDMT2: Hold Time I2 SGx

081 125 082 125
0.00 s
083 125 084 125
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 35
IDMT3: Hold Time I2 SGx

081 135 082 135
0.00 s
083 135 084 135
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 35
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Release I2 SGx
081 116 082 116
Instantaneous
083 116 084 116
OP Fig. 35
IDMT2: Release I2 SGx

081 126 082 126
Instantaneous
083 126 084 126
OP Fig. 35
IDMT3: Release I2 SGx

081 136 082 136
Instantaneous
083 136 084 136
OP Fig. 35
Setting for the release characteristic (negative-sequence current system). IDMT1: Iref, N SGx
081 061 082 061
Blocked
083 061 084 061
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: Iref, N SGx

081 181 082 181
Blocked
083 181 084 181
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: Iref, N SGx

081 201 082 201
Blocked
083 201 084 201
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 36
Setting for the pickup current (residual current system).
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-96
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT1: Iref, N dynamic SGx

081 062 082 062
Blocked
083 062 084 062
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 36

081 182 082 182
Blocked
083 182 084 182
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 36

081 202 082 202
Blocked
083 202 084 202
Blocked/ 0.01 In
0.80 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 36
Setting for the pickup current (residual current system) in dynamic mode. This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic settings is elapsing. Definite Time IEC Standard Inverse IEC Very Inverse IEC Extr. Inverse IEC Long Time Inv. IEEE Moderately Inv. IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Extr. Inverse ANSI Normally Inv. ANSI Short Time Inv. ANSI Long Time Inv. RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
ST
IDMT1: N Charac SGx IEC Standard Inverse
081 063
082 063
083 063
084 063
OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: N Charac SGx

081 183 082 183
IEC Standard Inverse

083 183 084 183
As per IDMT1: N Charac SGx
OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: N Charac SGx

081 203 082 203
IEC Standard Inverse

083 203 084 203
As per IDMT1: N Charac SGx
OP Fig. 36
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system). IDMT1: kt Time Dial/TMS SGx
081 064 082 064
1.00
083 064 084 064
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 36

081 184 082 184
1.00
083 184 084 184
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 36

081 204 082 204
1.00
083 204 084 204
0.05
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 36
TMS or time dial setting of the starting characteristic (residual current system). IDMT1: Min. Trip t N SGx
081 067 082 067
1.00 s
083 067 084 067
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: Min. Trip t N SGx

081 187 082 187
1.00 s
083 187 084 187
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 36
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-97
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
IDMT3: Min. Trip t N SGx

081 207 082 207
1.00 s
083 207 084 207
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 36
Setting for the minimum trip time (residual current system). IDMT1: Hold Time N SGx
081 065 082 065
0.00 s
083 065 084 065
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: Hold Time N SGx

081 185 082 185
0.00 s
083 185 084 185
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: Hold Time N SGx

081 205 082 205
0.00 s
083 205 084 205
0.00 s
600.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 36
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has dropped out (residual current system). IDMT1: Release N SGx
081 066 082 066
ST
Instantaneous
083 066 084 066
OP Fig. 36
IDMT2: Release N SGx

081 186 082 186
Instantaneous
083 186 084 186
OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: Release N SGx

081 206 082 206
Instantaneous
083 206 084 206
OP Fig. 36
Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system). 1.3.3.6 Thermal overload protection (THRM)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx THRM1: Enable SGx

081 070 082 070
No
083 070 084 070
No
Yes
OP Fig. 41
THRM2: Enable SGx

081 090 082 090
No
083 090 084 090
No
Yes
OP Fig. 41
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for thermal overload protection. THRM1: Iref Rating SGx
081 074 082 074
1.00 In
083 074 084 074
0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Iref Rating SGx

081 094 082 094
1.00 In
083 094 084 094
0.10 In
4.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the reference current.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-98
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
THRM1: Start Fact.OL_RC SGx

081 075 082 075
1.15
083 075 084 075
1.05
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Start Fact.OL_RC SGx

081 095 082 095
1.15
083 095 084 095
1.05
1.50
0.01
OP Fig. 45
The starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible continuous thermal current of the protected object: I therm,prot.object k= Inom,prot.object THRM1: Tim.const 1(heat) SGx
081 082 082 082
30.0 min
083 082 084 082
1.0 min
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
ST
THRM2: Tim.const 1(heat) SGx

081 102 082 102
30.0 min
083 102 084 102
1.0 min
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow (heating). THRM1: Tim.const 2(cool) SGx
081 083 082 083
30.0 min
083 083 084 083
1.0 min
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Tim.const 2(cool) SGx

081 103 082 103
30.0 min
083 103 084 103
1.0 min
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current flow. This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other cases time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1. THRM1: Max perm obj tmp. SGx
081 077 082 077
120 C
083 077 084 077
0 C
300 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Max perm obj tmp. SGx

081 097 082 097
120 C
083 097 084 097
0 C
300 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object. THRM1: Max perm cool tmp. SGx
081 080 082 080
40 C
083 080 084 080
0 C
70 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Max perm cool tmp. SGx

081 100 082 100
40 C
083 100 084 100
0 C
70 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the coolant. Note: This setting is only effective if the coolant temperature is measured via the PT100 or the 20mA input.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-99
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
THRM1: Select CT Ambient SGx

081 072 082 072
Default Temp. Value

083 072 084 072
Default Temp. Value From PT100 From 20 mA Input
OP Fig. 44
THRM2: Select CT Ambient SGx

081 092 082 092
Default Temp. Value

083 092 084 092
Default Temp. Value From PT100 From 20 mA Input
OP Fig. 44
Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from: No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead Data acquisition via the PT 100 input Data acquisition via the 20 mA input 40 C
083 081 084 081
THRM1: Default CT Amb SGx

081 081 082 081
-40 C
70 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
ST
THRM2: Default CT Amb SGx

081 101 082 101
40 C
083 101 084 101
-40 C
70 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if there is no data acquisition for the coolant temperature. THRM1: Blk for CTA Fail SGx
081 073 082 073
Yes
083 073 084 073
No
Yes
OP Fig. 44
THRM2: Blk for CTA Fail SGx

081 093 082 093
Yes
083 093 084 093
No
Yes
OP Fig. 44
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition. THRM1: T> Alarm Reset,% SGx
081 079 082 079
95 %
083 079 084 079
50 %
200 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: T> Alarm Reset,% SGx

081 099 082 099
95 %
083 099 084 099
50 %
200 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage. THRM1: T> Trip Reset,% SGx
081 076 082 076
100 %
083 076 084 076
50 %
200 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: T> Trip Reset,% SGx

081 096 082 096
100 %
083 096 084 096
50 %
200 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage. Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute Replica, the setting here will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter is hidden as far as the local control panel is concerned.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-100
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
THRM1: Trip Hysteresis SGx

081 078 082 078
2%
083 078 084 078
2%
30 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Trip Hysteresis SGx

081 098 082 098
2%
083 098 084 098
2%
30 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage. THRM1: Pre-Trip Alarm SGx
081 085 082 085
30.0 min
083 085 084 085
Blocked/ 0.0 min
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Pre-Trip Alarm SGx

081 105 082 105
30.0 min
083 105 084 105
Blocked/ 0.0 min
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
ST
1.3.3.7
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the warning time and the trip time is set here. Under/overvoltage protection (V<>)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx V<>: Enable SGx

076 000 077 000
No
078 000 079 000
No
Yes
OP Fig. 47
The time-voltage protection will be enabled in the setting group selected with this setting. V<>: V> SGx
076 003 077 003
1.10 Vn
078 003 079 003
Blocked/ 0.20 Vn
1.50 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate value V>. V<>: V>> SGx

076 004 077 004
1.10 Vn
078 004 079 004
Blocked/ 0.20 Vn
1.50 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate value V>>. V<>: tV> SGx

076 005 077 005
1.00 s
078 005 079 005
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate delay of time-overvoltage stage V>. V<>: tV>> SGx
076 006 077 006
1.00 s
078 006 079 006
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 48
Setting for the operate delay of time-overvoltage stage V>>. V<>: V< SGx
076 007 077 007
0.80 Vn
078 007 079 007
Blocked/ 0.20 Vn
1.50 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate value V<.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-101
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
V<>: V<< SGx

076 008 077 008
0.80 Vn
078 008 079 008
Blocked/ 0.20 Vn
1.50 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate value V<<. V<>: Vmin> SGx

076 046 077 046
0.25 Vn
078 046 079 046
Blocked/ 0.00 Vn
0.60 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 49
Setting for Vmin>. Can be used to prevent undervoltage stages operating when the VT is dead, restricting operation to low voltage conditions only. V<>: tV< SGx
076 009 077 009
1.00 s
078 009 079 009
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 49
Setting for the operate delay of time-undervoltage stage V<. V<>: tV<< SGx
076 010 077 010
1.00 s
078 010 079 010
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 49
ST
Setting for the operate delay of time-undervoltage stage V<<. V<>: tTransient SGx
076 029 077 029
1.00 s
078 029 079 029
Blocked/ 0.00 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 49
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the time-undervoltage stages. V<>: Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx
076 048 077 048
3%
079 048
1%
10 %
1%
OP Fig. 49
078 048
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for measured-voltage monitoring. 1.3.3.8 Frequency protection (f<>)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx f<>: Enable SGx

018 196 018 197
No
018 198 018 199
No
Yes
OP Fig. 50
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for over/underfrequency protection. f<>: Oper. Mode f1 SGx
018 120 018 121
f
018 122 018 123
f f with df/dt f + Delta f/Delta t
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Oper. Mode f2 SGx

018 144 018 145
f
018 146 018 147
OP Fig. 53

018 168 018 169
f
018 170 018 171
OP Fig. 53
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-102
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size

018 192 018 193
f
018 194 018 195
OP Fig. 53
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over/underfrequency protection, and whether instantaneous rate of change of frequency, or average frequency gradient shall supervize. f<>: f1 SGx
018 100 018 101
49.80 Hz
018 102 018 103
Blocked/ 40.00 Hz
70.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
f<>: f2 SGx
018 124 018 125
49.80 Hz
018 126 018 127
Blocked/ 40.00 Hz
70.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
ST
f<>: f3 SGx
018 148 018 149
49.80 Hz
018 150 018 151
Blocked/ 40.00 Hz
70.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
f<>: f4 SGx
018 172 018 173
49.80 Hz
018 174 018 175
Blocked/ 40.00 Hz
70.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over/underfrequency protection function operates if one of the following two conditions applies: The threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds this threshold The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold
Depending on the selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered. f<>: tf1 SGx
018 104 018 105
0.00 s
018 106 018 107
Blocked/ 0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: tf2 SGx

018 128 018 129
0.00 s
018 130 018 131
Blocked/ 0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: tf3 SGx

018 152 018 153
0.00 s
018 154 018 155
Blocked/ 0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: tf4 SGx

018 176 018 177
0.00 s
018 178 018 179
Blocked/ 0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
Setting for the operate delay of over/underfrequency protection. f<>: df1/dt SGx
018 108 018 109
2.0 Hz/s
018 110 018 111
Blocked/ 0.1 Hz/s
10.0 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: df2/dt SGx

018 132 018 133
2.0 Hz/s
018 134 018 135
Blocked/ 0.1 Hz/s
10.0 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
OP Fig. 53
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-103
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
f<>: df3/dt SGx

018 156 018 157
2.0 Hz/s
018 158 018 159
Blocked/ 0.1 Hz/s
10.0 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: df4/dt SGx

018 180 018 181
2.0 Hz/s
018 182 018 183
Blocked/ 0.1 Hz/s
10.0 Hz/s
0.1 Hz/s
OP Fig. 53
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored. Note: This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with df/dt has been selected. f<>: Delta f1 SGx
018 112 018 113
0.30 Hz
018 114 018 115
Blocked/ 0.01 Hz
5.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta f2 SGx

018 136 018 137
0.30 Hz
018 138 018 139
Blocked/ 0.01 Hz
5.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
ST
f<>: Delta f3 SGx

018 160 018 161
0.30 Hz
018 162 018 163
Blocked/ 0.01 Hz
5.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta f4 SGx

018 184 018 185
0.30 Hz
018 186 018 187
Blocked/ 0.01 Hz
5.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 53
Setting for delta f. Note: This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with Delta f/Delta t has been selected. f<>: Delta t1 SGx
018 116 018 117
0.30 s
018 118 018 119
0.04 s
3.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t2 SGx

018 140 018 141
0.30 s
018 142 018 143
0.04 s
3.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t3 SGx

018 164 018 165
0.30 s
018 166 018 167
0.04 s
3.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t4 SGx

018 188 018 189
0.30 s
018 190 018 191
0.04 s
3.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 53
Setting for delta t. Note: This setting is ineffective unless the operating mode f with Delta f/Delta t has been selected. 1.3.3.9 Overfluxing protection (V/f)
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx V/f: Enable SGx

018 210 082 210
No
083 210 084 210
No
Yes
OP Fig. 54
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for overfluxing protection.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-104
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size
V/f: V/f> (Alarm) SGx

018 211 082 211
1.05 Vn/fn
083 211 084 211
Blocked/ 1.00 Vn/fn
1.20 Vn/fn
0.01 Vn/fn
OP Fig. 56
Pickup value of definite time warning stage of overfluxing protection. V/f: V/f(t)> SGx
018 212 082 212
1.10 Vn/fn
083 212 084 212
Blocked/ 1.05 Vn/fn
1.50 Vn/fn
0.01 Vn/fn
OP Fig. 60
Pickup value of the variable time characteristic for overfluxing protection. V/f: V/f>> SGx
018 213 082 213
Blocked
083 213 084 213
Blocked/ 1.05 Vn/fn
1.60 Vn/fn
0.01 Vn/fn
OP Fig. 57
Pickup value of definite time tripping stage of overfluxing protection.
ST
V/f: tV/f> SGx

018 214 082 214
1s
083 214 084 214
Blocked/1 s
10000 s
1s
OP Fig. 56
Time delay for definite time warning stage of overfluxing protection. V/f: t at V/f=1.05 SGx
018 217 082 217
72.8 s
084 217
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 217
V/f: t at V/f=1.10 SGx

018 218 082 218
18.8 s
084 218
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 218

018 219 082 219
8.8 s
084 219
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 219

018 220 082 220
5.3 s
084 220
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 220

018 221 082 221
3.7 s
084 221
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 221

018 222 082 222
2.8 s
084 222
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 222

018 223 082 223
2.3 s
084 223
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 223

018 224 082 224
1.9 s
084 224
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 224

018 225 082 225
1.7 s
084 225
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 225

018 226 082 226
1.5 s
084 226
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 226
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-105
Menu Text
Default Setting
Step Size

018 227 082 227
1.4 s
084 227
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 227

018 228 082 228
1.3 s
084 228
1.0 s
1000.0 s
0.1 s
OP Fig. 58, 60
083 228
Time delay settings to configure the overfluxing protection characteristic for V/f values from 1.05 to 1.60 in 0.05 V/Hz steps. V/f: Reset Time SGx
018 230 082 230
0s
083 230 084 230
0s
10000 s
1s
OP Fig. 60
Reset delay for the variable time tripping characteristic of overfluxing protection. V/f: tV/f>> SGx
018 229 082 229
Blocked
083 229 084 229
Blocked/0 s
10000 s
1s
Time delay for definite time tripping stage of overfluxing protection. 1.3.3.10 Current transformer supervision (CTS)
ST
Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx CTS: Enable SGx

001 118 001 119
No
001 120 001 121
No
Yes
OP Fig. 64
This setting specifies the setting group to be enabled for CT supervision. CTS: I1> SGx
001 111 001 115
0.10 Iref
001 116 001 117
0.05 Iref
4.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 66
Positive sequence current threshold to be exceeded in order to determine CTS condition. CTS: I2/I1> SGx
001 102 001 103
0.05
001 104 001 105
0.05
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 66
Low set negative to positive sequence current ratio that is not to be exceeded in order to determine CTS condition. CTS: I2/I1>> SGx
001 122 001 123
0.40
001 124 001 125
0.05
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 66
High set negative to positive sequence current ratio to be exceeded at exactly one end in order to determine CTS condition. CTS: t(Alarm) SGx
001 126 001 127
1.00 s
001 128 001 129
0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 69
Alarming delay timer for CTS indication. CTS: t(Latch) SGx

001 130 001 131
1.00 s
001 132 001 133
Blocked/ 0.00 s
10.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 69
Latching alarm delay timer for CTS indication.
P63x/UK ST/A54 (ST) 4-106
1.3.3.11 Broken conductor detection (BC_)

Settings\Function Settings\Setting Group SGx BC_1: Enable SGx

081 038 082 038
No
083 038 084 038
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62
BC_2: Enable SGx

081 039 082 039
No
083 039 084 039
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62
BC_3: Enable SGx

081 040 082 040
No
083 040 084 040
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62
BC_4: Enable SGx

081 041 082 041
No
083 041 084 041
No
Yes
OP Fig. 62
ST
This setting specifies the end to be enabled for broken conductor detection for each setting group. BC_1: I2/I1> SGx
081 042 082 042
0.30
083 042 084 042
0.20
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 63
BC_2: I2/I1> SGx

081 043 082 043
0.30
083 043 084 043
0.20
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 63
BC_3: I2/I1> SGx

081 044 082 044
0.30
083 044 084 044
0.20
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 63
BC_4: I2/I1> SGx

081 045 082 045
0.30
083 045 084 045
0.20
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 63
Pickup level of broken conductor detection based on ratio of negative to positive sequence current. BC_1: Operate Delay SGx
081 046 082 046
5.00 s
083 046 084 046
0.10 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 63
BC_2: Operate Delay SGx

081 047 082 047
5.00 s
083 047 084 047
0.10 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 63

081 048 082 048
5.00 s
083 048 084 048
0.10 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 63

081 049 082 049
5.00 s
083 049 084 049
0.10 s
100.00 s
0.01 s
OP Fig. 63
Operate delay for broken conductor detection.
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK OP/A54
OP
OPERATION
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK OP/A54
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-1
CONTENTS
(OP) 51.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7
OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Differential protection (DIFF) Enabling or disabling differential protection Amplitude matching Vector group matching Tripping characteristics High-set differential protection function Magnetizing inrush current blocking Saturation discriminator Overfluxing restraint Measured operating data of differential protection Restricted earth fault protection (REF_) Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection Amplitude matching Operating modes and tripping characteristics Measured operating data of biased restricted earth fault protection Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC) Enabling or disabling DTOC protection Phase current stages Negative sequence current stages Residual current stages General starting Counters of the DTOC protection function Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT) Enabling or disabling IDMT protection Time dependent characteristics Phase current stage Negative sequence current stage Residual current stage Holding time General starting
11
11 11 12 15 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 26 27 28 32 33 33 34 35 37 38 39 39 40 41 45 46 47 48 49
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-2 1.4.8 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 Counters of the IDMT protection function Thermal overload protection (THRM) Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection Tripping characteristics Coolant temperature acquisition Warning Under/overvoltage protection (V<>) Enabling or disabling V<> protection Voltage monitoring Frequency potection (f<>) Enabling or disabling frequency protection Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time Operating modes of frequency protection Frequency monitoring Frequency monitoring with instantaneous rate of change (df/dt) monitoring Frequency monitoring with average rate of change (f/t) monitoring Overfluxing protection (V/f) Enabling or disabling overfluxing protection Conditioning the measured variable Fixed-time warning stage Fixed-time tripping stage Variable-time tripping stage Broken conductor detection (BC_) Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection Broken conductor detection
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 50 50 51 52 53 54 56 56 56 58 58 59 60 60 60 60 62 62 63 63 64 64 68 68 68
OP
1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.9 1.9.1 1.9.2
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2
OPERATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Current transformer supervision (CTS) Enabling or disabling CTS CTS blocked Operating conditions Signaling and indication Resetting DC and temperature monitoring (LIMIT) Enabling or disabling DC and temperature monitoring Monitoring the linearized DC values
70
70 70 70 71 72 73 74 74 74
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 2.2.3 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.6 2.7 2.7.1 2.8 2.8.1 2.9 2.9.1 2.9.2 2.10 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.11 2.11.1 2.11.2 2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 2.12 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.13 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 Monitoring the measured temperature value Phase current monitoring (LIM_) Enabling or disabling phase current monitoring Monitoring minimum and maximum phase currents Programmable logic (LOGIC) Local control panel (HMI) Operation panel Fault panel Overload panel Local front port communication (PC) Rear port serial communication (COMM1) Checking spontaneous signaling 2nd rear port serial communication (COMM2) Checking spontaneous signaling IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB) Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization Ready to synchronize Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs (INP) Configuration of the opto inputs Operating mode of the opto inputs Temperature and DC monitoring inputs (RTDmA) Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs Direct current inputs Zero suppression Open circuit and overload monitoring Input for connection of a RTD
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-3 75 76 76 76 78 83 84 84 85 85 86 92 93 93 94 94 94 95 95 95 96 96 97 98 98 100 100 100 100 101 102 103 103 103 104
OP
Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays (OUTP) Configuration of the output relays Operating mode of the output relays Blocking the output relays Testing the output relays Analog output channel (mA_OP) Enabling or disabling the analog output channel function Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input Resetting the analog output channel function
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-4 2.13.4 2.13.5 2.13.6 2.13.7 2.13.8 2.13.9 BCD-coded measured data output Output of measured event values Output of measured operating values Scaling Analog measured data output Output of measured event values
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 104 104 105 105 106 106 107 107 107 109 110 110 110 110 110 114 115 116 117 118 118 121 121 122 124 124 125 125 125 126 127 130 131 131 132
2.13.10 Output of measured operating values 2.13.11 Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels 2.13.12 Scaling 2.13.13 Output of external measured data 2.14 2.14.1 2.14.2 Configuration and operating mode of the LEDs (LED) Configuration of the LEDs Operating mode of the LEDs General functions of the P63x (MAIN) Conditioning of the measured variables Selection of the residual current measurement Phase reversal logic Operating data measurement Measured current values Delayed maximum phase current display (thermal ammeter) Stored maximum phase current display (thermal max. demand) Measured voltage value Frequency
OP
2.15 2.15.1 2.15.2 2.15.3 2.15.4 2.15.5 2.15.6 2.15.7 2.15.8 2.15.9
2.15.10 Angle determination 2.15.11 Configuring and enabling the protection functions 2.15.12 Canceling a protection function 2.15.13 Disabling and enabling the protection function 2.15.14 Activation of dynamic settings 2.15.15 Multiple blocking 2.15.16 Blocked/faulty 2.15.17 Starting signals and starting logic 2.15.18 Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels 2.15.19 Time tag and clock synchronization 2.15.20 Multiple signaling of the broken conductor detection function 2.15.21 Resetting mechanisms
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 2.15.22 Test mode 2.16 2.16.1 2.16.2 2.17 2.17.1 2.17.2 2.17.3 2.17.4 2.18 2.18.1 2.19 2.19.1 2.20 2.20.1 2.20.2 2.21 2.21.1 2.21.2 2.21.3 2.21.4 2.22 2.22.1 2.22.2 2.22.3 2.22.4 2.22.5 2.23 2.23.1 2.23.2 2.23.3 2.23.4 2.23.5 Setting group selection (GROUP) Selecting the setting group Selecting the setting group via opto inputs Self testing and diagnostics (CHECK) Tests during startup Cyclic tests Signaling Device response Operating data recording (OP_RC) Counter of signals relevant to system operation Monitoring signal recording (MT_RC) Counter of monitoring signals Overload data acquisition (OL_DA) Acquisition of the overload duration Acquisition of the measured overload data of thermal overload protection Overload recording (OL_RC) Start of overload recording Counting overload events Time tag Overload logging Fault data acquisition (FT_DA) Running time and fault duration Fault data acquisition time Acquisition of the fault currents Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents Fault data reset Disturbance recording (OSCIL) Start of fault recording Fault counting Time tag Fault logging Fault data recording
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-5 133 133 133 133 134 134 135 135 135 136 136 136 137 137 137 138 138 138 138 139 139 140 140 140 142 143 145 145 145 145 146 147 148
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-6
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Figure 6: Figure 7: Figure 8: Figure 9: Figure 10: Figure 11: Figure 12: Enabling or disabling differential protection Calculating and checking the matching factors Amplitude matching Vector diagram for vector group matching with a Yd5 transformer Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d Tripping characteristic of differential protection Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems Measuring system of the P63x Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) Saturation discriminator Overfluxing restraint Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection Calculating and monitoring the matching factors Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by residual current Measuring system of the P63x 12 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
OP
Figure 13: Figure 14: Figure 15: Figure 16: Figure 17: Figure 18: Figure 19: Figure 20: Figure 21: Figure 22: Figure 23: Figure 24: Figure 25: Figure 26: Figure 27: Figure 28: Figure 29: Figure 30: Figure 31: Figure 32: Figure 33: Figure 34: Figure 35: Figure 36:
Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by maximum phase current 31 High impedance restricted earth fault protection Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents Selection of measured variables for DTOC protection Enabling or disabling DTOC protection Phase current stages Negative sequence current stages Residual current stages General starting Counters of the DTOC protection function Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection Enabling or disabling IDMT protection Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3 Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112 Tripping characteristics per ANSI Tripping characteristics for RI and RXIDG type inverse Phase current stage Negative sequence current stage Residual current stage 32 32 33 34 35 37 38 39 39 40 40 42 43 44 44 45 47 48
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Figure 37: Figure 38: Figure 39: Figure 40: Figure 41: Figure 42: Figure 43: Figure 44: Figure 45: Figure 46: Figure 47: Figure 48: Figure 49: Figure 50: Figure 51: Figure 52: Figure 53: Figure 54: Figure 55: Figure 56: Figure 57: Figure 58: Figure 59: Figure 60: Figure 61: Figure 62: Figure 63: Figure 64: Figure 65: Figure 66: Figure 67: Figure 68: Figure 69: Figure 70: Figure 71: Figure 72: Figure 73: Figure 74: Example demonstrating the effect of holding time on the phase current stage General starting Counters of the IDMT protection function Selection of measured variables for thermal overload protection Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection Thermal overload protection ready Tripping characteristic of thermal overload protection Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition Thermal overload protection Thermal replica reset Enabling or disabling V<> protection Overvoltage monitoring Undervoltage monitoring Enabling or disabling frequency protection Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-7 49 50 50 51 51 52 53 54 55 55 56 57 58 59 59 61 62 63 63 64 64 65 66 67 68 68 69 70 71 71 72 73 74 74 75 76 77 78
Operation of frequency monitoring with average rate of change (f/t) monitoring First stage of the frequency protection function Enabling or disabling the overfluxing protection function Conditioning the measured variable Warning stage Fixed-time tripping stage Tripping characteristic for default settings Change of buffer content during an interrupted starting Variable-time tripping stage Resetting of the V/f replica Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection Broken conductor detection for end a Enabling or disabling CTS CTS blocking Current evaluation per end (y = a,b,c,d) CTS operating condition Modification of differential characteristic during CTS condition Overall signaling of CTS Per end signaling of CTS Monitoring the linearized DC values Monitoring the measured temperature value Selection of the measured variables for phase current monitoring (LIM_1 shown) Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current for the selected transformer end
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-8 Figure 75: Figure 76: Figure 77: Figure 78: Figure 79: Figure 80: Figure 81: Figure 82: Figure 83: Figure 84: Figure 85: Figure 86: Figure 87: Figure 88: Control of logic operations via settings or stored input signals Setting options for programmable logic (output 1 shown) Operating mode 1: pickup & reset delay Operating mode 2: pulse delayed pickup Operating mode 3: pickup & rst.retrig Operating mode 4: delayed pulse retrig Operating mode 5: minimum dwell Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean logic equations Operation panel Fault panel Overload panel PC interface settings Selecting the serial protocol Settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol Settings for the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol Settings for the ILS_C protocol Settings for the MODBUS protocol Settings for the DNP3.0 protocol Settings for the Courier protocol Checking spontaneous signaling Settings for COMM2 Checking spontaneous signaling Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 79 80 81 81 81 82 82 83 84 85 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 91 92 92 93 94 95 96 96 97 98 99 100 100 102 103 103 104 104 106 108
OP
Figure 89: Figure 90: Figure 91: Figure 92: Figure 93: Figure 94: Figure 95: Figure 96: Figure 97: Figure 98: Figure 99:
Figure 100: Example of the conversion of a 4-10mA input current to 0-20mA monitored current, IDC,lin Figure 101: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a dotted line) Figure 102: Analog DC input Figure 103: Scaling of the linearized measured value Figure 104: Temperature measurement using a RTD Figure 105: Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays Figure 106: Testing the output relays Figure 107: Enabling or disabling the analog output channel Figure 108: Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input Figure 109: Resetting the analog output channel function Figure 110: BCD-coded measured data output Figure 111: Example of a characteristic curve for analog output of measured data
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Figure 112: Analog measured data output Figure 113: Configuration and operating mode of the LEDs
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-9 109 110 112 113 114 115 116 118 119 120 120 121 121 122 122 123 124 125 125 126 127 127 127 129 130 130 131 132 132 133 134 135 136 137 137
Figure 114: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing connection of the fourth CT set to the transformers of the star point earth connection Figure 115: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual connection input to earth fault CT, Part 1 of 2 Figure 116: Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual connection input to earth fault CT, Part 2 of 2 Figure 117: Evaluation of residual current Figure 118: Internal current summation Figure 119: Measured operating data for phase currents, ends a to d Figure 120: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display Figure 121: Measured operating data for residual currents, ends a to c Figure 122: Measured operating data for residual current, end d (P634 only) Figure 123: Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current for the virtual winding (formed by current summation, P633 and P634 only) Figure 124: Measured voltage value Figure 125: Frequency measurement Figure 126: Determination of the angle between the phase currents Figure 127: Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends Figure 128: Determination of the angle between the calculated residual current and the current measured at transformer - Tx4 Figure 129: Enabling or disabling protection Figure 130: Activation of dynamic settings Figure 131: Multiple blocking Figure 132: Blocked/faulty signal Figure 133: P63x general start signals Figure 134: Counter of general start signals Figure 135: Formation of the trip commands Figure 136: Counter of the trip commands Figure 137: Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels Figure 138: Date and time setting and clock synchronization Figure 139: Signals of the broken conductor detection function Figure 140: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel Figure 141: Setting the test mode Figure 142: Setting group activation Figure 143: Monitoring signals Figure 144: Operating data recording and the counter of signals relevant to system operation Figure 145: Monitoring signal recording and the counter of monitoring signals Figure 146: Overload duration
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-10
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 138 138 139 140 142 143 144 145 146 147 149
Figure 147: Measured overload data of thermal overload protection (THRM1 shown) Figure 148: Counting overload events Figure 149: Overload memory Figure 150: Running time and fault duration Figure 151: Determination of the fault data acquisition time Figure 152: Acquisition of the fault currents Figure 153: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection Figure 154: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of restricted earth fault protection Figure 155: Start of fault recording and fault counter Figure 156: Fault memory Figure 157: Fault data recording
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-11
1.
OPERATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail the individual protection functions.
1.1
Differential protection (DIFF) The P63x is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the protection of motors and generators and of other two-winding (P631, P632, P633, P634), three-winding (P633, P634) or four-winding (P634) arrangements. For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude matching is required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power generally the nominal power of the transformer and of the primary nominal voltages for all windings of the transformer. Vector group matching is achieved by input of the relevant vector group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence current filtering may be deactivated. For conditions where it is possible to load the transformer with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing restraint prevents unwanted tripping. For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, the harmonic restraint (inrush compensation) can be deactivated. The start-up of directly switched asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential protection due to transient transformer saturation caused by a displacement of the start-up current for relatively high primary time constants. Even under these unfavorable measurement conditions, the P63x provides stable performance due to the application of a saturation discriminator. All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current transformers are connected to the P63x in standard configuration as shown in the Installation - IN section. In particular, the application as transformer differential protection device presupposes that winding a corresponds to the high voltage side of the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings must be selected (see Settings - ST).
OP
1.1.1
Enabling or disabling differential protection Differential protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-12
SGx
Setting Group SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4
SGx
OP
Figure 1: 1.1.2 Enabling or disabling differential protection Amplitude matching
P1758ENa
In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power - identical for all windings needs to be defined. For two-winding arrangements, the nominal power will usually be the reference power. For three or four-winding transformers, the nominal power of the highest-power winding should be set as the reference power. The individual reference currents for each winding of the protected object are then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
Iref ,a = S ref 3 Vnom,a S ref 3 Vnom,c Iref ,b = S ref 3 Vnom,b S ref 3 Vnom,d
Iref ,c =
Iref ,d =
Sref: Iref, a, b, c or d: Vnom, a, b, c or d:
reference power reference current of winding a, b, c or d nominal voltage of winding a, b, c or d
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
k am,a = Inom,a Iref ,a k am,b = Inom,b Iref ,b k am,c = Inom,c Iref ,c k am,d = Inom,d Iref ,d
With Kam, a, b, c or d: Inom, a, b, c or d: amplitude-matching factor of winding a, b, c or d primary nominal currents of the main current transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are calculated by the P63x.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-13
The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions: The matching factors must always be 16. i.e. k amp,z 16 The value of the lower matching factors must be 0.5. i.e. k amp,max 1 0.5
In three or four-winding protection, the weakest end, that is the end with the smallest primary nominal transformer current, is not associated with any restriction of the settings for the amplitude matching. Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically. The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of the device.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-14
Rated Ref Power Sref
CHECK: CHECK: CHECK: CHECK:
OP
CHECK: CHECK: CHECK: CHECK:
CHECK: CHECK:
P1759ENa
Figure 2:
Calculating and checking the matching factors
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-15
OP
Figure 3: 1.1.3
Amplitude matching
Vector group matching Vector group matching is performed solely by mathematical phasor operations on the amplitude-matched phase currents of the low-voltage side in accordance with the characteristic vector group number. This is shown in the following figure for vector group characteristic number 5, where vector group Yd5 is used as the example:
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-16
Figure 4:
Vector diagram for vector group matching with a Yd5 transformer
OP
No operation is carried out on the high-voltage side in connection with vector group matching. However, one should note that the phase windings are connected in a wye configuration, the neutral of which is operationally earthed. In the event of system faults to earth, the zero-sequence component of the fault current would flow via the earthed neutral that lies within the transformer differential protection zone and would thus appear in the measuring systems as differential current. The consequence would be undesirable tripping. For this reason the zero-sequence component of the three-phase system must be eliminated from the phase currents on the high-voltage side. In accordance with its definition, the zero-sequence current is determined as follows from the amplitude-matched phase currents:
Iamp,zero,z =
1 I +I +I 3 amp,A,z amp,B,z amp,C,z
On the low-voltage side, the zero-sequence current in the example shown above is automatically filtered out based on the mathematical phasor operations. This is not always necessary and also not always desired, but is basically the result of any subtraction of two phase current phasors:
Iamp,A,z = Iamp,zero,z + Iamp,pos,z + Iamp,neg,z Iamp,B,z = Iamp,zero,z + a Iamp,pos,z + a Iamp,neg,z Iamp,C,z = Iamp,zero,z + a Iamp,pos,z + a Iamp,neg,z Iamp,A,z Iamp,B,z = 1 a Iamp,pos,z + (1 a ) Iamp,neg,z
2 2 2
Iamp,B,z Iamp,C,z
Iamp,C,z Iamp,A,z = (a 1) Iamp,pos,z + a 1 Iamp,neg,z

2
( ) = (a a ) I
2
amp,pos,z
+ a a Iamp,neg,z
The following tables show that for all odd-numbered vector group characteristics the zero-sequence current on the low-voltage side is basically always filtered out, whereas for even-numbered vector group characteristics the zero-sequence current on the low-voltage side is never filtered out automatically. The latter is also true for the high-voltage side since in that case, as explained above, no mathematical phasor operations are performed. Vector group matching and zero-sequence current filtering must therefore always be viewed in combination. The following tables list all the mathematical phasor operations.
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 The indices in the formulae have the following meaning: am: s: x: y: z: x+1: x-1: amplitude-matched amplitude- and vector group-matched phase A, B or C measuring system 1, 2 or 3 winding a, b, c or d cyclically trailing phase cyclically leading phase
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-17
Mathematical operations on the high-voltage side: With Izero Filtering 0 Without Izero Filtering
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Iamp,zero,z
Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x, z
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an even-numbered vector group characteristic: VG 0 2 4 6 8 10 With Izero Filtering Without Izero Filtering
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,zero,z
Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x, z
( ( (
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z
OP
) )
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an odd-numbered vector group characteristic: VG 1 With Izero Filtering Without Izero Filtering
Ivec,y,z = Ivec,y,z = Ivec,y,z = Ivec,y,z = Ivec,y,z = Ivec,y,z =
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Iamp,x,z Iamp,x +1,z
) )
Ivec,y,z = Ivec, y, z = Ivec, y, z = Ivec, y, z =
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Iamp,x,z Iamp,x +1,z + Iamp,zero,z Iamp, x 1, z Iamp, x +1, z + Iamp,zero, z Iamp, x 1,z Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z Iamp, x +1, z Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z Iamp, x +1, z Iamp, x 1, z + Iamp,zero, z Iamp,x,z Iamp,x 1,z + Iamp,zero,z
Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,x,z Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,x,z
( (
( (
) ) )
Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,x,z Iamp,x 1,z
Ivec, y, z = Ivec,y,z =
11
Vector group matching is via input of the vector group identification number provided that the phase currents of the high and low voltage side(s) are connected in standard configuration. For other configurations, special considerations may apply. A reverse phase rotation (phase sequence A-C-B) needs to be taken into account by making the appropriate setting at the
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-18
P63x. The P63x will then automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the number 12 (vector group ID = 12 - set ID).
OP
Figure 5:
Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, ends a to c
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-19
OP
Figure 6: 1.1.4 Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering, end d
Tripping characteristics The differential and restraining current variables for each measurement system are calculated from the current variables after amplitude and vector group matching. The formation of the restraining variables differs between two and three-winding protection. Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b IR,y = 0.5 Is,y,a Is,y,b
Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three or four-winding protection:

Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d IR,y = 0.5 Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d
The tripping characteristic of the differential protection device P63x has two knees. The first knee is dependent on the setting of the basic threshold value DIFF: Idiff> SGx and is on the load line for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting DIFF: IR,m2 SGx. The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure 7 shows the tripping characteristic. Characteristic equation for the range:
0 IR 0.5 Idiff > : Id I > = diff Iref Iref
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-20 Characteristic equation for the range:

0.5 Idiff >< IR IR,m2
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 :
Id I > I = m1 R + diff (1 0.5 m1 ) Iref Iref Iref
Characteristic equation for the range:
IR,m2 < IR
IR,m2 Id I I = m 2 R + diff > (1 0.5 m1 ) + (m1 m 2 ) Iref Iref Iref Iref
Iref: reference current m1: gradient of characteristic in range m2: gradient of characteristic in range 0.5 Idiff >< IR IR,m2
IR,m2 < IR
OP
Fa u for lt cu rr sin gle ent ch -si ar de a fee cte ris d tic
Figure 7:
Tripping characteristic of differential protection
1.1.5
High-set differential protection function Above the adjustable threshold DIFF: Idiff>> SGx of the differential current, the P63x will trip without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the overfluxing restraint. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx>, the restraining current and the saturation discriminator are no longer taken into account either, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining variable and the saturation discriminator.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-21
Figure 8:
Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-22
OP
Figure 9:
Measuring system of the P63x
1.1.6
Magnetizing inrush current blocking When an unloaded transformer is energized, the inrush current at unfavorable points on wave such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the transformer nominal current several times over. Since the high inrush current flows on the connected side only, the tripping characteristic of differential protection may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action is taken. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush current. The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental I(fn) and second harmonic components I(2*fn) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(2*fn)/I(fn) exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring system, tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes:
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-23
Across all three measuring systems Selectively for one measuring system
There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> SGx.
OP
Figure 10: Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
1.1.7
Saturation discriminator Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means of the bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is particularly pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard for through-currents with transformer saturation, the P63x is provided with a saturation discriminator. After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator monitors the evolution of the differential current over time. For internal faults, the differential current appears after a zero crossing synchronous with the restraining current. In the case of through currents with transformer saturation, however, a differential current will not appear until transformer saturation begins. Accordingly, a blocking signal is generated on the basis of level monitoring of the differential current as compared to the restraining current, and thus the desired through-stabilization is achieved. Blocking is restricted to the measuring system where an external fault was detected. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>>> SGx.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-24
Figure 11:
Saturation discriminator
1.1.8
Overfluxing restraint If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, saturation effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential protection tripping. The fact that the current of the protected object under saturation conditions has a high proportion of harmonics having five times the system frequency serves as the basis of stabilization. The P63x filters the differential current and determines the fundamental component I(fn) and the fifth harmonic component I(5*fn). If the ratio I(5*fn)/I(fn) exceeds the set value DIFF: Over I(5fn)/I(fn) SGx in at least one measuring system, and if the restraining current is smaller than 4Iref, then tripping is blocked selectively for one measuring system. There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> SGx.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-25
OP
Figure 12:
Overfluxing restraint
1.1.9
Measured operating data of differential protection The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-26
OP
Figure 13: 1.2
Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents
Restricted earth fault protection (REF_)
The restricted earth fault protection function is not available with the P631. For the other design versions of the P63x, one restricted earth fault protection function per transformer winding is available for up to three ends. The P63x display shows the winding associated with a particular restricted earth fault protection function. Connection for and operation of the restricted earth fault protection function will now be presented with winding a as an example. Equivalent considerations apply to windings b and c. 1.2.1 Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection Restricted earth fault protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-27
OP
Figure 14: Enabling or disabling restricted earth fault protection
1.2.2
Amplitude matching In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, the nominal power of the transformer winding should be set as the reference power. The reference current is then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltage of the transformer winding.
Iref ,N,a = S ref 3 Vnom,a
Sref: Iref,N,a: Vnom,a:
reference power reference current of the restricted earth fault protection function, end a nominal voltage, end a
The P63x calculates the matching factor on the basis of the reference current and the set primary nominal current of the system transformer.
k am,N,a = Inom,a Iref ,N,a k am,Y,a = Inom,Y,a Iref ,N,a
Where: am: In,a: In,Y,a: amplitude-matched primary nominal current of the main CT primary nominal current of CT in the neutral-point-to-earth connections
Reference currents and matching factors are calculated by the P63x. The P63x checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their permissible ranges. The following conditions apply: The matching factors must always be 16 i.e. k amp ,P 16 and k amp, Y 16 The value of the smaller matching factor must be 0.5 i.e. k amp ,P 0.5 and k amp,Y 0.5
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-28
Should the P63x calculate a reference current or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be blocked automatically. The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.
Rated Ref Power Sref
CHECK
OP
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK Min Mtch f inv REF_1
CHECK Rat Mtch f inv REF_1
P1770ENa
Figure 15:
Calculating and monitoring the matching factors
1.2.3
Operating modes and tripping characteristics One of three operating modes for restricted earth fault protection can be selected via settings. Low impedance REF biased by residual current (Low-Z Iph Sum Bias) Low impedance REF biased by maximum phase current (Low-Z Iph Max. Bias) High impedance REF (High Impedance)
The operation of each mode is detailed below: Low-Z Iph Sum Bias
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-29
From the amplitude-matched resultant currents Iam,N,a and Iam,Y,a, the differential and restraining currents are calculated as follows:
Id,N,a = Iam,N,a + Iam,Y,a IR,N,a = Iam,N,a Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current arrows, that is, point either towards the protected object or away from it. Figure 16 shows the tripping characteristic of the restricted earth fault protection function. The characteristic equation is as follows:
Id,N,a Iref ,N,a = Idiff >,N,a Iref ,N,a + 1.005 IR,N,a Iref ,N,a
Where: Idiff>,N,a: setting REF_1: Idiff> SGx
5 .00 =1
Figure 16:
Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by residual current
If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold REF_1: Idiff>>> SGx, the restraining variable is no longer taken into account, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining variable. Low impedance REF biased by residual current is only applicable where the transformer winding has neutral point earthing, and where the earth connection is fitted with a CT (IY). This mode cannot be applied for balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.
12201e.DS4
ult Fa
rr cu
te ac ar h tc en
ris
tic
t for
ns ra
o on ati r atu ts n e i
e f th
in ma
nt rre cu
n t ra
er rm sfo
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-30
OP
Figure 17: Measuring system of the P63x
Low-Z Iph Max. Bias Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are defined as follows:
Id = k amp,P { IA ,IB ,IC } + k amp,Y IY IR = 1 k amp,P max IA , IB , IC + k amp,Y IY 2
Regarding the definition of restraining current IR a dual slope characteristic is applicable in comparison with operating mode, Low-Z Iph Sum Bias. The characteristic allows the user to apply tripping test by shorting a phase current (for simulation of residual current) without the need of star point current IY. This mode has the advantage of being universally applicable for conventional star winding REF, and also balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.

Id /Iref 2
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-31
Fault current characteristic for single- end, single- phase infeed
1.5 m2 1
0.5 Idiff>
m1 IR,m2 0.5 1 1.5 2 IR /Iref

P1845ENa
OP
Figure 18:
Tripping characteristic of restricted earth fault protection biased by maximum phase current
High Impedance This operating mode offers restricted earth fault protection using the high impedance measuring principle. Sensitivity may be set via the Idiff> setting. This mode has the advantage of being universally applicable for conventional star winding REF, and also balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-32
Healthy CT Zm R CT1
Protected circuit
Saturated CT
Zm R CT2
AG
IF
R L1 VS R L2 Voltage across relay circuit VS = IF (RCT + 2RL ) Stabilising resistor R ST limits spill current to I S (relay setting)
R
R L3 R ST R L4
OP
R ST = VS R R
IS
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current

Where RR = Relay burden RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer
P0115ENc
Figure 19:
High impedance restricted earth fault protection
1.2.4
Measured operating data of biased restricted earth fault protection The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
Figure 20:
Measured operating data of the differential and restraining currents
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.3 Definite time overcurrent protection (DTOC)
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-33
In the P631 and P632, two three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection functions (DTOC1 and DTOC2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three DTOC functions (DTOC1, DTOC2 and DTOC3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two user-selected transformer ends. For each DTOC function, a setting is provided for this assignment by the user. The DTOC function will then monitor the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current for the selection. DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the DTOC protection functions. Function groups DTOC2 and DTOC3 are equivalent.
Select CT Input
OP
P1774ENa
Figure 21:
Selection of measured variables for DTOC protection
1.3.1
Enabling or disabling DTOC protection DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. enabling can be done separately for each setting group. Moreover,
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-34
OP
Figure 22: Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
1.3.2
Phase current stages The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time of the dynamic settings (see Activation of Dynamic Settings); the normal thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-35
Inrush Restr Enab SGx
SGx SGx
Dynam. Setts. Active
SGx
SGx SGx
SGx
OP
SGx SGx SGx
Setting SG SG SG SG 1 2 3 4
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
P1776ENa
Figure 23:
Phase current stages
1.3.3
Negative sequence current stages The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents based on the formulas shown below. The phase sequence setting is taken into account. A-B-C (standard phase rotation):
Ineg = 1 2 I + a IB + a IC 3 A
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-36
A-C-B (reverse phase rotation):

Ineg = 1 2 I A + a IB + a IC 3
a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x with three-stage functions to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time of the dynamic settings (see Activation of Dynamic Settings); the normal thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-37
OP
Figure 24:
Negative sequence current stages
1.3.4
Residual current stages The residual current is monitored with three-stage functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time of the dynamic settings (see Activation of Dynamic Settings); the normal thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once these stages have elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the general starting decision is set to Enabled starting IN, a trip signal is issued as well. These timer stages can be blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Furthermore, the timer stages can, depending on the setting, be blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-38
OP
Figure 25:
Residual current stages
1.3.5
General starting If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a general starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-39
Gen. starting mode SGx
tGS SGx
I2 I2 Starting I2> General Starting I2>> I2>>> Starting Start
Gen. starting mode SGx SGx
tGS
P1779ENa
Figure 26:
General starting
1.3.6
Counters of the DTOC protection function The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
OP
Figure 27: 1.4
Counters of the DTOC protection function
Inverse time overcurrent protection (IDMT)
In the P631 and P632, two three-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection functions (IDMT1 and IDMT2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three IDMT functions (IDMT1, IDMT2 and IDMT3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two user-selected transformer ends. For each IDMT function, a setting is provided for this assignment by the user. The IDMT function will then monitor the phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current for the selection. IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the IDMT protection functions. Function groups IDMT2 and IDMT3 are equivalent.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-40
Select CT Input
OP
Figure 28: Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection
P1781ENa
1.4.1
Enabling or disabling IDMT protection IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
Figure 29:
Enabling or disabling IDMT protection
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-41
1.4.2
Time dependent characteristics The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current operate independently and can be set separately. The user can select from a multitude of characteristics. The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in Figures 30 to 33.
No.
Tripping Characteristic k = 0.01 to 10.00
Formula for the Tripping Characteristic a
Constants b c
Formula for the Release Characteristic R
Definite Time Per IEC 255-3
t=k
t =k
a I I ref 1
0.14 13.50 80.00 120.00 0.02 1.00 2.00 1.00
b
1 2 3 4
Standard Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse Per IEEE C37.112
a c t = k + I b 1 I ref
0.0515 19.6100 28.2000 0.0200 2.0000 2.0000 0.1140 0.4910 0.1217
tr = k
R I I ref 1
2
OP
5 6 7
Moderately Inverse Very Inverse Extremely Inverse Per ANSI
4.85 21.60 29.10
a t = k + c b I 1 I ref
8.9341 0.2663 5.6143 2.0938 1.2969 1.0000 0.17966 0.03393 2.18592
tr = k
R I I ref 1
2
8 9 10 11
Normally Inverse Short Time Inverse Long Time Inverse RI-Type Inverse
9.00 0.50 15.75
t =k
1 0.339 0.236 I I ref
12
RXIDG-Type Inverse
I t = k 5.8 1.35 ln I ref
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-42
IEC 255-3, St andard Inverse 1000 1000
IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
100 k=10 10
100
10 k=1
k=10
t/s
1
t/s
1 k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0.01
I/Iref
S8Z50K1A
I/Iref
S8Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse 1000 1000
IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse
100
100
k=10
10
10 k=10
k=1
t/s
t/s
1 k=0.1 k=0.05
OP
1 k=1 0.1 k=0.1 0.01 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0.1
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
S8Z50K3A
I/Iref
S8Z50K4A
P1784ENa
Figure 30:
Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-43
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse 1000

1000
IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
100
100
10
k=10
10
t/s
1 k=1
t/s
1
k=10
k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01
I/Iref
S8Z50K5C
I/Iref
S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse 1000
100
10
t/s
1
k=10
OP
0.1
k=1
0.01
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K7C
P1785ENa
Figure 31:
Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-44
ANSI, Normally Inverse 1000

1000
ANSI, Short Time Inverse
100
100
10
10
t/s
1
k=10
t/s
1 k=10
0.1
k=1
0.1 k=1 k=0.1 k=0.05
0.01
k=0.1 k=0.05 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K8C
I/Iref
S8Z50K9C
ANSI, Long Time Inverse 1000
100 k=10 10
OP
t/s
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50KAC
P1786ENa
Figure 32:
Tripping characteristics per ANSI
RI-Type Inverse 1000 1000
RXIDG-Type Inverse
100 k=10 10
100 k=10 10 k=1
t/s
1
t/s
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1 k=0.05
k=0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
0.01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
S8Z50KBA
I/Iref
S8Z50KCA
P1787ENa
Figure 33:
Tripping characteristics for RI and RXIDG type inverse
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-45
1.4.3
Phase current stage The three phase currents are monitored by the P63x to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic threshold is active for the set hold time of the dynamic settings (see Activation of Dynamic Settings); the normal threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase. The P63x determines the highest of the three phase currents for further processing. As a function of this current and of the set characteristic, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current. The phase current stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
Iref,Ph SGx Dynam. Setts. Active Iref,Ph dynamic SGx
OP
Starting Iref,Ph>
Phase Charac SGx Kt Time Dial/ SGx
Phase Charac SGx
TMS
Min. Trip t. Ph SGx Hold Time Ph SGx Release Ph Definite Time SGx SGx Release Ph
Block. tIref,Ph> EXT
tIref,Ph> Elapsed Hold Time Ph running Memory Ph Clear
Iref,Ph SGx
Iref,Ph dynamic SGx
Phase Charac SGx
Kt Time Dial/TMS SGx
Min. Trip t. Ph SGx
Hold Time Ph SGx SGx
Release Ph
P1788ENa
Figure 34:
Phase current stage
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-46
1.4.4
Negative sequence current stage The P63x calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase currents based on the formulas shown below. The phase sequence setting is taken into account. A-B-C (standard phase rotation):
A-C-B (reverse phase rotation):

a = e j120 a 2 = e j240
OP
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time of the dynamic settings (see Activation of Dynamic Settings); the normal thresholds are active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded. As a function of the negative-sequence current and of the set characteristic, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Moreover, a minimum trip time can be set. The trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current. The negative-sequence stage of the IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-47
Iref,I2 Dynam. Setts. Active SGx Iref,I2 dynamic SGx
Starting Iref,I2> Phase Rotation
I2 SGx
I2 Charac I2 Charac Kt Time Dial/ SGx SGx
TMS
Release I2
SGx
Min. Trip t. I2 SGx Hold Time
Definite Time
I2 SGx Release I2 SGx
OP
Block. tIref,I2> EXT
tIref,I2> Elapsed Hold Time I2 Runn. Memory I2 Gen. Starting Mode SGx I2 Clear Trip Sig. tIref,I2
I2/Iref,I2
Iref,I2 SGx
Iref,I2 dynamic SGx
I2 Charac SGx
Min. Trip t. I2 SGx
Hold Time I2 SGx SGx
Release I2
Gen. Starting Mode SGx
P1789ENa
Figure 35:
Negative sequence current stage
1.4.5
Residual current stage The residual current is monitored by the P63x to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic threshold is active for the set hold time of the dynamic settings (see Activation of Dynamic Settings); the normal threshold is active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if the residual current exceeds a value of 1.05 times the set reference current. As a function of the set characteristic and of the residual current, the P63x will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the residual current. The inverse-time stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. Furthermore, the inverse-time stage can, depending on the setting, be blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-48
Block Tim. St. IN SGx
Definite Time
Iref,N Dynam. Setts. Active SGx Iref,N dynamic SGx
N Charac SGx Kt Time Dial/ SGx Min. Trip SGx Hold Time SGx Release N SGx N Charac SGx
TMS
OP
Release N Definite Time SGx
t. N
Gen. Starting Mode SGx I2 Setting SG 1 SG 2 SG 3 SG 4 Setting SG SG SG SG 1 2 3 4 Block Tim. St. IN SGx Iref,N SGx Iref,N dynamic SGx N Charac SGx
t. N
Min. Trip SGx
Hold Time SGx
SGx
Release N
Gen. Starting Mode SGx
P1790ENa
Figure 36:
Residual current stage
1.4.6
Holding time The setting for the holding time defines the period for the IDMT starting time to be stored after the starting has dropped out. If the starting time returns while the hold time elapses, the new starting time is added to the stored time. If the sum of the starting times reaches the tripping time determined by the P63x then the appropriate message is issued. If the starting time does not return while the hold time elapses then the memory storing the sum of the starting times will, in accordance with the setting, be cleared either without delay or according to the set characteristic. The phase current stage serves as an example to illustrate the effect of the holding time in Figure 37.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-49
Starting Iref,Ph>
Hold Time Ph Running
Instantaneous
tIref,Ph> Elapsed
Starting Iref,Ph>
Hold Time Ph Running
Instantaneous
OP
tIref,Ph> Elapsed
Ph
Hold Time SGx
P1791ENa
Figure 37:
Example demonstrating the effect of holding time on the phase current stage
1.4.7
General starting If 1.05 times the set reference current is exceeded in one phase, a general starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of the negative-sequence and residual current stage should be taken into account in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-50
Figure 38:
General starting
1.4.8
Counters of the IDMT protection function The number of general startings is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
OP
Figure 39: 1.5
Counters of the IDMT protection function
Thermal overload protection (THRM)
Function THRM1 is designed for the thermal overload protection of transformers. This function is available in all devices of the P63x product family (P631, P632, P633 and P634). A second function with identical setting options (THRM2) is implemented in the P633 and P634. For each of these two functions, the protected transformer end, the measuring input for temperature acquisition and the tripping characteristics can be selected. The selection options for the protected transformer end comprise ends a and b (for the P631 and P632), ends a, b, and c (for the P633) or ends a, b, c and d (for the P634), respectively. For the P633 and P634 there is the further option of selecting the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two user-selected transformer ends (see Figure 40).
Device P631 P632 P633 P634
Thermal overload protection functions Protected transformer end
THRM1 End a or b
THRM1 End a or b
THRM1, THRM2 End a, b or c, or the virtual end
THRM1, THRM2 End a, b, c or d, or the virtual end
With the P633 or P634, the THRM2 function can be assigned to a weaker transformer end or to a combination of two weaker transformer ends (by assigning the virtual end) with an appropriate choice of tripping characteristics for function THRM2.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-51
THRM1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the thermal overload protection functions; function group THRM2 is equivalent.
Select CT Input
OP
P1794ENa
Figure 40:
Selection of measured variables for thermal overload protection
1.5.1
Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection Thermal overload protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
Figure 41:
Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-52
P1846ENa
Figure 42:
Thermal overload protection ready
1.5.2
Tripping characteristics The maximum phase current IPh,max.y of the selected transformer end serves to track a first-order thermal image according to IEC 255-8. The following parameters govern the tripping time: The set thermal time constant () of the protected object THRM1: Tim.const 1(heat)SGx The set tripping level trip set at THRM1: trip SGx The accumulated thermal load P (the level of pre-heating) The updated measured coolant temperature c for the protected object The maximum permissible coolant temperature c,max set at THRM1: Max perm cool tmpSGx The maximum permissible object temperature max set at THRM1: Max perm obj tmp.SGx
OP
The object temperature is calculated from the current IPh,max.y and can be displayed at THRM1: Object Temperat., TH1. The coolant temperature is either measured via the PT 100 input or via the 20 mA input or a default temperature value is used instead. This choice is governed by the setting at THRM1: Select CT Ambient SGx. The menu point for the display of the resulting coolant temperature is THRM1: Coolant Temp. TH1. The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
I I P ref c c,max trip 1 max c,max
2
t = ln
I I ref
Figure 43 shows the tripping characteristics for P = 0 % and with identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and the maximum permissible object temperature. The setting for the operating mode selects an absolute or relative replica. If the setting is for Absolute Replica, the P63x will operate with a fixed trip threshold trip of 100 %.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-53
OP
Figure 43:
Tripping characteristic of thermal overload protection
1.5.3
Coolant temperature acquisition To permit coolant temperature acquisition, the analog I/O module Y must be fitted. If this module is not available in the P63x then the setting THRM1: Coolant temp. SGx is used in the calculation of the tripping time. The setting THRM1: Blk for CTA Fail SGx defines whether the thermal overload protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant temperature acquisition. Typically, ambient temperature, or top-oil temperature is termed as the "coolant".
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-54
OP
Figure 44: Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition
1.5.4
Warning A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the set warning level THRM1: Alarm SGx{1><1}. Moreover, a pre-trip warning time can be defined. The time difference between the warning time and the trip time is set at THRM1: Alarm pre-trip SGx. The time remaining until the thermal overload protection function THRM1 will reach the tripping threshold can be displayed at OL_DA: Pre-trip t. left THRM1. If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the set time constant THRM1: Tim.const 2(cool)SGx). The thermal replica may be reset either from the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is effective even when the thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-55
Iref Rating SGx Start Fact.OL_RC SGx
Tim. Const 1 (heat)SGx Tim. Const 2 (cool)SGx
SGx
SGx
CT Amb SGx T> Alarm Reset, % SGx T> Trip Reset, % SGx Trip Hysteresis SGx CHECK Pre-Trip Alarm SGx Alarm
OP
Iref Rating SGx
Start Fact.OL_RC SGx
Tim. Const 1 (heat)SGx
Tim. Const 2 (cool)SGx
SGx
SGx CT Amb SGx
T> Alarm Reset, % SGx
T> Trip Reset, % SGx
Trip Hysteresis SGx
Pre-Trip Alarm SGx
P1847ENa
Figure 45:
Thermal overload protection
Figure 46:
Thermal replica reset
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-56 1.6 Under/overvoltage protection (V<>)
The time-voltage protection function is not available with the P631. The two-stage voltage-time protection function of the P63x evaluates the fundamental of the phase voltages. 1.6.1 Enabling or disabling V<> protection V<> protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group. V<> protection is ready when it is enabled and measuring circuit monitoring has not detected a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
Enable SGx
OP
Enable SGx
P1799ENa
Figure 47:
Enabling or disabling V<> protection
1.6.2
Voltage monitoring The P63x checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs. If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again. Furthermore, voltage-time protection provides a window function for each timer stage. The windows are defined by the setting V<>: Vmin> SGx as lower threshold for both timer stages and by the set operate value V< or V<< of the relevant timer stage and setting group as upper threshold. With an appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-57
Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx V> SGx
tV> SGx
Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx
tV>> SGx V>> SGx
Setting SG 1 SG 2 SG 3 SG 4
V> SGx SGx
tV> SGx
V>> SGx
tV>>
Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx
OP
P1800ENa
Figure 48:
Overvoltage monitoring
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-58
Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx SGx
V< SGx
tV<
tV<< SGx
V<< SGx
OP
Vmin> SGx
tTransient SGx
V< SGx SGx
tV< SGx
Vmin>
V<< SGx SGx
tV<< SGx
tTransient
Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx
P1801ENa
Figure 49: 1.7
Undervoltage monitoring
Frequency potection (f<>)
The over/underfrequency protection function is not available with the P631. The P63x checks the voltage to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero crossings of the voltage. The over/underfrequency protection function has four stages. The first stage will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of over/underfrequency protection. 1.7.1 Enabling or disabling frequency protection Over/underfrequency protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-59
Enable SGx
Enable SGx
P1802ENa
Figure 50:
Enabling or disabling frequency protection
1.7.2
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time Over/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of adequate magnitude. Over/underfrequency protection will be blocked immediately if the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage. In order to avoid frequency stages operating as a consequence of brief frequency fluctuations or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions need to be satisfied for the duration of the set evaluation time for a signal to be issued.
OP
P1803ENa
Figure 51:
Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-60
1.7.3
Operating modes of frequency protection For each stage of the over/underfrequency protection function, the user can select between the following operating modes: Frequency monitoring Frequency monitoring combined with instantaneous frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt) Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t)
1.7.4
Frequency monitoring Depending on the setting, the P63x checks the frequency to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks whether the frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set, the P63x checks whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
1.7.5
Frequency monitoring with instantaneous rate of change (df/dt) monitoring In this operating mode of the over/underfrequency protection function, the frequency is additionally monitored for attaining the set frequency gradient (as well as for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
OP
1.7.6
Frequency monitoring with average rate of change (f/t) monitoring The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and may vary in time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems. In this operating mode, frequency monitoring must be set to underfrequency monitoring. Monitoring of the mean value of the frequency gradient starts concurrently with underfrequency pick-up. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within the set time t then the f/t monitoring function operates without delay and generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring function then the f/t monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-61
P1804ENa
OP
Figure 52:
Operation of frequency monitoring with average rate of change (f/t) monitoring
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-62
Oper. mode f1 SGx
f1 SGx
Frequency fn
tf1 SGx
df1/dt SGx
OP
CHECK Delta f1 SGx Delta t1 SGx
Oper. mode f1 SGx SGx
f1 SGx
df1/dt SGx
Delta f1 SGx
Delta t1 SGx
tf1
P1805ENa
Figure 53: 1.8
First stage of the frequency protection function
Overfluxing protection (V/f)
The overfluxing protection function detects an inadmissibly high flux level in the iron core of transformers as caused by a voltage increase and/or a frequency decrease. 1.8.1 Enabling or disabling overfluxing protection The overfluxing protection function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-63
Figure 54:
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing protection function
1.8.2
Conditioning the measured variable Overfluxing protection evaluates the ratio V/f of voltage to frequency referred to nominal values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the iron core of a transformer. The overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless the voltage and frequency are within the limits for admissible values.
OP
P1849ENa
Figure 55:
Conditioning the measured variable
1.8.3
Fixed-time warning stage The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, a timer stage is triggered. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-64
Figure 56:
Warning stage
OP
1.8.4
Fixed-time tripping stage The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, a timer stage is triggered. Once this stage has elapsed, a signal is issued.
Figure 57:
Fixed-time tripping stage
1.8.5
Variable-time tripping stage The overfluxing value V/f is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set threshold. If the overfluxing value is found to exceed the threshold, the P63x determines the tripping time as a function of the overfluxing value and the set characteristic.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-65
The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing values and associated tripping time values. Intermediate values are obtained by interpolation. The setting of the characteristic is checked for plausibility - it must have a continuous falling profile, with no rising points. For values of V/f > 1.6, the tripping time is limited to the value set for V/f = 1.6. Figure 58 shows the characteristic as calculated with the P63x default values.
100
t/s 10
OP
1
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
1.50 V/f
1.60
1.70
1.80
1.90
2.00
P1852ENa
Figure 58:
Tripping characteristic for default settings
After a start, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. If the starting drops out, the buffer memory will be discharged. The discharge gradient is determined by the set cooling time. If there is another starting, the buffer memory will be recharged. If the accumulated starting time reaches the tripping time determined by the P63x then the trip signal is issued. Figure 59 shows the buffer content during an interrupted starting. In case A, the tripping time determined by the P63x is not reached by the accumulated starting time. In case B, on the other hand, a trip signal results.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-66
OP
SGx
P1853ENa
Figure 59:
Change of buffer content during an interrupted starting
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-67
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
OP
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
Setting SG 1 SG 2 SG 3 SG 4 Setting SG SG SG SG 1 2 3 4
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
SGx
P1854ENa
Figure 60:
Variable-time tripping stage
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-68
P1855ENa
Figure 61: 1.9
Resetting of the V/f replica
Broken conductor detection (BC_)
The broken conductor detection function of the P63x can detect faults in the primary conductors. The broken conductor detection functions BC_1, BC_2, BC_3 and BC_4 are permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored by the P63x. Broken Conductor 1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the BC_x protection functions. Function groups BC_2 to BC_4 are equivalent.
OP
1.9.1
Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection The broken conductor detection function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each setting group.
Figure 62:
Enabling or disabling broken conductor detection
1.9.2
Broken conductor detection The ratio of negative to positive-sequence current is used as the criterion for broken conductor detection. The broken conductor detection function is triggered if the set ratio I2/I1 is exceeded and either the negative or the positive-sequence current exceeds 0.02 In. After the set operate delay period has elapsed, a warning signal is issued.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-69
BC_1 : Blocking EXT [ 036 213] BC_1 : Enabled [ 036 194] MAIN: Phase sequence [ 010 049]
IA,a IB,a IC,a
>1
2
> 0, 02 Inom
> 0, 02 Inom c
BC_1 : 2/ [ * ]
> SGx
BC_1: Operate delay SGx [ * ]
5s
2 1
BC_1 : CT Fail Alarm [ 036 198]
* Setting
SG 1 SG 2 SG 3 SG 4
BC_1 : 2/ SGx 081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042
BC_1 : Operate delay SGx 081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046
CHECK : CT Fail Alarm [ 091 026]
BC_1 : Starting [ 036 212]
P1857ENa
Figure 63:
Broken conductor detection for end a
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-70
2.
OPERATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following section details the operation of the non-protection functions of the P63x.
2.1
Current transformer supervision (CTS)
A new current transformer supervision method has been implemented, which is able to prevent the differential protection from false tripping in case of a failure in the secondary circuit of the CT. Note: CTS function requires the new processor coprocessor. This is an order option. board with DSP
2.1.1
Enabling or disabling CTS The CT supervision can be disabled or enabled separately for each setting group.
CTS : General enable USER [ 031 085 ]
0 1 0 : No 1 : Yes & CTS : Enabled [ 036 080]
OP
CTS : Enable SGx [ * ]
0 1 0 : No 1 : Yes y 1 2 3 4
GROUP : SG y active 036 090 036 091 036 092 036 093
* Setting SG 1 SG 2 SG 3 SG 4
CTS : Enable SGx 001 118 001 119 001 120 001 121
GROUP : SG y active [ * ]
P1858ENa
Figure 64:
Enabling or disabling CTS
2.1.2
CTS blocked CT supervision will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies: The protection is disabled (off) The CTS function is not enabled An external blocking signal is present The general trip signal is present Inrush stabilization or overfluxing restraint have operated
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-71
Figure 65:
CTS blocking
2.1.3
Operating conditions CTS monitors the positive and negative sequence currents of all ends (2 4, depending on the device type). A faulty CT is determined if the following conditions are present at the same time: The positive sequence current in at least two ends exceeds the set release threshold I1>. This also means that CTS can only operate if minimum load current of the protected object is present On exactly one end a high set ratio of negative to positive sequence current I2/I1>> is exceeded On all other ends the ratio of negative to positive sequence current is less than a low set value I2/I1> or no significant current is present (i.e. positive sequence current is below the release threshold I1>)
OP
Under this condition a fault in the CT secondaries of the end with high negative sequence current is present. Because of evaluating negative sequence currents only unsymmetrical CT failures can be determined. In practice this is not a significant problem as the probability of symmetrical three-phase failures is very low.
Figure 66:
Current evaluation per end (y = a,b,c,d)
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-72
OP
Figure 67:
CTS operating condition
2.1.4
Signaling and indication CT failure condition signaling is provided with overall signals as well as with detail signals per end. Signaling can be delayed by a settable delay timer to prevent signaling under transient system conditions. The signals may be latched once the failure condition has been present for a set minimum time, e.g. to obtain a stable signaling and permanently higher restraint of differential protection in case of intermittent failures. Signals for each end can be used to selectively block the restricted earth fault (REF) protection associated to that end. Blocking or restraining of differential protection functions is based on the instantaneous signals: As soon as a CTS condition is detected (036.203 CTS: Idiff>(CTS) Active is present), the function will raise the low set threshold of the differential protection to the DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) setting:
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-73
Figure 68:
Modification of differential characteristic during CTS condition
The setting of this value determines the operating mode of the CTS: Only signaling: DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) SGx = DIFF: Idiff> SGx. Differential protection remains unrestricted. Naturally the risk of unwanted tripping under load current is present. Restricted operation: DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) SGx is set to exceed the maximum load current. This provides secure operation of differential protection even during CT failure. Differential protection will not falsely trip under any load condition, but remains operational for any internal short-circuit with fault current above the maximum load current. Blocking: DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) SGx = DIFF: Idiff>> SGx. Differential protection is blocked during CT failure for all currents under normal operation condition (including inrush currents).
OP
With the signals CTS: Alarm end y, available for each end y, the restricted earth fault protection of this end can be blocked, if setting is (REF_n: CTS effective = Yes, where REF_n is associated to end y). 2.1.5 Resetting Latched CTS signals can be reset via command from the HMI or any communication interface or via an opto-input signal. They are also reset by executing the general reset command.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-74
OP
Figure 69:
Overall signaling of CTS
Figure 70: 2.2
Per end signaling of CTS
DC and temperature monitoring (LIMIT)
The limit value monitoring function LIMIT supervises the measured variables subject to data acquisition in the analog measured data input. 2.2.1 Enabling or disabling DC and temperature monitoring The limit value monitoring function LIMIT can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. 2.2.2 Monitoring the linearized DC values The direct current that is linearized by analog measured data input is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-75
OP
Figure 71:
Monitoring the linearized DC values
2.2.3
Monitoring the measured temperature value The temperature that is measured by the P63x using a resistance thermometer is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-76
RTDmA:
OP
P1807ENa
Figure 72: 2.3
Monitoring the measured temperature value
Phase current monitoring (LIM_)
Each of the limit value monitoring functions LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3 is designed for the monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a user-selected transformer end. 2.3.1 Enabling or disabling phase current monitoring The limit value monitoring functions LIM_n can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. 2.3.2 Monitoring minimum and maximum phase currents In the P631 and P632, two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are implemented and can be assigned to the two transformer ends. In the P633 and the P634, three limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1, LIM_2 and LIM_3) are implemented. These can each be assigned to one of the transformer ends (a, b or c for the P633; a, b, c or d for the P634) or to the virtual transformer end formed by current summation over two user-selected transformer ends. For each limit value monitoring function, a setting is provided for this assignment by the user. The function will then monitor the minimum and maximum phase currents for the selection. If a maximum phase current exceeds the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase current falls below the relevant set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed. LIM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the LIM_n protection functions in the following figures.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-77
OP
Figure 73: Selection of the measured variables for phase current monitoring (LIM_1 shown)
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-78
OP
P1809ENa
Figure 74:
Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current for the selected transformer end
2.4
Programmable logic (LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within a framework of Boolean equations. Binary signals in the P63x can be linked by logical OR or AND operations or by additional NOT operations by setting LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. N, where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR. A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to the signals generated by the P63x, initial conditions for governing the equations can be set from the local control panel, the binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces. Intervention in the logical operations through the binary signal inputs can occur in different ways. The binary input signals LOGIC: Input n EXT (n = 1 to 40) have an updating function, whereas the input signals LOGIC: Set n EXT (n = 1 to 8) are stored. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs that are configured for LOGIC: Set n EXT if the corresponding reset input (LOGIC: Reset n EXT) has also been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of 1), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-79
Fct. U xxx Assign
P1810ENa
OP
Figure 75:
Control of logic operations via settings or stored input signals
The signal LOGIC: Trigger n is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms pulse to be issued.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-80
INPUT 40 034 109
OP
PickUp & Reset Delay Pulse Delayed PickUp PickUp & Rst. Retrig Delayed Pulse Retrig Minimum Dwell
P1811ENa
Figure 76:
Setting options for programmable logic (output 1 shown)
The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another higher-order equation, and this makes it possible to have a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage that has two timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In the Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures 77 to 81 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating modes.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-81
Figure 77:
Operating mode 1: pickup & reset delay
OP
Figure 78:
Operating mode 2: pulse delayed pickup
P1814ENa
Figure 79:
Operating mode 3: pickup & rst.retrig
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-82
Figure 80:
Operating mode 4: delayed pulse retrig
OP
P1816ENa
Figure 81:
Operating mode 5: minimum dwell
Through appropriate configuration it is possible to assign the function of a binary input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were triggered.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-83
Fct. U xxx Assign
OP
Fct. U xxx Assign
P1817ENa
Figure 82: 2.5
Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean logic equations
Local control panel (HMI)
The P63x offers Measured Value Panels which display the measured values relevant at a given time. During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel, provided that measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-84
2.5.1
Operation panel The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. From the measured operating data, values may be selected via an 'm out of n' setting for display on the Operation Panel. If more measured values are selected for display than the HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at HMI: Panel Hold-Time or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
OP
Figure 83:
Operation panel
2.5.2
Fault panel The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset. The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel by setting an m out of n setting. If more measured values are selected for display than the HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at HMI: Panel Hold-Time or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-85
Figure 84:
Fault panel
2.5.3
Overload panel The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel. The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel by setting an m out of n setting. If more measured values are selected for display than the HMI display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at HMI: Panel Hold-Time or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
OP
Figure 85: 2.6
Overload panel
Local front port communication (PC)
Local front port communication between the device P63x and a PC is through the PC EIA(RS)232 interface. In order for data transfer between the P63x and the PC to function, several settings must be made in the P63x. The S&R-103 Operating Program within MiCOM S1 is available as an accessory for P63x control.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-86
OP
Figure 86: 2.7
PC interface settings
Rear port serial communication (COMM1)
Depending on the design version of communication module A (see Technical Data), several interface protocols are available. The protocol as per IEC 60870-5-103 is supported for all versions. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P63x: IEC 60870-5-103, Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW/ZVEI Recommendation, Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility level 2,February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring IEC 870-5-101, Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission protocols Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,first edition 1995-11 ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA Energietechnik GmbH MODBUS DNP3.0 Courier (via EIA(RS)485, not K-Bus)
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x. The communication interface can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-87
OP
P1866ENa
Figure 87:
Selecting the serial protocol
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-88
OP
Figure 88:
Settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-89
OP
P1868ENa
Figure 89:
Settings for the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-90
OP
Figure 90:
Settings for the ILS_C protocol
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-91
P1870ENa
OP
Figure 91:
Settings for the MODBUS protocol
Figure 92:
Settings for the DNP3.0 protocol
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-92
OP
Figure 93: Settings for the Courier protocol
2.7.1
Checking spontaneous signaling For interface protocols per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C, there is the option of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal to the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via the local control panel.
Figure 94:
Checking spontaneous signaling
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 2.8 2nd rear port serial communication (COMM2)
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-93
"Logical" communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol. In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P63x.
OP
P1874ENa
Figure 95:
Settings for COMM2
2.8.1
Checking spontaneous signaling There is the option of selecting a signal for testing purposes. This transmission of this signal to the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via the local control panel.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-94
OP
Figure 96: 2.9 Checking spontaneous signaling IRIG-B time synchronization (IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of the P63x can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at the P63x, the P63x calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY). 2.9.1 Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. 2.9.2 Ready to synchronize If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P63x checks the received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P63x. If the P63x does not receive a correct signal after an extended delay, synchronization will no longer be ready.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-95
Figure 97: 2.10
Enabling or disabling IRIG-B time synchronization
Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs (INP)
The P63x has optical coupler inputs for the processing of binary signals from the substation. The functions that will be activated by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The trigger signal must persist for at least 30 ms in order to be recognized by the P63x. 2.10.1 Configuration of the opto inputs To each binary signal input, a function can be assigned by configuration. The same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thereby, a function can be activated from several control points with differing signal voltages. In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked EXT in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration. 2.10.2 Operating mode of the opto inputs For each binary signal input, the operating mode can be defined by the user. The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or the absence (active low mode) of a voltage should be interpreted as the logic 1 signal. The display of the state of a binary signal input - low or high - is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal input.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-96
Figure 98:
Configuration and operating mode of the opto inputs
OP
2.11
Temperature and DC monitoring inputs (RTDmA)
The P63x has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed to the P63x through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for connection of a resistance thermometer. The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDClin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. 2.11.1 Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs The measured data input function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
P1823ENa
Figure 99:
Enabling or disabling the temperature and DC monitoring inputs
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-97
2.11.2
Direct current inputs External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured - the temperature, for example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged - provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, it may be necessary for certain applications to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range that have a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair RTDmA: IDC x and RTDmA: IDClin x, the user specifies which input current (IDC) will correspond to the current that is monitored by the limit value monitoring function (IDC,lin). The points determined in this way, which are called interpolation points, are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDClin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (Figure 100). Up to 20 interpolation points are available for implementing a complex characteristic. When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising curve sense is allowed, no peaks. If the setting differs, the signal CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC will be generated.
OP
Figure 100:
Example of the conversion of a 4-10mA input current to 0-20mA monitored current, IDC,lin
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-98

IDClin/IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points IDClin20

0.7
0.6
IDClin4
0.5
0.4
IDClin3 IDClin2 IDClin1
0.3
0.2
0.1
OP
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
IDC/IDC,nom
IDC1 Enable IDC p.u.
IDC2
IDC3
IDC4
IDC20
P1825ENa
Figure 101:
Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a dotted line)
2.11.3
Zero suppression Zero suppression is defined by setting RTDmA: Enable IDC p.u. If the direct current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the current IDClin will be displayed as having a value of 0.
2.11.4
Open circuit and overload monitoring The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below the set threshold, the signal RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA inp. is issued. The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading. If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input is issued.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-99
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
OP
CHECK: RTDmA: CHECK:
RTDmA: CHECK:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
RTDmA:
P1826ENa
Figure 102:
Analog DC input
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and are available for further processing by protection functions.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-100
Figure 103:
Scaling of the linearized measured value
2.11.5
Input for connection of a RTD This input is designed for connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in IEC 751. If the PT 100 is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required. If there is an open measuring circuit due to wire breakage, the signal RTDmA: PT100 Faulty is generated.
OP
Figure 104: 2.12
Temperature measurement using a RTD
Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays (OUTP)
The P63x has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signals to be issued are defined by configuration. 2.12.1 Configuration of the output relays One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be assigned to several output relays by configuration. 2.12.2 Operating mode of the output relays The user can set an operating mode for each output relay. The operating mode determines whether the output relay will operate in a Follower mode or Inverted mode and whether it will operate in latching mode. Depending on the I/O module under consideration, the output relays have either make contacts, changeover contacts or both (see the Terminal Connection Diagrams in the Installation - IN section). For relays with make contacts, the Follower mode corresponds to normally-open operation. The Inverted mode means that the polarity of the driving signal is
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-101
inverted, such that a logic "0" maintains the relay normally-closed. For relays with changeover contacts, these more common descriptions are not applicable. Latching is disabled manually from the local control panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input either at the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new system disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected. 2.12.3 Blocking the output relays The P63x offers the option of blocking all output relays from the local control panel or by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs. In these cases, the relays are treated in keeping with their set operating mode. Relays in Inverted mode are triggered, those in Follower mode are not. This does not apply to relays with the signals CHECK: Alarm (Relay) or MAIN: Blocked/Faulty assigned to them. Thereby the blocking is signaled correctly. (The signal MAIN: Blocked/Faulty is coupled to the activation of the LED labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE'.) If, on the other hand, the self-monitoring function detects a serious hardware fault (see Troubleshooting - TS for signals leading to protection blocking), all output relays are reset irrespective of the set operating mode or signal assignment.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-102
USER Outp rel Block
CHECK:
Follower Follower Latching Follower Rst on Flt Follower Rst onStart Inverted
OP
Inverted Latching
OSCIL:
OSCIL:
P1828ENa
Figure 105:
Configuration, operating mode and blocking of the output relays
2.12.4
Testing the output relays For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via the local control panel. Triggering persists while the set hold time is running.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-103
P1829ENa
Figure 106: 2.13
Testing the output relays
Analog output channel (mA_OP)
OP
Output of the measured fault or earth fault data provided by the P63x can be in BCD-coded form through output relays or in analog form as direct current. Output as direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog I/O module Y. BCD-coded output, however, is possible, regardless of whether the device is equipped with analog I/O module Y or not. 2.13.1 Enabling or disabling the analog output channel function The measured data output function can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
P1830ENa
Figure 107:
Enabling or disabling the analog output channel
2.13.2
Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input Measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the function mA_OP: Outp. Enabled EXT has been configured. If the function mA_OP: Outp. Enabled EXT has not been configured for a binary signal input, then measured data output is always enabled.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-104
Figure 108:
Enabling the analog output channel via an opto input
2.13.3
Resetting the analog output channel function BCD-coded or analog output of measured data is terminated while the hold time elapses if one of the following conditions is met: The mA_OP function is reset from the local control panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input There is a general reset The LED indicators have been reset
OP
Figure 109:
Resetting the analog output channel function
2.13.4
BCD-coded measured data output The user can select a measured value for output in BCD-coded form through output relays. The selected measured value is output in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set hold time (mA_OP: Hold Time Output BCD. If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measured value.
2.13.5
Output of measured event values If the measured event value is updated while the hold time is elapsing, the measured value output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This means that the updated value is immediately output.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-105
2.13.6
Output of measured operating values The measured operating value is output for the duration of the hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
2.13.7
Scaling The resolution for measured data output, is defined by setting the scaling factor. The scaling factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the maximum measured value to be output. If this should occur, however, or if the measured value is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for Overflow (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Mx,scal = Mx,max scaling factor
Where: : Scaled measured value Mx,max : Maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value Mx,scal
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-106
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
OP
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
P1833ENa
Figure 110:
BCD-coded measured data output
2.13.8
Analog measured data output Analog output of measured data is two-channel. The user can select two of the measured values available in the P63x for output in the form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value. The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time (mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-x). If the selected variable was not measured, then there is no output of a measured value.
2.13.9
Output of measured event values If the measured event value is updated while the hold time is elapsing, the measured value output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This means that the updated value is immediately output.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-107
2.13.10 Output of measured operating values The measured operating value is output for the duration of the hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset. 2.13.11 Configuration of output relays assigned to the output channels The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for mA_OP: Value A-x output, since otherwise the output channels remain short-circuited (see terminal connection diagrams). 2.13.12 Scaling The minimum and maximum values to be transmitted for the selected measured value and one additional value for the knee point must be scaled to the range limit value of the measured value. By setting the following parameters the user can obtain an analog output characteristic like the one shown in Figure 111. mA_OP: Scaled Min. val. A-x mA_OP: Scaled Knee val. A-x mA_OP: Scaled Max. val. A-x mA_OP: AnOut Min. val. A-x mA_OP: AnOut Knee point A-x mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-x
OP
The scaled values that need to be set can be calculated using the following formulas: Formulas Key to the Formulas:
Mx,RL
Example
: :
Range limit value of selected measured value Minimum value to be transmitted for selected measured value : Knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured value Maximum value to be transmitted for selected measured value : : : Scaled minimum value Scaled knee point value Scaled maximum value
M x,min M x,RL
Mx,min
Let voltage V12 be selected as the measured value to be transmitted. Let the measuring range be 0 to 1.5 Vn. When Vn = 100 V, the range limit value in the assumed example is 150 V. Range to be transmitted: 0.02 to 1 Vn = 2 to 100 V Knee point: 0.1 Vn = 10 V
Mx,knee
M x,max
Mx,scal,min
M x,scal,knee
M x,scal,max
M x,scal,min =
M x,scal,min =
2V = 0.013 150 V 10 V = 0.067 150 V
M x,scal,knee =
M x,knee M x,RL
M x,scal,knee =
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-108
Formulas
M x,scal,max = M x,max M x,RL
Example
M x,scal,max = 100 V = 0.67 150 V
By setting mA_OP: AnOut Min. val A-x, the user can specify the output current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at mA_OP: AnOut Max. val. A-x defines the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When making this setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising-rising, or falling-falling curve sense is allowed (no peaks or vee shapes). If the wrong setting is entered, the signal CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-x will be generated. Note: After this setting, the new characteristics will be checked and implemented after enabling at MAIN: Protection Enabled.
OP
Figure 111:
Example of a characteristic curve for analog output of measured data
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-109

mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP:
mA_OP: mA_OP: mA_OP:
mA_OP:
OP
CHECK: mA_OP: mA_OP:
mA_OP:
mA_OP:
P1878ENa
Figure 112:
Analog measured data output
2.13.13 Output of external measured data Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled for 0-100%, can be written to the following parameters of the P63x by way of the communications interface: mA_OP: Output Value 1 mA_OP: Output Value 2 mA_OP: Output Value 3
These "external" measured values are output by the P63x either in the form of BCD-coded data or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD-coded measured data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output function are configured accordingly.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-110 2.14 Configuration and operating mode of the LEDs (LED)
The P63x has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Five of the LED indicators are permanently assigned to functions. The other LED indicators are freely configurable. (However, LED indicator H4 has a default setting of MAIN: Gen Trip Signal and is labeled "Trip".). 2.14.1 Configuration of the LEDs To each of the freely configurable LED indicators, a binary signal can be assigned. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators by configuration. 2.14.2 Operating mode of the LEDs The user can set an operating mode for each LED indicator, with the exception of the first one, that determines whether the LED indicator operates in a following arrangement or inverted arrangement and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually from the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see Main Functions of the P63x), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected.
OP
Figure 113: 2.15
Configuration and operating mode of the LEDs
General functions of the P63x (MAIN)
2.15.1
Conditioning of the measured variables The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P63x. Furthermore, there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The measured variables are, electrically isolated, converted to normalized electronics levels. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing. Depending on the design version, the P63x has the following measuring inputs:
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-111
P631: Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for two ends of the transformer
P632: Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for two ends of the transformer Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see Figure 115 and 116), or for connection as high impedance REF One voltage input
P633 and P634: Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured variables for three (P633) or four (P634) ends of the transformer Current inputs for up to three neutral-point-to-earth connections (see Figure 114) or for looping into the earth connections of the phase current transformers, or for connection as high impedance REF One voltage input
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-112
OP
Figure 114:
Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing connection of the fourth CT set to the transformers of the star point earth connection
Note:
"Dot" convention for winding polarities shown. When using P1-P2, S1-S2 standard notation. Dot on CT primary signifies P1 terminal Dot on CT secondary signifies S1 terminal Dot on VT primary signifies AN, BN, CN, YN polarity Dot on VT secondary signifies an, bn, cn, yn polarity
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-113
OP
Figure 115:
Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual connection input to earth fault CT, Part 1 of 2
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-114
CT Orientation Iph, b
In Device, end b
CT Orientation IY, b
Reversed
OP
CT Orientation Iph, c In Device, end c
CT Orientation IY, c
Reversed
CT Orientation Iph, d
In Device, end d
Reversed
P1882ENa
Figure 116:
Connection of the analog inputs to the P63x, showing residual connection input to earth fault CT, Part 2 of 2
2.15.2
Selection of the residual current measurement For protection functions of the P632, P633 and P634 monitoring the residual current, the user can select whether the device is to use the current calculated from the three phase currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer. Moreover, the P633 and P634 offer the option of forming the sum of the phase currents or of the residual currents for two or three ends of the transformer.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-115
OP
Figure 117:
Evaluation of residual current
2.15.3
Phase reversal logic In pumped storage applications, it is common practice to swap two phases to facilitate the pumping operation. P63x transformer differential devices provide the possibilty to maintain correct operation of all protection functions even when the phase reversal switch is inside the protected zone. The processing is done right after A/D conversion, such that the link between physical transformer input and internal numerical signal will be swapped. The parameters are included in function group 'MAIN' because phase reversal affects not only the differential protection function (DIFF), but also the negative sequence elements of Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent protection functions (IDMTx, DTOCx) as well as Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) and Broken Conductor functions (BC_x). Using setting groups readily allows phase reversal to be activated via any control interface (HMI, PC, COMMx) or via binary inputs.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-116
OP
Figure 118:
Internal current summation
2.15.4
Operating data measurement The P63x has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and voltages measured by the P63x during normal power system operation; quantities derived from these measured values are also displayed. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the value not measured is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed: Phase currents of all three phases of all four ends of the transformer Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-117
Current IN calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents for each end of the transformer Current IY measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) Phase currents of all three phases of the virtual end of the transformer. The virtual end is formed by adding the corresponding currents of two transformer ends selected by the user at MAIN: Current Summation Maximum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer Minimum phase current of the virtual end of the transformer Current IN of the virtual end of the transformer Voltage Frequency Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer Angle between calculated IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a general starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring (CHECK) function detects a hardware fault. 2.15.5 Measured current values The measured values for the current are displayed both as quantities referred to the nominal current of the P63x and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal current of the transformers connected to the P63x needs to be set.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-118
Minimum Iph Measmt
Curr Iph, Max now, zpu Iph pu Thermal peakz Iph pu Thermal dem. z Current Imin,
z p.u. In CT. Prim., end z
In CT. Prim., end z
Time Const Iph Dem. Reset Iph, Max Demand
Iph, Max now, z prim Iph Therm Dem z prim Iph Therm pk z prim Current Imin, z prim
OP
Curr Iph, Max now, zpu
Iph, Max now, z prim In CT. Prim., end z Iph pu Thermal peakz Iph pu Thermal dem. z Iph Therm Dem z prim Iph Therm pk z prim Current Imin, z p.u. Current Imin, z prim
P1885ENa
Figure 119:
Measured operating data for phase currents, ends a to d
2.15.6
Delayed maximum phase current display (thermal ammeter) The P63x offers the option of delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase currents. The delayed maximum phase current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current IPh,max (see upper curve in Figure 120). At MAIN: Time Const Iph Dem. the user can set the time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase current IPh,max.
2.15.7
Stored maximum phase current display (thermal max. demand) The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Figure 120). At MAIN: Reset IPh,Max Demand the user can set
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-119
the stored maximum phase current to the actual value of the delayed maximum phase current (see lower curve in Figure 120).
Iph pu Thermal dem. z
Time Const Iph Dem.
Time Const Iph Dem.
Iph pu Thermal peakz
Time Const Iph Dem.
Time Const Iph Dem.
Iph pu Thermal peakz
OP
Time Const Iph Dem. Time Const Iph Dem.
Reset Iph, Max Demand
Curr Iph, Max now, zpu Iph pu Thermal peakz Iph pu Thermal dem. z
P1886ENa
Figure 120:
Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-120
OP
Figure 121:
Measured operating data for residual currents, ends a to c
Figure 122:
Measured operating data for residual current, end d (P634 only)
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-121
OP
Figure 123:
Measured operating data for the phase currents and the residual current for the virtual winding (formed by current summation, P633 and P634 only)
2.15.8
Measured voltage value The measured voltage value is displayed both as quantity referred to the nominal voltage of the P63x and as primary quantity. To allow a display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the transformer connected to the P63x needs to be set.
Minimum V Measmt
Vn VT. Sec.
Vn V.T. prim.
P1890ENa
Figure 124:
Measured voltage value
2.15.9
Frequency The P63x determines the frequency from the voltage. The voltage needs to exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vn in order for the frequency to be determined.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-122
Figure 125:
Frequency measurement
2.15.10 Angle determination The P63x determines the angle between the following currents if the associated currents exceed the lower threshold of 0.033 In: Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the transformer Angle between the calculated residual current and the current measured at the transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) for each end of the transformer
OP
Figure 126:
Determination of the angle between the phase currents
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-123
OP
Figure 127:
Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-124
OP
Figure 128:
Determination of the angle between the calculated residual current and the current measured at transformer - Tx4
2.15.11 Configuring and enabling the protection functions By including the relevant protection functions in the device configuration and canceling all others, the user creates an individual device appropriate to the application. Settings, signals and measured values of canceled protection functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be canceled. 2.15.12 Canceling a protection function The following conditions have to be met before a protection function can be canceled: The protection function must be disabled None of the functions of the protection function to be canceled may be assigned to a binary input None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or to an LED indicator
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Settings/Configuration branch of the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the device function to be disabled. If you wish to disable the LIMIT function group, for example, access the setting LIMIT: Limit Thresholds I<> and set its value to Disabled. Should you wish to re-include the function group in the device configuration, set the value to Enabled. The assignment of a setting, a signal or a measured value to a protection function is defined by a function group descriptor such as LIMIT.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-125
2.15.13 Disabling and enabling the protection function Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled via a function setting or via binary signal inputs. Protection can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT and MAIN: Enable Protect. EXT functions are both configured. When only one or neither of the two functions is configured, this is interpreted as Protection externally enabled. If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible, as for example when they both have a logic value of 1, then the last plausible state remains stored in memory. Note: If the protection device is disabled via the binary signal input configured to MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT there will be no MAIN: Blocked/Faulty signal.
OP
Figure 129:
Enabling or disabling protection
2.15.14 Activation of dynamic settings For several of the protection functions, it is possible to switch the duration of the set hold time to other settings, the "dynamic settings", through an appropriately configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, the switching is effective while the binary signal input is being triggered.
Figure 130:
Activation of dynamic settings
2.15.15 Multiple blocking Four multiple blockings may be defined via m out of n settings. Thereby the functions defined by the selection may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-126
OP
P1897ENa
Figure 131:
Multiple blocking
2.15.16 Blocked/faulty If the protective functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by a steady light from yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and also by a signal through the output relay configured for MAIN: Blocked/Faulty. In addition, the user can select the functions that will produce the MAIN: Blocked/Faulty signal by setting an m out of n setting.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-127
CHECK:
OUTP: USER Outp Rel Block [ 021 014 ]
P1898ENa
Figure 132:
Blocked/faulty signal
2.15.17 Starting signals and starting logic The trip signals of differential protection and restricted earth fault protection plus the general startings of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection are combined into one common general starting.
OP
Starting [ 041 106 ]
P1899ENa
Figure 133:
P63x general start signals
The starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Figure 134:
Counter of general start signals
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-128
Trip command The P63x has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected by setting an m out of n setting independently for each of the four trip commands. The minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for the signal are satisfied. Manual trip command A manual trip command may be issued via the local control panel or a signal input configured accordingly. It is not executed, however, unless the manual trip is included in the selection of possible functions to effect a trip. Latching of the trip commands For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate setting whether it will operate in latching mode. If the latching mode is selected, the trip command persists until it is reset from the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal. Blocking of the trip commands The trip commands may be blocked via the integrated local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. The blocking is effective for all four trip commands. The trip signals are not affected by the blocking. If the trip commands are blocked this is indicated by a steady light at yellow LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by an output relay configured to Blocked/Faulty.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-129
tDWELL Trip Cmd y
OP
tDWELL Trip Cmd y
P1901ENa
Figure 135:
Formation of the trip commands
The trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-130
P1902ENa
Figure 136:
Counter of the trip commands
OP
2.15.18 Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels Optionally, there are one or two communication channels available, depending on the design version of communication module A. The "logical" communication interfaces COMM1 and COMM2 can be assigned to these physical communication channels. If "logical" communication interface COMM1 is assigned to communication channel 2, then this means that the settings for "logical" communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for communication channel 1. Communication with the P63x via communication channel 2 is only possible when the PC interface is inactive. As soon as communication occurs through the PC interface, communication channel 2 is "dead". Channel 2 will then be re-enabled once the PC interface timeout has elapsed.
Figure 137:
Assignment of logical communication interfaces to physical communication channels
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-131
2.15.19 Time tag and clock synchronization The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the event memories are date-and time-tagged. For correct tagging, date and time need to be set at the P63x. The device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock to an external master clock: Time-synchronization command via communication interfaces (COMM1, COMM2/PC) IRIG-B signal (IRIGB) Minute impulse via binary input (MAIN)
Prior to -606, these interfaces were of equal priority, i.e. clock synchronization was done irrespective of the source. As long as all sources (communication master, IRIG-B and minute impulse signal sources) are at the same time, no conflicts have to be taken into account. But if the sources are at different times, unwanted step changes of the internal clock can occur. In some applications redundant time synchronization is used, e.g. to keep time synchronization via IRIG-B interface, if and while the SCADA communication is out of service. For such applications the device now provides settings for primary and backup sources for time synchronization. Clock synchronization then is done solely via the primary source as long as time synchronization messages (or minute pulses respectively) are received within the set time out. If the time out is set to blocked, then time synchronization is exclusively done through the primary source. During synchronization via back up source the primary source is continuously monitored to switch back immediately as soon as that source provides time synchronization messages again. Via an appropriately configured binary signal input, the time of different devices may be synchronized by means of a pulse. The P63x evaluates the rising edge. This is used to set the clock to the next full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), the last edge is evaluated.
OP
P1904ENa
Figure 138:
Date and time setting and clock synchronization
2.15.20 Multiple signaling of the broken conductor detection function The signals of the broken conductor detection function are grouped to form a multiple signal.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-132
Figure 139:
Signals of the broken conductor detection function
2.15.21 Resetting mechanisms Stored data such as event logs, fault values etc, can be cleared in a number of ways. The following mechanisms are available: Automatic resetting of the event signals indicated by LED indicators (provided that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the local control panel whenever a new event occurs Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data on the local control panel by pressing the Clear key located on the panel Selective resetting of a particular memory type (only the fault memory, for example) from the local control panel or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs General Reset
OP
In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control panel are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory. In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and power supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
Figure 140:
General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-133
2.15.22 Test mode If tests are run on the P63x, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be marked accordingly.
Figure 141: 2.16
Setting the test mode
Setting group selection (GROUP)
With the P63x, four independent setting groups may be pre-set. The user may switch between setting groups during operation without interrupting the protection functions. 2.16.1 Selecting the setting group The method of setting the active setting group may be selected via the setting GROUP: Control via USER or via the external signal GROUP: Control Via user EXT. Correspondingly, the setting group is selected either in accordance with the pre-set GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER or in accordance with external signals. The setting group actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the logic state signal GROUP: Actual Setting Group. 2.16.2 Selecting the setting group via opto inputs If the binary signal inputs are to be used for setting group selection, then the P63x first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for setting group selection. If this is not the case, then the setting group selected via the function parameter will be active. The P63x also checks to determine whether the signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous setting group selection. This is only true when just one binary signal input is set to a logic value of 1. If more than one signal input is set to a logic value of 1, then the setting group previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between setting groups (this is the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic value of 0), then the stored energy time is started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected setting group remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic value of 1, the associated setting group becomes active. If, after the stored energy time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic value of 1, the setting group selected via a function parameter becomes active. If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic value of 1 is present at any of the binary signal inputs selected for the setting group selection, then the setting group selected via a function parameter will become active once the stored energy time has elapsed. The previous setting group remains active while the stored energy timer stage is running. Setting group selection may also occur during a starting condition. When setting group selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account. Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally effective for all four setting groups.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-134
OP
Figure 142: 2.17
Setting group activation
Self testing and diagnostics (CHECK)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P63x ensure that internal faults are detected and do not lead to maloperations. 2.17.1 Tests during startup After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full operability of the P63x. If the P63x detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P63x can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-135
2.17.2
Cyclic tests After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory, the monitoring signal memory, along with the assigned date and time. The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail. The Maintenance - MT section, gives further instructions on battery replacement.
2.17.3
Signaling The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured CHECK: Alarm. The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
OP
Figure 143:
Monitoring signals
2.17.4
Device response The response of the P63x to monitoring signals takes one of the following forms depending on the signal. Signaling only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow. Selective blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface. Warm restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system restart, for example a fault in the hardware, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any startup, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-136
Cold restart
If a corrupted setting group is diagnosed in the checksum test during self-monitoring, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the protection device cannot identify which setting in the group is corrupt. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the value indicating setting loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory.
2.18 Operating data recording (OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a non-volatile ring memory is provided. The operationally relevant signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, earth faults, or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared. 2.18.1 Counter of signals relevant to system operation The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP
Figure 144:
Operating data recording and the counter of signals relevant to system operation
2.19
Monitoring signal recording (MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the monitoring signal memory. The memory depth allows for a maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the CHECK: Overflow MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the protection device are always entered in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an m out of n setting. If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry is indicated by a flashing light. The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not even cleared automatically if the corresponding test in a new test cycle has a negative result. The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local control panel.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-137
2.19.1
Counter of monitoring signals The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the MT_RC: No. Monit. Signals. counter.
Figure 145: 2.20
Monitoring signal recording and the counter of monitoring signals
Overload data acquisition (OL_DA)
In the event of an overload, the P63x determines the following measured overload data: Overload duration Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the thermal overload protection functions THRM1 and THRM2. For each of these two functions, the following values are determined: 2.20.1 Status of the thermal replica Load current Object temperature Coolant temperature Time remaining before trip Offset of the thermal replica
OP
Acquisition of the overload duration The overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_RC: Record in Progress signal.
Figure 146:
Overload duration
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-138
2.20.2
Acquisition of the measured overload data of thermal overload protection The measured overload data are derived from the measured operating data of the thermal overload protection function. They are stored at the end of the overload event.
OP
P1913ENa
Figure 147: 2.21
Measured overload data of thermal overload protection (THRM1 shown)
Overload recording (OL_RC)
2.21.1
Start of overload recording The following description is presented for the thermal overload protection function THRM1 but is equally relevant for THRM2. An overload exists, and therefore overload recording begins, if the signal THRM1: Starting k*IB> is issued.
2.21.2
Counting overload events Overload events are counted and identified by sequential number.
P1914ENa
Figure 148:
Counting overload events
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-139
2.21.3
Time tag The date that is assigned to each overload event by the internal clock is stored. An overload events individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to the overload events when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory at the local control panel or through the PC and ILSA interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload event) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
2.21.4
Overload logging Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_RC: Overl. Mem. Overflow will be entered as the last signal. In addition to the signals, the measured overload data are also entered in the overload memory. The overload recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.
OP
Figure 149:
Overload memory
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-140 2.22 Fault data acquisition (FT_DA)
When there is a fault in the power system, the P63x collects the following measured fault data: 2.22.1 Running time Fault duration Fault currents Differential current of all three measuring systems Second and fifth harmonic of the differential current Restraining current of all three measuring systems Differential currents of restricted earth fault protection Restraining currents of restricted earth fault protection
Running time and fault duration The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting signal that is generated within the P63x, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OSCIL: Record in Progress signal.
OP
OSCIL:
P1916ENa
Figure 150:
Running time and fault duration
2.22.2
Fault data acquisition time The P63x determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault. Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P63x. If, for example, the differential protection function detects a fault then the P63x determines the measured fault data at the time during the fault when the maximum differential current was measured. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions detect a fault then the criterion is selected on the basis of the priorities given in the table below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P63x.
Operation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Priority Function Recognizing the Fault
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-141 Acquisition Time Criterion
1 2 3 4 5 6
Differential protection function Restricted earth fault protection, end a Restricted earth fault protection, end b Restricted earth fault protection, end c Definite-time overcurrent protection or inverse-time overcurrent protection
Maximum differential current Maximum differential current (REF_1) Maximum differential current (REF_2) Maximum differential current (REF_3) Maximum restraining current
Functions according to the selection End of fault through m out of n parameters
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data acquisition time is determined by the P63x and displayed.
OP
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-142
OSCIL:
OP
P1917ENa
Figure 151:
Determination of the fault data acquisition time
2.22.3
Acquisition of the fault currents The P63x stores the fault current data determined at the acquisition time. The following fault currents are stored: The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer The residual current calculated from the phase currents The current measured by the P63x at transformer - Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
The fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to In.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-143
OP
Figure 152:
Acquisition of the fault currents
2.22.4
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents The P63x stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the acquisition time by the differential protection and restricted earth fault protection functions. Moreover, the values for the second and fifth harmonic of the differential current are stored. Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to Iref.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-144
OSCIL:
I (2*fn), 1 1 (2*fn)
I (5*fn), 1 1 (5*fn)
I (2*fn), 2 2 (2*fn)
I (5*fn), 2 2 (5*fn)
OP
I (2*fn), 3 3 (2*fn)
I (5*fn), 3 3 (5*fn)
P1919ENa
Figure 153:
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-145
OSCIL:
P1920ENa
OP
Figure 154:
Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of restricted earth fault protection
2.22.5
Fault data reset After pressing the Clear key on the local control panel, the fault data value is displayed as Not Measured. However, the values are not erased and can continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
2.23
Disturbance recording (OSCIL)
2.23.1
Start of fault recording A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the signals selected through an m out of n parameter is present. Moreover, fault recording is started if the Id> and IR> triggers operate. Furthermore, fault recording can also be started manually from the local control panel or externally through a binary signal input.
2.23.2
Fault counting Faults are counted and identified by sequential number.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-146
OP
Figure 155:
Start of fault recording and fault counter
2.23.3
Time tag The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory at the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-147
2.23.4
Fault logging Protection signals during a fault, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been logged, the oldest fault record will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then OSCIL: Fault Mem. Overflow will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal OSCIL: Faulty Time Tag is generated. In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data are also entered in the fault memory. The fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication interfaces.
OP
Figure 156:
Fault memory
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-148
2.23.5
Fault data recording The following analog signals are recorded: The phase currents of all four ends of the transformer The residual current measured by the P63x at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) The voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The times for recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz) is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached. The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording time. Otherwise; the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a sampling increment and the post-fault time is set to zero. If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
OP
The analog data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults remain stored.
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-149
OSCIL: OSCIL:
OSCIL:
OSCIL:
OP
OSCIL:
P1923ENa
Figure 157:
Fault data recording
P63x/UK OP/A54 (OP) 5-150
OP
Application Notes MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK AP/A54
AP
APPLICATION NOTES
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK AP/A54
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-1
CONTENTS
(AP) 61.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2
INTRODUCTION
Protection of transformers Introduction Overview of existing practices P63x protection relay Protection functions Non protection features
5
5 5 5 7 8 9
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.2.1 2.4.2.2 2.4.2.3
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

Overall differential protection (87) Biased elements Ratio correction Vector group correction and zero sequence current filtering Magnetizing inrush stabilization High set operation Restricted earth fault protection Basic principles REF operating modes Stability requirements for high impedance REF Use of METROSIL non-linear resistors Overfluxing protection and blocking Basic principles Transformer overfluxing Time delayed overfluxing protection 5th Harmonic blocking Required settings Auto-transformer protection Unloaded delta tertiary Neutral earthing with phase-segregated CTs Amplitude matching Vector group matching Zero-sequence current filtering
10
10 10 13 14 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 24 24 24 24 25 26 26 28 28 28 28 28
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-2 2.4.2.4 2.4.3 2.4.3.1 2.4.3.2 2.4.3.3 2.4.3.4 2.4.4 2.4.4.1 2.5 2.5.1 Inrush stabilization CTs in series with delta tertiary winding Amplitude matching Vector group matching Zero-sequence current filtering Inrush stabilization CTs outside delta tertiary winding Tripping characteristic Busbar/mesh corner differential protection Busbar protection settings
Application Notes MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 28 29 29 29 29 29 30 31 31 32
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
SETTING RECOMMENDATIONS
Introduction Enabling the relay Enabling a protection function Configuring a trip command and output contact for CB tripping Configuring a watchdog contact HMI read key assignment Operation panel configuration
33
33 33 33 33 34 34 34
AP
3.5 3.6 3.7
4.
4.1 4.2
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

Knee point voltage offered by IEC P class CTs Use of ANSI/IEEE CTs
35
36 37
5.
AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING
38
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Figure 6: Figure 7: Figure 8: Figure 9: Typical transformer protection package Typical protection package for a generator transformer P63x bias characteristic of transformer differential protection Amplitude matching factor, kamp Yd5 transformer example Vector group selection Zero sequence current filtering Fault limitation on an impedance earthed system Fault limitation on a solidly earthed system 6 7 11 14 15 17 18 19 19
Application Notes MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Figure 10: Figure 11: Figure 12: Figure 13: Figure 14: Figure 15: Figure 16: Figure 17: Figure 18: Figure 19: High Impedance REF principle Variable time overfluxing protection characteristic Auto-transformer with tertiary winding Auto-transformer with tertiary winding Auto-transformer - unloaded delta tertiary winding Auto-transformer - neutral earthing with per phase neutral CTs Auto-transformer - CTs in series with delta tertiary winding Auto-transformer - CTs outside delta tertiary winding P63x busbar differential protection scheme P63x bias characteristic of busbar differential protection
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-3 20 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 32
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-4
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-5
1.
1.1 1.1.1
INTRODUCTION
Protection of transformers Introduction The development of modern power systems has been reflected in the advances in transformer design. This has resulted in a wide range of transformers with sizes from a few kVA to several hundred MVA being available for use in a wide variety of applications. The considerations for transformer protection vary with the application and importance of the transformer. To reduce the effects of thermal stress and electrodynamic forces it is advisable for the overall protection to minimize the time that a fault is present within a transformer. On smaller distribution transformers effective and economically justifiable protection can be achieved by using either fuse protection or IDMT/instantaneous overcurrent relays. Due to the requirements of co-ordination with the downstream power system protection this results in time delayed fault clearance for some low level faults. Time delayed clearance of major faults is unacceptable on larger distribution, transmission and generator transformers, where the effects on system operation and stability must be considered. High speed protection is desirable for all faults. Transformer faults are generally classified into four categories: Winding and terminal faults Core faults Abnormal operating conditions such as overvoltage, overfluxing and overload Sustained or uncleared external faults
AP
All of the above conditions must be considered individually and the transformer protection designed accordingly. To provide effective protection for faults within a transformer and security for normal operation and external faults, the design and application of transformer protection must consider factors such as: Magnetizing inrush current Winding arrangements Winding connections Connection of protection secondary circuits
The way that the protection of larger transformers is typically achieved is best illustrated by examining the protective devices associated with common applications. 1.1.2 Overview of existing practices Figure 1 shows typical protection functions for a sub-transmission or large distribution transformer.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-6
WT
OT
51
50N
51N
ICT 64
WT = B OT 64 87 = = = = Winding temp' Buchholz Oil temp' REF Biased diff' Standby E/F Inst' earth fault IDMT overcurrent Overfluxing relay
P1937ENa
51N =
87
50N = 51 24 = =
AP
Figure 1: Typical transformer protection package
High speed protection is provided for faults on both the HV and LV windings by biased differential protection (87). The relay operates on the basic differential principle that HV and LV CT secondary currents entering and leaving the zone of protection can be balanced under load and through fault conditions, whereas under internal fault conditions balance will be lost and a differential current will cause the relay to trip. The zone of protection is clearly defined by the CT locations and, as the protection is stable for through faults, it can be set to operate without any intentional time delay. In Figure 1 the application of the P63x differential relay includes software vector group and amplitude matching to provide phase and ratio correction of CT signals in addition to filtering LV zero sequence current to prevent maloperation of the differential element for external LV earth faults. Interposing CTs (ICTs) are no longer required. More sensitive high speed earth fault protection for the LV winding is provided by restricted earth fault protection (64). Due to the limitation of phase fault current on the HV side for LV winding earth faults and the fact that any unrestricted earth fault protection in the transformer earth path requires a discriminative time delay, restricted earth fault protection is widely applied. The application of restricted earth fault protection is further discussed in section 2.2. Earth fault protection is provided on the HV winding by the inherently restricted earth fault element associated with the HV overcurrent protection (50N). The delta winding of the transformer draws no HV zero sequence current for LV earth faults and passes no zero sequence current to upstream HV earth faults, hence there is no requirement to grade this element with other earth fault protection and it can be set to operate without any intentional time delay. Sustained external LV faults are cleared by the IDMT overcurrent protection on the HV winding (51) or by the standby earth fault protection (51N) in the transformer earth connection. The extent of backup protection employed will vary according to the transformer installation and application.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-7
The protection scheme may be further enhanced by the use of other protective devices associated with the transformer, such as the Buchholz, pressure relief and winding temperature devices. These devices can act as another main protective system for large transformers and they may also provide clearance for some faults which might be difficult to detect by protection devices operating from line current transformers, e.g. winding inter turn faults or core lamination faults. These devices are connected to directly trip the breaker in addition to operating auxiliary relays for indication purposes.
WT B OT
64 24 51N 64
ICT
WT B OT 64 87 51N 51 24 = = = = = = = = Winding temp' Buchholz Oil temp' REF Biased diff' Standby E/F IDMT overcurrent Overfluxing relay
P1938ENa
87
Figure 2:
Typical protection package for a generator transformer
AP
The protection of a generator transformer is similar to that for any other large transformer. High speed protection is provided for phase to phase faults by the provision of biased differential protection. In addition, for large generators, the transformer is commonly included within an overall second main differential arrangement, which incorporates the generator and transformer within the overall zone of protection. Earth fault protection is provided by a restricted earth fault element on the star winding. Overfluxing protection is commonly applied to generator circuits to prevent generator or transformer damage from prolonged overfluxing conditions. Other protection devices will again complement the main relay protection. Auto-transformers are commonly used to couple EHV and HV power networks if the ratio of their voltages is moderate. The protection arrangements for an auto-transformer are similar in most respects to the protection of a two winding transformer. Protection of all windings can be offered by a biased differential relay such as the P63x, this is further discussed in section 2.4. 1.2 P63x protection relay The P63x relay has been designed to bring the latest numerical technology to the protection of power transformers. The increased functionality of numerical relays allows enhanced protection functions to be offered for a wide variety of applications, which, when combined with a host of non-protective features, can provide power system control and monitoring requirements.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-8 1.2.1 Protection functions The main protection functions offered by the P63x are listed below: Biased differential protection (87) Restricted earth fault protection for individual transformer windings (64)* Instantaneous/time delayed phase overcurrent protection (50/51) Instantaneous/time delayed earth fault protection (50N/51N)
Instantaneous/time delayed negative sequence overcurrent protection (46) Thermal overload protection (49) Under/over voltage protection (27/59)* Under/over frequency protection (81)* Overfluxing protection (24)* Opto-isolated inputs and programmable logic for alarm/trip indication of external devices
* These protection functions are not available in the P631. The biased differential element has a triple slope bias characteristic to ensure sensitivity, with load current, to internal faults and stability under heavy through fault conditions. The differential element can be blocked for magnetizing inrush conditions based on the ratio of second harmonic to fundamental current. In addition, the differential element can be blocked during transient overfluxing conditions based on the ratio of fifth harmonic to fundamental current. Fast operating times for heavy internal faults can be achieved by use of the unrestrained instantaneous differential high set elements. Restricted earth fault protection is available for up to three transformer windings to offer increased sensitivity to low-level winding earth faults. The principle of operation is selectable and allows either the high impedance or biased (low impedance) restricted earth fault method to be implemented. Both the definite-time and the inverse-time overcurrent protection operate with separate measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negative-sequence current and the residual current. Three stages each are provided for the three measuring systems of the definite-time overcurrent protection. The inverse-time overcurrent protection offers a multitude of tripping characteristics for the individual measuring systems. Thermal overload protection can be used to prevent electrical plant from operating at temperatures in excess of the designed maximum withstand. Prolonged overloading causes excessive heating, which may result in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. The relay incorporates a current based thermal replica, using rms load current to model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip stages. The V/f overfluxing element provides protection against transformer damage that may result from prolonged operation at increased voltages and/or decreased frequency. Independent alarm and trip characteristics are provided to enable corrective action to be undertaken prior to tripping being initiated. Use of the opto-inputs as trip repeat and alarm paths for other transformer protection devices, (Buchholz, Oil pressure, winding temperature etc.,) allows operation of these devices to be event-logged. Interrogation of the relay fault, event and disturbance records offers an overall picture of an event or fault, of the transformer protection performance and sequences of operation. All models of the P63x are three phase units with internal phase compensation, CT ratio correction and zero sequence filtering, thus eliminating the need for external interposing transformers. Up to four biased inputs can be provided to cater for power transformers with more than two windings and/or more than one set of CTs associated with each winding, e.g. in mesh or one-and-a-half circuit breaker substation arrangements.
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-9
The variety of protective functions offered by the P63x makes it ideal not only for the protection of power transformers but also for a variety of applications where biased differential or high impedance protection is commonly applied, these include: 1.2.2 Busbars/mesh corners Overall generator/transformer protection Generators Reactors
Non protection features In addition to providing all of the common relaying requirements for a transformer protection package, the P63x relay shares many common features with the other relays in the MiCOM range. The P63x offers this variety of additional features by virtue of its digital design and standardization of hardware. These features are listed below: Electrical Instrumentation with local/remote display Fault records (summary of reasons for tripping etc.) Event records (summary of alarms and relay events) Disturbance records (record of analogue wave forms and operation of opto-inputs and output relays) Date and time tagging of all records Commissioning aids Optional remote communications High level of continuous self monitoring and diagnostic information Relay menu displayed as standard English or Regional English language variant -800
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-10
2.
APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The following sections detail individual protection functions in addition to where and how they may be applied. Each section provides some worked examples on how the settings are applied to the relay.
2.1
Overall differential protection (87) In applying the well established principles of differential protection to transformers, a variety of considerations have to be taken into account. These include compensation for any phase shift across the transformer, possible unbalance of signals from current transformers either side of windings and the effects of the variety of earthing and winding arrangements. In addition to these factors, which can be compensated for by correct application of the relay, the effects of normal system conditions on relay operation must also be considered. The differential element must be blocked for system conditions which could result in maloperation of the relay, such as high levels of magnetizing current during inrush conditions or during transient overfluxing. In traditional transformer differential schemes, the requirements for phase and ratio correction were met by the application of external interposing current transformers, as a secondary replica of the main transformer winding arrangements, or by a delta connection of main CTs (phase correction only). Within the P63x, settings are provided to allow flexible application of the protection to a wide variety of transformer configurations, or to other devices where differential protection is required, without the need for external interposing CTs or delta connection of secondary circuits.
2.1.1
Biased elements The number of biased differential inputs required for an application depends upon the transformer and its primary connections. It is recommended that, where ever possible, a set of biased CT inputs is used per set of current transformers. There are four basic models of the P63x relay; P631 Two biased differential inputs (without REF or voltage based protection) P632 Two biased differential inputs P633 Two or three biased differential inputs P634 Two, three or four biased differential inputs
AP
Where a P634 or P633 is chosen they can be programmed to provide 2, 3, 4 and 2 or 3 biased windings respectively. Table 1 shows the variety of connections which can be catered for by the range of P63x relays. Configuration
HV
No. of CT sets
Recommended Relay
2
LV
P631, P632, P633 or P634
HV
3
LV1 LV2
P633 or P634
HV
3
LV HV
P633 or P634
3
LV
P633 or P634
Application Notes MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Configuration

HV
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-11 No. of CT sets 4

LV1 LV2
Recommended Relay P634 only
HV LV1 LV2
P634 only
HV
4
LV
P634 only
Table 1:
Applications of the P63x transformer differential protection relay
The P63x relay achieves stability for through faults in two ways, both of which are essential for correct relay operation. The first consideration is the correct sizing of the current transformers as described in section 4, the second is by providing a relay bias characteristic as shown below:
8.00
I d / I ref
6.00
Tripping area
AP
4.00
Fa u for lt cu rr sin gle ent ch -s i ar de a fee cte ris d t ic
.7
=0
2.00
= 0.3
Blocking area
I R ,m2 / I ref = 4.0 6.00 I R / I ref III
12200e.DS4
I d > / I ref
= 0.2 0.00 I 2.00 II 4.00
8.00
P1764ENa
Figure 3:
P63x bias characteristic of transformer differential protection
The differential and restraining current variables for each measurement system are calculated from the current variables after amplitude and vector group matching (Refer to the following sections). The formation of the restraining variables differs between two and three-winding protection. The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected equipment, i.e. the current arrows of all windings point either towards the protected object or away from it. Calculation of differential and restraining currents for two-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b IR,y = 0.5 Is,y,a Is,y,b
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-12
When the infeed to an internal fault from both ends is exactly equal as regards amplitude and angle, then both currents cancel one another out, i.e. the restraining current becomes zero and the restraining effect disappears. Disappearance of the restraining effect when there is an internal fault is a desirable result since in this case transformer differential protection attains maximum sensitivity. Calculation of differential and restraining currents for three or four-winding protection:
Id,y = Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d IR,y = 0.5 Is,y,a + Is,y,b + Is,y,c + Is,y,d
In this case the restraining effect never disappears when there is an internal fault; the restraining effect is even reinforced in the case of multi-end infeed. However, the restraining current factor means that the differential current Id has twice the value of the restraining current IR so that safe and reliable tripping is also guaranteed in the case of multi-end infeed. The tripping characteristic of the differential protection device P63x has two knees. The first knee is dependent on the setting of the basic threshold value DIFF: Idiff> SGx and is on the load line for single-side feed. The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting DIFF: IR,m2 SGx. The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below. Figure3: shows the tripping characteristic. The first section (Area I) represents the most sensitive region of the tripping characteristic in the form of the settable basic threshold value Id>. The default setting of 0.2 takes into account the magnetizing current of the transformer, which flows even in a no-load condition and is generally less than 5% of the nominal transformer current. When protecting generators and other items of plant, where shunt magnetizing current is not present, a lower differential setting can be used and 0.1 would be more typical. Characteristic equation for the range
Id I > = diff Iref Iref
0 I R 0 .5 I diff > : (Area I)
AP
The second section (Area II) of the tripping curve covers the load current range, so that in this section we must account for not only the transformer magnetizing current, which appears as differential current, but also with differential currents that can be attributed to the transformation errors of the current transformer sets. If we calculate the worst case with IEC class 10P current transformers, then the maximum allowable amplitude error according to IEC 60044-1 is 3 % for nominal current. The phase-angle error can be assumed to be 2 for nominal current. The maximum allowable total error for nominal current is then obtained, in approximation, as (0.0-3 + sin 2) 6.5 %. If the current is increased to the nominal accuracy limit current, then the total error for Class 10P current transformers can be 10 % maximum. Beyond the nominal accuracy limit current, the transformation error can be of any magnitude. The dependence of the total error of a current transformer on current is therefore non-linear. In the operating current range, i.e., in the current range below the nominal accuracy limit current, we can expect a worst case total error of approximately 10 % per current transformer set. The second section of the tripping characteristic forms a straight line, the slope of which should correspond to the cumulative total error of the participating current transformer sets. The curve slope m1 can be set. The default setting for m1 is defined as 0.3 with respect to protection of three-winding transformers, i.e. 3 x 10%. Characteristic equation for the range 0,5 I an < I H 4 I B : (Area II)
Id I > I = m1 R + diff (1 0.5 m1 ) Iref Iref Iref
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-13
The second knee point of the tripping characteristic determines the end of the overcurrent zone in the direction of increasing restraining current in fault-free operation. It can be as high as four times the nominal current in certain operating cases - such as when a parallel transformer has failed. Therefore, the second knee point can be set (IR,m2) for a default setting of 4Iref. IR,m2 must be set in accordance with the maximum possible operating current. Restraining currents that go beyond the set knee point are then evaluated as continuous fault currents. For truly continuous fault currents, the third section of the tripping characteristic could therefore be given an infinitely large slope. Since, however, we also need to take into account the possibility that a fault can occur in the transformer differential protection zone as the result of the system fault, a finite slope m2 is provided for the third section of the tripping curve. The default setting for m2 is 0.7. Characteristic equation for the range 4 I < I B H : (Area III)
IR,m2 Id I I = m 2 R + diff > (1 0.5 m1 ) + (m1 m 2 ) Iref Iref Iref Iref
Iref: reference current m1: gradient of characteristic in range m2: gradient of characteristic in range 2.1.2 Ratio correction To ensure correct operation of the differential element it is important that under load and through fault conditions the currents into the differential element of the relay balance. In many cases, the HV and LV current transformer primary ratings will not exactly match the transformer winding rated currents. Ratio correction factors are therefore provided. The CT ratio correction factors are applied to ensure that the signals to the differential algorithm are correct. In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference power, identical for all windings, needs to be defined at Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF: Rated Ref Power Sref [019.016]. For two-winding arrangements, the nominal power will usually be the reference power. For three or four-winding transformers, the nominal power of the highest-power winding should be set as the reference power. The individual reference currents for each winding of the protected object are then calculated by the P63x on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
Iref ,a = S ref 3 Vnom,a Iref ,b = S ref 3 Vnom,b
0,5 I an < I H 4 I B
4 IB < I H
AP
Iref ,c =
S ref 3 Vnom,c
Iref ,d =
S ref 3 Vnom,d
Sref: Iref,a, b, c or d: Vn,a, b, c or d:
reference power reference current of winding a, b, c or d nominal voltage of winding a, b, c or d
The P63x calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers. Note: Where on-load tap changing is used, the nominal voltage chosen should be that for the middle tap position.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-14
Winding a C
Winding b C
B B A A
k amp,a
kamp,b
Figure 4:
k am,a =
Amplitude matching factor, kamp

k am,b = Inom,b Iref ,b k am,c = Inom,c Iref ,c k am,d = Inom,d Iref ,d
Inom,a Iref ,a
With:
AP
kam,a, b, c or d: amplitude-matching factor of winding a, b, c or d In,a, b, c or d: primary nominal currents of the main current transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed by the P63x. The values are also displayed in the setting file, however the setting file will not update any changes to the matching factors as processing by the relay operating system is required to determine new matching factors. The P63x checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within their permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following conditions: The matching factors must always be 16 The value of the lower matching factors must be 0.5
In three or four-winding protection, the weakest end, that is the end with the smallest primary nominal transformer current, is thus not associated with any restriction of the settings for the amplitude matching. Should the P63x calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then a warning will be issued and the P63x will be automatically blocked. The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected object are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer to the relevant reference currents rather than to the transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of the device. 2.1.3 Vector group correction and zero sequence current filtering To compensate for any phase shift between two windings of a transformer it is necessary to provide vector group correction. This was traditionally provided by the appropriate connection of physical interposing current transformers, as a replica of the main transformer winding arrangements, or by a delta connection of main CTs.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-15
Basically, this matching operation can be carried out regardless of the phase winding connections, since the phase relation is described unambiguously by the characteristic vector group number. Vector group matching is therefore performed solely by mathematical phasor operations on the amplitude-matched phase currents of the low-voltage side in accordance with the characteristic vector group number. The vector group is the clock-face hour position of the LV A-phase voltage, with respect to the A-phase HV voltage at 12-oclock (zero) reference. Phase correction is provided in the P63x via Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF: Vector Grp. ends b-a [019.010] for phase shift between windings a and b. Similar settings are provided for phase shift between further windings in the P633 and P634 relays. This is shown in the following figure for vector group characteristic number 5, where vector group Yd5 is used as the example:
AP
Figure 5:
Yd5 transformer example
No operation is carried out on the high-voltage side in connection with vector group matching. In addition to mimicking the phase shift of the protected transformer, it is also necessary to mimic the distribution of primary zero sequence current in the protection scheme. The necessary filtering of zero sequence current has also been traditionally provided by appropriate connection of interposing CTs or by delta connection of main CT secondary windings. In the P63x, zero sequence current filtering is implemented in software via Settings/Function Settings/Setting Group SG1/DIFF: I0 filt a Enab SG1 [072.155] for setting group 1, winding a. Similar settings are provided for the remaining ends in each setting group. Where a transformer winding can pass zero sequence current to an external earth fault it is essential that some form of zero sequence current filtering is employed. This ensures out of zone earth faults will not cause the relay to maloperate.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-16
An external earth fault on the star side of a Dyn11 transformer will result in zero sequence current flowing in the current transformers associated with the star winding but, due to the effect of the delta winding, there will be no corresponding zero sequence current in the current transformers associated with the delta winding. In order to ensure stability of the protection, the LV zero sequence current must be eliminated from the differential current. Traditionally this has been achieved by either delta connected line CTs or by the inclusion of a delta winding in the connection of an interposing current transformer. In accordance with its definition, the zero-sequence current is determined as follows from the amplitude-matched phase currents:
Iamp,zero,z =
1 I +I +I 3 amp,A,z amp,B,z amp,C,z
The following tables show that for all odd-numbered vector group characteristics the zero-sequence current on the low-voltage side is basically always filtered out, whereas for even-numbered vector group characteristics the zero-sequence current on the low-voltage side is basically never filtered out automatically. The latter is also true for the high-voltage side since in that case, as explained above, no mathematical phasor operations are performed. Vector group matching and zero-sequence current filtering must therefore always be viewed in combination. The following tables list all the mathematical phasor operations. Mathematical operations on the high-voltage side:
AP
With Izero Filtering
Without Izero Filtering
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Iamp,zero,z
Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x,z
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an even-numbered vector group characteristic: VG 0 2 4 6 8 10 With Izero Filtering Without Izero Filtering
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,zero,z
Ivec, y, z = Iamp, x,z
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Iamp,zero,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,zero,z
) )
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x +1,z Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z
Ivec,y,z = Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,zero,z
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-17
Mathematical operations on the low-voltage side for an odd-numbered vector group characteristic: VG 1 With Izero filtering Without Izero filtering
Ivec ,y,z =
1 3
Iamp,x,z Iamp,x +1,z
Ivec,y,z =
1 3
Iamp,x,z Iamp,x +1,z + Iamp,zero,z
Ivec ,y,z =
Ivec ,y,z =
1 3
1 3
Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,x +1,z

Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,x,z
Ivec, y, z =
Ivec, y, z =
1 3
1 3
Iamp, x 1, z Iamp, x +1, z + Iamp,zero, z

Iamp, x 1, z Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z
Ivec ,y,z = Ivec ,y,z = Ivec ,y,z =
1 3 1 3 1 3
Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,x,z
) )
Ivec, y, z = Ivec, y, z = Ivec,y,z =
1 3 1 3 1 3
Iamp, x +1, z Iamp, x, z + Iamp, zero, z Iamp, x +1, z Iamp, x 1, z + Iamp,zero, z Iamp,x,z Iamp,x 1,z + Iamp,zero,z
Iamp,x +1,z Iamp,x 1,z Iamp,x,z Iamp,x 1,z
11
Setting the vector group matching function is very simple and does not require any calculations. Only the characteristic vector group number needs to be set:
AP
Figure 6:
Vector group selection
Other nameplate designations may be used instead of the clock notation - common examples are: Alternatives DAB/Y DAC/Y Y/Y Y/Y DAB - Y DAC - Y Y0 - Y0 Y0 - Y6 Equivalent Standard Dy1 Dy11 Yy0 Yy6 LV Group Setting 1 11 0 6
Setting the zero-sequence current filtering function is very simple and does not require any calculations. Zero-sequence current filtering should only be activated for those ends where there is operational earthing of a neutral point:
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-18
Figure 7: 2.1.4
Zero sequence current filtering
Magnetizing inrush stabilization The magnetizing inrush phenomenon is associated with a transformer winding which is being energized where no balancing current is present in the other winding(s). This current appears as a large operating signal for the differential protection. Special measures are taken with the relay design to ensure that no maloperation occurs during inrush. The fact that the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush current. The P63x filters the differential current. The fundamental I(fn) and second harmonic components I(2*fn) of the differential current are determined. If the ratio I(2*fn)/I(fn) exceeds a specific adjustable value (typical setting 20%) in at least one measuring system, tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes: Across all three measuring systems Selectively for one measuring system
AP
There is no blocking if the differential current exceeds the high set threshold DIFF: Idiff>> SGx. 2.1.5 High set operation The P63x relay incorporates an independent differential high set element, DIFF: Idiff>> SGx, to complement the protection provided by the biased differential low set element. The instantaneous high set offers faster clearance for heavy internal faults and it is not blocked for magnetizing inrush or transient overfluxing conditions. Stability is provided for heavy external faults, but the operating threshold of the high set differential element must be set to avoid operation with inrush current. As described in section 2.1.4 when a transformer is energized, a high magnetizing inrush current is drawn. The magnitude and duration of this inrush current is dependant upon several factors which include; Size and impedance of the transformer Point on wave of switching Remnant flux in the transformer Number of transformers connected in parallel
It is difficult to accurately predict the maximum anticipated level of inrush current. Typical waveform peak values are of the order of 8 - 10x rated current. A worst-case estimation of inrush could be made by dividing the transformer full load current by the per-unit leakage reactance quoted by the transformer manufacturer.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-19
A setting range of 2.5 - 30Iref (RMS values) is provided on the P63x relay. The high set setting should be set in excess of the anticipated or estimated peak value of inrush current after ratio correction. Note: If the differential current exceeds the adjustable threshold DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx>, the restraining current and the saturation discriminator are no longer taken into account either, that is the P63x will trip regardless of the restraining variable and the saturation discriminator.
2.2 2.2.1
Restricted earth fault protection Basic principles The P63x uses biased differential protection to provide fast clearance for faults within the protected zone. The value of earth fault current, however, may be limited by any impedance in the earth path or by the percentage of the winding involved in the fault. The P63x offers a restricted earth fault element for up to 3 windings of the protected transformer to provide greater sensitivity for earth faults which will not change with load current. The levels of fault current available for relay measurement are illustrated in below. If an earth fault is considered on an impedance earthed star winding of a Dyn transformer (Figure 8), the value of current flowing in the fault (If) will be dependant upon two factors. These are the value of earthing impedance and the fault point voltage, which is governed by the fault location. The value of fault current (If) is directly proportional to the location of the fault. A restricted earth fault element (64) is connected to measure If directly, to provide more sensitive earth fault protection. The overall differential protection is less sensitive, since it only measures the HV current Is. The value of Is is limited by the number of faulted secondary turns in relation to the HV turns.
87 If Is 87 If Is
AP
Source
Source
If
64
If
64
1.0 I Current (x full load) F

Current (x full load)
10
0.2
IS
IS
1.0 0.2 Fault position from neutral (Impedance earthing)
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Fault position from neutral (Solid earthing)
Figure 8:
Fault limitation on an impedance earthed system
Figure 9:
Fault limitation on a solidly earthed system
If a fault on a solidly earthed star winding (Fig 9) is considered, the fault current is limited by the leakage reactance of the winding, any impedance in the fault and by the fault point voltage. The value of fault current varies in a complex manner with fault location. As in the case of the impedance earthed transformer, the value of current available as an overall differential protection operating quantity is limited. More sensitive earth fault protection is provided by a restricted earth fault relay (64), which is arranged to measure If directly. Although more sensitive protection is provided by REF, the operating current for the overall differential protection is still significant for faults over most of the winding. For this reason,
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-20
independent REF protection may not have previously been considered necessary for a solidly earthed winding; especially where an additional relay would have been required. With the P63x, the REF protection is available at no extra cost if a neutral CT is available. Restricted earth fault protection is also commonly applied to Delta windings of large power transformers, to improve the operating speed and sensitivity of the protection package to winding earth faults. When applied to a Delta winding this protection is commonly referred to as balanced earth fault protection. It is inherently restricted in its zone of operation when it is stabilized for CT spill current during inrush or during phase faults. The value of fault current flowing will again be dependant upon system earthing arrangements and the fault point voltage. 2.2.2 REF operating modes One of three operating modes for restricted earth fault protection can be selected via settings. Low impedance REF biased by residual current (Low-Z Iph Sum Bias) Low impedance REF biased by maximum phase current (Low-Z Iph Max. Bias) High impedance REF (High Impedance)
The biasing techniques operate by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the relay.
AP
Historically the high impedance principle has been most widely implemented and an example illustrating the principle is included in the following section. Details on the application of the low impedance REF types are not included here, however the Operation OP section contains details on the characteristics and principles involved. Low impedance biased REF settings are similar to those of the biased differential protection function. Note: The Low-Z Iph Sum Bias mode cannot be used for balanced earth fault protection of delta windings.
2.2.3
Stability requirements for high impedance REF
If(prim)
Rct Rl
Rl
Rl
If(prim)
R stab'
64
Rl
Figure 10: High Impedance REF principle
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-21
The high impedance REF element shall maintain stability for through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following conditions are met in determining the CT requirements and value of associated stabilizing resistor:
Vk > 2 Idiff > Rs Rs = 1.1 If (Rct + 2Rl ) Idiff >
For faster operation of the REF element, a larger knee-point voltage will provide reduced operating times. Refer to the graph below showing the operating time of the REF element for differing ratios.
45 40 35 Operating time (ms) 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 5 10 Vk / (Idiff> Rs) 15 20
AP
Note:
The diagram is the result of investigations which were carried out for impedance ratios in the range of 5 to 120 and for fault currents in the range of 0.5 to 40 In.
2.2.4
Use of METROSIL non-linear resistors Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand 3000V peak. The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer saturation did not occur. Vp Vf = 2 2Vk ( Vf - Vk ) = 'f (Rct + 2RL + RST)
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-22 Where: Vp Vk Vf 'f Rct RL = Peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions = Current transformer kneepoint voltage
= Maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not occur = Maximum internal secondary fault current = Current transformer secondary winding resistance = Maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay
RST = Relay stabilizing resistor When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, Metrosils should be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in order to prevent very high secondary voltages. Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. characteristics follow the expression: V = C0.25 Their operating
Where: V C = = = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) Constant of the non-linear resistor (Metrosil) Instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (Metrosil)
AP
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil, the RMS current would be approximately 0.52 x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as follows: (rms) = 0.52 Where: Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the Metrosil This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the Metrosil is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted. For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (Metrosil), its characteristic should be such that it complies with the following requirements: 1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) current should be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current transformers and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformers At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (metrosil) should limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms, so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated
Vs (rms) x 2 4 C
2.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc. Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following restrictions: 3. 4. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 30mA rms At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms if possible
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-23
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CT's are as shown in the following table: Relay Voltage Setting Up to 125V rms 125 to 300V rms Note: Nominal Characteristic C 450 900 0.25 0.25 Recommended Metrosil Type Single Pole Relay 600A/S1/S256 600A/S1/S1088 Triple Pole Relay 600A/S3/1/S802 600A/S3/1/S1195
Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
Metrosil units for relays with a 5 amp CT These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements: 1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should be less than 100mA rms (the actual maximum currents passed by the units shown below their type description At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***) The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole relays are as shown in the following table: Secondary Internal Fault Current Amps rms 50A
Up to 200V rms 600A/S1/S1213 C = 540/640 35mA rms 600A/S2/P/S121 7 C = 470/540 70mA rms 600A/S3/P/S121 9 C = 430/500 100mA rms Note:
2.
3.
Recommended Metrosil Type Relay Voltage Setting

250V rms 600A/S1/S1214 C = 670/800 40mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1215 C = 570/670 75mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1220 C = 520/620 100mA rms *2400V peak 275V rms 600A/S1/S1214 C =670/800 50mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1215 C =570/670 100mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1221 C = 570/670** 100mA rms **2200V peak 300V rms 600A/S1/S1223 C = 740/870* 50mA rms 600A/S2/P/S1196 C =620/740* 100mA rms 600A/S3/P/S1222 C =620/740*** 100mA rms ***2600V peak
AP
100A
150A
In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact AREVA T&D for detailed applications. Note: 1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on the same central stud but electrically insulated from each other. To order these units please specify "Triple pole Metrosil type", followed by the single pole type reference Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be supplied if required
2.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-24 2.3 2.3.1 Overfluxing protection and blocking Basic principles
The P63x relay offers an overfluxing protection element which can be used to raise an alarm or initiate tripping in the event of prolonged periods of transformer overfluxing. In addition, a differential current 5th harmonic blocking feature is also provided within the P63x, which can be used to prevent possible maloperation of the differential element under transient overfluxing conditions. To make use of the time delayed overfluxing protection, the P63x relay must be supplied with a voltage signal which is representative of the primary system voltage on the source side of the transformer. The 5th harmonic blocking feature does not require a voltage signal. A 5th harmonic signal is derived from the differential current wave form on each phase and blocking is on a per phase basis. 2.3.2 Transformer overfluxing Transformer overfluxing might arise for the following reasons: High system voltage Generator full load rejection Ferranti effect with light loading transmission lines Low system frequency Generator excitation at low speed with AVR in service Geomagnetic disturbance Low frequency earth current circulation through a transmission system The initial effects of overfluxing will be to increase the magnetizing current for a transformer. This current will be seen as a differential current. If it reaches a high level without a waveshape which would cause operation of the inrush blocking system, there would be a risk of differential protection tripping. Persistent overfluxing may result in thermal damage or degradation of a transformer as a result of heating caused by eddy currents that may be induced in non-laminated metalwork of a transformer. The flux levels in such regions would normally be low, but excessive flux may be passed during overfluxed operation of a transformer. The following protection strategy is proposed to address potential overfluxing conditions: Maintain protection stability during transient overfluxing Ensure tripping for persistent overfluxing
AP
In most applications, the recommended minimum differential trip threshold for P63x, its filtering action and possible operation of the inrush detector will ensure stability of the differential element. If more difficult situations exist, the P63x relay is offered with a 5th harmonic differential current blocking facility. This facility could be applied with some study of the particular problem. To ensure tripping for persistent overfluxing, due to high system voltage or low system frequency, the P63x is provided with time delayed Volts per Hertz protection. Where there is any risk of persistent geomagnetic overfluxing, with normal system voltage and frequency, the 5th harmonic differential current facility could be used to initiate tripping after a long time delay. 2.3.3 Time delayed overfluxing protection Two independently adjustable V/f elements are available for overfluxing protection. A definite-time element, with a time setting range of 0 - 10,000 seconds, is provided for use as an alarm element. The settings of this element should be such that the alarm signal can be used to prompt automatic or manual corrective action.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-25
Protection against damage due to prolonged overfluxing is offered by a V/f protection element with a variable time tripping characteristic. The setting flexibility of this element, by adjustment of the time delay at various V/f values, makes it suitable for various applications. The manufacturer of the transformer or generator should be able to supply information about the short-time over-excitation capabilities, which can be used to determine appropriate settings for the V/f tripping element. The variable time overfluxing protection would be used to trip the transformer directly. If preferred, the V/f tripping element can be set with a definite time characteristic.
AP
Figure 11: Variable time overfluxing protection characteristic 2.3.4 5th Harmonic blocking The 5th Harmonic blocking feature is available for possible use to prevent unwanted operation of the low set differential element under transient overfluxing conditions. When overfluxing occurs, the transformer core becomes partially saturated and the resultant magnetizing current waveforms increase in magnitude and become harmonically distorted. Such waveforms have a significant 5th harmonic content, which can be extracted and used as a means of identifying the abnormal operating condition. The 5th harmonic blocking threshold is adjustable between 10 - 80% differential current. The threshold should be adjusted so that blocking will be effective when the magnetizing current rises above the chosen threshold setting of the low-set differential protection. Where the magnetizing current is just in excess of the differential element setting, the magnetizing inrush detection will not be effective in all applications with all types of transformers. To offer some protection against damage due to persistent overfluxing that might be caused by a geomagnetic disturbance, the 5th harmonic blocking element can be routed to an output contact via an associated timer. Operation of this element could be used to give an alarm to the network control centre. If such alarms are received from a number of transformers, they could serve as a warning of geomagnetic disturbance so that operators could take some action to safeguard the power system. Alternatively this element can be used to initiate tripping in event of prolonged pick up of a 5th harmonic measuring element. It is not expected that this type of overfluxing condition would be detected by the AC overfluxing protection. This form of time delayed tripping should only be applied in regions where geomagnetic disturbances are a known problem and only after proper evaluation through simulation testing.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-26 2.3.5 Required settings
The pick up for the overfluxing elements will be dependant upon the nominal core flux density levels. Generator transformers are generally run at higher flux densities than transmission and distribution transformers and hence require a pick up setting and shorter tripping times which reflect this. Transmission transformers can also be at risk from overfluxing conditions and withstand levels should be consulted when deciding upon the required settings. 2.4 Auto-transformer protection Auto-transformers are designed as three-phase units or consist of a group of three single-phase units. They are used for interconnection of solidly earthed EHV and HV networks if the rated voltages of both networks within a factor of 2 to 3 times. Material and weight as well as losses can be saved by autotransformers compared with separate-winding transformers. Auto-transformers with star connection of primary and secondary winding (serial and common winding) are usually equipped with a delta stabilizing winding (tertiary winding) rated about one third of the throughput rating.
AP
Figure 12: Auto-transformer with tertiary winding Shunt reactors or capacitors for power factor correction can be connected to such a tertiary winding. A booster transformer consisting of energizing and regulating winding for voltage adjustment by in-phase or phase-angle regulation can be accommodated in the same tank.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-27
C B A Serial winding
C B A Energizing winding Regulating winding -60/0/+60 phase-angle Delta connection C B A
Common winding
Tertiary winding
Figure 13: Auto-transformer with tertiary winding Depending on the application various possibilities with different features can be used for differential protection of autotransformers:
Unloaded Delta Tertiary Winding Differential protection Amplitude matching Vector group matching Zero sequence current filtering Two-end Vnom,a Vnom,b VGa-b = 0 Enabled Neutral Earthing With PhaseSegregated CTs Three-end Vnom,a = Vnom,b = Vnom,c VGa-b = 0 VGa-c = 0 Disabled Disabled Yes No High No CTs in Series CTs Outside Delta With Delta Tertiary Winding Tertiary Winding Three-end 3Vnom,c VGa-b = 0 VGa-c = 0 Disabled Enabled Yes No High Yes Three-end Vnom,c VGa-b = 0 VGa-c = odd Enabled Enabled No Yes Low Yes
AP
Inrush stabilization Enabled Phase-segregation No Affected by voltage Yes adjustment Sensitivity for earth Low faults Protection against turn-to-turn faults Protection of the delta tertiary winding Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Individual applications are discussed below.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-28 2.4.1 Unloaded delta tertiary
A two-end differential protection may be applied in any case if the tertiary winding is used as delta stabilizing winding only i.e. if there is no additional feeding from the tertiary winding:
C B A
C B A
I d/I
AP
Figure 14: Auto-transformer - unloaded delta tertiary winding The setting of the differential protection corresponds to the setting of a separate-winding transformer with neutral earthing at both ends. 2.4.2 Neutral earthing with phase-segregated CTs In case of neutral earthing with per phase neutral CTs its the ideal solution to apply a three-end differential protection. The protected zone corresponds to a single winding; HV extremity, LV tap and neutral tail CT. 2.4.2.1 Amplitude matching Because the protection is effectively performing a Kirchoff current summation at the center tap, the primary nominal voltages of all three ends have to be set to the same value (primary nominal voltage of the serial or of the common winding). 2.4.2.2 Vector group matching Both vector group numbers have to be set to 0. 2.4.2.3 Zero-sequence current filtering As zero sequence current flow will not upset the Kirchoff current summation, the zero-sequence current filtering may be disabled for all three ends. 2.4.2.4 Inrush stabilization Because of the galvanic connected electrical node there is no transformer coupling and therefore inrush stabilization may be disabled.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-29
C B A
C B A
I d/I
Figure 15: Auto-transformer - neutral earthing with per phase neutral CTs The differential protection described above operates strictly phase-segregated particularly due to the fact that inrush stabilization is not required. Sensitivity for earth fault detection is high. However turn-to-turn faults and faults on the tertiary winding cannot be detected in principle. 2.4.3 CTs in series with delta tertiary winding If the corresponding current through the tertiary winding is measured instead of the neutral-to-earth current per phase a transformer coupling will be given. 2.4.3.1 Amplitude matching Because of transformer coupling amplitude matching has to be based on the individual primary nominal voltages of the ends. Considering that the CTs of the third end are located in series with the delta tertiary winding 3 times of the corresponding primary nominal voltage has to be used for amplitude matching calculation. 2.4.3.2 Vector group matching Because of the limb related measuring systems both vector group numbers have to be set to 0. 2.4.3.3 Zero-sequence current filtering Because of the inclusion of the neutral-to-earth current via measuring the current through the transformer coupled tertiary winding zero-sequence current filtering may be disabled for all three ends. 2.4.3.4 Inrush stabilization Because of the transformer coupling within the protected zone inrush stabilization has to be enabled.
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-30
C B A
C B A
I d/I
C B A
Figure 16: Auto-transformer - CTs in series with delta tertiary winding The differential protection described above provides the same degree of earth fault sensitivity in comparison to the differential protection according to chapter 2.4.2. Furthermore turn-to-turn faults can be detected on principle due to transformer coupling of the measured currents and the tertiary winding is included in the protected zone. Earth faults on the regulating winding will be detected too whereas the differential measuring systems are not affected by voltage adjustment. Only the requirement of inrush stabilization is unfavorable. 2.4.4 CTs outside delta tertiary winding If the CTs of the tertiary winding are not located in series but outside the delta winding a three-end differential protection may be applied. This differential protection offers the largest protection zone in comparison to all the applications described above. However the requirement of zero-sequence current filtering leads to reduced earth fault sensitivity. The setting of the differential protection corresponds to the setting of a separate-winding transformer. The differential measuring systems are affected by in-phase or phase-angle regulation.
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-31
Figure 17: Auto-transformer - CTs outside delta tertiary winding 2.4.4.1 Tripping characteristic This overall differential protection is affected by voltage adjustment. This has to be taken into consideration for the setting of the tripping characteristic according to section xx. 2.5 Busbar/mesh corner differential protection The P633 and P634 relays may be applied to simple busbar/mesh corner configurations to provide biased differential protection of the zone. The figure below shows the basic concept of the scheme when applied as busbar protection.
AP
P634
BB1
P633
Figure 18: P63x busbar differential protection scheme The maximum size of any zone is limited to 4 CT sets when the P634 relay is used.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-32 2.5.1 Busbar protection settings
The reference power setting Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF: Rated Ref Power Sref (019.016) is set based on the CT primary rating and the system voltage. In is then equal to P63x reference current, Iref. The minimum differential current pickup setting, Idiff>, is set above maximum load current to prevent maloperation of the scheme if CT secondary wiring becomes open circuited, presenting the relay with a differential current equivalent to load. In the settings shown on the characteristic below, Idiff> has been set to 1.2 times the nominal current.
AP
Figure 19: P63x bias characteristic of busbar differential protection If there is the possibility for resistive busbar faults to occur, e.g. in GIS chambers, then the Idiff> setting needs to be set less than load current. As bus zone protection is generally the most critical area where disconnection of a CT could cause problems, e.g. tripping a whole bus zone in error, the application of CT supervision is recommended to prevent maloperation of the biased differential protection when there is an open circuited CT secondary. The CTS feature can be used for de-sensitizing or blocking of the biased differential protection. De-sensitization is achieved by raising the differential current pickup setting to the value of Idiff> (CTS).
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-33
3.
3.1
SETTING RECOMMENDATIONS
Introduction By default all protection, logic and I/O settings are disabled in the P63x when delivered from the manufacturer. The following sections are intended to provide recommendations on the setup of auxiliary functions available in all relay configurations. The settings may be configured in the MiCOM S1 S&R-103 setting software with out the need to access the relay. The configured file may be saved as a standard default and used as a starting point when applying the P63x to specific installations requiring calculated protection and logic settings. The relevant sections of the application notes should be cross referenced prior to applying the settings ensuring they are correct for the application.
3.2
Enabling the relay The relay must be enabled, switching it on-line:

(003.030) Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN: Protection Enabled set to Yes.
3.3
Enabling a protection function As an example, the following steps are required to enable differential protection in Setting Group 1: 1. Firstly, differential protection settings must be enabled globally within the relay:
(056.027) Settings/Configuration/DIFF: Differential PR (87) set to Enabled
2.
Then the differential protection must be enabled across the setting groups globally:
(019.080) Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF: General Enable USER set to Yes
AP
3.
Differential protection must then be enabled in the required setting group, e.g. SG1:
(072.152) Settings/ Function Settings/Setting Group 1/DIFF: Enable SG1 set to Yes
The protection system settings for differential protection can then be set as required for the particular installation with reference to the appropriate sections of this Technical Guide. The above procedure is also required for configuring other types of protection such as overcurrent, restricted earth fault, etc. 3.4 Configuring a trip command and output contact for CB tripping It should be noted that the trip signals of the various protection functions are not suitable for trip command purposes, due to their undefined timing. For command purposes, P63x devices provide four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip are selected from those available via the following setting, e.g. for Trip Command 1:
(021.001) Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN: Fct.Assig Trip Cmd.1
Having assigned the trip command, the corresponding signal may be assigned to the desired output relay. It is recommended to use output relay 01 on the power supply module which provides 2 N/O contacts, although any available contact in a P63x may be configured for circuit breaker tripping. For P632/P633/P634:
(151.201) Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 2001 set to Gen. Trip Command 1
For P631:
(150.193) Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 901 set to Gen. Trip Command 1
The closing pulse time of the output contact is then controlled by the setting:
(021.003) Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN: tDWELL Trip Cmd 1
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-34
The logic equations should not be used for fast operating protection tripping functions, as they may introduce a small delay in operation. Any grouping of trip commands should be performed in the trip command described above. 3.5 Configuring a watchdog contact It is recommended to use output relay 08 on the power supply module as the watchdog contact: For P632/P633/P634:
(151.222) Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 2008 set to MAIN Blocked/Faulty
For P631:
(150.214) Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Fct. Assignm. K 908 set to MAIN Blocked/Faulty
This output relay provides a C/O contact which should be programmed to changeover when auxiliary power is applied and the relay has not detected any conditions preventing correct operation of protection. The operation mode for P632/P633/P634:
(151.223) Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Oper. Mode K 2008 set to Inverted
For P631:
(150.215) Settings/Configuration/OUTP: Oper. Mode K 908 set to Inverted
3.6
HMI read key assignment The Read key may be assigned to display the most recent fault recordings by configuring the following setting:
(080.110) Settings/Configuration/HMI: Read Key Assignment set to OSCIL Fault Recording 1
AP
3.7
Operation panel configuration The information displayed on the HMI LCD under normal operating conditions can be configured via the setting:
(053.007) Settings/Configuration/HMI: Operation Panel fct
This enables display of e.g. load current, voltage, frequency measurements on the front panel display during normal operation. When more than two measurements are selected the HMI will cycle through the configured measurements at a rate set by:
(031.075) Settings/Configuration/HMI: Panel Hold-Time
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-35
4.
CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

CT specification IEC 60044-1 accuracy class 5P or equivalent. Minimum knee-point voltage (IEC knee) Differential protection The required knee-point voltage must be calculated for phase fault current and also for the earth fault current. The higher of the two calculated knee-point voltages is used. The CT requirements are based on the default settings. For transformer differential protection; Idiff> = 0.2 Iref, m1 = 0.3, m2 = 0.7, IR,m2 = 4 Iref, and for busbar differential protection; Idiff> = 1.2 Iref, m1 = 0.2, m2 = 0.8, IR,m2 = 1.8 Iref. Phase fault differential protection Earth fault differential protection
Vk K (Rct + Rl )
Vk K e (Rct + 2Rl )
K is a constant depending on the maximum value of through fault current (as a multiple of In) and the primary system X/R ratio. For phase faults, K is determined as follows: When (If X/R) 500 In:
K = 0.14 (If X / R)
When 500 In < (If X/R) < 1200 In:
K = 70
For earth faults, Ke is determined as follows: When (Ife X/R) 500 In:
AP
K e = 0.14 (Ife X / R)
When 500 In < (Ife X/R) < 1200 In:
K e = 70
Typical knee-point voltage requirement for transformer differential protection. The through fault stability required for most transformer applications is determined by the external through fault current and transformer X/R ratio. The through fault current in all but ring bus or mesh fed transformers is given by the inverse of the per unit reactance of the transformer. For most transformers, the reactance varies between 0.05 to 0.1pu, therefore typical through fault current is given by 10 to 20In. For conventional transformers (non-autotransformer), the X/R ratio is typically 7. This cancels out the 0.14 multiplier, leaving only the maximum secondary through fault current (If) to multiply with the loop resistance, giving:
Vk If (Rct + 2Rl )
Alternatively, as a conservative estimate:
Vk (Rct + 2Rl ) Xt
Low impedance REF protection The CT requirements for low impedance REF protection are generally lower than those for differential protection. As the line CTs for low impedance REF protection are the same as those used for differential protection the differential CT requirements cover both differential and low impedance REF applications.
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-36 High impedance REF protection
The high impedance REF element shall maintain stability for through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following conditions are met in determining the CT requirements and value of associated stabilizing resistor:
Vk > 2 Idiff > Rs Rs = 1.1 If (Rct + 2Rl ) Idiff >
For faster operation of the REF element, a larger knee-point voltage will provide reduced operating times. Refer to the graph below showing the operating time of the REF element for differing ratios.
45 40 35 Operating time (ms) 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0 5 10 Vk / (Idiff> Rs) 15 20
AP
Note:
The diagram is the result of investigations which were carried out for impedance ratios in the range of 5 to 120 and for fault currents in the range of 0.5 to 40 In.
4.1
Knee point voltage offered by IEC P class CTs Class X current transformers with a knee point voltage greater or equal than that calculated can be used. Class 5P protection CTs can be used, noting that the knee point voltage equivalent these offer can be approximated from: Vk = (VA x ALF)/In + (RCT x ALF x In)
Where: VA = Voltampere burden rating,
ALF = Accuracy Limit Factor, In = CT nominal secondary current.
Application Notes MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 4.2 Use of ANSI/IEEE CTs
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-37
Where American/IEEE standards are used to specify CTs, the C class voltage rating can be checked to determine the equivalent Vk (knee point voltage according to IEC). The equivalence formula is: Vk = [ (C rating in volts) x 1.05 ] + [ 100 x RCT ]
AP
P63x/UK AP/A54 (AP) 6-38
5.
AUXILIARY SUPPLY FUSE RATING

It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring is protected by fuses of standard ratings between 6A and 16A. Low voltage fuse-links rated for 250V minimum and compliant with IEC60269-1 general application type gG with high rupturing capacity are acceptable. This gives equivalent characteristics to HRC "Red Spot" fuse types NIT/TIA often specified historically. Where only one or two relays are wired as a fused spur, it is acceptable to use a 6A rating. Generally, five relays could be connected on a spur protected at 10A, and ten relays for a 15/16A fuse. Alternatively, miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) may be used to protect the auxiliary supply circuits.
AP
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK MR/A54
MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING
MR
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK MR/A54
MR
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-1
CONTENTS
(MR) 71.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.3 1.1.1.4 1.1.1.5 1.1.1.6 1.1.1.7 1.1.2 1.1.2.1 1.1.2.2 1.1.2.3 1.1.2.4 1.1.2.5 1.1.3 1.1.3.1 1.1.3.2 1.1.3.3 1.1.3.4 1.1.3.5 1.1.3.6 1.1.3.7 1.1.3.8 1.1.3.9
MEASUREMENTS + TESTS
Measurements Analog readings Temperature & DC monitoring measurements (RTDmA) Analog output channel measurements (mA_OP) General measurements (MAIN) Differential protection measurements (DIFF) Restricted earth fault protection measurements (REF_) Thermal overload protection measurements (THRM) Overfluxing protection measurements (V/f) I.O. status monitor Ethernet GOOSE I/O status signals (GOOSE) Ethernet GSSE I/O status signals (GSSE) Opto input status signals (INP) Output relay status signals (OUTP) LED status signals (LED) Log. state signals Local control panel status signals (HMI) Rear port communication status signals (COMM1) Ethernet communication status signals (IEC/GOOSE/GSSE) IRIG-B time synchronization status signals (IRIGB) Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (RTDmA) Output relay status signals (OUTP) Analog output channel status signals (mA_OP) General status signals (MAIN) Setting group selection status signals (GROUP)
5
5 5 5 6 6 15 16 16 18 18 18 19 21 22 23 23 23 23 24 25 25 25 26 27 30 32 39 39 40 41
MR
1.1.3.10 Self testing and diagnostics status signals (CHECK) 1.1.3.11 Overload recording status signals (OL_RC) 1.1.3.12 Disturbance recorder status signals (OSCIL) 1.1.3.13 Differential protection status signals (DIFF) 1.1.3.14 Restricted earth fault protection status signals (REF_)
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-2 1.1.3.15 Definite time overcurrent protection status signals (DTOC) 1.1.3.16 Inverse time overcurrent protection status signals (IDMT) 1.1.3.17 Thermal overload protection status signals (THRM) 1.1.3.18 Under/overvoltage protection status signals (V<>) 1.1.3.19 Frequency protection status signals (f<>) 1.1.3.20 Overfluxing protection status signals (V/f) 1.1.3.21 Current transformer supervision status signals (CTS) 1.1.3.22 Broken conductor detection status signals (BC_) 1.1.3.23 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (LIMIT) 1.1.3.24 Phase current monitoring status signals (LIM_) 1.1.3.25 Programmable logic status signals (LOGIC) 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.2.5 Control and testing Local control panel settings enable (HMI)
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 41 48 51 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 62 62 63 63 63 65 65 66 67 67 67 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 69 70
Main rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM1) 2nd rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM2) Ethernet communication control and testing commands (GSSE) Output relay control and testing commands (OUTP) Analog output channel control and testing commands (mA_OP) General control and testing commands (MAIN) Operating data control and testing commands (OP_RC) Monitoring signal control and testing commands (MT_RC) Overload recording control and testing commands (OL_RC) Disturbance recorder control and testing commands (OSCIL) Thermal overload control and testing commands (THRM) Frequency protection control and testing commands (f<>) Overfluxing protection control and testing commands (V/f) Current transformer supervision control and testing commands (CTS) Programmable logic control and testing commands (LOGIC) Operating data rec. Operating data record no. (OP_RC) Monitoring signal record no. (MT_RC)
MR
1.2.6 1.2.7 1.2.8 1.2.9 1.2.10 1.2.11 1.2.12 1.2.13 1.2.14 1.2.15 1.2.16 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2
2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2
FAULT + EVENT RECORD

Fault, event counters General counters (MAIN) Operating data recording counter (OP_RC)
71
71 71 71
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 Monitoring signal recording counter (MT_RC) Overload recording counter (OL_RC) Disturbance recording counter (MT_RC) Definite time overcurrent counter (DTOC) Inverse time overcurrent counter (IDMT) Fault, oload records Overload data acquisition (OL_DA) Fault data acquisition (FT_DA) Frequency acquisition limits (f<>) Disturbance oscillo Overload recording acquisition (OL_RC) Disturbance recording acquisition (OSCIL)
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-3 71 72 72 72 73 73 73 75 79 79 79 80
MR
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-4
MR
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-5
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.1.1
MEASUREMENTS + TESTS
Measurements Analog readings Temperature & DC monitoring measurements (RTDmA) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings RTDmA: Current IDC

004 134
0.00 mA
Read only
24.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 102
Display of the input current. RTDmA: Current IDC p.u.

004 135
0.00 IDC,nom
Read only
1.20 IDC,nom
0.01 IDC,nom
OP Fig. 102
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom. RTDmA: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
004 136
0.00 IDC,nom
Read only
1.20 IDC,nom
0.01 IDC,nom
OP Fig. 102
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom. RTDmA: Scaled Value IDC,lin
004 180
MR
32000 1
OP Fig. 103
-32000
Read only
Display of the scaled linearized value. RTDmA: Temperature

004 133
-40.0 C
Read only
215.0 C
0.1 C
OP Fig. 104
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. RTDmA: Temperature p.u.
004 221
-0.40
Read only
2.15
0.01
OP Fig. 104
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer as a per unit value.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-6 1.1.1.2 Analog output channel measurements (mA_OP) Menu Text
Measurement Range Min. Max.
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings mA_OP: Current A-1

005 100
0.00 mA
Read only
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Current A-2

005 099
0.00 mA
Read only
20.00 mA
0.01 mA
OP Fig. 112
Display of the output current for analog measured value output (A-1: channel 1, A-2: channel 2) 1.1.1.3 General measurements (MAIN) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings MAIN: Date

003 090
dd.mm.yy
OP Fig. 138
Date display.
MR
Note: MAIN: Time

003 091
The date can also be set here. hh:mm:ss

OP Fig. 138
Display of the time of day. Note: The time can also be set here. Standard Time Daylight Saving Time OP Fig. 138
MAIN: Time Switching

003 095
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time. This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or communication interfaces. MAIN: Frequency f
004 040
40.00 Hz
Read only
70.00 Hz
0.01 Hz
OP Fig. 125
Display of system frequency. MAIN: Iph, Max now, a prim

005 101
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph, Max now, b prim

005 102
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. 0A
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-7
Menu Text MAIN: Iph, Max now, c prim

005 103
Max. 25000 A
Step Size 1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph, Max now, d prim

005 115
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity for each end. MAIN: Iph Therm dem a prim
005 162
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph Therm dem b prim

006 162
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph Therm dem c prim

007 162
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph Therm dem d prim

008 162
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of the delayed maximum current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. Alternatively known as a thermal ammeter. MAIN: Iph Therm pk a prim
005 161
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MR
MAIN: Iph Therm pk b prim

006 161
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph Therm pk c prim

007 161
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Iph Therm pk d prim

008 161
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity (thermal maximum demand). MAIN: Current Imin,a prim
005 104
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current Imin,b prim

005 105
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current Imin,c prim

005 106
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-8
Read only
Menu Text MAIN: Current Imin,d prim

005 117
Max. 25000 A
Step Size 1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of the minimum phase current of end a, b, c or d, respectively, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Current IA,a prim.
005 021
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,a prim.

006 021
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,a prim.

007 021
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end a. MAIN: Current IA,b prim.
005 022
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,b prim.

006 022
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MR
MAIN: Current IC,b prim.

007 022
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end b. MAIN: Current IA,c prim.
005 023
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,c prim.

006 023
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,c prim.

007 023
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end c. MAIN: Current IA,d prim.
005 024
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,d prim.

006 024
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,d prim.

007 024
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents as a primary quantity, end d.
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-9
Menu Text MAIN: Current I2 a prim.

005 125
Max. 25000 A
Step Size 1A
MAIN: Current I2 b prim.

005 129
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
MAIN: Current I2 c prim.

005 136
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
MAIN: Current I2 d prim.

005 140
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
Display of negative sequence currents as a primary quantity for each end. MAIN: Current I1 a prim.
005 127
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
MAIN: Current I1 b prim.

005 134
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
MAIN: Current I1 c prim.

005 138
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
MAIN: Current I1 d prim.

005 146
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
Display of positive sequence currents as a primary quantity for each end. MAIN: Current IN,a prim.
005 121
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MR
MAIN: Current IN,b prim.

005 122
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IN,c prim.

005 123
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IN,d prim.

005 124
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 122
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents as a primary quantity for each end. MAIN: Current IY,a prim.
005 131
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IY,b prim.

005 132
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IY,c prim.

005 133
0A
Read only
25000 A
1A
OP Fig. 121
Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T14 as a primary quantity for each end.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-10
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. 0.0 kV
Read only
Menu Text MAIN: Voltage V prim.

005 118
Max. 2500.0 kV
Step Size 0.1 kV

OP Fig. 124
Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as a primary quantity. MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,apu
005 111
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,bpu

005 112
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,cpu

005 113
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Curr Iph,Max now,dpu

005 116
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
Display of the maximum phase current for each end as referred to In, or per unit. MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.a
005 163
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MR
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.b

006 163
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.c

007 163
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal dem.d

008 163
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
Display of the delayed maximum phase current for each end as referred to In. MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peaka
005 160
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peakb

006 160
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peakc

007 160
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
MAIN: Iph pu Thermal peakd

008 160
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119, 120
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current for each end as referred to In.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. 0.00 In
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-11
Menu Text MAIN: Current Imin,a p.u.

005 107
Max. 25.00 In
Step Size 0.01 In

OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current Imin,b p.u.

005 108
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current Imin,c p.u.

005 109
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current Imin,d p.u.

005 118
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
Display of the minimum phase current for each end as referred to In. MAIN: Current IA,a p.u.
005 031
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,a p.u.

006 031
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,a p.u.

007 031
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MR
Display of phase currents, end a, as referred to In. MAIN: Current IA,b p.u.
005 032
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,b p.u.

006 032
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,b p.u.

007 032
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents, end b, as referred to In. MAIN: Current IA,c p.u.
005 033
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IB,c p.u.

006 033
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,c p.u.

007 033
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents, end c, as referred to In. MAIN: Current IA,d p.u.
005 039
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-12
Read only
Menu Text MAIN: Current IB,d p.u.

006 034
Max. 25.00 In
Step Size 0.01 In

OP Fig. 119
MAIN: Current IC,d p.u.

007 034
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 119
Display of phase currents, end d, as referred to In. MAIN: Current I2 a p.u.

005 126
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
MAIN: Current I2 b p.u.

005 130
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
MAIN: Current I2 c p.u.

005 137
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
MAIN: Current I2 d p.u.

005 145
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
Display of negative sequence currents for each end in per unit. MAIN: Current I1 a p.u.
005 128
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
MAIN: Current I1 b p.u.
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
MR
005 135
MAIN: Current I1 c p.u.

005 139
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
MAIN: Current I1 d p.u.

005 147
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
Display of positive sequence currents for each end in per unit. MAIN: Current IN,a p.u.
005 141
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IN,b p.u.

005 142
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IN,c p.u.

005 143
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IN,d p.u.

005 144
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 122
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents for each end as referred to In. MAIN: Current IY,a p.u.
005 151
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 121
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-13
Menu Text MAIN: Current IY,b p.u.

005 152
Max. 25.000 In
Step Size 0.001 In

OP Fig. 121
MAIN: Current IY,c p.u.

005 153
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 121
Display of the current measured by the P63x at transformer T14 for each end as referred to In. MAIN: Iph,max,add p.u.
005 114
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 123
Display of the maximum phase current for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation. MAIN: Iph,min,add p.u.
005 110
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 123
Display of the minimum phase current for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation. MAIN: Current IA,add p.u.
005 038
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 123
MAIN: Current IB,add p.u.

006 038
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 123
MR
MAIN: Current IC,add p.u.

007 038
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
OP Fig. 123
Display of phase currents for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation. MAIN: Curr. I2, add p.u.
005 149
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
Display of negative sequence currents for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation. MAIN: Curr. I1, add p.u.
005 150
0.00 In
Read only
25.00 In
0.01 In
Display of positive sequence currents for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation. MAIN: Current IN,add p.u.
005 155
0.000 In
Read only
25.000 In
0.001 In
OP Fig. 123
Display of residual current for the virtual end, as referred to In. The virtual end is formed according to the selection at MAIN: Current Summation. MAIN: Voltage V p.u.
005 019
0.00 Vn
Read only
25.00 Vn
0.01 Vn
OP Fig. 123
Display of the voltage measured by the P63x, as referred to Vn.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-14
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. -180
Read only
Menu Text MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a

005 089
Max. 180
Step Size 1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a

006 089
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a

007 089
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end a. MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b
005 092
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b

006 092
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b

007 092
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end b.
MR
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end c

005 093
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end c

006 093
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end c

007 093
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end c. MAIN: Angle phi AB, end d
005 095
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end d

006 095
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end d

007 095
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 126
Display of the phase shift between phases, end d. MAIN: Angle phi A, end b-a
005 090
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
MAIN: Angle phi A, end c-a

005 091
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. -180
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-15
Menu Text MAIN: Angle phi A, end d-a

005 094
Max. 180
Step Size 1
OP Fig. 127
Display of the phase shift between ends for phase A. MAIN: Angle phi B, end b-a
006 090
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
MAIN: Angle phi B, end c-a

006 091
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
MAIN: Angle phi B, end d-a

006 094
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
Display of the phase shift between ends for phase B. MAIN: Angle phi C, end b-a
007 090
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
MAIN: Angle phi C, end c-a

007 091
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
MAIN: Angle phi C, end d-a

007 094
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 127
MR
Display of the phase shift between ends for phase C. MAIN: Angle phi NY, end a
005 077
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 128
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end b

005 078
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 128
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end c

005 079
-180
Read only
180
1
OP Fig. 128
Display of the phase shift between the residual current calculated by the P63x from the sum of the phase currents at each end and the current measured at transformer T14. 1.1.1.4 Differential protection measurements (DIFF) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings DIFF: Diff Current 1

005 080
0.000 Iref
Read only
40.000 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
DIFF: Diff Current 2

006 080
0.000 Iref
Read only
40.000 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-16
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. 0.000 Iref
Read only
Menu Text DIFF: Diff Current 3

007 080
Max. 40.000 Iref
Step Size 0.001 Iref

OP Fig. 13
Display of the differential current for each measuring system, as referred to Iref. DIFF: Restrain Current 1
005 081
0.000 Iref
Read only
40.000 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
DIFF: Restrain Current 2

006 081
0.000 Iref
Read only
40.000 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
DIFF: Restrain Current 3

007 081
0.000 Iref
Read only
40.000 Iref
0.001 Iref
OP Fig. 13
Display of the restraining current for each measuring system, as referred to Iref. 1.1.1.5 Restricted earth fault protection measurements (REF_) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings REF_1: Diff. Current, REF_1

008 080
0.00 Iref
Read only
20.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
REF_2: Diff. Current, REF_2
0.00 Iref
Read only
20.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
MR
008 070
REF_3: Diff. Current, REF_3

008 060
0.00 Iref
Read only
20.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
Display of the differential current, as referred to Iref. REF_1: Restrain Curr.,REF_1

008 081
0.00 Iref
Read only
20.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
REF_2: Restrain Curr.,REF_2

008 071
0.00 Iref
Read only
20.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
REF_3: Restrain Curr.,REF_3

008 061
0.00 Iref
Read only
20.00 Iref
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 20
Display of the restraining current, as referred to Iref. 1.1.1.6 Thermal overload protection measurements (THRM) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings THRM1: Status Replica, TH1

004 150
-25000 %
Read only
25000 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Status Replica, TH2

004 175
-25000 %
Read only
25000 % 300 C
1%
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Object Temperat.,TH1

004 151
-40 C
Read only
1 C
OP Fig. 45
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. -40 C
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-17
Menu Text THRM2: Object Temperat.,TH2

004 171
Max. 300 C
Step Size 1 C
OP Fig. 45
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1. THRM1: Coolant Temp. TH1
004 154
-40 C
Read only
200 C 200 C
1 C
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Coolant Temp. TH2

004 174
-40 C
Read only
1 C
OP Fig. 45
Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at THRM1: Select CT Ambient SGx for the coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed: Setting Default Temp. Value: Display of the set temperature value. Setting From PT 100: Setting From 20 mA Input: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer. Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input. 0.0 min
Read only
THRM1: Pre-Trip t. Left,TH1

004 153
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Pre-Trip t. Left,TH2

004 173
0.0 min
Read only
1000.0 min
0.1 min
OP Fig. 45
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function will reach the tripping threshold. THRM1: Therm. Repl. p.u.TH1
004 204
MR
-25.00
Read only
25.00
0.01
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Therm. Repl. p.u.TH2

004 207
-25.00
Read only
25.00
0.01
OP Fig. 45
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function. THRM1: Object Temp. p.u. 1
004 205
-0.04 100C
Read only
0.30 100C 0.30 100C 0.20 100C 0.20 100C
0.01 100C
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Object Temp. p.u. 2

004 208
-0.04 100C
Read only
0.01 100C
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Coolant Temp. p.u. 1

004 206
-0.04 100C
Read only
0.01 100C
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Coolant Temp. p.u. 2

004 209
-0.04 100C
Read only
0.01 100C
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Temp. Offset Repl. 1

004 170
-25000 %
Read only
25000 %
1%
OP Fig. 45
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-18
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. -25000 %
Read only
Menu Text THRM2: Temp. Offset Repl. 2

004 190
Max. 25000 %
Step Size 1%
OP Fig. 45
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards. If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case. 1.1.1.7 Overfluxing protection measurements (V/f) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Analog Readings V/f: Excitation V/f p.u.

004 220
0.00
Read only
10.00
0.01
OP Fig. 55
V/f: Status Replica in %

004 222
0%
Read only
100 %
1%
OP Fig. 60
V/f: Status Replica p.u.
0.00
Read only
1.00
0.01
OP Fig. 60
MR
004 223
1.1.2 1.1.2.1
I.O. status monitor Ethernet GOOSE I/O status signals (GOOSE) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor GOOSE: Out 1 (32) State

See table below for status addresses.
0
Read only
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

Menu Text
GOOSE Out 1 State GOOSE Out 2 State GOOSE Out 3 State GOOSE Out 4 State GOOSE Out 5 State GOOSE Out 6 State GOOSE Out 7 State GOOSE Out 8 State GOOSE Out 9 State GOOSE Out 10 State GOOSE Out 11 State
Address
106 010 106 012 106 014 106 016 106 018 106 020 106 022 106 024 106 026 106 028 106 030
Menu Text
GOOSE Out 12 State GOOSE Out 13 State GOOSE Out 14 State GOOSE Out 15 State GOOSE Out 16 State GOOSE Out 17 State GOOSE Out 18 State GOOSE Out 19 State GOOSE Out 20 State GOOSE Out 21 State GOOSE Out 22 State
Address
106 032 106 034 106 036 106 038 106 040 106 042 106 044 106 046 106 048 106 050 106 052
Menu Text
GOOSE Out 23 State GOOSE Out 24 State GOOSE Out 25 State GOOSE Out 26 State GOOSE Out 27 State GOOSE Out 28 State GOOSE Out 29 State GOOSE Out 30 State GOOSE Out 31 State GOOSE Out 32 State
Address
106 054 106 056 106 058 106 060 106 062 106 064 106 066 106 068 106 070 106 072
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Max.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-19
Menu Text
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor GOOSE: Inp 1 (16) State

0
Read only
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.

Menu Text
GOOSE Inp 1 State GOOSE Inp 2 State GOOSE Inp 3 State GOOSE Inp 4 State GOOSE Inp 5 State GOOSE Inp 6 State GOOSE Inp 7 State GOOSE Inp 8 State GOOSE Inp 9 State GOOSE Inp 10 State GOOSE Inp 11 State
Address
106 200 106 201 106 202 106 203 106 204 106 205 106 206 106 207 106 208 106 209 106 210
Menu Text
GOOSE Inp 12 State GOOSE Inp 13 State GOOSE Inp 14 State GOOSE Inp 15 State GOOSE Inp 16 State
Address
106 211 106 212 106 213 106 214 106 215
1.1.2.2
Ethernet GSSE I/O status signals (GSSE) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor GSSE: Out 1 (32) State

MR
1 1
0
Read only
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.

Menu Text
GSSE Out 1 State GSSE Out 2 State GSSE Out 3 State GSSE Out 4 State GSSE Out 5 State GSSE Out 6 State GSSE Out 7 State GSSE Out 8 State GSSE Out 9 State GSSE Out 10 State GSSE Out 11 State
Address
104 100 104 103 104 106 104 109 104 112 104 115 104 118 104 121 104 124 104 127 104 130
Menu Text
GSSE Out 12 State GSSE Out 13 State GSSE Out 14 State GSSE Out 15 State GSSE Out 16 State GSSE Out 17 State GSSE Out 18 State GSSE Out 19 State GSSE Out 20 State GSSE Out 21 State GSSE Out 22 State
Address
104 133 104 136 104 139 104 142 104 145 104 148 104 151 104 154 104 157 104 160 104 163
Menu Text
GSSE Out 23 State GSSE Out 24 State GSSE Out 25 State GSSE Out 26 State GSSE Out 27 State GSSE Out 28 State GSSE Out 29 State GSSE Out 30 State GSSE Out 31 State GSSE Out 32 State
Address
104 166 104 169 104 172 104 175 104 178 104 181 104 184 104 187 104 190 104 193
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-20
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. 0
Read only
Menu Text GSSE: Inp 1 (32) State

Max. 1 1
Step Size
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.

Menu Text
GSSE Inp 1 State GSSE Inp 2 State GSSE Inp 3 State GSSE Inp 4 State GSSE Inp 5 State GSSE Inp 6 State GSSE Inp 7 State GSSE Inp 8 State GSSE Inp 9 State GSSE Inp 10 State GSSE Inp 11 State
Address
105 000 105 005 105 010 105 015 105 020 105 025 105 030 105 035 105 040 105 045 105 050
Menu Text
GSSE Inp 12 State GSSE Inp 13 State GSSE Inp 14 State GSSE Inp 15 State GSSE Inp 16 State GSSE Inp 17 State GSSE Inp 18 State GSSE Inp 19 State GSSE Inp 20 State GSSE Inp 21 State GSSE Inp 22 State
Address
105 055 105 060 105 065 105 070 105 075 105 080 105 085 105 090 105 095 105 100 105 105
Menu Text
GSSE Inp 23 State GSSE Inp 24 State GSSE Inp 25 State GSSE Inp 26 State GSSE Inp 27 State GSSE Inp 28 State GSSE Inp 29 State GSSE Inp 30 State GSSE Inp 31 State GSSE Inp 32 State
Address
105 110 105 115 105 120 105 125 105 130 105 135 105 140 105 145 105 150 105 155
MR
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.1.2.3 Opto input status signals (INP) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-21
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor INP: State U 701 (2004)

Disabled Low High

Read only
OP Fig. 98
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows: Disabled: Low: High: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input Not energized Energized
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
Menu Text
State U 701 State U 702 State U 703 State U 704 State U 705 State U 706 State U 801 State U 802 State U 803 State U 804 State U 805 State U 806 State U 807 State U 808 State U 809 State U 810 State U 811 State U 812 State U 813 State U 814 State U 815 State U 816 State U 817 State U 818 State U 819 State U 820
Address
152 108 152 111 152 114 152 117 152 120 152 123 184 001 184 005 184 009 184 013 184 017 184 021 184 025 184 029 184 033 184 037 184 041 184 045 184 049 184 053 184 057 184 061 184 065 184 069 184 073 184 077
Menu Text
Address
184 081 184 085 184 089 184 093 152 144 152 147 152 150 152 153 152 162 152 165 152 168 152 171 152 174 152 177 152 198 152 201 152 204 152 207 190 001 190 005 190 009 190 013 190 017 190 021 190 025 190 029
Menu Text
Address
190 033 190 037 190 041 190 045 190 049 190 053 190 057 190 061 190 065 190 069 190 073 190 077 190 081 190 085 190 089 190 093 192 001 192 005 192 009 192 013 192 017 192 021 153 086 153 089 153 092 153 095
MR
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-22 1.1.2.4 Output relay status signals (OUTP) Menu Text
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor OUTP: State K 701 (2008)

Disabled Enabled
Read only
OP Fig. 105
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows: Disabled: Low: High: No functions are assigned to the output relay The output relay is not energized The output relay is energized
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
Menu Text
State K 701 State K 702 State K 703 State K 704 State K 705 State K 706 State K 707
Address
150 144 150 147 150 150 150 153 150 156 150 159 150 162 150 165 150 168 150 171 150 192 150 195 150 198 150 201 150 204 150 207 150 210
Menu Text
State K 908 State K 1001 State K 1002 State K 1003 State K 1004 State K 1005 State K 1006 State K 1007 State K 1008 State K 1201 State K 1202 State K 1601 State K 1602 State K 1603 State K 1604 State K 1605 State K 1606
Address
150 213 150 216 150 219 150 222 150 225 150 228 150 231 150 234 150 237 151 008 151 011 171 001 171 005 171 009 171 013 171 017 171 021
Menu Text
State K 1607 State K 1608 State K 1801 State K 1802 State K 1803 State K 1804 State K 1805 State K 1806 State K 2001 State K 2002 State K 2003 State K 2004 State K 2005 State K 2006 State K 2007 State K 2008
Address
171 025 171 029 173 001 173 005 173 009 173 013 173 017 173 021 151 200 151 203 151 206 151 209 151 212 151 215 151 218 151 221
MR
State K 708 State K 801 State K 802 State K 901 State K 902 State K 903 State K 904 State K 905 State K 906 State K 907
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.1.2.5 LED status signals (LED) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-23
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\I.O. Status Monitor LED: State H 2 (16)

Disabled Enabled
Read only
OP Fig. 113
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows: Disabled: Enabled: The LED indicator is not energized The LED indicator is energized
Address
085 000 085 003 085 006 085 009 085 012
Menu Text
State H 2 State H 3 State H 4 State H 5 State H 6
Menu Text
Address
085 015 085 018 085 021 085 024 085 027
Menu Text
Address
085 030 085 033 085 036 085 039 085 042
1.1.3 1.1.3.1
Log. state signals Local control panel status signals (HMI) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals HMI: Illumination on EXT

037 101
MR
-
No
Read only
Yes
Binary input/other logic is asserting switch-on of the LCD backlight. 1.1.3.2 Rear port communication status signals (COMM1) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals COMM1: Command Block. EXT

003 173
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 87
Binary input/other logic is asserting a block on all command (remote) operations for COMM port 1. Prevents remote control via COMM1. COMM1: Sig/meas. Block EXT
037 074
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
Binary input/other logic is asserting a block on all transmission of data/measurements via COMM1. COMM1: Command Blocking
003 174
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 87
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-24
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. No
Read only
Menu Text COMM1: Sig/meas. val.Block

037 075
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 88, 89, 90
The two addresses above indicate the overall status of read (signal/measured value) and write (command) permission via protocol, for COMM1. COMM1: IEC 870-5-103
003 219
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 88
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101

003 218
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 89
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS

003 221
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 90
COMM1: MODBUS
003 223
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 91
COMM1: DNP3
003 230
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 92
COMM1: COURIER
103 041
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 93
Addresses to indicate the protocol in operation for COMMS port 1. 1.1.3.3 Ethernet communication status signals (IEC/GOOSE/GSSE) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
MR
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals IEC: Comm. Link Faulty

105 180
No
Read only
Yes
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC address is missing, or there is a non-plausible setting combination applied. GOOSE: IED Link Faulty
107 250
No
Read only
Yes
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received. GSSE: IED Link Faulty
105 181
No
Read only
Yes
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GSSE the GSSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.1.3.4 IRIG-B time synchronization status signals (IRIGB) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-25
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals IRIGB: Enabled

023 201
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 97
IRIGB: Synchron. Ready

023 202
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 97
IRIG-B time synchronizing signals are being received correctly. 1.1.3.5 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (RTDmA) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals RTDmA: Enabled

035 008
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 99
RTDmA: PT100 Faulty

040 190
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 104
RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input

040 191
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 102
MR
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA inp.

040 192
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 102
1.1.3.6
Output relay status signals (OUTP) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals OUTP: Block Outp.Rel. EXT

040 014
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 105
Binary input/other logic is asserting a block on operation of output contacts possibly as required for a commissioning/test operation. OUTP: Reset Latch. EXT
040 015
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 105
Binary input/other logic is acting to reset latched output contacts. OUTP: Outp. Relays Blocked
021 015
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 105
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-26
Read only
Menu Text OUTP: Latching Reset

040 088
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 105
The two addresses above indicate the global status of relay contact blocking, and the command to reset latched contacts. 1.1.3.7 Analog output channel status signals (mA_OP) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals mA_OP: Enabled

037 102
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 107
mA_OP: Outp. Enabled EXT

036 085
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 108
mA_OP: Reset Output EXT

036 087
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 109
mA_OP: Output Reset
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 109
MR
037 117
mA_OP: Valid BCD Value

037 050
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110
mA_OP: 1-digit Bit 0 (BCD)

037 051
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110

037 052
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110

037 053
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110

037 054
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110

037 055
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110

037 056
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110

037 057
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-27
Menu Text mA_OP: 10-digit Bit 3 (BCD)

037 058
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 110
mA_OP: 100-dig. Bit 0 (BCD)

037 059
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110
mA_OP: 100-dig. Bit 1 (BCD)

037 060
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 110
Previous addresses indicate the current loop output of units, tens and hundreds for binary-coded decimal. mA_OP: Value A-1 Valid
069 014
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Value A-2 Valid

069 015
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Value A-1 Output

037 118
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 112
mA_OP: Value A-2 Output

037 119
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 112
MR
1.1.3.8
General status signals (MAIN) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2

036 174
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 17
MAIN: Trip sig.REF2 & REF3

036 175
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 17
MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF3

036 176
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 17
Trip signals for application of REF on auto-transformers. MAIN: Phase Reversal Activ
036 220
No
Read only
Yes
Indicates whether phase swapping for CTs is in force. MAIN: Enable Protect. EXT No Yes Not Configured
Read only
OP Fig. 129
003 027
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-28
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. No Yes Not Configured
Read only
Menu Text
Max. -
Step Size
MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT
003 026
OP Fig. 129
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT

040 060
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 131

040 061
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 131

040 116
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 131

040 117
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 131
MAIN: Reset Latch.Trip EXT

040 138
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Block. EXT
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MR
036 045
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT

004 061
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 47, 53
An auxiliary contact from an external MCB indicates that the VT input may be unreliable. MAIN: Switch Dyn Param.EXT
036 033
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 130
MAIN: Man. Trip Cmd. EXT

037 018
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Test Mode EXT

037 070
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 141
Binary input/other logic is being used to signal via IEC-60870-5-103 protocol that the relay is undergoing some kind of testing operation, and the remote operators need to be notified. MAIN: Reset Indicat. EXT
065 001
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 140
MAIN: Min-Pulse Clock EXT

060 060
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 138
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-29
Menu Text MAIN: Prot. Ext. Enabled

003 028
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 129
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Disabled

038 046
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 129
MAIN: Protect. Not Ready

004 060
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 132
MAIN: Test Mode

037 071
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 141
MAIN: Blocked/Faulty
004 065
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 132
MAIN: CT Fail Alarm

036 155
No
Read only
Yes
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked

021 013
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Latch. Trip c Reset

040 139
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MR
MAIN: Manual Trip Signal

034 017
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal

036 251
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1

036 005
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135

036 023
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135

036 108
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135

036 109
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 1

036 071
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-30
Read only
Menu Text MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 2

036 022
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 135

036 113
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135

036 114
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 135
MAIN: General Start

036 000
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 133
MAIN: Dynam. Setts. Active

040 090
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 130
MAIN: Disabled
060 000
No
Read only
Yes
MAIN: Disabled
061 000
No
Read only
Yes
Unused.
MR
1.1.3.9
MAIN: Auxiliary Address

038 000
No
Read only
Yes
Setting group selection status signals (GROUP) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals GROUP: Control Via User EXT

036 101
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142
GROUP: Activate Grp 1 EXT
No Yes Not Configured

Read only
OP Fig. 142
065 002

Read only
OP Fig. 142
065 003

Read only
OP Fig. 142
065 004
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-31
Menu Text
Max. -
Step Size
065 005
OP Fig. 142
GROUP: Control Via user

036 102
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142
GROUP: Ext.sel. Settg. Grp
No Set Grp Selected Setting Group SG1 Setting Group SG2 Setting Group SG3 Setting Group SG4
Read only
003 061
OP Fig. 142
GROUP: Grp1 Activated Ext.

036 094
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142

036 095
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142

036 096
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142
MR

036 097
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142
GROUP: Actual Setting Group
Setting Group SG1 Setting Group SG2 Setting Group SG3 Setting Group SG4
Read only
003 062
OP Fig. 142
GROUP: Group 1 Active

036 090
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142

036 091
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142

036 092
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142

036 093
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 142
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-32 1.1.3.10 Self testing and diagnostics status signals (CHECK) Menu Text
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals CHECK: Faulty DSP

093 127
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. DSP

093 128
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Alarm (LED)

036 070
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 143
Alarm configured for LED H3. CHECK: Alarm (Relay)

036 100
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 143
Alarm configured for an output relay. CHECK: Warm Restart Exec.

041 202
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Cold Restart Exec.

041 201
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Cold Restart
No
Read only
Yes
MR
093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the memory (NOVRAM). CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update
093 025
No
Read only
Yes
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update. CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure
090 019
No
Read only
Yes
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked. CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty
041 200
No
Read only
Yes
Multiple signal: output relay defective. CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail

093 040
No
Read only
Yes
The hardware clock has failed. CHECK: Battery Failure

090 010
No
Read only
Yes
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery inside power supply module V. CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded
096 121
No
Read only
Yes
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-33
Menu Text CHECK: +15V Supply Faulty

093 081
Max. Yes -
Step Size
The + 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. CHECK: +24V Supply Faulty
093 082
No
Read only
Yes
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty
093 080
No
Read only
Yes
The -15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value. CHECK: Wrong Module Slot 1 (21)
See table below for measurement addresses.
No
Read only
Yes
Module in wrong slot.

Setting
Wrong Module Slot 1 Wrong Module Slot 2 Wrong Module Slot 3 Wrong Module Slot 4 Wrong Module Slot 5 Wrong Module Slot 6 Wrong Module Slot 7
Address
096 100 096 101 096 102 096 103 096 104 096 105 096 106
Setting
Address
096 107 096 108 096 109 096 110 096 111 096 112 096 113
Setting
Address
096 114 096 115 096 116 096 117 096 118 096 119 096 120
MR
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot 1 (21)

No
Read only
Yes
Defective module in slot x.

Setting
Defect.Module Slot 1 Defect.Module Slot 2 Defect.Module Slot 3 Defect.Module Slot 4 Defect.Module Slot 5 Defect.Module Slot 6 Defect.Module Slot 7
Address
097 000 097 001 097 002 097 003 097 004 097 005 097 006
Setting
Defect.Module Slot 8 Defect.Module Slot 9 Defect.Module Slot10 Defect.Module Slot11 Defect.Module Slot12 Defect.Module Slot13 Defect.Module Slot14
Address
097 007 097 008 097 009 097 010 097 011 097 012 097 013
Setting
Defect.Module Slot15 Defect.Module Slot16 Defect.Module Slot17 Defect.Module Slot18 Defect.Module Slot19 Defect.Module Slot20 Defect.Module Slot21
Address
097 014 097 015 097 016 097 017 097 018 097 019 097 020
CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty

093 070
No
Read only
Yes
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected during device startup. CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty
093 071
No
Read only
Yes
RAM fault on communication module A.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-34
Read only
Menu Text CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty

093 110
Max. Yes -
Step Size
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM. CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty
093 111
No
Read only
Yes
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module. CHECK: Error K 701 (2008)
No
Read only
Yes
Self checking error indication of output relays. Output relay K xxx defective.
Setting
Error K 701 Error K 702 Error K 703 Error K 704 Error K 705 Error K 706 Error K 707 Error K 708
Address
097 078 097 079 097 080 097 081 097 082 097 083 097 084 097 085 097 086 097 087 097 094 097 095 097 096 097 097 097 098 097 099 097 100
Setting
Error K 908 Error K 1001 Error K 1002 Error K 1003 Error K 1004 Error K 1005 Error K 1006 Error K 1007 Error K 1008 Error K 1201 Error K 1202 Error K 1601 Error K 1602 Error K 1603 Error K 1604 Error K 1605 Error K 1606
Address
097 101 097 102 097 103 097 104 097 105 097 106 097 107 097 108 097 109 097 118 097 119 097 150 097 151 097 152 097 153 097 154 097 155
Setting
Error K 1607 Error K 1608 Error K 1801 Error K 1802 Error K 1803 Error K 1804 Error K 1805 Error K 1806 Error K 2001 Error K 2002 Error K 2003 Error K 2004 Error K 2005 Error K 2006 Error K 2007 Error K 2008
Address
097 156 097 157 097 166 097 167 097 168 097 169 097 170 097 171 097 182 097 183 097 184 097 185 097 186 097 187 097 188 097 189
MR
Error K 801 Error K 802 Error K 901 Error K 902 Error K 903 Error K 904 Error K 905 Error K 906 Error K 907
CHECK: Undefined Op Code

093 010
No
Read only
Yes
Undefined operation code, i.e. software error. CHECK: Invalid Op

093 011
No
Read only
Yes
Invalid arithmetic operation, i.e. software error. CHECK: Undefined Interrupt

093 012
No
Read only
Yes
Undefined Interrupt, i.e. software error. CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst.

093 013
No
Read only
Yes
Interrupt of the operating system.
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-35
Menu Text CHECK: Protection Failure

090 021
Max. Yes -
Step Size
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routine. It has detected an error. CHECK: Checksum Sett Error
090 003
No
Read only
Yes
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been detected. CHECK: Clock Sync. Error
093 041
No
Read only
Yes
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than 10 ms. CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM
093 026
No
Read only
Yes
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted. CHECK: Overflow MT_RC
090 012
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 145
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow. CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block.
093 015
No
Read only
Yes
MR
Software overload. CHECK: Inval. SW vers.comm.

093 075
No
Read only
Yes
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded. CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y
093 113
No
Read only
Yes
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module has been downloaded. CHECK: Time-out Module Y
093 112
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: M.c.b. Trip V

098 000
No
Read only
Yes
The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped. CHECK: CT Fail Alarm

091 018
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end a

091 026
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end b

091 027
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end c

091 028
No
Read only
Yes
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-36
Read only
Menu Text CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end d

091 029
Max. Yes -
Step Size
CHECK: Invalid Charact. V/f

091 011
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-1

093 114
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 112
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-2

093 115
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 112
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of analog I/O module Y. CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC
093 116
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 102
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O module Y. CHECK: PT100 open Circuit
098 024
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 104
The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance thermometer.
MR
CHECK: Overload 20 mA input

098 025
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 102
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded. CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA inp.
098 026
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 102
The P63x has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input. CHECK: Setting Error f<>
098 028
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
The over/underfrequency protection function has been set to "overfrequency" (by way of the settings for operate threshold and nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f with Delta f/Delta t operating mode. CHECK: Iref, a Inval. Range
091 007
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
CHECK: Iref, b Inval. Range

091 008
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
CHECK: Iref, c Inval. Range

091 009
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
CHECK: Iref, d Inval. Range

091 016
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
The reference current determined by the P63x for differential protection is not within the permissible range.
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-37
Menu Text CHECK: Output 30

098 053
Max. Yes -
Step Size
CHECK: Output 31
098 055
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Output 32
098 057
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Output 30 (t)

098 054
No
Read only
Yes

098 056
No
Read only
Yes

098 058
No
Read only
Yes
CHECK: Matching Fail. end a

091 000
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
CHECK: Matching Fail. end b

091 001
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
CHECK: Matching Fail. end c

091 002
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
CHECK: Matching Fail. end d

091 017
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
MR
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is outside the permissible range. CHECK: Ratio mtch.Fact.inv.
091 004
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the differential protection function is above the permissible range. CHECK: 2nd Match.Fact. inv.
091 006
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 2
The medium amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is lower than permitted. CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_1
091 105
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_2

091 115
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_3

091 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
The reference current determined by the P63x for restricted earth fault protection is not within the permissible range. CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_1
091 101
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-38
Read only
Menu Text CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_2

091 111
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_3

091 121
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the restricted earth fault protection function is outside the permissible range. CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1
091 102
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_2

091 112
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_3

091 122
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the restricted earth fault protection function is outside the permissible range. CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_1
091 103
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_2

091 113
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_3
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
MR
091 123
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the restricted earth fault protection function is above the permissible range. CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_1
091 104
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_2

091 114
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_3

091 124
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 15
The lowest amplitude matching factor of the restricted earth fault protection function is lower than permitted. CHECK: CTA Error THRM1
098 036
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 44
CHECK: CTA Error THRM2

098 037
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 44
Faulty coolant temperature acquisition. CHECK: Setting Error THRM1

098 038
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
CHECK: Setting Error THRM2

098 039
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value. This setting is not valid.
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-39
Menu Text CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync

093 120
Max. Yes -
Step Size
Function MAIN: Min-Pulse Clock EXT has been configured to a binary input of analog I/O module Y. 1.1.3.11 Overload recording status signals (OL_RC) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals OL_RC: Record. in Progress

035 003
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 148
OL_RC: Overl. Mem. Overflow

035 007
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 149
1.1.3.12 Disturbance recorder status signals (OSCIL) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals OSCIL: Trigger EXT

036 089
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 155
MR
OSCIL: Trigger
037 076
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 155
OSCIL: Id> Triggered

035 018
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 155
OSCIL: IR> Triggered

035 019
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 155
OSCIL: Record. in Progress

035 000
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 155
OSCIL: System Disturb. Runn

035 004
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 155
OSCIL: Fault Mem. Overflow

035 001
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 156
OSCIL: Faulty Time Tag

035 002
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 149
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-40 1.1.3.13 Differential protection status signals (DIFF) Menu Text
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals DIFF: Enabled

041 210
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 1
DIFF: Starting
041 106
No
Read only
Yes
Instantaneous start indication of the differential protection. DIFF: Meas System 1 Trigg.
041 124
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Meas System 2 Trigg.

041 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Meas System 3 Trigg.

041 126
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Id>> Triggered

041 221
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Id>>> Triggered

041 222
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Harm. Block 1 Trigg.
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 10
MR
041 118

041 119
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 10

041 120
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 10
DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 Trigg.

041 121
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 12

041 122
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 12

041 123
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 12
DIFF: Sat.Discr. 1 Trigg.

041 115
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 11

041 116
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 11

041 117
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 11
DIFF: Trip Signal

041 075
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Trip Signal 1

041 002
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-41
Menu Text DIFF: Trip Signal 2

041 003
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 9
DIFF: Trip Signal 3

041 004
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 9
1.1.3.14 Restricted earth fault protection status signals (REF_) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals REF_1: Enabled

041 132
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 14
REF_2: Enabled
041 133
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 14
REF_3: Enabled
041 134
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 14
REF_1: Trip Signal

041 005
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 17
REF_2: Trip Signal

041 016
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 133
MR
REF_3: Trip Signal

041 067
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 133
1.1.3.15 Definite time overcurrent protection status signals (DTOC) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT

035 120
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Block. tI> EXT

035 150
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Block. tI> EXT

035 237
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT

035 121
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 151
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 238
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-42
Read only
Menu Text DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT

035 122
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Block. tI>>> EXT

035 229
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Block. tI>>> EXT

035 239
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Block. tI2> EXT

036 141
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 161
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 181
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Block. tI2>> EXT

036 142
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 162
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 182
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
MR
DTOC1: Block. tI2>>> EXT

036 143
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 163
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 183
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT

035 123
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 230
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 240
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT

035 124
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 231
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 241
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT

035 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: Block. tIN>>> EXT

035 232
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-43
Menu Text DTOC3: Block. tIN>>> EXT

035 242
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Enabled
035 102
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 22
DTOC2: Enabled
035 132
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 22
DTOC3: Enabled
035 136
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 22
DTOC1: General Start

035 128
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26

035 234
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26

035 244
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
DTOC1: tGS Elapsed

035 129
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
DTOC2: tGS Elapsed

035 245
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
DTOC3: tGS Elapsed

035 250
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
MR
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Starting A
035 104
No
Read only
Yes
DTOC2: Starting A
035 134
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Starting A
035 180
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Starting B
035 105
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Starting B
035 135
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Starting B
035 185
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Starting C
035 106
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Starting C
035 141
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Starting C
035 186
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Starting N
035 107
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-44
Read only
Menu Text DTOC2: Starting N

035 146
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: Starting N
035 187
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Starting I>

035 108
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Starting I>

035 138
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Starting I>

035 188
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Starting I>>

035 109
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC2: Starting I>>

035 139
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC3: Starting I>>

035 189
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Starting I>>>

035 110
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
MR

035 149
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 190
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI>

035 114
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 144
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 205
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI>>

035 115
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 145
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 206
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI>>>

035 116
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 158
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23

035 208
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 23
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-45
Menu Text DTOC1: Starting I2

036 144
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: Starting I2
036 164
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: Starting I2
036 184
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Starting I2>

036 145
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: Starting I2>

036 165
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: Starting I2>

036 185
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Starting I2>>

036 146
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 166
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 186
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Starting I2>>>

036 147
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
MR
OP Fig. 24

036 167
No
Read only
Yes

036 187
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: tI2> Elapsed

036 148
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: tI2> Elapsed

036 168
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC3: tI2> Elapsed

036 188
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: tI2>> Elapsed

036 149
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 169
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 189
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: tI2>>> Elapsed

036 150
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC2: tI2>>> Elapsed

036 170
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-46
Read only
Menu Text DTOC3: tI2>>> Elapsed

036 190
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI2>

036 151
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 171
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 191
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI2>>

036 152
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 172
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 192
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Trip Signal tI2>>>

036 153
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24

036 173
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
MR

036 193
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 24
DTOC1: Starting IN>

035 111
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC2: Starting IN>

035 152
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: Starting IN>

035 202
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Starting IN>>

035 112
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 153
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 203
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Starting IN>>>

035 113
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 154
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 204
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: tIN> Elapsed

035 117
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-47
Menu Text DTOC2: tIN> Elapsed

035 159
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 25
DTOC3: tIN> Elapsed

035 209
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: tIN>> Elapsed

035 118
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 225
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 235
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: tIN>>> Elapsed

035 119
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 226
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 236
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Trip Signal tIN>

035 126
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 233
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
MR
OP Fig. 25

035 243
No
Read only
Yes
DTOC1: Trip Signal tIN>>

035 130
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 246
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 251
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
DTOC1: Trip Signal tIN>>>

035 131
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 247
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25

035 252
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 25
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-48 1.1.3.16 Inverse time overcurrent protection status signals (IDMT) Menu Text
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals IDMT1: Block. tIref,Ph> EXT

038 114
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: Block. tIref,Ph> EXT

038 134
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Block. tIref,Ph> EXT

038 154
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Block. tIref,I2> EXT

038 178
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 188
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 198
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT

038 124
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
MR
038 144

038 164
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
IDMT1: Enabled
038 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 29
IDMT2: Enabled
038 145
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 29
IDMT3: Enabled
038 165
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 29
IDMT1: General Start

038 115
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26

038 135
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26

038 155
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
IDMT1: tGS Elapsed

038 116
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
IDMT2: tGS Elapsed

038 136
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
IDMT3: tGS Elapsed

038 156
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 26
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-49
Menu Text IDMT1: Starting Iref,Ph>

038 110
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: Starting Iref,Ph>

038 130
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT3: Starting Iref,Ph>

038 150
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Starting Iref,A>

038 117
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 137
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 157
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Starting Iref,B>

038 118
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 138
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 158
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Starting Iref,C>

038 119
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
MR
OP Fig. 34

038 139
No
Read only
Yes

038 159
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: tIref, Ph> Elapsed

038 111
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 131
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 151
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Hold Time Ph Running

038 112
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 132
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34

038 152
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Memory Ph Clear

038 113
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
IDMT2: Memory Ph Clear

038 133
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 34
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-50
Read only
Menu Text IDMT3: Memory Ph Clear

038 153
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 34
IDMT1: Starting Iref, I2>

038 173
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 183
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 193
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
IDMT1: tIref, I2> Elapsed

038 174
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 184
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 194
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
IDMT1: Trip Sig. tIref, I2>

038 177
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 187
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
MR

038 197
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
IDMT1: Hold Time I2 Runn.

038 175
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 185
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 195
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
IDMT1: Memory I2 Clear

038 176
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 186
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35

038 196
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 35
IDMT1: Starting Iref,N>

038 120
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 140
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 160
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
IDMT1: tIref,N> Elapsed

038 121
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-51
Menu Text IDMT2: tIref,N> Elapsed

038 141
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 36
IDMT3: tIref,N> Elapsed

038 161
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
IDMT1: Trip Signal tIref,N>

038 126
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 146
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 166
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
IDMT1: Hold Time N Running

038 122
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 142
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 162
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
IDMT1: Memory N Clear

038 123
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36

038 143
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 36
MR
OP Fig. 36

038 163
No
Read only
Yes
1.1.3.17 Thermal overload protection status signals (THRM) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals THRM1: Replica Block EXT

039 150
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Replica Block EXT

039 170
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: CTA Error EXT

039 152
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 44
THRM2: CTA Error EXT

039 172
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 44
THRM1: Reset Replica EXT

039 122
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 46
THRM2: Reset Replica EXT

039 182
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 46
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-52
Read only
Menu Text THRM1: Enabled

039 129
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 41
THRM2: Enabled
039 189
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 41
THRM1: Not Ready

039 154
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 41
THRM2: Not Ready

039 174
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 41
THRM1: Reset Replica

039 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 46
THRM2: Reset Replica

039 185
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 46
THRM1: Buffer Empty

039 128
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 46
THRM2: Buffer Empty

039 188
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 46
THRM1: CTA Error

039 127
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 44
MR
THRM2: CTA Error

039 187
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 44
THRM1: Starting k*Iref>

039 151
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Starting k*Iref>

039 171
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Within Pre-trip Time

039 153
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Within Pre-trip Time

039 173
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Alarm
039 124
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Alarm
039 184
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Trip Signal

039 123
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Trip Signal

039 183
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM1: Setting Error,Block.

039 126
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
THRM2: Setting Error,Block.

039 186
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 45
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.1.3.18 Under/overvoltage protection status signals (V<>) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-53
Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals V<>: Blocking tV> EXT

041 068
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 48
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT

041 069
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 48
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT

041 070
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT

041 071
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: Enabled
040 066
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 47
V<>: Ready
042 003
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 47
V<>: Not Ready

042 004
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 47
V<>: Starting V>

041 030
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 48
V<>: Starting V>>

041 096
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 48
MR
OP Fig. 48
V<>: tV> Elapsed

041 034
No
Read only
Yes
V<>: tV>> Elapsed

041 035
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 48
V<>: Starting V<

041 037
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: Starting V<<

041 099
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: tV< Elapsed

041 041
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: tV< Elapsed & Vmin>

041 026
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: tV< Elaps. Transient

042 023
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: Fault V<

041 110
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: tV<< Elapsed

041 042
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: tV<< Elapsed & Vmin>

041 066
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-54
Read only
Menu Text V<>: tV<< Elapsed Trans.

042 025
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 49
V<>: Fault V<<

041 112
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
V<>: tV</<< Elaps. Trans.

042 007
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 49
1.1.3.19 Frequency protection status signals (f<>) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals f<>: Blocking f1 EXT

042 103
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Blocking f2 EXT

042 104
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 105
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
MR
042 106
f<>: Enabled
042 100
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 50
f<>: Ready
042 101
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 50
f<>: Not Ready

042 140
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 50
f<>: Blocked by V<

042 102
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 51
f<>: Starting f1
042 107
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Starting f2
042 115
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Starting f3
042 123
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Starting f4
042 131
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Starting f1/df1

042 108
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 116
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-55
Menu Text f<>: Starting f3/df3

042 124
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 53

042 132
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta f1 Triggered

042 109
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 117
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 133
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Delta t1 Elapsed

042 110
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 118
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 126
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53

042 134
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
MR
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Trip Signal f1

042 111
No
Read only
Yes
f<>: Trip Signal f2

042 119
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Trip Signal f3

042 127
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
f<>: Trip Signal f4

042 135
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 53
1.1.3.20 Overfluxing protection status signals (V/f) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals V/f: Block. tV/f> EXT

035 196
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
V/f: Block. Replica EXT

035 197
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
V/f: Block. tV/f>> EXT

035 199
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-56
Read only
Menu Text V/f: Reset Replica EXT

035 182
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 61
V/f: Enabled
041 229
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 57
V/f: Reset Replica

035 184
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
V/f: Starting V/f>

041 230
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 56
V/f: tV/f> Elapsed

041 231
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 56
V/f: Starting V/f(t)

041 232
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
V/f: Trip Signal tV/f(t)

041 233
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
V/f: Starting V/f>>

041 234
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 57
V/f: tV/f>> Elapsed

041 235
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 57
MR
V/f: Buffer Empty

041 236
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 60
1.1.3.21 Current transformer supervision status signals (CTS) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals CTS: Blocking EXT

036 160
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 65
CTS: Reset Latching EXT

036 158
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 69
CTS: Enabled
036 080
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 64
CTS: Reset Latching

036 159
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 69
CTS: Operated (Updating)

036 099
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 69
CTS: Operated (Latched)

036 202
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 69
CTS: Idiff> (CTS) Active

036 203
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 69
Indication of whether the pick-up threshold of the differential has been moved from Idiff> to Idiff> (CTS), upon detection of a CT failure.
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-57
Menu Text CTS: Alarm End a (Updat.)

036 081
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End b (Updat.)

036 082
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End c (Updat.)

036 083
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End d (Updat.)

036 084
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End a (Latch.)

036 204
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End b (Latch.)

036 206
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End c (Latch.)

036 208
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End d (Latch.)

036 210
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End a

036 205
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End b

036 207
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
MR
OP Fig. 67
CTS: Alarm End c

036 209
No
Read only
Yes
CTS: Alarm End d

036 211
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 67
1.1.3.22 Broken conductor detection status signals (BC_) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals BC_1: Blocking EXT

036 213
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_2: Blocking EXT

036 215
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_3: Blocking EXT

036 217
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_4: Blocking EXT

036 219
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_1: Enabled
036 194
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 62
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-58
Read only
Menu Text BC_2: Enabled

036 195
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 62
BC_3: Enabled
036 196
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 62
BC_4: Enabled
036 197
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 62
BC_1: CT Fail Alarm

036 198
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_2: CT Fail Alarm

036 199
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_3: CT Fail Alarm

036 200
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_4: CT Fail Alarm

036 201
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_1: Starting
036 212
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_2: Starting
036 214
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
MR
BC_3: Starting
036 216
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
BC_4: Starting
036 218
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 63
1.1.3.23 Temperature & DC monitoring status signals (LIMIT) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals LIMIT: Enabled

040 074
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>

040 180
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>>

040 181
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> Elapsed

040 182
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> Elapsed

040 183
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<

040 184
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-59
Menu Text LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<<

040 185
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< Elapsed

040 186
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< Elapsed

040 187
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 71
LIMIT: Starting T>

040 170
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: Starting T>>

040 171
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: tT> Elapsed

040 172
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: tT>> Elapsed

040 173
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: Starting T<

040 174
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: Starting T<<

040 175
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: tT< Elapsed

040 176
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 72
MR
OP Fig. 72
LIMIT: tT<< Elapsed

040 177
No
Read only
Yes
1.1.3.24 Phase current monitoring status signals (LIM_) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals LIM_1: Enabled

040 123
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: Enabled
040 125
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: Enabled
040 127
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_1: tI> Elapsed

040 122
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: tI> Elapsed

040 124
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI> Elapsed

040 126
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-60
Read only
Menu Text LIM_1: tI>> Elapsed

037 201
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: tI>> Elapsed

038 201
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI>> Elapsed

039 201
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_1: tI< Elapsed

037 202
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: tI< Elapsed

038 202
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI< Elapsed

039 202
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_1: tI<< Elapsed

037 203
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_2: tI<< Elapsed

038 203
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
LIM_3: tI<< Elapsed

039 203
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 74
MR
1.1.3.25 Programmable logic status signals (LOGIC) Menu Text Measurement Range Min. Max. Step Size
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals LOGIC: Input 1 (40) EXT

See table below for status addresses. Menu Text
Input 1 EXT Input 2 EXT Input 3 EXT Input 4 EXT Input 5 EXT Input 6 EXT Input 7 EXT Input 8 EXT Input 9 EXT Input 10 EXT Input 11 EXT Input 12 EXT Input 13 EXT Input 14 EXT
No
Read only Menu Text
Input 15 EXT Input 16 EXT Input 17 EXT Input 18 EXT Input 19 EXT Input 20 EXT Input 21 EXT Input 22 EXT Input 23 EXT Input 24 EXT Input 25 EXT Input 26 EXT Input 27 EXT Input 28 EXT
Yes
OP Fig. 76
Address
034 000 034 001 034 002 034 003 034 004 034 005 034 006 034 007 034 008 034 009 034 010 034 011 034 012 034 013
Address
034 014 034 015 034 086 034 087 034 088 034 089 034 090 034 091 034 092 034 093 034 094 034 095 034 096 034 097
Menu Text
Input 29 EXT Input 30 EXT Input 31 EXT Input 32 EXT Input 33 EXT Input 34 EXT Input 35 EXT Input 36 EXT Input 37 EXT Input 38 EXT Input 39 EXT Input 40 EXT
Address
034 098 034 099 034 100 034 101 034 102 034 103 034 104 034 105 034 106 034 107 034 108 034 109
Read only Menu Text
Set 4 EXT Set 5 EXT Set 6 EXT
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-61
Menu Text
Max. -
Step Size
LOGIC: Set 1 (8) EXT

Set 1 EXT Set 2 EXT Set 3 EXT
OP Fig. 76 Address
034 054 034 055 034 056
Address
034 051 034 052 034 053
Menu Text
Set 7 EXT Set 8 EXT
Address
034 057 034 058
LOGIC: Reset 1 (8) EXT

Reset 1 EXT Reset 2 EXT Reset 3 EXT

Read only Menu Text
Reset 4 EXT Reset 5 EXT Reset 6 EXT
OP Fig. 76
Address
034 059 034 060 034 061
Address
034 062 034 063 034 064
Menu Text
Reset 7 EXT Reset 8 EXT
Address
034 065 034 066
LOGIC: 1 (8) has been set

1 has been set 2 has been set 3 has been set
No
Read only Menu Text
4 has been set 5 has been set 6 has been set
Yes
OP Fig. 76
Address
034 067 034 068 034 069
Address
034 070 034 071 034 072
Menu Text
7 has been set 8 has been set
Address
034 073 034 074
MR
LOGIC: 1 (8) set Externally

1 set Externally 2 set Externally 3 set Externally
No
Read only Menu Text
4 set Externally 5 set Externally 6 set Externally
Yes
OP Fig. 76
Address
034 075 034 076 034 077
Address
034 078 034 079 034 080
Menu Text
7 set Externally 8 set Externally
Address
034 081 034 082
LOGIC: Enabled
034 046
No
Read only
Yes
OP Fig. 76
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-62
Read only Menu Text
Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16 Output 17 Output 18 Output 19 Output 20 Output 21 Output 22
Menu Text LOGIC: Output 1 (32)

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11
Max. Yes -
Step Size
OP Fig. 76 Address
042 054 042 056 042 058 042 060 042 062 042 064 042 066 042 068 042 070 042 072 042 074
Address
042 032 042 034 042 036 042 038 042 040 042 042 042 044 042 046 042 048 042 050 042 052
Menu Text
Output 23 Output 24 Output 25 Output 26 Output 27 Output 28 Output 29 Output 30 Output 31 Output 32
Address
042 076 042 078 042 080 042 082 042 084 042 086 042 088 042 090 042 092 042 094
LOGIC: Output 1 (32) (t)

Output 1 (t) Output 2 (t)
No
Read only Menu Text
Output 12 (t) Output 13 (t) Output 14 (t) Output 15 (t) Output 16 (t) Output 17 (t) Output 18 (t) Output 19 (t) Output 20 (t) Output 21 (t) Output 22 (t)
Yes
OP Fig. 76
Address
042 033 042 035 042 037 042 039 042 041 042 043 042 045 042 047 042 049 042 051 042 053
Address
042 055 042 057 042 059 042 061 042 063 042 065 042 067 042 069 042 071 042 073 042 075
Menu Text
Output 23 (t) Output 24 (t) Output 25 (t) Output 26 (t) Output 27 (t) Output 28 (t) Output 29 (t) Output 30 (t) Output 31 (t) Output 32 (t)
Address
042 077 042 079 042 081 042 083 042 085 042 087 042 089 042 091 042 093 042 095
MR
Output 3 (t) Output 4 (t) Output 5 (t) Output 6 (t) Output 7 (t) Output 8 (t) Output 9 (t) Output 10 (t) Output 11 (t)
1.2 1.2.1
Control and testing Local control panel settings enable (HMI) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing HMI: Param. Change Enabl.
003 010
Step Size
No
Yes
Setting the permission for changing values from the HMI.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2.2 Main rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM1) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing COMM1: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test
003 180
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-63
Step Size
Signals from selection table dependent upon relay configuration
COMM1: Test Spont.Sig.Start

003 184
COMM1: Test Spont.Sig. End

003 186
1.2.3
2nd rear port communication control and testing commands (COMM2) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing COMM2: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test
103 180
Step Size
Signals from selection table dependent upon relay configuration
OP Fig. 94
COMM2: Test Spont.Sig.Start

103 184
MR
OP Fig. 94
COMM2: Test Spont.Sig. End

103 186
OP Fig. 94
1.2.4
Ethernet communication control and testing commands (GSSE) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing GSSE: Reset Statistics
105 171
Step Size
GSSE: GSSE Enroll.Flags L

105 160
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: GSSE Enroll. Flags H

105 161
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: GSSE Tx Msg Counter

105 162
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-64
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/0
Read only
Menu Text GSSE: GSSE Rx Msg Counter

105 163
Max. 65535 1
Step Size
GSSE: No. Bin State Chang.

105 164
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: Tx Last Sequence

105 165
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: Tx Last Message

105 166
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: No. Reject. Messages

105 167
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: IED View Selection

105 170
Remote IED
GSSE: GSSE IED Recvd Msgs

105 172
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
MR
GSSE: GSSE IED Last SeqRx

105 173
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: GSSE IED Last MsgRx

105 174
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: GSSE IED MissedMsgs

105 175
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: GSSE IED Missed Changes

105 176
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
GSSE: GSSE IED Timeouts

105 177
Not Measured/0
Read only
65535
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2.5 Output relay control and testing commands (OUTP) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing OUTP: Reset Latch. USER
021 009
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-65
Step Size
OP Fig. 105
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel. OUTP: Relay Assign. f.Test Signals from selection table dependent upon relay configuration OP Fig. 106
003 042
Selection of the relay to be tested. OUTP: Relay Test

003 043
OP Fig. 106
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time (OU T P: Ho ld -T im e for Tes t). OUTP: Hold-Time for Test
003 044
1s
10 s
1s
OP Fig. 106
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for functional testing. 1.2.6 Analog output channel control and testing commands (mA_OP) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing mA_OP: Reset Output USER
037 116
MR
Step Size
OP Fig. 109
Resetting the measured data output function.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-66 1.2.7 General control and testing commands (MAIN) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing MAIN: General Reset
003 002
Step Size
OP Fig. 140
Reset of the following memories:

All counters LED indicators Operating data memory All event memories Event counters Measured overload data Fault, OLoad records Recorded fault values Dont Execute Execute OP Fig. 140
MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER

021 010
MR
Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators Fault, OLoad Records Dont Execute Execute OP Fig. 135
MAIN: Rset Latch Trip USER

021 005
Reset latched trip commands using the local control panel. MAIN: Reset c. cl./Trip c.
003 007
OP Fig. 136
The counters for close and trip commands are reset. MAIN: Reset IPh,Max Demand
003 033
OP Fig. 119, 120
The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current, ends a to d, are reset. MAIN: Man. Trip Cmd. USER
003 040
OP Fig. 135
A trip command is issued from the local control panel for 100 ms. Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command is included in the configuration of trip commands.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Dont Execute Execute Max.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-67
Menu Text MAIN: Warm Restart

003 039
Step Size -
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power supply is turned on. MAIN: Cold Restart
000 085

Password Protected
A cold restart is executed. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with which the device operates after a cold restart are the default settings given in the Settings - ST section. They are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart. 1.2.8 Operating data control and testing commands (OP_RC) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing OP_RC: Reset Recording
100 001
Step Size
OP Fig. 144
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset. 1.2.9 Monitoring signal control and testing commands (MT_RC) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing MT_RC: Reset Recording
003 008
MR
Step Size
OP Fig. 145
Reset of the monitoring signal memory. 1.2.10 Overload recording control and testing commands (OL_RC) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing OL_RC: Reset Recording
100 003
Step Size
OP Fig. 148
Reset of the overload memory.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-68 1.2.11 Disturbance recorder control and testing commands (OSCIL) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing OSCIL: Trigger USER
003 041
Step Size
OP Fig. 155
Fault recording and fault value recording are triggered from the local control panel for 500 ms. OSCIL: Reset Recording
003 006
OP Fig. 156
Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators Fault memory Fault counter Fault, OLoad Records Recorded fault values
1.2.12
Thermal overload control and testing commands (THRM) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing THRM1: Reset Replica USER
039 120
MR
Step Size
OP Fig. 46
THRM2: Reset Replica USER

039 180
Thermal overload memory reset. 1.2.13 Frequency protection control and testing commands (f<>) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
003 080
Step Size
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.2.14 Overfluxing protection control and testing commands (V/f) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing V/f: Reset Replica USER
035 183
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-69
Step Size
1.2.15
Current transformer supervision control and testing commands (CTS) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing CTS: Reset Latch. USER
036 157
Step Size
1.2.16
Programmable logic control and testing commands (LOGIC) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Control and Testing LOGIC: Trigger 1 (8)
See table below for command addresses.
Step Size
OP Fig. 76
MR
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.

Menu Text
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3
Address
034 038 034 039 034 040
Menu Text
Trigger 4 Trigger 5 Trigger 6
Address
034 041 034 042 034 043
Menu Text
Trigger 7 Trigger 8
Address
034 044 034 045
1.3 1.3.1
Operating data rec. Operating data record no. (OP_RC) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Operating Data Rec. OP_RC: Operat. Data Record.
003 024
Step Size
0
Read only
100
1
OP Fig. 144
Point of entry into the operating data log.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-70 1.3.2 Monitoring signal record no. (MT_RC) Menu Text Measurements + Tests\Operating Data Rec. MT_RC: Mon. Signal Record.
003 001
Step Size
0
Read only
30
1
OP Fig. 145
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
MR
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-71
2.
2.1 2.1.1
FAULT + EVENT RECORD

Fault, event counters General counters (MAIN) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters MAIN: No. General Start.
004 000
Step Size
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 134
Number of general starting signals. MAIN: No. Gen. Trip Cmds.1

004 006
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 136
MAIN: No. Gen. Trip Cmds.2

009 050
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 136

009 056
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 136
MR

009 057
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 136
Number of general trip commands 1 to 4. 2.1.2 Operating data recording counter (OP_RC) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters OP_RC: No. Oper. Data Sig.
100 002
Step Size
0
Read only
100
1
OP Fig. 144
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory. 2.1.3 Monitoring signal recording counter (MT_RC) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters MT_RC: No. Monit. Signals
004 019
Step Size
0
Read only
30
1
OP Fig. 145
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-72 2.1.4 Overload recording counter (OL_RC) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters OL_RC: No. Overload
004 101
Step Size
0
Read only
9999
1
OP Fig. 148
Number of overload states. 2.1.5 Disturbance recording counter (MT_RC) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters OSCIL: No. of Faults
004 020
Step Size
0
Read only
9999
1
OP Fig. 84
Number of faults. OSCIL: No. System Disturb.

004 010
0
Read only
9999
1
OP Fig. 84
Number of system disturbances (trips, plus starts which may not have resulted in trips). 2.1.6 Definite time overcurrent counter (DTOC) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters DTOC1: No. General Start.
009 150
MR
Step Size
0
Read only
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 27
DTOC2: No. General Start.

009 160
0
Read only
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 27
DTOC3: No. General Start.

009 170
0
Read only
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 27
Number of general starting signals.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 2.1.7 Inverse time overcurrent counter (IDMT) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, Event Counters IDMT1: No. General Start.
009 151
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-73
Step Size
0
Read only
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 39
IDMT2: No. General Start.

009 161
0
Read only
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 39
IDMT3: No. General Start.

009 171
0
Read only
9999/ Overflow
1
OP Fig. 39
Number of general starting signals. 2.2 2.2.1 Fault, oload records Overload data acquisition (OL_DA) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, OLoad Records OL_DA: Overload Duration Not Measured/ 0.0 s
Read only
Step Size
6500.0 s/ Overflow
0.1 s
OP Fig. 146
MR
004 102
Duration of the overload event. OL_DA: Status THRM1 Replica Not Measured/ 0%
Read only
250%/ Overflow
1%
OP Fig. 147
004 155
OL_DA: Status THRM2 Replica
Not Measured/ 0%
Read only
250%/ Overflow
1%
OP Fig. 147
004 185
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively. OL_DA: Load Current THRM1 Not Measured/ 0.00 In
Read only
3.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 147
004 159
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-74
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/ 0.00 In
Read only
Menu Text
Max. 3.00 In/ Overflow
Step Size
OL_DA: Load Current THRM2
0.01 In
OP Fig. 147
004 189
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to calculate the tripping time. OL_DA: Object Temp. THRM1 Not Measured/ -40 C
Read only
300 C/ Overflow
1 C
OP Fig. 147
004 156
OL_DA: Object Temp. THRM2
Not Measured/ -40 C

Read only
300 C/ Overflow
1 C
OP Fig. 147
004 186
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively. OL_DA: Coolant Temp.THRM1 Not Measured/ -40 C
Read only
215 C/ Overflow
1 C
OP Fig. 147
MR
004 157
OL_DA: Coolant Temp.THRM2
Not Measured/ -40 C

Read only
215 C/ Overflow
1 C
OP Fig. 147
004 187
Display of the coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at THR M1 : Se lec t CT Am bi en t or at T HRM 2 : Se lec t C T Am bi en t, respectively, for the coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed: Setting Default Temp. Value: Display of the set temperature value Setting From PT 100: Setting From 20 mA Input: Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer Display of the temperature measured via the 20 mA input Not Measured/ 0.0 min
Read only
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1
1000.0 min/ Overflow
0.1 min
OP Fig. 147
004 158
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM2
Not Measured/ 0.0 min

Read only
1000.0 min/ Overflow
0.1 min
OP Fig. 147
004 188
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, will reach the tripping threshold.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/ -25000 %
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-75
Menu Text
Max. 25000%/ Overflow
Step Size
OL_DA: Offset THRM1 Replica
1%
OP Fig. 147
004 191
OL_DA: Offset THRM2 Replica
Not Measured/ -25000 %

Read only
25000%/ Overflow
1%
OP Fig. 147
004 192
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards. If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case. 2.2.2 Fault data acquisition (FT_DA) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, OLoad Records FT_DA: Fault Duration Not Measured/ 0.0 s
Read only
Step Size
6500.0 s/ Overflow
MR
0.1 s
OP Fig. 150
008 010
Display of the fault duration. FT_DA: Running Time Not Measured/ 0.00 s
Read only
65.00 s/ Overflow
0.01 s
OP Fig. 150
004 021
Display of the running time. No Fault Max. diff. Current Max. Idiff, REF_1 Max. Idiff, REF_2 Max. Idiff, REF_3 Max Restrain Current Other Trigger
Read only
FT_DA: Fault Determ. With
004 198
OP Fig. 151
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-76
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/ 0.000 s
Read only
Menu Text
Max. 65.000 s/ Overflow
Step Size
FT_DA: Run Time to Meas.
0.001 s
OP Fig. 151
004 199
This display indicates when the fault data were stored. FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,a p.u Not Measured/ 0.00 In
Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
025 086
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,b p.u
Not Measured/ 0.00 In

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
026 086
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,c p.u

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
027 086
FT_DA: Fault Curr.Iph,d p.u
MR
028 086

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
Display of the maximum phase current at the data acquisition time for each end, referred to In. FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,a p.u. Not Measured/ 0.00 In
Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
025 087
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,b p.u.

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
026 087
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,c p.u.

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
027 087
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IN,d p.u.

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
028 087
Display of the residual current calculated by the P63x at the data acquisition time based on the sum of the phase currents for each end, referred to In.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/ 0.00 In
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-77
Menu Text
Max. 99.00 In/ Overflow
Step Size
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IY,a p.u.
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
025 088
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IY,b p.u.

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
026 088
FT_DA: Fault Curr.IY,c p.u.

Read only
99.00 In/ Overflow
0.01 In
OP Fig. 152
027 088
Display of the residual current measured at the T14 transformer by the P63x at the data acquisition time, referred to In. FT_DA: Diff Current 1 Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref
Read only
99.00 Iref/ Overflow
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
005 082
FT_DA: Diff Current 2
Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
MR
006 082
FT_DA: Diff Current 3

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
007 082
Display of the differential current for each measuring system, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff Current 1(2*fn) Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref
Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
005 084
FT_DA: Diff Current 2(2*fn)

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
006 084

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
007 084
Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current for each measuring system, referred to Iref.
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-78
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref
Read only
Menu Text
Max. 99.00 Iref/ Overflow
Step Size
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
005 085

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
006 085

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
007 085
Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current for each measuring system, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Restrain Current 1 Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref
Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
005 083
MR
FT_DA: Restrain Current 2

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
006 083
FT_DA: Restrain Current 3

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 153
007 083
Display of the restraining current for each measuring system, referred to Iref. FT_DA: Diff Current REF_1 Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref
Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 154
025 082
FT_DA: Diff Current REF_2

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 154
026 082
FT_DA: Diff Current REF_3

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 154
027 082
Display of the differential current, determined by the restricted earth fault protection function (REF_1), referred to Iref.
Measurements and Recording MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Measurement Range Min. Not Measured/ 0.00 Iref
Read only
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-79
Menu Text
Max. 99.00 Iref/ Overflow
Step Size
FT_DA: Restrain. Curr. REF_1
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 154
025 083

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 154
026 083

Read only
0.01 Iref
OP Fig. 154
027 083
Display of the restraining current, determined by the restricted earth fault protection function (REF_1), referred to Iref. 2.2.3 Frequency acquisition limits (f<>) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Fault, OLoad Records f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
005 002
Step Size
Not Measured/ 12.00 Hz

Read only
70.00 Hz/ Overflow
0.01 Hz
MR
Maximum frequency attained in the event of overfrequency. f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
005 001
Not Measured/ 12.00 Hz

Read only
70.00 Hz/ Overflow
0.01 Hz
Minimum frequency attained in the event of underfrequency. 2.3 2.3.1 Disturbance oscillo Overload recording acquisition (OL_RC) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Disturbance Oscillo. OL_RC: Overload Recording 1 (8)
Step Size
0
Read only
9999
Point of entry into the overload log.

Menu Text
Overload Recording 1 Overload Recording 2 Overload Recording 3
Address
003 020 003 021 003 022
Menu Text
Overload Recording 4 Overload Recording 5 Overload Recording 6
Address
003 023 003 024 003 025
Menu Text
Overload Recording 7 Overload Recording 8
Address
003 026 003 027
P63x/UK MR/A54 (MR) 7-80 2.3.2 Disturbance recording acquisition (OSCIL) Menu Text Fault + Event Record\Disturbance Oscillo. OSCIL: Fault Recording 1 (8)
Step Size
0
Read only
9999
Point of entry into the fault log.

Menu Text
Fault Recording 1 Fault Recording 2 Fault Recording 3
Address
003 000 033 001 033 002
Menu Text
Fault Recording 4 Fault Recording 5 Fault Recording 6
Address
033 003 033 004 033 005
Menu Text
Fault Recording 7 Fault Recording 8
Address
033 006 033 007
MR
Firmware Design MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK FD/A54
FIRMWARE DESIGN
FD
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK FD/A54
FD
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-1
CONTENTS
(FD) 81.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.9 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3
FIRMWARE DESIGN
Relay structure overview Software overview Settings and measurements Programmable scheme logic Hardware overview Transformer module T Processor module P Local control module L Communication module A Bus modules B Binary modules X Analogue module Y Power supply module V Ethernet module Self testing & diagnostics System alarms and errors Monitoring signal memory Device response
3
3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 7
FD
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Relay modules and information flow LOGIC structure 3 4
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-2
FD
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-3
1.
1.1
FIRMWARE DESIGN
Relay structure overview
P1952ENa
Figure 1:
Relay modules and information flow
The external analog and binary quantities, electrically isolated, are converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y and X. Commands and signals generated by the device internally are transmitted to external destinations via floating contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally. Analog data are always transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y are transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor handles the processing of digitized measured variables and of binary signals, generates the protective trip and signals and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. Moreover, the entire device communication is handled by the processor module. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide communication with substation control systems. The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated PC interface are housed on control module L. 1.2 1.2.1 Software overview Settings and measurements All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the Px3x device family. The main branches are: Settings branch This branch carries all settings, including the device identification data, the configuration settings for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the function settings for adapting the device functions to the protected plant. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
FD
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-4 Measurements + Tests branch
This branch carries all information relevant for operation such as measured operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently is not stored. In addition, various control parameters are grouped here, for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays. Fault + Event Record branch The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. Therefore all information contained in this group is stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault data, and the sampled fault records are stored here and can be read out at a later time. 1.2.2 Programmable scheme logic The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (LOGIC) is to allow the relay user to configure an individual protection scheme to suit a particular application. This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers. User-configurable logic enables the user to set up logic operations on binary signals within a framework of Boolean equations. By means of a straightforward configuration procedure, any of the signals of the protection device can be linked by logic OR or AND operations with the possibility of additional negation operations. The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order equation as an input signal, thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations. The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer elements each and a choice of operating modes. Thus the output signal of each equation can be assigned a freely configurable time characteristic. The two output signals of each equation can be configured to each available input signal after logic OR linking. The user-configurable logic function is then able to influence the individual functions without external wiring (block, reset, trigger, for example). Via non-storable continuous signals, monostable trigger signals and bistable setting/resetting signals, the Boolean equations can be controlled externally via any of the devices interfaces.
FD
Fixed Logic: Configuration: DTOC, IDMT, DIFF, ... INP HMI PC COMM1 COMM2 GOOSE GSSE OUTP LED HMI PC COMM1 COMM2 GOOSE GSSE Configuration:
Programmable Logic: LOGIC
P1953ENa
Figure 2: 1.3
LOGIC structure
Hardware overview The modular hardware structure of the devices is shown in Figure 1. The plug-in modules can be combined to suit individual requirements. The device itself can identify the fitted modules. During each startup, the number and type of fitted modules are identified and checked for compliance with the permissible configurations. As a function of the components actually fitted, the corresponding configuration parameters are then enabled for application.
Firmware Design MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.3.1 Transformer module T
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-5
The transformer modules convert the measured currents and voltages to the internal processing levels and provides for electrical isolation. 1.3.2 Processor module P The processor module performs the analogue/digital conversion of the measured variables as well as all digital processing tasks. 1.3.3 Local control module L The local control module encompasses all control and display elements as well as a PC interface. The local control module is located behind the front panel and connected to the processor module via a ribbon cable. 1.3.4 Communication module A The optional communication module provides one or two serial information interfaces for the integration of the protection device into a substation control system and for remote access. The communication module is plugged into the processor module. 1.3.5 Bus modules B Bus modules are printed circuit boards (PCBs), providing the electrical connection between the other modules. Two types of bus modules are used, namely the analogue and digital-bus PCB. 1.3.6 Binary modules X The binary modules are equipped with opto inputs and/or output relays for the output of signals and commands. 1.3.7 Analogue module Y The analogue module is fitted with a PT 100 input, a 20 mA input and two 20 mA outputs. One output relay each is assigned to two 20 mA outputs. Additionally, four opto inputs are available. 1.3.8 Power supply module V The power supply module ensures the electrical isolation of the device as well as providing the power supply. Depending on the chosen design version, optical coupler inputs and output relays are provided in addition. 1.3.9 Ethernet module The optional communication module provides an Ethernet interface (one copper, one fiber) for the integration of the protection device into a substation control system and for remote access. The medium is selected via settings. This module also includes an additional EIA(RS)485 port. The Ethernet module is plugged into the processor module. 1.4 Self testing & diagnostics The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or fault occurs within the relays hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the Healthy LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be indicated by the LED and watchdog contact.
FD
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-6
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a maintenance record in the monitoring signal memory to allow the nature of the problem to be notified to the user. The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the relays critical functions whilst it is in service. 1.4.1 System alarms and errors Self monitoring distinguishes between system alarms and system errors. System alarms
System alarms do not affect the protection and control tasks and therefore the device remains in operation. As an example, overflow of communication buffers or a low voltage of the internal battery result in an alarm only. System errors
System errors affect the protection and control function and require further processing. At the first instance the device will perform a warm restart to recover from the error. If the error already present before (i.e. already entered in the monitoring signal memory), then the device will become blocked (004.065 MAIN: Blocked/Faulty = Yes). Examples for system errors are checksum errors, defective module errors etc. Both, alarms and errors, could be either spontaneous (which means that only the occurrence of the alarm/error could be detected, e.g. any checksum error) or testable (which means start and end of the alarm/error condition could be detected, e.g. defective output relay). Peripheral faults like fuse failure are always testable alarms. 1.4.2 Monitoring signal memory In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory - the monitoring signal memory. Peripheral faults are only stored if selected by the user (setting 021.030 CHECK: Fct Assign. Alarm). The monitoring signal memory can store up to 30 signals. The 30th entry is always the overflow signal (090.012 CHECK: Overflow MT_RC = Yes). If 30 entries are present, no further new signals could be stored, where new means that this signal is not yet entered in the memory. If a monitoring signal is already entered in the monitoring signal memory, then just the counter of the entry is incremented (e.g. transient errors on the transmission channel of the protective signaling thus would cause only one signal entry). Each entry contains the following information: Address and description text of the warning signal Date and time of the first occurrence of the error Counter of detection of the error Flag updated = Yes: the error is still present; = No: the error is no longer present. Spontaneous alarms/errors are always indicated as updated = yes. Flag acknowledged = Yes: the warning was already acknowledged but the error is still present; = No: the warning was not yet acknowledged.
FD
Firmware Design MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.4.3 Device response
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-7
The response of the Px3x is a function of the type of monitoring signal. The following responses are possible: Signaling only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal (= upon system alarms), then only a signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow or if the internal battery voltage is low. Selective blocking
If a system error is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface or if an individual output relay is faulty. Warm restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a system error that might be eliminated by a system restart - such as a hardware error, e.g. DPRAM read error, or a software error, e.g. zero division error, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any startup, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no settings are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by a control action. During a warm restart sequence, both the protective functions and communication through serial interfaces will be blocked. If the same system error is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked, but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again. Cold restart
If corrupted settings are diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary because the unit cannot identify which setting in the group is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to predefined default values. This means that all device settings are also erased after a cold restart. In order for a safe initial state to be established, the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the signal indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory. Beside corrupted settings, a cold restart is initiated only after a software download procedure (either download of a new firmware version or download of a customized data model) or manually (as a means to get the device in a predefined condition). Manual cold restart can only be initiated from the local HMI. The device must be in offline mode. The initiation is password protected. Refer to Troubleshooting - TS section of this manual, which lists possible warning signals and the device response/reaction upon detection of each alarm/error.
FD
P63x/UK FD/A54 (FD) 8-8
FD
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK CM/A54
COMMISSIONING
CM
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK CM/A54
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-1
CONTENTS
(CM) 91. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
INTRODUCTION PRODUCT FAMILIARISATION

Settings Reference to menu addresses Module positions Terminal references
3 4
4 4 4 4
3.
3.1 3.2
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

Minimum equipment required Optional equipment
5
5 5
4.
4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.8.1 4.2.8.2 4.2.8.3 4.2.8.4 4.2.8.5 4.2.9
PRODUCT CHECKS
With the relay de-energized Visual inspection Insulation resistance External wiring Auxiliary supply With the relay energized Power-up verification Date and time With an IRIG-B signal Without an IRIG-B signal Light emitting diodes (LEDs) Opto inputs Output relays Rear communications port(s): COMM1 and COMM2 (if used) IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM1 MODBUS communications COMM1 DNP3.0 interface COMM1 Courier interface COMM1 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM2 PT100 temperature RTD probe (where fitted)
6
6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 11
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-2 4.2.10 4.2.11 4.2.12 Apply application-specific settings Current inputs Voltage input (where fitted)
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 11 11 12
5.
5.1 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.4 5.4.1
SETTING CHECKS
Demonstrate correct relay operation Differential protection setting checks Checking differential sensitivity Checking differential through stability by primary injection Checking differential through stability by secondary injection Yy transformers, autotransformer and busbar applications Dy and Yd applications Dd applications Differential stability - summary Verifying the trip output contact mapping Restricted earth fault setting checks Checking REF sensitivity Checking REF through stability by primary injection Verifying the trip output contact mapping (secondary injection) Check application settings Checking that the correct settings group is active Checking that the protection is switched on Checking that no blocking of output relays is inadvertently left applied Checking that the primary protection function (differential) is enabled Ensuring that all records and memories have been reset Check correct display of status LEDs
13
13 13 13 14 14 14 15 16 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 20
CM
5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.5
6.
6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2
ON-LOAD CHECKS
Confirm current and voltage transformer wiring Voltage connection Current connections
21
21 21 21
7. 8. 9.
FINAL CHECKS P63x COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD AS-FITTED SETTINGS RECORD
21 22 28
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-3
1.
INTRODUCTION
MiCOM P63x transformer protection relays are fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays. To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay. It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the settings have been verified by one of the following methods: Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software (preferred method - using MiCOM S1) Via the operator interface
Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relays internal programmable scheme logic. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/C11) or later issue, or the Safety and Technical Data sections of this Technical Manual and also the ratings on the equipments rating label. The MiCOM P63x relay must not be disassembled in any way during commissioning.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-4
2.
2.1
PRODUCT FAMILIARISATION
Settings When commissioning a MiCOM P63x relay for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the ENTER key are accessible. With the cover fitted, no protection or configuration settings can be changed. Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However, for setting and configuration cells, the appropriate password has to be entered before changes can be made. Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.
2.2
Reference to menu addresses To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions, they will be given in the form [menu address: FUNCTION GROUP, Cell Description]. When using MiCOM S1 software, the toolbar command Edit Find can be used to jump directly to a chosen address.
2.3
Module positions Each internal circuit board/module has its connections terminated at a block on the rear of the relay. The slot position of each module is numbered from 01 to 20, with slot 01 on the left, and slot 20 at the right (viewed from rear), for 84TE case size relays. For 40TE cases, slots run from 01 to 10. Each module also has a generic alpha identifier: A, T, V, X, Y used in documentation, used to abbreviate its purpose (e.g. V denotes a power supply module).
CM
2.4
Terminal references All terminals are prefixed by identifier X, and then a numeric location. The first two digits of the location denote the module slot position as described above. Thus, X20nn would be connection number nn for the terminal block in slot 20.
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-5
3.
3.1
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

Minimum equipment required Multifunctional current and voltage injection test set. Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of 0 - 300V. Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
3.2
Optional equipment Multi-finger test plug type P992 (if test block type P991 installed) or MMLB (if using MMLG blocks) An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (for insulation resistance testing when required). A portable PC, with appropriate MiCOM S1 software (this enables the rear communications port to be tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning). EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter, if rear communications ports COMM1 and COMM2 are to be tested. Example converter is AREVA type CK222. A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-6
4.
PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances. If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their restoration later. This could be done by: Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to the relay) Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC with appropriate setting software)
4.1
With the relay de-energised The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated. The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for these checks. If a P991 or MMLG test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be achieved by inserting test plug type P992/MMLB which effectively open-circuits all wiring routed through the test block. Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring) diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For example, the test block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits. It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current transformer secondary windings are shorted. In the case of an MMLB test plug, the user must make the shorts manually on the plug BEFORE it is inserted into the MMLG test block. Danger: Danger: Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer since the high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage insulation. For pin terminal relays, never disconnect the T module terminal block it is NOT a shorting block, and CT connections will be open circuited.
CM
If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals. Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links, fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard. 4.1.1 Visual inspection Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since installation. The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation. Ensure that the case earthing connection, is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using a conductor of minimum cross-sectional area 2.5mm2. The case earth should be verified, made tight to the side of the case by nut/bolt. 4.1.2 Insulation resistance Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be done and they have not been performed during installation. Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits should be temporarily connected together.
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 The main groups of relay terminals are: Voltage transformer circuits (situated on module(s) T) Current transformer circuits (situated on module(s) T) Power supply (situated on module V) Opto-isolated binary inputs, situated on V and X/Y (populated slots)
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-7
Relay output contacts, situated on V and X/Y (populated slots). Also, milliamp current loop measured inputs and outputs, situated on module Y. EIA(RS)485 COMM1 and COMM2 ports, situated on module A (slot 02)
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V. On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected to the relay. 4.1.3 External wiring Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top access cover on the front of the relay, written in the form P63x.4xx. If a P991 or MMLG test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the scheme (wiring) diagram. Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customers normal practice. 4.1.4 Auxiliary supply The P63x relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply depending on the relays nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Table 9-1. Without energizing the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the operating range. Nominal Supply Rating DC [AC rms] 24V 48 - 250V Table 1: [N/A] [100 - 230V] DC Operating Range 19.2 to 26.4V 38 to 275V AC Operating Range 80 to 254V
CM
Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx
It should be noted that the P63x relay can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12% of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply. Do not energise the relay using the battery charger with the battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relays power supply circuitry. Energize the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges, and also the power supply protective earth/ground connection is connected. The ground conductor is connected to V module terminal X__27 (ring terminal relay) or X__39 (pin terminal relay), and the minimum wire cross section is 1.5mm2. If a test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay. 4.2 With the relay energised The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-8
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. 4.2.1 Power-up verification On application of the supply voltage, the P63x will start-up. During start-up LEDs will flash, and the display will show a sequence of arrows on the LCD display >>>>>. After approximately 15s the display will stabilize showing P63x, and the relay is ready. Verify that the HEALTHY LED is illuminated. If no settings have previously been applied to the relay, the OUT OF SERVICE LED may also be showing. 4.2.2 Date and time The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the relay. 4.2.3 With an IRIG-B signal If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the relay has the optional IRIG-B port fitted at slot 02, the satellite clock equipment should be energized. To allow the relays time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source cell [056.072: Settings/Configuration/IRIGB, IRIG-B Time Sync] must be set to Enabled and [023.200: .../Configuration/IRIGB, General Enable USER] must be set to Yes. Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [023.202: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/IRIGB, Synchron. Ready] reads Yes. Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is displayed. Check the time is correct in cell [003.091: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Analog Readings/MAIN, Time]. The IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be set manually in the date cell. Set the year in cell [003.090: /MAIN, Date], and verify the date shown is correct.
CM
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay. Leave the relay de-energized for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the date and time in cells 003.090 and 003.091 should be correct. Reconnect the IRIG-B signal. 4.2.4 Without an IRIG-B signal If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell [056.072] is set to Disabled Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cells [003.091: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Analog Readings/MAIN, Time] and [003.090: /MAIN, Date]. In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore, when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need to be set again. To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the date and time in cells 003.090 and 003.091 should be correct.
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 4.2.5 Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-9
On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that the relay is HEALTHY. (The Out of Service LED will also be lit if no settings have yet been applied to the relay). Any LEDs still illuminated from previous faults or injection tests should be reset by pressing the CLEAR (C) key. Check that on pressing the C key ALL LED indicators momentarily light and then extinguish. Check and record that the HEALTHY LED remains lit. 4.2.6 Opto inputs This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly. The opto-isolated inputs should be energized one at a time, as per the external wiring diagram. Ensure correct polarity, with the positive battery voltage applied to the lowest numbered terminal, and negative to the highest number for the input concerned (e.g. Opto input U2001 for the ring terminal relay should be energized at terminals X2018 (+ve) and X2019 (-ve)). If possible, the voltage applied to the opto should be generated by operation of the item of plant which that opto normally monitors e.g. if an opto input is assigned to 52b (circuit breaker open), then correct wire routing and indication is best ascertained by movement of the real contacts, or a test short connected across them. Opto inputs are polarity sensitive, and DC rated only. alternating current supply. Do not energise from an
The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed in the Measurements + Tests subheading in the menu, under Measurements/I.O Status Monitor, example cell for opto input U2001 [153.086: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/I.O. Status Monitor/INP, State U 2001]. A de-energized input is indicated by the display Low, and when an input is energized the display should read High. 4.2.7 Output relays This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. It can also be used to verify that output contact wiring is routed to the correct location, via the panel/cubicle wiring. Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to the output relay being tested, as given in the external connection diagram. Output contacts will be operated by manual commands - ensure that contact operation is permitted, without dangerous/unwanted consequences. For example, operation of contacts assigned to trip or close duties should only be undertaken if the CB is locked for no operation, or if operation is permitted. The output relays should be energized one at a time. The means of operating contacts is within the Control and Testing sub-heading in the menu, via the heading Measurements + Tests. The user first selects which contact should be operated, at cell [003.042: Measurements + Tests/Control + Testing/OUTP, Relay Assign. f.Test]. The contact to be operated is selected by scrolling down the list and selecting Configure. Once configured, stepping down to the next cell in the menu [003.043: /OUTP, Relay Test] allows the user to apply the test by selecting Execute. With default settings, the selected contact will be operated for 1 second. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact. Note: It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too long. It is therefore advised that the time between application and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-10 4.2.8 Rear communications port(s): COMM1 and COMM2 (if used)
This test should only be performed where the relay is to be accessed from a remote location and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted. It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the remote location, just the relays rear communications port and any protocol converter necessary. 4.2.8.1 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM1 Connect a portable PC running the appropriate IEC60870-5-103 Master Station software to the relays EIA(RS)485 port via an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor. It is strongly recommended that MiCOM S1 software is used for this test, as it uses the - 103 protocol for its communication. Where the communication is - 103 protocol over fiber optic, the appropriate fiber link will need to be made and tested. Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in the COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up. Check that communications with this relay can be established. 4.2.8.2 MODBUS communications COMM1 Connect a portable PC running the appropriate MODBUS Master Station software to the relays EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor. Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in the COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up. Check that communications with this relay can be established. 4.2.8.3 DNP3.0 interface COMM1 Connect a portable PC running the appropriate DNP3 Master Station software to the relays EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor.
CM
4.2.8.4
Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in the COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up. Check that communications with this relay can be established. Courier interface COMM1 Connect a portable PC running the appropriate Courier Master Station software to the relays EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor. Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in the COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up. Check that communications with this relay can be established. 4.2.8.5 IEC60870-5-103 communications COMM2 This test is only valid for relays having a second communications port fitted, COMM2. Connect a portable PC running MiCOM S1 software to the relays EIA(RS)485 port via a EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 interface convertor. If the second port is being used for an off-site MODEM link, remote access can be tested at this stage. Ensure that the Relay/Octet communication address, Baud rate, and Parity settings in the COMM1 configuration sub-heading are set to match the Master Station set-up. Check that communications with this relay can be established.
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 4.2.9 PT100 temperature RTD probe (where fitted)
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-11
This tests that where ambient temperature compensation of the thermal protection is applied, the RTD probe is connected/measuring correctly, and that the correct ambient temperature is being measured. To check correct RTD fitting: [039.127 and 039.187: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/THRM1 and /THRM2, CTA Error] Must show No error, and
[004.154 and 004.174: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Analog Readings/THRM1 and /THRM2, Coolant Temp. THx] 4.2.10 Must show an ambient air temperature as expected
Apply application-specific settings There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay: Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate software via the relays front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port. This method is preferred for transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for error. If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on a diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be the case where application-specific programmable scheme logic is to be applied to the relay. Enter them manually via the relays operator interface
4.2.11
Current inputs This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances. All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz. If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [010.030: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Frequency fn]. To avoid spurious operation of protection elements during injection testing, ensure that the Protection is disabled via cell [003.030: Settings/Function Settings /Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled]. Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each current transformer input in turn, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked under Communication Cyclic Readout of Data in the S&R-103 menu. When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of current, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity). The measurement accuracy of the relay is 1%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used. Next, to check that all three phase CTs associated with one winding are of the same polarity, the same current should be applied to phases A, B, and C - phase displaced as per a balanced 3 phase set. This will be for phase angles A = 0o, B = -120o, C = 120o, for a standard ABC phase rotation system. Starting for end a CTs, apply the balanced current, and check the measured residual current for the winding - address [005.141; Current IN,a p.u.]. The residual current measured should be less than 0.05 p.u.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-12 Repeat for end b For P633 and P634 - repeat for end c For P634 - repeat for end d
If high residual current is measured, one or more of the CT circuits for the end concerned may have a problem (for example - an inverted connection). 4.2.12 Voltage input (where fitted) Apply voltage equal to the line voltage transformer secondary winding rating to the VT input, checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked under in the relay menu. When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of voltage, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity). The measurement accuracy of the relay is 0.5%. However, an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-13
5.
SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both the relays function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have been correctly applied to the relay. Note (1): The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker. If the user wishes the relay to be incapable of tripping the circuit breaker by means of inhibiting the trip output contact(s), this can be set at:
Note (2):
[021.012: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Trip Cmd.Block USER]. Set to Yes to inhibit trip output contacts.
5.1
Demonstrate correct relay operation The current and voltage tests have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, thus the purpose of these tests is as follows: To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, differential protection, can trip according to the correct application settings To verify correct setting of any restricted earth fault (REF) protection To verify correct assignment of the trip contacts, by monitoring the response to a selection of fault injections The customers desired setting group to be left in-service after testing is used. This is generally Setting Group SG1, and verification that the relay has the correct group applied should be done by reading cell [003.062: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/GROUP, Actual Setting Group]
To enable the protection elements, ensure that the Protection is Yes (Enabled) at cell [003.030: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled] 5.2 5.2.1 Differential protection setting checks Checking differential sensitivity For single-side infeeding to an in-zone fault, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the tripping characteristic of the P63x, so that an injection test will find the Idiff> setting [072.142] (for Setting Group SG1). The current I to which the P63x responds for single-side feeding is calculated as follows:
CM
I=
z:
I diff > I nom , z kz

Ends a or b
Idiff>: Set differential minimum sensitivity Inom,z: Nominal CT current of the P63x for the winding concerned kz: Amplitude matching factor for winding [address 004.105 for HV]
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P63x are displayed as measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the P63x to the system current transformers is correct. The display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user. Connect the test equipment to the relay via the test block(s) taking care not to open-circuit any CT secondary. If MMLG type test blocks are used, the live side of the test plug must be provided with shorting links before it is inserted into the test block.
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-14
Apply balanced three-phase current slightly less than the Idiff> setting to the HV side CT inputs only (these CTs are usually the input designated as End a). Observe that no trip should occur, and the red Trip LED remains extinguished. Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates. Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be within +/10% of the Idiff> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy 5%). 5.2.2 Checking differential through stability by primary injection To check for through stability, it is preferable, especially for a new transformer installation to simulate a through-fed external fault, by a real primary fault simulation. This is achieved by placing a three phase bolted short circuit on the downstream side of the LV CTs, and energizing the HV winding from a three phase medium voltage supply. Typically, the HV winding is energized only from a voltage rated within the range 400 to 440V, to limit the through fault current. In such a through fault scenario, the relay should not trip. The procedure for primary testing is not covered here, as it must respect utility safety rules, permits to work, sanctions for testing, etc. 5.2.3 Checking differential through stability by secondary injection If primary injection to verify correct settings, vector group correction, and CT orientation is not possible, secondary injection testing should be performed. For a two-winding transformer, a fault current is simulated flowing out of the LV side, with a balancing set of currents on one or two phases flowing into the HV side. If all settings and CT orientations are correct, no trip should occur, and minimal differential current will be measured by the relay. For a relay with more than two bias inputs (P633 and P634 models), the external fault injection must be repeated for each additional set of CT inputs. For example, in a P633 there should be an injection for a through fed fault winding a to b, and then afterwards for winding a to c. During these tests, unbalanced faults will be simulated, which could cause restricted earth fault, residual current, and negative sequence protection elements to operate. As these elements are not being tested at this stage, they should be disabled in the Common Settings section of the menu. For example, to temporarily disable REF_1 set [019.050: Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/REF_1, General Enable USER] = No. Make a note of all functions whose General Enable USER setting must be restored to Yes after the testing is completed. 5.2.4 Yy transformers, autotransformer and busbar applications This test simulates current flowing through the transformer to an out-of-zone external fault. In such applications, it is simple to inject a fault current flowing out of the A phase at end b. Because the same zero sequence filtering setting is applied for the end a and end b inputs, then if the current simulated is 1 per unit (1 p.u.) out of end b, the input current to balance at end a is easy to determine. For ease of injection, a single phase current equal to the CT secondary rating (1A or 5A) is simulated to flow OUT on phase A, end b. On an automatic test set, use INOM -180o.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-15
To balance, a current is applied to one phase input at end a (the HV winding, in a transformer application). The magnitude should be a current equal to Kb / Ka x INOM, and at a phase angle as shown below: End b Injected Phase Yy0, Autotrafo. and Busbar Yy2 Yy4 Yy6 Yy8 Yy10 Table 2: A A A A A A Current (End b = LV) INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o End a Injected Phase A C B A C B Current (End a - HV) INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka -180o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka -180o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka -180o
Through fault stability for Yy ends
The amplitude matching factors Ka and Kb can be found in the menu, at addresses [004.105] and [004.106]. Note that in each case, Inom relates to the CT rating of the end being injected. Apply the fault currents for approximately one second. It should be observed that if end a and end b CTs are in the correct orientation that no trip should occur. It is important too to read the displayed Diff. Current 1, 2 and 3 measurements in the relay menu, to check that these measurements are low. These measurements must show less than 0.1 p.u. (10%), to prove that a balance is achieved. (The reason that the differential currents must be read is that in certain busbar applications the Idiff> trip threshold may be set higher than Inom, so that even an incorrect CT connection would not cause a trip). The differential current measurement displays are found in cell [005.080] and onwards. It is not necessary to repeat the injection for other phases, because their orientation has already been proven to be in the same direction as for Phase A (when the Current Inputs were checked). 5.2.5 Dy and Yd applications This test simulates current flowing through the transformer to an out-of-zone external fault. In such applications, it is necessary to inject a fault current flowing out of the A phase on whichever winding is the star (wye) end. For a Dy configuration it will be the LV side (end b), for a Yd configuration it will be the HV side (end a). The star winding phase A shares the same power transformer limb as two phases on the opposite side, such that a two phase current loop will need to be injected to achieve a balance. For ease of injection, a single phase current equal to the CT secondary rating (1A or 5A) is simulated to flow OUT on phase A. On an automatic test set, use INOM -180o.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-16
To balance, a current is applied to two phase CT inputs (delta side). The magnitude should be a current equal to Kb / (3.Ka) x INOM, and at the phase angles as shown below: Star End Injected Phase Dy1 or Yd11 A Current (Star) INOM -180o INOM -180 INOM -180
o
Delta Side Injected Loop A-B
Current IA = INOM . Kb / 3Ka 0o IB = INOM . Kb / 3Ka -180o IC = INOM . Kb / 3Ka 0o IB = INOM . Kb / 3Ka -180o IC = INOM . Kb / 3Ka 0o IA = INOM . Kb / 3Ka -180o IB = INOM . Kb / 3Ka 0o IA = INOM . Kb / 3Ka -180o IB = INOM . Kb / 3Ka 0o IC = INOM . Kb / 3Ka -180o IA = INOM . Kb / 3Ka 0o IC = INOM . Kb / 3Ka -180o
Dy3 or Yd9
C-B
Dy5 or Yd7
C-A
Dy7 or Yd5
INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180

o
B-A
Dy9 or Yd3
B-C
Dy11 or Yd1 Table 3:
A-C
Through fault stability for delta-star ends
The amplitude matching factors Ka and Kb can be found in the menu, at addresses [004.105] and [004.106]. Note that in each case, Inom relates to the CT rating of the end being injected. The delta side loop current may be applied as two separate current outputs from a test set, or one current looped out through the first phase specified, and returning back through the latter phase input. Apply the fault currents for approximately one second. It should be observed that if end a and end b CTs are in the correct orientation that no trip should occur. It is important too to read the displayed Diff. Current 1, 2 and 3 measurements in the relay menu, to check that these measurements are low. These measurements must show less than 0.1 p.u. (10%), to prove that a balance is achieved. The differential current measurement displays are found in cell [005.080] and onwards. It is not necessary to repeat the injection for other phases, because their orientation has already been proven to be in the same direction as for Phase A (when the Current Inputs were checked). 5.2.6 Dd applications This test simulates current flowing through the transformer to an out-of-zone external fault. In many such applications, there may be in-zone earthing transformers, so it easiest to simulate an external phase-phase fault, to avoid simulating a zero sequence current. If the current simulated is 1 per unit (1 p.u.) out of end b, the input current to balance at end a is easy to determine. In the simplest application of a Dd0 transformer, an A-B fault is simulated flowing out of the LV side, fed by an A-B loop input on the HV side. For ease of injection, a loop current equal to the CT secondary rating (1A or 5A) is simulated to flow OUT on phase A, end b, and looping back through phase B, end b. On an automatic test set, use INOM -180o. Because four phase CT inputs to the relay will be energized at once, it is necessary that the test set output current for this LV side is set as a single phase but looping through two phase CT inputs.
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-17
To balance, a loop current is applied at end a (the HV winding). The magnitude should be a current equal to Kb/Ka x INOM, and at a phase angle as shown below. Again, the test set is configured to generate only one single phase output for this winding, looped through two phase CT inputs - thus in total the output requirements can be satisfied by a test set typically having only up to 3 current outputs. End b Injected Phase Dd0 Dd2 Dd4 Dd6 Dd8 Dd10 Table 4: A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B A-B Current (End b - LV) INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o INOM -180o End a Injected Phase A-B C-B C-A B-A B-C A-C Current (End a - HV) INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o INOM . Kb / Ka 0o
Through fault stability for Dd ends
The amplitude matching factors Ka and Kb can be found in the menu, at addresses [004.105] and [004.106]. Note that in each case, Inom relates to the CT rating of the end being injected. Apply the fault currents for approximately one second. It should be observed that if end a and end b CTs are in the correct orientation that no trip should occur. It is important too to read the displayed Diff. Current 1, 2 and 3 measurements in the relay menu, to check that these measurements are low. These measurements must show less than 0.1 p.u. (10%), to prove that a balance is achieved. The differential current measurement displays are found in cell [005.080] and onwards. It is not necessary to repeat the injection for other phases, because their orientation has already been proven to be in the same direction as for Phase A (when the Current Inputs were checked). 5.2.7 Differential stability - summary It must be ensured that each winding has been covered during the external fault simulations. For example: For a P634 used in a mesh/busbar protection scheme, the stability test should be performed 3 times: (1) End a-b, (2) End a-c, (3) End a-d. The Yy injection test case would be used for each test For a P633 protecting a Yd transformer with an HV winding fed from two ring-bus CT inputs (summated HV from end a + end b), the stability test would be performed 2 times: (1) End a-b, (2) End a-c. The Yy test would be used for (1), and the Yd test for (2)
CM
5.2.8
Verifying the trip output contact mapping At the test set, retain the same injection currents as per the last stability test, but invert the LV side (end b) current(s) to simulate an internal fault. This effectively simulates a double end fed fault. To verify correct mapping feed the trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker into the injection test set, to observe that the contact closes correctly. Apply the fault current for 100ms - check and record the tripping time. At this stage, make sure that any protection elements which were disabled by a USER command to permit differential testing, are now restored to Enabled.
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-18 5.3 5.3.1 Restricted earth fault setting checks Checking REF sensitivity
These tests are performed on a per winding basis, for all elements (REF_1, REF_2, REF_3) that are used in the application. The tripping sensitivity for the REF differential protection of one winding with a single end infeed is given by:
I=
z:
I diff > I nom , z kz

REF_1, 2 or 3
Idiff>: Set REF minimum sensitivity Inom,z: Nominal phase CT current of the P63x for the winding concerned kz: Amplitude matching factor for Y CT input [address 004.163 for REF_1]
First start with REF_1 if enabled. Apply a current slightly less than the Idiff> setting to the IY CT input for that winding only. Observe that no trip should occur, and the red Trip LED remains extinguished. Ramp up the current until a trip occurs and the Trip LED illuminates. Record the current at which the relay tripped. The measured current should be within +/10% of the Idiff> setting (relay accuracy 5%, plus test set accuracy 5%). Note: If the REF is providing low-impedance balanced earth fault protection for a delta winding, there will be no IY input connected. In such cases, inject instead into the A phase CT input for the winding concerned, and take the Kz matching factor from address [004.160]. In such cases it may be necessary to temporarily disable other protection elements that may trip, in order to view only REF operation.
In high impedance REF applications, take care that the injection test set is able to support the connected burden of the stabilising resistor. If not, the test injection may need to be made directly into the relay IY input terminals.
CM
5.3.2
Remember to repeat the REF tests for each winding where it is implemented. Checking REF through stability by primary injection Where REF is providing low-impedance balanced earth fault protection for delta windings, then no additional testing is required. This is because no IY CT input is connected, and all phase CT orientations have already been proven to be in the same sense. In all high impedance applications, and all applications to protect grounded star (wye) windings, it will not be possible to prove that all input CTs have the correct directionality, without a primary injection test. To check for through stability, it is important, especially for a new transformer installation to simulate a through-fed external earth fault, by a primary fault simulation. This is achieved by temporarily shorting the entire A-phase winding to the star point, and then circulating fault current in a loop through the A-phase CT primary, the short, and the IY CT primary. In such a through fault scenario, the relay should not trip. The procedure for primary testing is not covered here, as it must respect utility safety rules, permits to work, sanctions for testing, etc. It is important that the primary injection test is undertaken for the REF function, because even stability with loadflow cannot be used as a test of REF stability. Whilst balanced load is flowing, there is no way of knowing whether the star point-ground CT is correctly oriented. Thus, an installation might falsely appear correct on-load - until such time as an external earth fault happens on the system, and a maloperation could occur.
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 5.3.3 Verifying the trip output contact mapping (secondary injection)
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-19
At the test set, make the same connections and settings as per the REF sensitivity test, however the current injection should be set to Inom (1A or 5A). To verify correct mapping feed the trip contacts that would be expected to trip the circuit breaker into the injection test set, to observe that the contact closes correctly. Apply the fault current for 100ms - check and record the tripping time. Repeat the REF tests for other windings, as appropriate. 5.4 Check application settings Upon completion of the tests any protection or supervision elements which were disabled for testing purposes must have their application settings restored. It is not essential to injection test non-differential elements, as the basic integrity of the setting file, and relay calibration have already been verified. The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during the injection test. There are two methods of checking the settings: Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running MiCOM S1 software via the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover, or rear communications port. Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available) Step through the settings using the relays operator interface and compare them with the original application-specific setting record
It is very important that the key settings below are investigated: 5.4.1 Checking that the correct settings group is active Ensure that the active setting group left applied is as expected. In the menu, navigate to: 5.4.2 [003.062: Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/GROUP, Actual Setting Group] Read out and record the setting group shown, Setting Group SGx
CM
Checking that the protection is switched on Ensure that this is set to Yes (Enabled). In the menu, navigate to: [003.030: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Protection Enabled] Read out and record that this shows Yes (Enabled)
5.4.3
Checking that no blocking of output relays is inadvertently left applied In the menu, navigate to both of the following addresses to check that no User programmable inhibits (blocks) on contact operation remain. All should show No. [021.014: Settings/Function Settings/Global/OUTP, USER Outp rel Block] [021.012: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Trip Cmd.Block USER]
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-20 5.4.4
Checking that the primary protection function (differential) is enabled In the menu, navigate to all of the following addresses to check that the display reads Enabled or Yes in each instance: [056.027: Settings/Configuration/DIFF, Differential PR (87)] [019.080: Settings/Function Settings/Common Settings/DIFF, General Enable USER] [07y.152: Settings/Function Settings/Setting Group SGx/DIFF, Enable]
Note that address y is the required setting group x, plus one. 5.4.5 Ensuring that all records and memories have been reset In the menu, navigate to both of the following addresses to execute resetting. The general reset is password protected (Input the password, which by default is a press of the four arrow keys <>, left-right-up-down in sequence. Press ENTER, and if the password has been accepted the EDIT mode LED will light. The up or down key can now be used to toggle the setting to Execute, then press ENTER.) 5.5 [003.002: Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/MAIN, General Reset] [003.008: Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/MT_RC, Reset Recording]
Check correct display of status LEDs The status of the 5 LED indicators on the left hand-side of the relay front panel should be checked. The TRIP LED should not be showing The ALARM LED should not be showing The OUT OF SERVICE LED should not be showing The green HEALTHY LED must be illuminated The ENTER/edit mode LED should not be showing
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-21
6.
ON-LOAD CHECKS
The objectives of the on-load checks are to: Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the plant being protected. Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has been removed to allow testing. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. When advised by the system operator that it is permitted to energise the primary circuit, arrange for the protected transformer to be made live by closing the circuit breaker. This will make VT and CT circuits live. 6.1 6.1.1 Confirm current and voltage transformer wiring Voltage connection For the voltage input to the relay, verify that the analog reading is as expected. When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurement of voltage, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity) when the line voltage is equal to the [010.002: Settings/Function Settings/Global/MAIN, Vn V.T. prim.] setting in kV. 6.1.2 Current connections For each current input to the relay, verify that the analog reading is as expected. When reading the per unit (p.u.) measurements of current, the relevant reading should be 1 (unity) when the line current is equal to the [In C.T. prim.] setting in A.
7.
FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete. Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service. If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay. The green HEALTHY LED must be illuminated
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-22
8.
Date:
P63x COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD

Engineer:
Substation:
Circuit:
System Frequency:
Front Plate Information Model No. Variant Serial Number/MM/YY (includes month and year of manufacture) Front Plate Rated Current In Rated Voltage Vn Auxiliary Voltage Vx Test Equipment Used This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices that have been commissioned using equipment that is later found to be defective or incompatible but may not be detected during the commissioning procedure. Injection test set Model: Serial No: Model: Serial No: Model: Serial No: Type: Version: MiCOM S1 1A 50 - 130V 5A / / Station Rating Used A V V P63 P63 -3 -4 -6 -
CM
Multimeter Insulation tester
Setting software
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-23 *Tick as appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions been followed?
Yes*
No*
Product Checks With the Relay De-Energized Visual inspection Visual inspection Relay damaged? Rating information correct for installation? Case earth installed? Insulation resistance >100M at 500V dc Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No* Not Tested*
External Wiring Wiring checked against diagram? Test block connections checked? Yes* Yes* No* No* N/A*
Measured auxiliary supply Power supply protective earth installed?
V ac* Yes*
V dc* No*
With the Relay Energized Healthy LED illuminated after power-up? Yes* No*
Date and Time Clock set to local time? Time maintained when auxiliary supply removed? Yes* Yes* No* No*
CM
Light Emitting Diodes All LEDs illuminate on press of C key? Yes* No*
Input Opto-Isolators (Starting from Right Side) Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A*
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-24 Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Opto input U___ working? Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes*
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A*
Output Relays (Starting from Right Hand Side) Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Working? Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A*
CM
Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___ Relay K___
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 COMM1 Communication Standard Courier* IEC60870-5-103* UCA2.0* Communications established? Protocol converter tested? COMM2 communications established? MODEM tested? Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No*
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-25 MODBUS* DNP3.0*
N/A*
N/A*
UCA2 communications established? RTD probe working? (where fitted) Ambient temperature shown
Yes* Yes* C
No* No*
N/A* N/A*
Setting Checks Application-specific function settings applied? Yes* No*
Current Inputs In end a CT Ratio (HV winding) In end b CT Ratio In end c CT Ratio In end d CT Ratio End a neutral CT Ratio End b neutral CT Ratio End c neutral CT Ratio / / / / / / / (prim/sec) (prim/sec) (prim/sec) (prim/sec) (prim/sec) (prim/sec) (prim/sec)
Input VT A, a (HV DIFF A phase input) B, a (HV DIFF B phase input) C, a (HV DIFF C phase input) A, b B, b C, b A, c B, c C, c A, d B, d C, d Y, a (REF) Y, b (REF) Y, c (REF)
Applied Value A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Displayed Value p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. p.u. N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A*
CM
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-26 Voltage Input VT Ratio N/A* /
(prim/sec)
Input VT V
Applied Value V
Displayed Value p.u. N/A*
Differential Element Tests DIFF Idiff> pickup sensitivity OK DIFF through fault stability (end a to b) OK DIFF through fault stability (end a to c) OK DIFF through fault stability (end a to d) OK DIFF protection trip contact routing OK? DIFF trip time REF_1 pickup sensitivity OK REF_1 through fault stability OK REF_1 protection trip contact routing OK? REF_1 trip time REF_2 pickup sensitivity OK REF_2 through fault stability OK REF_2 protection trip contact routing OK? REF_2 trip time REF_3 pickup sensitivity OK REF_3 through fault stability OK REF_3 protection trip contact routing OK? Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A* s Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A* s Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A* s Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No* No* s N/A* N/A*
CM
REF_3 trip time
Application-Specific Function Settings Verified? Settings extracted and stored as filename.? Active setting group left applied Protection switched on? Any user blocking of contacts? Differential protection enabled Records and memories reset HEALTHY LED lit, and no alarms?
Yes* .x3v SG Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes*
No*
N/A* N/A*
No* No* No* No* No*
On-Load Checks Test wiring removed? Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? Per unit voltage reading as expected? Per unit current readings as expected? Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No* N/A* N/A* N/A*
Commissioning MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Final Checks Test wiring removed? Disturbed customer wiring re-checked? HEALTHY LED still showing? Secondary front cover replaced? Yes* Yes* Yes* Yes* No* No* No* No*
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-27
N/A* N/A*
N/A*
CM
Commissioning Engineer
Customer Witness
Date:
Date:
P63x/UK CM/A54 (CM) 9-28
9.
AS-FITTED SETTINGS RECORD

It is recommended that either a MiCOM S1 print-out of settings applied is attached to the commissioning record here, or preferably the file is stored electronically. The setting file must be saved and stored securely, for example held on a CDROM kept within the substation. Safe electronic storage, under the control of the customers quality system, will permit easy re-use and/or modification of settings in the future.
CM
Maintenance MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK MT/A54
MAINTENANCE
MT
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK MT/A54
MT
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-1
CONTENTS
(MT) 101.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 1.3.1.2 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.1.1 1.4.1.2 1.4.1.3 1.4.2 1.5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance period Maintenance checks Alarms Opto-isolators Output relays Measurement accuracy Method of repair MiCOM P63x relay Replacing the complete relay Replacing a module Power supply module Internal battery Instructions for replacing the battery Post modification tests Battery disposal Electrolytic capacitors Cleaning
3
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 7
MT
FIGURES
Figure 1: Component drawing for power supply module V 6
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-2
MT
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-3
1.
1.1
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance period It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive periodic monitoring after installation. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. AREVA T&D protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
1.2
Maintenance checks The P63x is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely checked for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Additional functional tests should performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years - 4 years at the maximum. The P63x incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis. Nonetheless, there are a number of functions that cannot be checked by the self-monitoring feature without running a test from the device terminals. The respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases. In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/C11) or later issue, or the Safety and Technical Data sections of this Technical Manual and also the ratings on the equipments rating label.
1.2.1
Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, examine the Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/CHECK folder to determine if any internal self-monitoring faults have been detected. Details of all alarm conditions can be obtained by a Readout of Logs from the Communication menu in S&R-103. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
MT
1.2.2
Opto-isolators The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read out (Measurements + Tests/Measurements/I.O. Status Monitor/INP folder). This check should be performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
1.2.3
Output relays With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the all-or-nothing relays. There is no monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control function (Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/OUTP folder).
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-4
Before testing, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no inadvertent switching operations will take place. 1.2.4 Measurement accuracy The analog measured variables are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly, it is necessary to test from the device terminals. The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A small measured value (such as 0.5 Inom) and a large measured value (such as 4 Inom) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire control range. The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous measurements. A dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range. Additional analog testing is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely numerical and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type testing. 1.3 1.3.1 Method of repair MiCOM P63x relay If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged. Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty modules should be replaced, as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the complete relay or just the faulty modules, identified by the in-built diagnostic software, can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty module can be found in the Troubleshooting section (P63x/UK TS). The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement modules. However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring. Replacing modules can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not performed by an approved service center, the warranty will be invalidated. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipments rating label. This should ensure that no damage is caused by incorrect handling of the electronic components. 1.3.1.1 Replacing the complete relay The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the relay. Note: The MiCOM P63x range of relays with ring-terminals have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal block is removed.
MT
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-5
Disconnect the relay earth, IRIG-B and fiber optic connections, as appropriate, from the rear of the relay. There are two types of terminal block used on the relay, medium and heavy duty, which are fastened to the rear panel using crosshead screws. Note: The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimize the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.
Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal blocks away from their internal connectors. Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers are fitted and open. Withdraw the relay carefully from the panel, rack, etc. because it will be heavy due to the internal transformers. To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth, IRIG-B and fiber optic connections are replaced. Terminal blocks are labeled to facilitate easy identification. Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be re-commissioned using the instructions in the Commissioning section (P63x/UK CM), inclusive of this section. 1.3.1.2 Replacing a module Replacing printed circuit boards and other internal components of protective relays must be undertaken only by Service Centers approved by AREVA T&D. Failure to obtain the authorization of AREVA T&D After Sales Engineers prior to commencing work may invalidate the product warranty. Before removing any modules the auxiliary supply must be removed. Wait 5s for capacitors to discharge. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated. AREVA T&D Automation Support teams are available world-wide, and it is strongly recommended that any repairs be entrusted to those trained personnel. For this reason, details on product disassembly and re-assembly are not included here. 1.4 1.4.1 Power supply module Internal battery The P63x is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only a few A during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval cited above. Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment's rating label. 1.4.1.1 Instructions for replacing the battery Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
MT
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-6
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module. The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock. The relevant components are located on the following modules: Electrolytic capacitor: On power supply module V Lithium battery: On power supply module V Note: Only AREVA-approved components may be used.
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
P1843ENa
Figure 1:
Component drawing for power supply module V
MT
1.4.1.2
Post modification tests To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the auxiliary supply fails, check cell [090.010, Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/CHECK, Battery Failure] reads No. Additionally, if further confirmation that the replacement battery is installed correctly is required, the commissioning test described in section 5.2.3 of the Commissioning section (P63x/UK CM), Date and Time, can be performed.
1.4.1.3
Battery disposal The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
1.4.2
Electrolytic capacitors Electrolytic capacitors are installed on the power supply module because of dimensioning requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the recommended temperature range (+55C or 131F), the useful life of these components is 80,000 hours or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 years. The useful life is doubled for each
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-7
10 K reduction in temperature, thus for substation ambients 40C no capacitor maintenance will be necessary during the relay service life. 1.5 Cleaning Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all ac and dc supplies, current transformer and voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth moistened with clean water. The use of detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not recommended as they may damage the relays surface and leave a conductive residue.
MT
P63x/UK MT/A54 (MT) 10-8
MT
Troubleshooting MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK TS/A54
TROUBLESHOOTING
TS
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK TS/A54
TS
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-1
CONTENTS
(TS) 111. 2. 3. 4.
4.1
INTRODUCTION INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION POWER UP ERRORS ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP

Error code identification
3 3 3 4
4
5. 6.
6.1
OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP ERROR DURING OPERATION

ALARM LED indication
5 6
6
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3
MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING

Failure of output contacts Failure of opto inputs Incorrect analog signals
9
9 9 9
8.
REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE
10
TS
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-2
TS
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-3
1.
INTRODUCTION
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/C11) or later issue, or the Safety and Technical Data sections of this Technical Manual and also the ratings on the equipments rating label. The purpose of this section of the service manual is to allow an error condition on the relay to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken. Should the relay have developed a fault, it should be possible in most cases to identify which relay module requires attention. The Maintenance section (P63x/UK MT), advises on the recommended method of repair where faulty modules need replacing. It is not possible to perform an on-site repair to a faulted module. In cases where a faulty relay/module is being returned to the manufacturer or one of their approved service centers, completed copy of the Repair/Modification Return Authorization Form located at the end of this section should be included.
2.
INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION

Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem experienced, and then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed analysis of the problem. Symptom Relay fails to power up Relay powers up - but indicates error and halts during power-up sequence Relay powers up but Out of Service LED is illuminated Error during normal operation Mal-operation of the relay during testing Table 1: Problem identification Refer To Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7
3.
POWER UP ERRORS
If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be used to determine whether the fault is in the external wiring, auxiliary fuse, power supply module of the relay or the relay front panel. Test Check Check that the magnitude of the supply voltage at the auxiliary voltage input is correct. The P63x is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal. Note: Before checking further, disconnect the P63x from the power supply. 2 Check to ensure fuse F1 on power supply module V is undamaged. Action If auxiliary voltage is present and correct, then proceed to test 2. Otherwise the wiring and fuses/MCBs in auxiliary supply should be checked. If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced before determining the cause of the failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is a danger that the damage will spread. Required fuses: Vaux = 24V dc, Type M3.5 Vaux = 48-250V dc/100-230V ac, Type M2 Table 2: Failure of relay to power up
TS
If the cause of failure of the relay to power up can not be determined it should be returned to the manufacturer or one of their approved service centers, accompanied with a completed copy of the Repair/Modification Return Authorization Form located at the end of this section.
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-4
4.
ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP

After the auxiliary supply voltage has been applied, various tests are carried out to verify full operability of the P63x. Check memories (RAM write/read test) Checksum test (calculate actual ROM checksum and compare with stored checksum) Check hardware (test real time clock, test counters, test A/D converter) Check bus and fitted modules (identify device type, verify correct modules fitted: type/version/location) Check intelligent devices on fitted modules (if applicable) (write/read DPRAM on comm module or transient ground fault module) Check software (compare compatibility of device type, data model information, processor operating system and protection and control software)
4.1
Error code identification If the Px3x detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred and (if applicable) the address of the faulty memory area, e.g. ERROR 9 - 03C80000H. Error number (nn) 1 5 6 9 17 18 19 30 31 32 Description RAM error (with HW address) Static RAM error (with HW address) Non-volatile RAM (NOVRAM) error of setting parameters (with HW address) Flash-Eprom checksum error of device firmware (with HW address) Error of timer/clock 82C54 Error of A/D-converter Flash-EPROM checksum error of bay templates (only OBS & Cx3x devices; with HW address) Wrong data model version Wrong version of operating system iRMX386 Wrong software versions (combination) of protection, local operation (HMI) and communication (COMM1/2) Wrong control software version (only OBS & Cx3x devices) Power-up self-test error
TS
Table 3:
33
No control actions can be carried out. A new attempt to start up the Px3x can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-5
5.
OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP

The yellow OUT OF SERVICE LED indicates that the device is out of operation (all protection and control functions are blocked) and therefore should be used for high priority alarming of operational personnel to take immediate/urgent corrective actions. This LED is active if: The device is determined blocked/faulty by the internal self-monitoring due to a system error; The protection is disabled (003.030 MAIN: Protection Enabled = No (Disabled); The output relays are blocked (021.014 OUTP: USER Outp rel Block = Yes); The trip command is blocked (021.012 MAIN: Trip Cmd.Block. USER = Yes).
Furthermore the setting (021.031 MAIN: Fct Assign Fault) may be used to allocate additional internal alarms/errors to raise the blocked/faulty signal for high prior alarming of operational personnel. A typical example is to configure the system alarm CHECK: Error Kxx with Kxx being the output relay on which the trip command is configured. Please note that the configuration of any signal to 021.031 only raises the blocked/faulty signal but does not cause any blocking of protection or control functions. Test 1 Check Check setting MAIN: Protection Enabled [003.030] is set to Yes (Enabled). If so, proceed to test 2. Check setting OUTP: USER Outp rel Block [021.014] is set to No. If so, proceed to test 3. Check setting MAIN: Trip Cmd.Block. USER [021.012] is set to No. If so, proceed to test 4. Check setting MAIN: Fct Assign Fault [021.031] to determine any user configured signals that may be set to indicate via the OUT OF SERVICE LED. It is probable that the device has detected an internal fault. Extract the Monitoring Signal log via the S&R-103 Communications/ Readout of Logs/Monitoring Signal Recording command. Action If set to No (Disabled), set to Yes (Enabled). Verify that the OUT OF SERVICE LED is extinguished. If set to Yes, set to No. Verify that the OUT OF SERVICE LED is extinguished. If set to Yes, set to No. Verify that the OUT OF SERVICE LED is extinguished. Check the current status of these signals to determine if any are causing the LED to remain on. Reset these signals by correcting the problem indicated. Proceed to step 5 if the LED can not be extinguished by resetting these signals. View the extracted log file to determine the cause of the fault.
TS
Table 4:
Out of Service LED illuminated
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-6
6.
ERROR DURING OPERATION

After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run during normal operation with a cycle time of 10 seconds. These tests comprise: Timeout check of protection task Check of internal battery voltage Checksum test of recording buffers Checksum test of setting parameters Checksum test of monitoring buffer Continuity tests of output relay coils
In addition, errors (exceptions) detected by the main processor are immediately/directly handled by the operating system, e.g. zero division error or undefined op.code. Tests of external signals/wiring are done as part of the protection tasks, e.g. monitoring of VT and CT measuring circuits. 6.1 ALARM LED indication Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory via the S&R-103 Communications/Readout of Logs/Monitoring Signal Recording command. The log will contain monitoring or warning indications currently active in the device. The status of the monitoring or warning indications can also be checked in the device in the Measurements + Tests/Measurements/Log. State Signals/CHECK menu group. The table below details the device reaction when the internal signal listed occurs. Further explanation of the signals is contained in section 8 - Measurements and Recording. Menu Text Device Action On First Instance Subsequent Action
Measurements + Tests\Measurements\Log. State Signals CHECK: Faulty DSP CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. DSP CHECK: Warm Restart Exec. CHECK: Cold Restart Exec.
TS
CHECK: Cold Restart CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail CHECK: Battery Failure CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded CHECK: +15V Supply Faulty CHECK: +24V Supply Faulty CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty CHECK: Wrong Module Slot 1 (21) CHECK: Defect.Module Slot 1 (21) CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty
Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart -
Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking -
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-7 Device Action On First Instance Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Warm restart Subsequent Action Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking -
Menu Text CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty CHECK: Error K 1201 (2008) CHECK: Undefined Op Code CHECK: Invalid Op CHECK: Undefined Interrupt CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. CHECK: Protection Failure CHECK: Checksum Sett Error CHECK: Clock Sync. Error CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM CHECK: Overflow MT_RC CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block CHECK: Inval. SW vers.comm. CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y CHECK: Time-out Module Y CHECK: M.c.b. Trip V CHECK: CT Fail Alarm CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end a CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end b CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end c CHECK: CT Fail Alarm, end d CHECK: Invalid Charact. V/f CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-1 CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-2 CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC CHECK: PT100 open Circuit CHECK: Overload 20 mA input CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA inp. CHECK: Setting Error f<> CHECK: Iref, a Inval. Range CHECK: Output 30 CHECK: Output 31 CHECK: Output 32 CHECK: Output 30 (t) CHECK: Output 31 (t) CHECK: Output 32 (t) CHECK: Iref, b Inval. Range
Blocking of f<> and V<> protection
Fault dependent Fault dependent Fault dependent Fault dependent Fault dependent Fault dependent Blocking of f<> protection Device blocking Device blocking -
TS
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-8
Troubleshooting MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Device Action On First Instance Subsequent Action
Menu Text CHECK: Iref, c Inval. Range CHECK: Iref, d Inval. Range CHECK: Matching Fail. end a CHECK: Matching Fail. end b CHECK: Matching Fail. end c CHECK: Matching Fail. end d CHECK: Ratio mtch.Fact.inv. CHECK: 2nd Match.Fact. inv. CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_1 CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_2 CHECK: Inv.Range Iref REF_3 CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_1 CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_2 CHECK: Match.f. kam,N REF_3 CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1 CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_2 CHECK: Match.f. kam,Y REF_3 CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_1 CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_2 CHECK: Rat Mtch f inv REF_3 CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_1 CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_2 CHECK: Min Mtch f inv REF_3 CHECK: CTA Error THRM1 CHECK: CTA Error THRM2 CHECK: Setting Error THRM1
Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking Device blocking -
Blocking of THRM1 protection Blocking of THRM2 protection Clock synchronization failure
TS
CHECK: Setting Error THRM2 CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync Table 5:
Device response to self monitoring errors
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-9
7.
7.1
MAL-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING

Failure of output contacts It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time setting at [003.044 OUTP: Hold-Time for Test]) in the Measurements + Tests/Control and Testing/OUTP menu group. First select the output relay to be tested [003.042 OUTP: Relay Assign. f.Test]. The output relay to be tested can only be selected if the device has been set to off-line at (003.030) MAIN: Protection Enabled ('Set/Func/Glob/' menu group). Test triggering then occurs via OUTP: Relay Test. It is password protected (see Getting Started - GS Password-Protected Control Operations).
7.2
Failure of opto inputs By selecting the corresponding state signal within the Measurements + Tests/ Measurements/I.O. Status Monitor/INP, it is possible to determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the P63x. The values displayed have the following meanings: Low: High: Not energized Energized
Disabled: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input
This display appears regardless of the opto input mode selected. 7.3 Incorrect analog signals If it is suspected that the analog quantities being measured by the relay are not correct then the measurement function of the relay can be used to verify the nature of the problem. The measured values displayed by the relay should be compared with the actual magnitudes at the relay terminals. Verify that the correct terminals are being used and that the CT and VT ratios set on the relay are correct. The correct 120 degree displacement of the phase measurements can be used to confirm that the inputs have been correctly connected.
TS
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-10
8.
REPAIR AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURE

Please follow these 5 steps to return an Automation product to us: 1. Get the Repair and Modification Authorization Form (RMA) Find a copy of the RMA form at the end of this section. To obtain an electronic version of the RMA form for e-mailing, please visit the following URL:
http://www.areva-td.com/automationrepair
2. Fill in RMA form Fill in only the white part of the form. Please ensure that all fields marked (M) are completed such as: Equipment model Model No. and Serial No. Description of failure or modification required (please be specific) Value for customs (in case the product requires export) Delivery and invoice addresses Contact details
3. Send RMA form to your local contact Find enclosed a list of local service contacts, worldwide.
4. Receive from local service contact, the information required to ship the product Your local service contact will provide you with all the information: Pricing details RMA n Repair center address
If required, an acceptance of the quote must be delivered before going to next stage.
TS
5. Send the product to the repair center Address the shipment to the repair center specified by your local contact Ensure all items are protected by appropriate packaging: anti-static bag and foam protection Ensure a copy of the import invoice is attached with the unit being returned Ensure a copy of the RMA form is attached with the unit being returned E-mail or fax a copy of the import invoice and airway bill document to your local contact
Troubleshooting MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 LOCAL CONTACT LIST

Country NORTH AMERICA Tel: Canada CANADA : Brossard Fax: (1) 450 923 9571 USA (Products), Virgin Islands CENTRAL AMERICA Anguilla, Antigua & Barbuda, Aruba, Barbados, Belize, Cayman Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominica, Dominican Republic, El Salvador, Grenada, Guatemala, Guyana, Honduras, Jamaica, Kiribati, Mexico, Montserrat, Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Republic of Haiti, Saint Kitts & Nevis, Santa Lucia, Saint Vincent and the Grenadines, Suriname, Trinidad and Tobago, Turks and Caicos Islands, Venezuela. SOUTH AMERICA Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Ecuador, Falkland Islands, Paraguay, Peru, Uruguay. EUROPE (MEDITERRANEAN) Albania, Andorra, Belgium, Bulgaria, Bosnia and Herzegovinia, Croatia, Cyprus, France, French DOM-TOM, Greece, Israel, Macedonia, Malta, Mauritius, Romania, Yugoslavia. EUROPE (EAST) Austria, Czech Republic, Germany, Hungary, Liechtenstein, Slovakia, Svalbard Islands, Switzerland, Turkey. Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Estonia, Georgia, Latvia, Moldova, Poland, Ukraine. EUROPE (NORTH) Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway, Netherlands, Sweden. UNITED KINGDOM Tel: Faroe Islands, Ireland, UK UK : Stafford Fax: (44) 1785 227 729 (44) 1785 272 156 Tel: UK : Stafford Fax: (44) 1785 227 729 (44) 1785 272 156 Tel: GERMANY : Dresden Fax: (49) 69 66 32 28 10 (49) 69 66 32 11 36 Tel: BRAZIL : Sao Paulo Fax: (55) 11 3491 7256 (55) 11 3491 7271 Tel: USA : Bethlehem Fax: (1) 610 997 5450 (1) 610 997 5100 (1) 450 923 7084 Automation Support Manager Telephone and Fax Numbers
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-11
E-Mail
automationrepair.us@areva-td.com
Tel: MEXICO :
(52) 55 5387 4309 support.automation-mexico@areva-td.com
Fax: (52) 55 5387 4317
automationrepair.southamerica@areva-td.com
Tel: FRANCE : Lattes
(33) 4 67 20 55 55 automationrepair.medaf@areva-td.com
Fax: (33) 4 67 20 56 00
Service-afs@areva-td.com
TS
Tel: POLAND : Swiebodzice
(48) 748 548 410 automationrepair.nce2@areva-td.com
Fax: (48) 748 548 548
automationrepair.uk@areva-td.com
automationrepair.uk@areva-td.com
P63x/UK TS/A54 (TS) 11-12

Automation Support Manager Telephone and Fax Numbers
Country EUROPE (OTHER)
E-Mail
Tel: Italy ITALY : Bergamo
(39) 0345 28 111 automationrepair.italy@areva-td.com
Fax: (39) 0345 22 590 Tel: Russian Federation RUSSIA : Moscow Fax: (7) 095 231 29 45 Tel: Spain, Gibralter AFRICA Tel: All African countries MIDDLE EAST Bahrain, Iran, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Syria, United Arab Emirates, Yemen. ASIA Tel: Afghanistan, Pakistan Kazakhstan, Kyrghyzstan, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan. Bhutan, India, Maldives, Nepal, Sri Lanka EASTERN ASIA Bangladesh, British Indian Ocean Territory, Brunei, Cambodia, Cocos Islands, Democratic Peoples Republic of Korea, East Timor, Hong Kong, Indonesia, Japan, Laos, Macau, Malaysia, Myanmar, Palau, Papua New Guinea, Philippines, Singapore, Solomon Islands, South Korea, Taiwan, Thailand, Tokelau, Tuvalu, Vietnam. China, Mongolia. UAE : Dubai Fax: (971) 6556 1082 Tel: POLAND : Swiebodzice Fax: (48) 748 548 548 Tel: INDIA : Chennai Fax: (91) 44 226 40 657 (91) 44 226 40 921 automationsupport.india@areva-td.com (48) 748 548 410 automationrepair.nce2@areva-td.com (971) 6556 0559 automationrepair.middleeast@areva-td.com Tel: UAE : Dubai Fax: (971) 6556 1082 (971) 6556 0559 automationrepair.middleeast@areva-td.com FRANCE : Lattes Fax: (33) 4 67 20 56 00 (33) 4 67 20 55 55 automationrepair.medaf@areva-td.com SPAIN : Madrid Fax: (34) 91 305 9200 (34) 91 655 9043 (7) 095 231 29 49
Tel: SINGAPORE :
(65) 6749 0777 automationrepair.seasia@areva-td.com
Fax: (65) 6846 1796
Tel: CHINA : Shanghai
(86) 21 5812 8822 automationrepair.shanghai@areva-td.com
Fax: (86) 21 5812 8833
TS
OCEANIA American Samoa, Australia, Christmas Islands, Cook Islands, Fiji, Guam, Heard and Mac Donalds Islands, Marshall Islands, Micronesia, Nauru, New Zealand, Niue, Norfolk Island, Northern Mariana Islands, Pitcairn, Samoa, Vanuatu.
Tel: AUSTRALIA : Sydney
(61) 2 9739 3071 automationrepair.pacific@areva-td.com
Fax: (61) 2 9739 3092
REPAIR/MODIFICATION RETURN AUTHORIZATION FORM

FIELDS IN GREY TO BE FILLED IN BY AREVA T&D PERSONNEL ONLY
Reference RMA: Repair Center Address (for shipping) Service Type Retrofit Warranty Paid service Under repair contract Wrong supply AREVA T&D - Local Contact Details Name: Telephone No.: Fax No.: E-mail: IDENTIFICATION OF UNIT
Date: LSC PO No.:
Fields marked (M) are mandatory, delays in return will occur if not completed. Model No./Part No.: (M) Manufacturer Reference: (M) Serial No.: (M) Software Version: Quantity: FAULT INFORMATION Type of Failure Hardware fail Mechanical fail/visible defect Software fail Other: Found Defective During FAT/inspection On receipt During installation/commissioning During operation Other: Site Name/Project: Commissioning Date: Under Warranty: Additional Information: Customer P.O (if paid):
Yes
No
Fault Reproducibility Fault persists after removing, checking on test bench Fault persists after re-energization Intermittent fault
Description of Failure Observed or Modification Required - Please be specific (M)
FOR REPAIRS ONLY Would you like us to install an updated firmware version after repair? CUSTOMS & INVOICING INFORMATION Required to allow return of repaired items Value for Customs (M) Customer Invoice Address ((M) if paid) Customer Return Delivery Address (full street address) (M)
Yes
No
Part shipment accepted OR Full shipment required Contact Name: Telephone No.: Fax No.: E-mail: REPAIR TERMS 1. 2. 3. 4. Contact Name: Telephone No.: Fax No.: E-mail:
Yes Yes
No No
Please ensure that a copy of the import invoice is attached with the returned unit, together with the airway bill document. Please fax/e-mail a copy of the appropriate documentation (M). Please ensure the Purchase Order is released, for paid service, to allow the unit to be shipped. Submission of equipment to AREVA T&D is deemed as authorization to repair and acceptance of quote. Please ensure all items returned are marked as Returned for Repair/Modification and protected by appropriate packaging (anti-static bag for each board and foam protection).
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK SC/A54
SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
SC
Date: Hardware Suffix: Software Version: Connection Diagrams: 16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
P63x/UK SC/A54
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-1
CONTENTS
(SC) 121.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
COURIER INTERFACE
Courier communication settings Relay courier database Courier message structure Information field Supported command set Setting changes Event extraction Disturbance record extraction
5
5 7 8 9 9 10 10 10
2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.4 2.5 2.5.1 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.2.1 2.6.2.2 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2
MODBUS INTERFACE
MODBUS communication settings MODBUS transactions Serial transmission modes RTU mode RTU framing MODBUS functions Error handling Exception codes Procedures Time synchronization Event handling Event handling for MODBUS variant ALSTOM Event handling for MODBUS variant ALSTOM D Transmission of disturbances and long-time recorded data Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant ALSTOM Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant ALSTOM D
11
11 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 19 20 20 29
SC
3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE

IEC 60870-5-103 communication settings Physical connection and link layer Initialization Time synchronization
31
31 32 33 33
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 Spontaneous events General interrogation Cyclic measurements Commands Test mode Disturbance records Blocking of monitor direction and/or command direction
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 33 33 33 33 34 34 34
4.
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2 4.3.2.3 4.3.2.4 4.3.2.5 4.3.2.6 4.3.2.7 4.3.2.8
DNP3.0 INTERFACE
DNP3.0 communication settings DNP3.0 layer model Physical layer Data link layer Transport layer Application layer Data objects General Data objects supported Data object 1 - binary input Data object 10 - binary output Data object 12 - control relay output block Data object 20 - binary counters Data object 21 - frozen counters Data object 30 - analog inputs Data object 34 - analog input reporting deadband Data object 40 - analog output status Data object 41 - analog output block
35
35 37 37 37 37 38 38 38 39 39 39 40 41 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 43 44 44 44 44 44
SC
4.3.2.9
4.3.2.10 Data object 80 - internal indications 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.1.1 4.4.1.2 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.3.1 4.4.3.2 Function codes Function codes implemented Request function codes - master to slave Response function codes - slave to master Function 1 - read Function 2 - write Analog input reporting deadband Time and date/time synchronization
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 4.4.3.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.3.1 4.5.3.2 4.5.4 4.5.5 Internal indications Function 3, 4, 5, 6 - select, operate, direct operate, direct operate no ack.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-3 44 44 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 46 46 46 46 47
Functions 7, 8, 9, 10 - immediate freeze (with/without acknowledge), freeze and clear (with/without Acknowledge) (*) Function 13 - cold start Function 14 - warm start Function 22 - assign class Function 23 - delay measurement Notes on communication functions Startup Time and date handling Event handling Binary events Analog events Data class handling File transfer
5.
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE IEC 61850 (FUNCTION GROUP IEC)

Ethernet module Activating and enabling Client log-on Clock synchronization Fault transmission Transmission of "GOOSE messages" Communication with the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface
48
48 49 49 49 49 49 50
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3
GENERIC OBJECT ORIENTED SUBSTATION EVENT (FUNCTION GROUP GOOSE)

Activating and enabling Sending GOOSE Receiving GOOSE
51
51 51 52
SC
7.
7.1 7.2 7.3
GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (FUNCTION GROUP GSSE)

Activating and enabling Sending GSSE Receiving GSSE
53
53 53 53
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-4
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Logic for event transmission without automatic acknowledgement Logic for event transmission with automatic acknowledgement Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode upload by column Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode file upload Basic structure of sent GOOSE 16 18 21 25 52
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-5
1.
COURIER INTERFACE
A general description of the Courier protocol can be found in the Courier specification. The Px30 series supports Courier over EIA(RS)485 connection (d.c., polarity-sensitive), not the K-BUS format which is a transformer-coupled "a.c." connection.
1.1
Courier communication settings Enabling and configuration of the Courier protocol for P63x devices must be done via the local HMI or over the PC interface. Data items do not have fixed indices but instead the user may configure the data items which are to be made available to the Courier master by selecting items from m out of n selection tables. The protocol is available on the logical communications interface 1 (COMM1) only. Configuration is done in the menu tree branch: Settings\Configuration\COMM1 The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the Courier protocol to be used: Set/Conf/COMM1 Remote Comms Port1 Enabled
Address: 056 026
Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Set/Conf/COMM1 General Enable USER Yes
Address: 003 170
Disabling or enabling the communication interface. Set/Conf/COMM1 COURIER Enable Yes
Address: 103 040
Enabling settings relevant for the Courier protocol. Set/Conf/COMM1 Communicat Protocol COMM1 COURIER
Address: 003 167
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the Courier protocol. The following settings are used to configure the Courier protocol and will be dependant upon the system within which the device will be communicating.
SC
Set/Conf/COMM1 Baud Rate 19.2 kBaud
Address: 003 071
Set the baud rate of the communication interface.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-6 Set/Conf/COMM1 Parity Bit Even
Address: 003 171
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control unit connected to the P63x. Set/Conf/COMM1 Octet Comm. Address 1
Address: 003 072
The unique communication address used to identify the device over communications via the rear port. Values in the P63x device data model which are to be made available to the Courier protocol must be configured using the following settings: Set/Conf/COMM1 Command Selection The above setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary commands (read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. Device online). Set/Conf/COMM1 Signal Selection The above setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary signals (read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. Starting I>). Set/Conf/COMM1 Meas. val. Selection The above setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. Running time). Set/Conf/COMM1 Parameter Selection
Address: 103 042
Address: 103 043
Address: 103 044
Address: 103 045
SC
The above setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog settings (read/write) which are to be made available to the Courier master (e.g. tI>). The selected data items are written to four lists in the order in which they have been selected and the Courier master can access any of the information which has been configured in this way. In the Courier protocol these lists are referred to as columns. The entries in the lists are numbered consecutively. In the Courier protocol these numbers are referred to as rows. In the Courier protocol each data item is called a cell. It is addressed by its column and row. The first cell in each list (row 0) is called a heading and it contains only the text of the corresponding P63x device data model configuration setting. Some system data information is always accessible to the Courier master but cannot be changed.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 The numbering of the columns and rows is as below: Column 0
(System Data)
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-7
Column 10
(Commands)
Column 20
(Signals)
Column 30
(Measurements)
Column 40
(Settings)
cell 00.00 cell 00.08
cell 10.00 cell 10.01 cell 10.nn
cell 40.00 cell 40.nn
System data cells have fixed Courier addresses (column, row). In the Courier implementation for P63x devices the data has been simulated because the data does not exist in the required format in the P63x device data model. The implemented data items are as follows: Column 00 00 00 00 00 1.2 Row 00 04 05 06 08 Description System Data Description Plant Reference Model Number Serial Number Format ASCII string ASCII string ASCII string ASCII string ASCII string
Relay courier database The Courier data model is generated from the complete P63x device data model when a device starts up. The Courier data model contains only the description texts of the system data column, and the command, signal, measurement and setting cells which have been configured to be accessible to the Courier master. In addition the Courier data model contains all the setting strings for cells whose contents are displayed as a text rather than a value, e.g. Yes, No, On, Off. Normally there is no Courier data model on the Courier master station, and the Courier master first reads the Courier data model from a device using the Get Column Headings and Get Column Texts commands. When the Courier master wants to write to a cell which uses a text rather than a value in the display, the master sends a Get Strings command to retrieve the setting strings from the device. Each cell text in the Courier data model has a description text. This is 36 characters long, including a field which contains formatting information which the Courier master uses for displaying the cell contents. This formatting information is similar to that used by the C programming language (e.g. .%s. for a string, .%u. for an unsigned integer). If the cell is not a heading cell, then the cell contains a value. The value is either a numerical value or a text. Here are some examples:
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-8 Cell description text for a cell which contains a value: Field 5 character function group 1 space 20 character text 5 formatting characters 5 character unit Contents, (e.g.) HMI Auto Return Time %u s
The Courier master displays the value according to the formatting information (number of decimal places, sign etc.). Cell description text for a cell which contains a text: Field 5 character function group 1 space 20 character text 5 formatting characters 5 character unit (empty) Note: Contents, (e.g.) COMM1 Baud Rate %s
The unit in the P63x device data model is up to 10 characters long. However, the Courier master program PAS&T cannot handle texts of this length and so the last 5 characters of the unit field are truncated.
A text which is used as the contents of a cell is 26 characters long. Space has been reserved for future use for the function group: Field 5 character function group (empty) 1 space 20 character text 1.3 Courier message structure The framing of messages between the Courier master and P63x slave devices conforms to the IEC870 standard: Field Start Byte 1 Value (hex) 68 xx xx 68 xx xx xx 16 Contents, (e.g.) Yes
SC
Length Byte 1 Length Byte 2 Start Byte 2 Information Field Byte 1 Information Field Byte n Checksum End Byte
The length is the number of bytes in the information field. The checksum is the byte sum of all bytes in the information field.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 1.3.1 Information field The contents of the information field are as below: Information Field Control Byte Unit Address Network Address Data Field Byte 1 Data Field Byte n Value (hex) xx xx 00 xx xx
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-9
The control byte in a message from the Courier master to a P63x slave device has either the value 7B (hex) or 5B (hex). The FCB (frame check bit, bit 5) is set to 1 in the first message from the master (Reset Remote Link command) and is toggled in each subsequent message, meaning that the control byte alternates between 7B and 5B. By evaluating this byte it is possible for a P63x slave device to detect that a message has been lost. In response messages to the Courier master the control byte is always set to 08. 1.4 Supported command set The following Courier commands have been implemented in P63x devices: Code (hex) .. 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 23 24 40 45 4A 4E Command Reset Remote Link Poll Buffer Poll Status Get Text Get Value Enter Setting Mode Get Column Headings Get Column Text Get Column Values Get Strings Send Block Send Event Accept Event Preload Setting Set Real Time Abort Setting Execute Setting Description Reset/start communication in slave device Poll for last command while device busy Poll for status only Get text for menu location Read the value of a menu location Get setting limits and enter setting mode Read all column headings Read all texts for a menu column Read all values for a menu column Get setting strings for a menu location Send next block in a blocked transaction Send and event Acknowledge receipt of event Preload a new value before setting Set the devices real time clock Abort the current setting Execute the preloaded setting
SC
Using these commands it is possible to read any information from a P63x device data model which has been configured to be accessible to the Courier master. Courier events (i.e. changes in the value of a cell or stored fault values) can be read out from a slave device. The data and time can be changed so that timestamps in messages from slave devices are synchronized.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-10 1.5 Setting changes
In the Courier implementation for P63x devices, settings are done using the Courier commands Enter Setting Mode, Preload Setting, Execute Setting, Abort Setting, and (if a cell uses strings instead of numeric values for display purposes) the Get Strings command. The Enter Setting Mode command causes a slave device to start a 2 minute timeout. During this period the Courier master should attempt to change the specified cell. No other cell may be written to during this time. The slave device responds with the cells current value, lower and upper limit, and increment. These values depend on the data type of the cell. If the value has decimal places, the data type is floating point. If the value is a whole number, the data type is unsigned or signed integer. If the value is not to be displayed numerically but as a text (e.g. No and Yes instead of 0 and 1), the data type is indexed string. In this case the Courier master must send a Get Strings command to the slave device to retrieve the valid setting strings for the cell. The strings correspond to the values in the range 0 to n-1, where n is the number of setting strings. The Courier master subsequently sends a Preload Setting command to the slave device. The command message contains a setting data packet. The slave device echoes the setting data packet in a response message. If an error occurs, the Courier master sends an Abort Setting command to the slave device which causes the slave to leave setting mode and reset the timeout. If no error occurs the Courier master sends an Execute Setting command to the slave device. While the slave device is busy executing the setting, the Courier master sends Poll Buffer commands. The slave device answers these commands with messages containing no data (i.e. only a timestamp and status byte) but sets the BUSY bit in the status byte. When the setting is complete or if an error occurs during setting, the slave device responds to the Poll Buffer command with a message containing a reply code (successful or an error code). 1.6 Event extraction Courier events are either changes in the value of a cell or fault measurements stored by a device. Events are generated only for values which have been configured to be accessible to the Courier master. P63x devices have an event ring buffer in which up to 100 Courier events may be stored. Embedded in the cell text is formatting information for displaying the value, e.g. %.1f (floating point, 1 decimal place) or %s (string.). The timestamp is the time at which the event occurred. If a slave device has events available for reading, it sets the EVENT bit in the status byte of response messages. If this bit is not set, the Courier master should not attempt to request events from the slave device. If the Courier master sends a Send Event command to a slave device, the device responds with the oldest event in the event buffer. The format of an event in a response message depends on the data type of the value.
SC
1.7
Each event must be acknowledged by the Courier master with an Accept Event command, otherwise the event remains in the event buffer until a subsequent Send Event command followed by an Accept Event command is received. Disturbance record extraction Courier has no explicit commands for reading disturbances. Disturbance reading is not supported in the Courier implementation for P63x devices.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-11
2.
MODBUS INTERFACE
The MODBUS interface is a master/slave protocol and it is defined by MODBUS.org: See www.modbus.org MODBUS Serial Protocol Reference Guide: PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E
2.1
MODBUS communication settings Enabling and configuration of the MODBUS protocol for P63x devices must be done via the local HMI or over the PC interface. Data items do not have fixed indices but instead the user may configure the data items which are to be made available to the MODBUS master by selecting items from m out of n selection tables. MODBUS register allocation depends on the MODBUS variant selected. The register allocation for the two variants is as described in Appendix A and B of the MODBUS Protocol for MiCOM 30 Series document. The protocol is available on the logical communications interface 1 (COMM1) only. Configuration is done in the menu tree branch: Settings\Configuration\COMM1 The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the MODBUS protocol to be used. Set/Conf/COMM1 Remote Comms Port1 Enabled
Address: 056 026
Address: 003 170
Disabling or enabling the communication interface. Set/Conf/COMM1 MODBUS Enable Yes
Address: 003 220
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol. Set/Conf/COMM1 Communicat Protocol COMM1 MODBUS
SC
Address: 003 167
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the MODBUS protocol. The following settings are used to configure the MODBUS protocol and will be dependant upon the system within which the device will be communicating.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-12 Set/Conf/COMM1 Baud Rate 19.2 kBaud
Address: 003 071
Set the baud rate of the communication interface. Set/Conf/COMM1 Parity Bit Even
Address: 003 171
Address: 003 072
The unique communication address used to identify the device over communications via the rear port. The following device setting is used to select which MODBUS variant is to be used. Set/Conf/COMM1 MODBUS Variant ALSTOM D There are two MODBUS variants: ALSTOM ALSTOM D
Address: 003 214
The main difference between the two variants is the allocation of the MODBUS registers. Description COMM1: Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds COMM1: Reg.asg. Selec. Sig. COMM1: Reg.asg. Sel. m.val. COMM1: Reg.asg. Sel. Param. MODBUS register on protocol variant ALSTOM 06153 06216 06028 06091 18369 18432 18433 18496 ALSTOM D 00301 00400 10301 10400 30301 30400 40301 40400
SC
The first command in the actual configured list of Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds is addressable by the ALSTOM D MODBUS register 00301, the second by 00302, etc. The first measurement value by 30301, etc. MODBUS register areas are defined contiguously so that more than one item of information may be accessed in a single query. Values in the device data model which are to be made available to the MODBUS protocol must be configured using the following settings: Set/Conf/COMM1 Reg.asg. Selec. Cmds This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary commands (read/write) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master.
Address: 003 210
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Set/Conf/COMM1 Reg.asg. Selec. Sig.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-13
Address: 003 211
This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary signals (read only) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master. Set/Conf/COMM1 Reg.asg. Sel. m.val. This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master. Set/Conf/COMM1 Reg.asg. Sel. Param. This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog settings (read/write) which are to be made available to the MODBUS master. In the case of MODBUS variant ALSTOM, the following setting is used to define whether automatic event acknowledgement is to be used. Set/Conf/COMM1 Autom Event Confirm. Disabled
Address: 003 212
Address: 003 213
Address: 003 249
The following setting is used to configure the behavior of the device when refreshing measurement values: Set/Conf/COMM1 Delta t (MODBUS) 5 s
Address: 003 152
This setting defines the time in seconds after which measurement values are refreshed by the protection software in the device. The value of this setting should be chosen carefully because changes in the value of a measurement within the configured time period are not registered. 2.2 MODBUS transactions MODBUS controllers communicate using a master-slave mechanism in which only one device (the master) can initiate transactions (called queries). The other devices (the slaves) respond by supplying the requested data to the master, or by taking the action requested in the query. The master can address individual slaves, or can initiate a broadcast message to all slaves. Slaves return a message (called a response) to queries that are addressed to them individually. No response is made to broadcast queries from the master. 2.3 Serial transmission modes MODBUS can communicate using either of two transmission modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) RTU (Remote Terminal Unit)
SC
In the P63x implementation only RTU mode is supported.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-14 2.3.1 RTU mode Coding system 8-bit binary, hexadecimal 0-9, A-F
Two hexadecimal characters in each 8-bit field of the message Bits per byte 1 start bit 8 data bits, least significant bit sent first 1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no parity 1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity 2.3.2 RTU framing START T1-T2-T3-T4 ADDRESS 8 BITS FUNCTION 8 BITS DATA n x 8 BITS CRC CHECK 16 BITS END T1-T2-T3-T4
START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRC CHECK END 2.4 MODBUS functions
Silent interval of at least 3.5 character times Address field, slave device addresses 1 - 247, address 0 is used for broadcast Function code Data field, sets of RTU characters, can be non-existent CRC value, 16 bit Silent interval of at least 3.5 character times
The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the relay: 01 02 03 04 05 06 08 16 Read Coil Status Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Force Single Coil Preset Single Register Diagnostics Preset Multiple Registers
SC
2.5
Error handling One of four possible events can occur as a result of a query from the master: If the slave device receives the query without a communication error and can handle the query normally, it returns a normal response If the slave does not receive the query due to a communication error, no response is returned If the slave receives the query but detects a communication error (parity or CRC), no response is returned If the slave receives the query without a communication error, but cannot handle it (for example if the request is to a non-existent coil or register), the slave returns an exception response informing the master of the nature of the error. In exception responses, the slave sets the most-significant bit of the function code to 1
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 2.5.1 Exception codes Code (dec) 01 02 03 04 06 2.6 2.6.1 Procedures Time synchronization Name Illegal Function Illegal Data Address Illegal Data Value Slave Device Failure Slave Device Busy Meaning
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-15
The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the slave The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the slave A value contained in the query is not an allowable value for the slave The slave has an internal communication error The slave is processing a long duration command
The time is kept in four registers in IEC 870-5 CP56Time2a format in reverse order. Byte Position and Register Contents 7 0 0 6 0 0 5 0 0 0 4 0 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Register (dec) ALSTOM 02049 Day of Month Minutes 02050 02051 02052 ALSTOM D 40001 40002 40003 40004
Year DOW IV 0
Month
SU 0
Hours
Millisecond High Note:
Millisecond Low DOW - Day of week (1: Monday) SU IV
- Summer time (0: standard time, 1: daylight saving time) - Invalid (0: valid, 1: invalid)
Time synchronization is done according to IEC 60870-5-103. The MODBUS master sends the time to the slave(s) using function code 16 (Preset Multiple Registers). A slave adjusts the time taken from the message (taking into account the elapsed communication and internal processing time) and sets its internal clock. The newly set time is written to the time synchronization registers so that the master can check that time synchronization was successful. Note: 2.6.2 Event handling All P63x devices have a ring buffer for storing the most recent 100 state changes (referred to as events). Event transmission is handled differently depending on the configured MODBUS variant. 2.6.2.1 Event handling for MODBUS variant ALSTOM If more events occur than can fit in the ring buffer, the oldest event is overwritten by the new event. In addition, bit 13 of the system information register is set, and an additional event buffer overflow start is generated with the register number and contents of the system information register. When an event has been read and acknowledged, the event is deleted from the ring buffer, bit 13 of the system information register is reset and an additional event buffer overflow end is generated with the register number and contents of the system information register. All fields must be provided in a time synchronization message.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-16
For this MODBUS variant there are two possible modes for event transmission: Event transmission without automatic event acknowledgement Event transmission with automatic event acknowledgement
The mode can be selected under COMM1 : Autom Event Confirm. (003 249). 2.6.2.1.1 Event transmission without automatic acknowledgement In this mode the MODBUS master sends a message with function code 03 or 04 to read register 13825 (dec). The MODBUS slave device returns the oldest event. If the master receives the event successfully, it sends a message with function code 06 to write to register 01025 (dec), acknowledging receipt of the event. The slave responds by echoing the message, deletes the event from the ring buffer, and may reset bit 2 of the device status register and bit 13 of the system information register where appropriate. If the master detects an error during reception of the event, the master may read register 13825 (dec) again to retrieve the same event. If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04. The following figure shows the basic logic for event transmission without automatic acknowledgement:
MODUS Master MODUS Slave
Read Device Status Send Device Status, bit 2 = 1 Read Event Send Event Send Event Acknowledgement Confirm Event Acknowledgement
optional
P1927ENa
Figure 1:
Logic for event transmission without automatic acknowledgement
The following tables show the contents of the messages for event transmission without automatic acknowledgement: Reading and Sending the Device Status (Event Present) QUERY RESPONSE xx 07 xx xx Slave Address Function Code Coil Data CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 07 Bit 2 = 1 xx xx
SC
Slave Address Function Code CRC Lo CRC Hi
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Reading and Sending an Event QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 03 or 04 36 (hex) 00 (hex) 00 (hex) 09 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 9 Hi Data 9 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Acknowledging an Event QUERY Slave Address Function Code Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Event Structure Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9 Reserved Reserved Value Register Reserved xx 06 04 (hex) 00 (hex) 20 (hex) 00 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-17
xx 03 or 04 12 (hex) Event
xx xx
xx 06 04 (hex) 00 (hex) 20 (hex) 00 (hex) xx xx
Time stamp (inverted CP56Time2a)
SC
2.6.2.1.2 Event transmission with automatic acknowledgement In this mode the MODBUS master sends a message with function code 03 or 04 to read register 13825 (dec). The MODBUS slave device returns the oldest event. The slave deletes the event from the ring buffer and may reset bit 2 of the device status register and bit 13 of the system information register where appropriate. If the master detects an error during reception of the event, the master may read register 13826 (dec) to retrieve the same event. If the slave device has no events to send, or if the master reads register 13286 (dec) without first reading register 13825 (dec), the slave will respond with an exception response code 04.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-18
The following figure shows the basic logic for event transmission with automatic acknowledgement:
Read Device Status Send Device Status, bit 2 = 1 Read Event Send Event
optional
P1928ENa
Figure 2:
Logic for event transmission with automatic acknowledgement
The following tables show the contents of the messages for event transmission with automatic acknowledgement: Reading and Sending the Device Status (Event Present) QUERY Slave Address Function Code CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 07 xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Coil Data CRC Lo CRC Hi Reading and Sending an Event QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo xx 03 or 04 36 (hex) 00 / 01 (hex) 00 (hex) 09 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 9 Hi Data 9 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx xx xx 03 or 04 12 (hex) Event xx 07 Bit 2 = 1 xx xx
SC
CRC Lo CRC Hi
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Event Structure Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9 2.6.2.2 Reserved Reserved Value Register Reserved
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-19
Time stamp (inverted CP56Time2a)
Event handling for MODBUS variant ALSTOM D MODBUS registers are updated when state changes occur. In addition, event messages are generated for all registers in the 0xxxx range, for external device registers, and for disturbance measurements. Each event is stored in a ring buffer along with a time stamp. If the ring buffer is full, the oldest event is overwritten by the new event and the ring buffer overflow is flagged. Event handling is done using the event command register and the event message registers. Event Message Registers Register Content Number of Events Function Code Event Register Number Event Data Year Month/Day Hour/Minute Milliseconds Event Command Register Register Content Register (dec) Meaning Event command register 0000 (hex) - Read next event 0001 (hex) - Reread last event FFFF (hex) - Delete ring buffer Register (dec) 30101 30102 30103 30104 30105 30106 30107 30108 Meaning Number of events in ring buffer Hi: default = 0, buffer overflow = FF (hex) Lo: function code depending on register range Register or bit address of the event Binary: bit 0 = value, bit 1 to 15 = 0 Analog: register contents Event time stamp
SC
Event command
40005
The number of events register 30101 (dec) contains the number of event messages currently stored in the ring buffer. The master can cyclically poll this register to check for events. Registers 30102 (dec) to 30108 (dec) contain the data from the last event which was read. The event command is initialized to 0.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-20
When registers 30101 (dec) to 30108 (dec) have been read and there is at least one event present in the ring buffer, the oldest event is copied to these registers and the number of events is decremented. The master can reread the previous event by setting the event command register to 0001 (hex). This is useful when a transmission error has occurred. The master can also reread registers outside the range 30101 (dec) to 30108 (dec). 2.7 Transmission of disturbances and long-time recorded data Transmission of recorded data is handled differently depending on the configured MODBUS variant. 2.7.1 Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant ALSTOM All P63x devices have memory for storing analog samples for a maximum of eight recordings. There are two possible modes for transmission of recorded data: Recorded data upload by column File upload
Recorded Data Upload by Column The following figure shows the basic logic for mode upload by column:
SC

P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-21
Read Device Status Send Device Status, bit 4 = 1 Read Recording Information Send Recording Information Read Channel 1 Data Send Channel 1 Data Read First Block of Samples for Channel 1 Send First Block of Samples for Channel 1 ... ... Read Last Block of Samples for Channel 1 Send Last Block of Samples for Channel 1 ... ... Read Channel 8 Data Send Channel 8 Data ... ... Read Last Block of Samples for Channel 8 Send Last Block of Samples for Channel 8 Read Recording Index Send Recording Index Send Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording Confirm Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
P1929ENa
optional
SC
Figure 3:
Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode upload by column
The following tables show the contents of the messages for mode upload by column: Reading and Sending the Device Status (Recorded Data Present) QUERY Slave Address Function Code CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 07 xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Coil Data CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 07 Bit 4 = 1 xx xx
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-22 Reading and Sending of Recorded Data QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 03 or 04 60 (hex) 00 (hex) 00 (hex) 06 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code
xx 03 or 04 0C (hex)
Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 6 Hi Data 6 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi
xx xx
Structure of Recorded Data Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Channel information register for channel 1: 24833 (dec) Recording read acknowledgement register: 01024 (dec) Number of channels Maximum number of samples per block: 100 (dec) Register of first block: 25089 (dec) Register of last block
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). Reading and Sending of the Data for a Channel QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo xx 03 or 04 Channel inf. register 00 (hex) 0E (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 14 Hi Data 14 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx xx xx 03 or 04 1C (hex) Channel data
SC
CRC Lo CRC Hi
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Structure of Recorded Data Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9 Data 10 Data 11 Data 12 Data 13 Data 14 Number of samples Number of samples in the pre-fault time Number of samples in the post-fault time Transformation ratio, primary voltage Transformation ratio, secondary voltage Transformation ratio, primary current Transformation ratio, secondary current Internal voltage scaling factor Internal current scaling factor Register of first block of samples Register of last block of samples Number of samples in the last block Sampling frequency Channel type
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-23
Contents of the Channel Type Field (Channel Information Data Item 14) Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning IA IB IC IN VA-G VB-G VC-G VN-G
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). Reading and Sending a Block of Samples for a Channel QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 03 or 04 Block register No. of samples in block xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data n Hi Data n Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Value of sample n xx xx xx 03 or 04 xx Value of sample 1
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-24
When a block of samples for a channel is read, all samples must be read. This means that the number of samples is always 100. For the last block, the number of samples is the value in the field number of samples in last block (channel information data item 12). A primary measurement value is calculated by multiplying the value of the sample by the internal scaling factor of the voltage or current. If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). Reading and Sending the Recording Index QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 03 or 04 61 (hex) 80 (hex) 00 (hex) 09 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 9 Hi Data 9 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Structure of Recording Index Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9 Cause Sampling frequency Version number of the conversion tool Revision number of the conversion tool Recording number Time stamp (inverted CP56Time2a) xx xx xx 03 or 04 12 (hex) Recording index
SC
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). Sending and Confirming Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording QUERY Slave Address Function Code Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 06 04 (hex) 00 (hex) 10 (hex) 00 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 06 04 (hex) 00 (hex) 10 (hex) 00 (hex) xx xx
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-25
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). File Upload The following figure shows the basic logic for mode file upload:
Read Device Status Send Device Status, bit 4 = 1 Read Header Send Header Read Channel Information Send Channel Information Read First Block of Samples Send First Block of Samples ... ... Read Last Block of Samples Send Last Block of Samples Send Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording Confirm Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording
P1930ENa
optional
Figure 4:
Logic for transmission of recorded data in mode file upload
The following tables show the contents of the messages for transmission of recorded data in mode file upload: Reading and Sending the Device Status (Recorded Data Present) QUERY Slave Address Function Code CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 07 xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Coil Data CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 07 Bit 4 = 1 xx xx
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-26 Reading and Sending of the Header QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 03 or 04 61 (hex) 90 (hex) 00 (hex) 18 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code
xx 03 or 04 30 (hex) Header
Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 24 Hi Data 24 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi
xx xx
Structure of the Header Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9 Data 10 Data 11 Data 12 Data 13 Data 14 Data 15 Data 16 Type of transmission: 0003 (hex) = recorded data transmission Time stamp (inverted CP56Time2a) Version number of the transmission mechanism Device serial number Manufacturer Product designation Number of samples per channel Data transmission type: 00000 Number of channel information data items: 36 (dec)
SC
Data 17 Data 18 Data 19 Data 20 Data 21 Data 22 Data 23 Data 24 If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). Reserved
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Reading and Sending of the Channel Information QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 03 or 04 61 (hex) B0 (hex) 00 (hex) 24 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data 36 Hi Data 36 Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Structure of the Channel Information Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Data 8 Data 9 Data 10 Data 11 Data 12 Data 13 Data 14 Data 15 Data 16 Data 17 Data 18 Data 19 Data 20 Data 21 Data 22 Data 23 Data 24 Data 25 Data 26 Data 27 Number of channels Type of channel 1 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 2 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 3 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 4 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 5 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 6 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 7 Transformation ratio, primary
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-27
xx 03 or 04 48 (hex) Channel inf.
xx xx
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-28 Data 28 Data 29 Data 30 Data 31 Data 32 Data 33 Data 34 Data 35 Data 36 Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Type of channel 8 Transformation ratio, primary Transformation ratio, secondary Internal scaling factor Sampling frequency Recording number Number of samples per channel
Contents of the Channel Type Field (Channel Information Data Items 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30) Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning IA IB IC IN VA-G VB-G VC-G VN-G
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). Reading and Sending a Block of Samples QUERY Slave Address Function Code Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No. of Points Hi xx 03 or 04 Block register No. of samples in block xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Byte Count (Data) Data 1 Hi Data 1 Lo Data n Hi Data n Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi Value of sample n xx xx xx 03 or 04 xx Value of sample 1
SC
No. of Points Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi
When a block of samples for a channel is read, all samples must be read. This means that the number of samples is always 100, with the exception of the last block which may have fewer samples. If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes).
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Sending and Confirming Acknowledgement of Reading of Recording QUERY Slave Address Function Code Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi xx 06 04 (hex) 00 (hex) 10 (hex) 00 (hex) xx xx RESPONSE Slave Address Function Code Register Address Hi Register Address Lo Preset Data Hi Preset Data Lo CRC Lo CRC Hi
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-29
xx 06 04 (hex) 00 (hex) 10 (hex) 00 (hex) xx xx
If the slave device has no events to send, it will respond with an exception response code 04 (see 2.5.1 Exception codes). 2.7.2 Transmission of recorded data for MODBUS variant ALSTOM D All P63x devices have memory for storing a maximum of eight recordings with the following data which can be read if MODBUS variant ALSTOM D is configured: Binary data Disturbance measurements Analog samples
Transmission of recorded data is done by reading the disturbance or long-time recording information from the recorded data registers and by writing the command or acknowledgement messages to the recorded data command registers. The following registers are used for the transmission of recorded data: Recorded Data Message Registers Register content Number of messages Type ID Cause of transmission Function type Variable structure ID Device address Information number Register (dec) 30110 30111 30112 30113 30114 Data structure according to ASDU 23, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31 as per IEC 60870-5-103 Recorded Data Command Register Register Content Register (dec) Meaning Transfer command register 0000 (hex) - Read next message 0001 (hex) - Reread previous message FFFF (hex) - Initialize transfer 30132
SC
Command
40006
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-30 Recorded Data Order Registers Register Content Type ID Cause of transmission Function type Type of order Recording number Lo Channel number Variable structure ID Device address Information number Type of recorded data Recording number Hi 00
Register (dec) 40007 40008 40009 40010 40011 40012
The messages for information transfer are kept in a ring buffer. The number of messages can be read from register 30110 (dec). After initialization, the message list of recordings is present in the ring buffer. The procedures for reading from the recorded data message registers use the same mechanisms as the event handling logic, depending on the contents of the recorded data command register. The next message can be read by writing a read command to registers 30110 (dec) to 30132 (dec). The MODBUS master writes ASDU 24 (recorded data transfer order) and ASDU 25 (recorded data transfer acknowledgement) commands to the recorded data order registers in IEC 60870-5-103 format.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-31
3.
IEC 60870-5-103 INTERFACE

The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2; compatibility level 3 is not supported. Refer to the following document for more information: AREVA Communication Architecture (ACA) Part 5, Communication for the Subsystem Control and Monitoring for MiCOM 30 Series based on IEC 60870-5-101/103
The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: 3.1 Initialization (reset) Time synchronization Event record extraction General interrogation Cyclic measurements General commands Disturbance record extraction Private codes
IEC 60870-5-103 communication settings Enabling and configuration of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol for P63x devices must be done via the local HMI or over the PC interface. Data items do not have fixed indices but instead the user may configure the data items which are to be made available to the IEC 60870-5-103 master by selecting items from m out of n selection tables. The protocol is available on the logical communications interface 1 (COMM1) when selected via settings. IEC 60870-5-103 is the fixed protocol on logical communications interface 2 (COMM2). Configuration is done in the menu tree branch: Settings\Configuration\COMM1 The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol to be used. Set/Conf/COMM1 Remote Comms Port1 Enabled
Address: 056 026
SC
Address: 003 170
Disabling or enabling the communication interface. Set/Conf/COMM1 IEC870-5 Enabled Yes
Address: 003 215
Enabling settings relevant for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-32 Set/Conf/COMM1 Communicat Protocol COMM1 IEC 870-5-103
Address: 003 167
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The following settings are used to configure the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and will be dependant upon the system within which the device will be communicating.
Address: 003 071
Set the baud rate of the communication interface. Set/Conf/COMM1 Parity Bit Even
Address: 003 171
Address: 003 072
The unique communication address used to identify the device over communications via the rear port. Values in the P63x device data model which are to be made available to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol must be configured using the following settings: Set/Conf/COMM1 Select. Spontan.Sig. The above setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary signals (read only) which are to be made available to the IEC 60870-5-103 master (e.g. Starting I>). Set/Conf/COMM1 Cycl. Data ILS Tel.
Address: 003 179
Address: 003 175
SC
The above setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog measurements (read only) which are to be made available to the IEC 60870-5-103 master (e.g. Running time). 3.2 Physical connection and link layer Two connection options are available for IEC 60870-5-103, either the rear EIA(RS)485 port or an optional rear fiber optic port. For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the local HMI or over the PC interface. Following a change of these settings a reset command is required to re-establish communications, see reset command description below.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 3.3 Initialization
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-33
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication settings have been changed a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer. The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The content of ASDU 5 is described in the IEC 60870-5-103 section of the ACA document noted above. In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event. 3.4 Time synchronization The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC 60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization Class 1 event will be generated/produced. The time synchronization source is selected from the setting below: Set/Conf/MAIN Prim.Source TimeSync
Address: 103 210
3.5
Spontaneous events Events are categorized using the following information: Function type Information number
The IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Telegram documentation contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. 3.6 General interrogation The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. These are indicated in the IEC 60870-5-103 profile in the Telegram documentation. 3.7 Cyclic measurements Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in IEC 60870-5-103 section 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is only one choice for each measurand. 3.8 Commands A list of the supported commands is contained in the Telegram documentation. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a Cause of Transmission (COT) indicating negative acknowledgement.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-34 3.9 Test mode
It is possible using either the HMI menu or the front communication port to enable test mode as specified by the IEC 60870-5-103 standard. An event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a COT of test mode. 3.10 Disturbance records The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the standard mechanisms described in IEC 60870-5-103. Note: 3.11 IEC 60870-5-103 only supports up to 8 records.
Blocking of monitor direction and/or command direction The relay supports a facility to block messages in the monitor direction and also in the command direction. Messages can be blocked in the monitor and command directions using the menu commands Set/Func/Glob/COMM1: USER Sig/meas Block (003.076) and COMM1: USER Command Block (003.172) or via an opto input or write command from the IEC 60870-5-103 master.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-35
4.
DNP3.0 INTERFACE
The DNP3.0 protocol is not described in its entirety here, please refer to the documentation available from the user group. The device profile document specifies the full details of the DNP3.0 implementation for the relay. This is the standard format DNP3.0 document that specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported. The device profile document also specifies what data is available from the relay via DNP3.0. The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol.
4.1
DNP3.0 communication settings Enabling and configuration of the DNP3.0 protocol for P63x devices must be done via the local HMI or over the PC interface. Data items do not have fixed indices but instead the user may configure the data items which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master by selecting items from m out of n selection tables. The protocol is available on the logical communications interface 1 (COMM1) only. Configuration is done in the menu tree branch: Settings\Configuration\COMM1 The following settings must be correctly configured to allow the DNP3.0 protocol to be used. Set/Conf/COMM1 Remote Comms Port1 Enabled
Address: 056 026
Address: 003 170
Disabling or enabling the communication interface. Set/Conf/COMM1 DNP3 Enable Yes
Address: 003 231
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP3.0 protocol. Set/Conf/COMM1 Communicat Protocol COMM1 DNP3
Address: 003 167
SC
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication interface. Note: The above 4 settings must be set as shown to enable the DNP3.0 protocol. The following settings are used to configure the DNP 3.0 protocol and will be dependant upon the system within which the device will be communicating.
Address: 003 071
Set the baud rate of the communication interface.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-36 Set/Conf/COMM1 Parity Bit Even
Address: 003 171
Address: 003 072
The unique communication address used to identify the device over communications via the rear port. All values in the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 protocol must be configured using the following settings: Set/Conf/COMM1 Ind./cl. bin. Inputs This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary signals (read only) which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master. A data class may be assigned to each selected item (no class, or class 0 to 3). Set/Conf/COMM1 Ind./cl. bin.Outputs This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the binary commands (read/write) from the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master. Since all m out of n settings use the same software mechanism, a data class may be assigned to each selected item, but data classes 1 to 3 are not evaluated. Set/Conf/COMM1 Ind./cl. Analog Inp. This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog measurements (read only) from the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master. A data class may be assigned to each selected item (no class, or class 0 to 3). Set/Conf/COMM1 Ind./cl. Analog Outp This setting is used to select from an m out of n selection table all the analog settings (read/write) from the device data model which are to be made available to the DNP3.0 master. Since all m out of n settings use the same software mechanism, a data class may be assigned to each selected item, but data classes 1 to 3 are not evaluated. The data class defines the event reporting behavior and allows the user to retrieve data by class as well as by data type.
Address: 003 232
Address: 003 233
Address: 003 235
SC
Address: 003 236
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-37
Two settings are used to configure the behavior of the device when refreshing measurement values: Set/Conf/COMM1 Ph-Ph Meas v.(DNP3) 16
Address: 003 250
The value of this setting is used as the default reporting deadband for all measurements. The master can change the reporting deadband value for each measurement individually. A measurement is reported only when its value changes by a magnitude greater than the configured value. Set/Conf/COMM1 PhasePhase t (DNP3) 5 s
Address: 003 248
This setting defines the time in seconds after which measurement values are refreshed by the device. The value of this setting should be chosen carefully because changes to a measurement within the configured time period are not registered. 4.2 DNP3.0 layer model The DNP3.0 protocol layer model has the following structure: User Layer Application Layer Transport Layer Data Link Layer Physical Layer In order to guarantee as far as possible that P63x devices conform to the DNP3.0 standard, a library from Triangle MicroWorks Inc. has been used in the implementation of the software. This library supports DNP 3.0 Level 2. 4.2.1 Physical layer The physical layer is either: 4.2.2 Fiber optic EIA(RS)485 bus, two-wire or four-wire
Data link layer The data link layer is responsible for message framing. The data link layer uses the FT3 message format as defined in the IEC 870-5-1 specification. Messages have a secure hamming distance of 6. This document describes the specifics of the DNP 3.0 implementation for P63x devices. The document DNP V3.00 Data Link Layer Protocol Description and the IEC 870-5-1 specification contain a detailed description of the data link layer and message framing.
SC
4.2.3
Transport layer The transport layer is responsible for fragmentation of data over multiple messages. This layer is responsible for disassembling one Transport Service Data Unit (TSDU) into multiple Transport Protocol Data Units (TPDUs), or frames, and assembling multiple (more than one) TPDUs into one TSDU.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-38
This document describes the specifics of the DNP3.0 implementation for P63x devices. The document DNP V3.00 Transport Functions contains a detailed description of the transport layer. 4.2.4 Application layer The master sends Application Layer Requests to the slave device. The device replies with Application Layer Responses. The application layer is responsible for decoding the command and data information from request messages (from the master) and writing data to response messages (from the slave device). Each request message contains a header and optionally data fields (information objects). The header contains an application control byte, and a function code defining the action to be taken by the slave device. The header in a response message contains an application control byte, a response function code and a field containing internal indications from the slave device. Each item of data in a message is prefixed by an object header which defines the data type (e.g. binary input) and data variation (e.g. binary input with status) contained in the data field (see section Data Objects). Qualifier and range fields in the object header specify how the data objects are packed in the message range, quantity, index size. The document DNP V3.00 Application Layer Protocol Description contains a detailed description of the application layer. 4.3 4.3.1 Data objects General DNP3.0 uses the concept of data objects as an interface for devices which support the DNP3.0 protocol. These objects have been defined in such a way that any device should be able to map the data which it wants to make available to a DNP3.0 master to the data objects which are defined in the protocol specification. The master specifies variations when handling data objects (see the Device Profile Document for a complete list of implemented data objects, variations, and function and qualifier codes which use these objects). The document DNP V3:00 Data Object Library contains a detailed description of the data objects and their variations. In the implementation for P63x devices only 2 types of data objects are supported: Static objects
Static objects reflect the current value of data items.
SC
Event objects
Event objects are generated as a result of a data change, e.g. a signal or fault measurement. Event data reflects the value of data at some time in the past, and is stored in a queue in the device.
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 4.3.2 Data objects supported
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-39
The following table lists the data objects which are supported in P63x devices, the data object type, and which functions use the data objects. Object No. (dec) 1 2 10 12 20 21 30 32 34 40 41 50 52 60 80 4.3.2.1 Description Binary Input Binary Input Change Binary Output Control relay Output Block Binary Counter Frozen Counter Analog Input Analog Change Event Analog Input Reporting Deadband Analog Output Analog Output Block Time and Date Time Delay Fine Class 0, 1, 2, 3 Data Internal Indications Type static event static static static static static event static static static static static event static 1 2 Functions Using this Object (dec) 1 1 1 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 7, 8, 9, 10 1 1 1 1, 2 1 3, 4, 5, 6 1, 2
Data object 1 - binary input All binary signals which are generated by protection and control functions which are to be mapped to data object 1 are available in m out of n selection tables instead of a fixed place being reserved. The index of each signal is the position in the list of selected signals, i.e. the order in which the signals are selected from the selection list implicitly assigns the index to the signal. Data object 1 is allocated as follows: Index (dec) 0 - 63 Index (hex) 00 - 3F Description m out of n selection of binary signals
The software reduces the size of data object 1 to the number of values selected from the m out of n selection tables. Every value can be assigned data class 0 (static) and data classes 1, 2 or 3 for the corresponding event message. Assigning of the data class is done in the m out of n selection list. If an event data class (1, 2 or 3) is selected, data class 0 is set implicitly. The master can change the data class using the Assign Class function. 4.3.2.2 Data object 10 - binary output The number of binary outputs depends on the device type and design version. The number of signals may be anything from 2 up to over 150. There are two types of binary outputs: binary outputs to coils The state of the output is therefore not
SC
These outputs may be controlled by pulses. represented in the binary output object. logical binary outputs
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-40
These outputs represent binary settings (e.g. MAIN: Protection Enabled). The state of these signals can be read in the binary output object. Data object 10 is allocated as follows: Index (dec) 0 - 31 Index (hex) 00 - 1F Description m out of n selection of binary commands
The software reduces the size of data object 10 to the number of values selected from the m out of n selection tables. Data class assignment is not relevant for data object 10. 4.3.2.3 Data object 12 - control relay output block The following table shows the structure of data object 12 and the use of the individual fields: Field Control Code Description 8 bit control code Bits 0-3 (code): 0 - NULL operation 1 - Pulse On 2 - Pulse Off 3 - Latch On 4 - Latch Off Bit 4 - Queued Bit 5 - Clear Bit 6/7 - Trip/Close: 1 - Close/Lower 2 - Trip/Raise Count On Time No. of control executions Duration of ON state Close/lower tap changer Trip/raise tap changer 1 2000 - short command time 20000 - long command time Off Time Status Duration of OFF state Control operation status: 0 - Request accepted Not implemented, 0 Response only Pulse ON Not implemented Latch the output ON Latch the output OFF Not implemented, 0 Not implemented, 0 Use/Comments
SC
1 - Operate too late after select 2 - No matching select before operate 3 - Format error in request 4 - Control operation not supported 5 - Queue full or already active 6 - Hardware error 7 - Device in local mode (*) 8 - Too many operations (*) 9 - Not authorized (*) 10 to 126 - Reserved (*) 127 - Unspecified error (*)
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-41
(*) Note: These codes are currently only documented in a recommendation by the technical committee. The control relay output block information object offers a wide variety of possibilities for controlling outputs. Among DNP vendors there are discussions about the interpretation of control operations. The technical committee of the DNP Users Group has published a number of recommendations in an attempt to improve compatibility. The discussions have made clear that DNP masters on the market differ greatly in their implementation of the control relay output block. An attempt has therefore been made to offer as many possibilities as possible in order to achieve compatibility to as many masters as possible. Destination of Operation Operation Single Pole Device Logical Output (e.g. setting) set persistent logical 1 not supported set persistent logical 1 set persistent logical 0 not supported not supported 2-pole OFFcontact/ transformer raise switch off/raise not supported switch off/raise not supported switch off/raise switch on/lower 2-pole ONcontact/ transformer lower switch on/lower not supported switch on/lower not supported switch off/raise switch on/lower
Pulse ON Pulse OFF Latch ON Latch OFF Trip/Raise Close/Low er 4.3.2.4
pulse on not supported persistent output on persistent output off not supported not supported
Data object 20 - binary counters Data object 20 is allocated as follows: Index (dec) 0 - 15 Index (hex) 00 - F Description m out of n selection of counters
The software reduces the size of data object 10 to the number of values selected from the m out of n selection tables. The method of data class assignment is the same as for data object 1, except that only static data class 0 may be assigned. This is because counter events are not supported. 4.3.2.5 Data object 21 - frozen counters Frozen counters are counter values which have been frozen at a definite point in time so they can be read at a later time. The method of data class assignment is the same as for data object 1, except that only static data class 0 may be assigned. This is because frozen counter events are not supported. 4.3.2.6 Data object 30 - analog inputs Data object 30 is allocated as follows: Index (dec) 0 - 31 Index (hex) 00 - 1F Description m out of n selection of analog inputs
SC
The software reduces the size of data object 30 to the number of values selected from the m out of n selection tables. The method of data class assignment is the same as for data object 1.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-42 Event Handling Normal measurements
Event handling is done using CURRENT mode, i.e. for each measurement only one entry per change is made in the queue and identical entries are overwritten. An analog event has the current value and timestamp at the time of the request. Fault measurements (function groups FT_DA, OL_DA, 103 protocol ID 4)
For measurements generated by a fault, SOE mode is used, i.e. all events are stored in a queue and overwriting of identical entries does not take place. Two settings are available allowing the user to configure a simple smoothing of all measurement values and a refresh rate for all the measurement values. In addition, the master can define a reporting deadband for each individual measurement. 4.3.2.7 Data object 34 - analog input reporting deadband Each individual measurement has its own deadband. message is generated when a deadband is exceeded. In CURRENT mode, an event
Deadband values can be read and written by the master. The values are lost when a device is restarted and must be reconfigured by the master. This is in keeping with the DNP philosophy. 4.3.2.8 Data object 40 - analog output status Index (dec) 0 - 15 Index (hex) 00 - F Description m out of n selection of analog outputs
The software reduces the size of data object 40 to the number of selected data points. Data class assignment is not relevant to data object 40. 4.3.2.9 Data object 41 - analog output block Data object 41 can be sent as 32 bit or 16 bit and has the following structure: Field Value Status Description 32/16 bit analog value Status Identical to control relay output block Use/Comments
The analog output block is used for changing settings in a device. This is done in a similar way to the control of a logical binary output, i.e. the command is echoed with status code set.
SC
4.3.2.10 Data object 80 - internal indications Internal indications are reported in every response message. The master can write to the internal indications to reset the restart bit. No other bits may be written to. The following table describes the meaning of each bit: Bit 0 1 2 3 4 IIN1-0 IIN1-1 IIN1-2 IIN1-3 IIN1-4 Description and Conditions All Stations - set after a broadcast message (any message using a destination address of 0xFFF0 or above) has been received Class 1 event data available Class 2 event data available Class 3 event data available Time synchronization required
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Bit 5 6 7 8 9 IIN1-5 IIN1-6 IIN1-7 IIN2-0 IIN2-1 Description and Conditions
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-43
Local mode. Set when control is in local mode or command direction is blocked Device Trouble. Set when the group alarm condition is active Device restart. Set after device restart Function Unknown. Generally means that the function code (octet 2 of the request header) cannot be processed Object Unknown. Generally means that the function code could be processed but the object group/variation could not be processed Setting Error. Generally indicates that the function code and object group/variation could be processed but that the qualifier/range field is in error Buffer Overflow. Indicates that an event buffer has overflowed, and that change events, of at least one type, have been lost Already Executing - not supported, always 0 Bad Configuration - not supported, always 0 Reserved. Always 0 Reserved. Always 0
10
IIN2-2
11 12 13 14 15 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.1.1
IIN2-3 IIN2-4 IIN2-5 IIN2-6 IIN2-7
Function codes Function codes implemented Request function codes - master to slave The following function codes are sent by the master to the slave device: Code (dec) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 14 22 23 Function Read Write Select Operate Direct Operate Direct Operate No Acknowledgement Immediate Freeze Immediate Freeze No Acknowledgement Freeze and Clear (*) Freeze and Clear No Acknowledgement (*) Cold Start Warm Start Assign Class Delay Measurement
SC
(*) Note: Freeze and clear functions are currently not implemented.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-44 4.4.1.2 Response function codes - slave to master
The following function codes are sent by the slave device to the master: Code (dec) 129 4.4.2 Function 1 - read Reading of the following data objects is implemented: Object No. (dec) 1 10 20 21 30 34 40 Description Binary Input Binary Output Binary Counter Frozen Counter Analog Input Analog Input Reporting Deadband Analog Output Function Response
Any read errors are flagged in the internal indications in the response. 4.4.3 Function 2 - write Writing of the following data objects is implemented: Object No. (dec) 34 50 80 4.4.3.1 Description Analog Input Reporting Deadband Time and Date Internal Indications
Analog input reporting deadband Deadband values may be written for each individual measurement.
4.4.3.2
Time and date/time synchronization The transmission time from the master (depending on the baud rate) is taken into consideration before setting the date and time in the device.
4.4.3.3
Internal indications In data object 80 it is possible to introduce additional internal indications. This functionality has not been implemented. The master can write to the internal indications to reset the restart bit. No other bits may be written to.
SC
4.4.4
Function 3, 4, 5, 6 - select, operate, direct operate, direct operate no ack. These commands may be used with the following data objects: Object No. (dec) 12 41 Description Control Relay Output Block Analog Output Block
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 The following functionality is implemented: 4.4.5
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-45
Select a combination of bits which indicate the operations supported by a binary output Select a binary output for control Execute a control operation for a binary output Select a combination of bits which indicate the operations supported by an analog output Select an analog output for control
Functions 7, 8, 9, 10 - immediate freeze (with/without acknowledge), freeze and clear (with/without Acknowledge) (*) (*) Implementation of freeze and clear functions planned but not yet implemented. These functions can be used with data object 20 (binary counters).
4.4.6
Function 13 - cold start DNP defines a cold start as a restart of the application as occurs when a device is switched on. This corresponds to a warm start in MiCOM terminology. A warm start can only be performed if the device is in offline mode. The device informs the master in a response message what period of time will elapse before the device is available again.
4.4.7
Function 14 - warm start DNP defines a warm start as a restart of the DNP protocol, i.e. clearing of buffers and queues. The device informs the master in a response message what period of time will elapse before the device is available again.
4.4.8
Function 22 - assign class The master can use function 22 to change the data class of event messages. This has been implemented for data objects 1 (binary inputs) and 30 (analog inputs). The data class setting values are lost when a device is restarted and must be reconfigured by the master. This is in keeping with the DNP philosophy.
4.4.9
Function 23 - delay measurement The master uses function 23 to calculate the path delay for a device. This is done by sending the command to the device and measuring the elapsed time until a response is received. The elapsed time can be used to adjust the time of day when setting the device time.
SC
4.5 4.5.1
Notes on communication functions Startup It is important to note that changes in the m out of n selection tables will result in the initialization of the communications module of a device.
4.5.2
Time and date handling The transmission time from the master (depending on the baud rate) is taken into consideration before setting the date and time in the device. Conversion from DNP time and date to the devices native format is done.
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-46 4.5.3 4.5.3.1 Event handling Binary events
Binary events are queued in the device. An event message is generated only if the data is configured in one of the data classes 1 to 3. The allocation of data classes is done during configuration of the signals in the m out of n selection lists. 4.5.3.2 Analog events In P63x devices there are 3 different types of analog values: Constant values (e.g. device characteristics)
This data does not change and there are therefore no events. Normal measurements, which can change at any time
The master can define a reporting deadband for each individual measurement. Event handling is done using CURRENT mode, i.e. for each measurement only one entry per change is made in the queue and identical entries are overwritten. An analog event has the current value and timestamp at the time of the request. Fault measurements
These are measurements which are calculated when a fault occurs (e.g. fault duration). SOE mode is used, i.e. all events are stored in the queue. An event message is generated only if the data is configured in one of the data classes 1 to 3. The allocation of data classes is done during configuration of the signals in the m out of n selection lists. 4.5.4 Data class handling The DNP3.0 protocol defines the following data classes: Class 0 - static data Class 1 - high priority events Class 2 - medium priority events Class 3 - low priority events
Data classes can be assigned to signals in two ways: By configuring the class of a configured signal in the m out of n selection lists By the master sending the Assign Class command (function code 22)
SC
Assignment of classes 1, 2 and 3 (used for event messages) is mutually exclusive. All data which is assigned a class 1, 2 or 3 is also implicitly assigned class 0. The possible data classes are No Class, Class 0, Class 1, Class 2 or Class 3. Below is a list of the default configuration and valid values for each data object: Object No. (dec) 1 10 20 21 30 40 Description Binary Input Binary Output Binary Counter Frozen Counter Analog Input Analog Output Default Data Class 1 none none none 2 none Valid Data Classes none, 0, 1, 2, 3 none none, 0 none, 0 none, 0, 1, 2, 3 none
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 4.5.5 File transfer
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-47
The DNP3.0 protocol specifies data object 70 (file identifier) for transferring files. File transfer support (required for fault data transfer) is currently not implemented in P63x devices.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-48
5.
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE IEC 61850 (FUNCTION GROUP IEC)

IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers and implemented as a worldwide applicable and accepted standard. The main target of the IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange information and to apply such in a compliant joint operation. Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common communication basis, from the process control level down to the network control level, with which signals, data, measuring values and commands are exchanged. For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images. The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with the P63x, is available: ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are to be imported into the system configurator PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents: PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850
5.1
Ethernet module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter IEC: Ethernet media. The ordering variants available are: For fiber:
SC
The ST connector supports 100 Mbit/s over 1300 nm multimode fiber. For copper: The RJ45 connector supports 10/100 Mbit/s. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides a EIA(RS)485 interface for remote access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2). Notes: The P63x may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an alternative to the other optional communication modules. Therefore the Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1. The Ethernet module can be applied in conjunction with all processor modules P for P63x. The item numbers of these processor modules are:
SCADA Communications MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 0337 875 (P631 and P632 without DSP) and 9650 135 (P633 and P634 without DSP) 9651 428 (all P631P634 variants with DSP) 5.2 Activating and enabling
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-49
The function group IEC can be activated by setting the parameter IEC: IEC 61850 Communic. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IEC: General enable USER. The settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC: Enable configuration is executed or automatically when the device is switched online. 5.3 Client log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices. A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic information. In its function as a server the P63x can supply up to 16 clients with information. 5.4 Clock synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the P63x functions as an SNTP client. For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. In the former operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P63x requests the device specific time signal following a settable polling cycle. 5.5 Fault transmission Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer". 5.6 Transmission of "GOOSE messages" The so-called "GOOSE Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "GOOSE Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority. Furthermore, these "GOOSE Messages" can be received by all participants in the respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850 "GOOSE Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between two or more devices. Application areas are, for example, reverse interlocking, transfer tripping or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "GOOSE Message" will therefore replace hardwiring and local fieldbus inter-relay communications. According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "GOOSE Messages", the GSSE and the IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However the IEC-GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit with which the P63x corresponds. With the IEC-GOOSE the P63x at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information or two-pole external device states.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-50 5.7
Communication with the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication and "GOOSE Messages". Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such as reading/writing of settings or retrieving stored data.
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-51
6.
GENERIC OBJECT ORIENTED SUBSTATION EVENT (FUNCTION GROUP GOOSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P63x provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals. "GOOSE Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "GOOSE Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
6.1
Activating and enabling The function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter GOOSE: Gen.ObjOr.SubstEvent. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all data points associated to this function group (settings, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General enable USER. The settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC: Enable configuration is executed or automatically when the device is switched online. In addition the function group IEC must be configured and enabled.
6.2
Sending GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of state signals is made by setting GOOSE: Output n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32). The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs. GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state signal. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after 2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at 2-second intervals. In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the GOOSE ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string "System/LLNO$GooseST".
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-52
Figure 5: 6.3
Basic structure of sent GOOSE
Receiving GOOSE With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic state signals received (GOOSE: Input n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 16)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). For each state signal to be received from an external device the "GOOSE Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the GOOSE ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the data attribute index, the selection of the information wanted from the chosen GOOSE will occur. The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN identifier and Dataset Configuration Revision that are also included in the GOOSE received. Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value GOOSE: Input n default (n = 1 to 16). The default value of 0 or 1 is chosen to be a failsafe "fallback".
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-53
7.
GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (FUNCTION GROUP GSSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P63x provides, as an additional functionality, the function group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.
7.1
Activating and enabling The Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter GSSE: Gen.Subst.Stat.Event. This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GSSE: General enable USER. The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command IEC: Enable configuration is executed or automatically when the device is switched online.
7.2
Sending GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of state signals is made by setting GSSE: Output n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (GSSE: Output n bit pair (n = 1 to 32)), which will transmit this state signal. GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter GSSE: Min. cycle. The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter GSSE: Increment. Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (GSSE: Max. cycle), then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time. In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which was set in function group IEC.
7.3
Receiving GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic binary state signals received (GSSE: Input n fct.assig. (n = 1 to 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the information wanted, must be selected by setting the IED name (GSSE: Input n IED name (n = 1 to 32)). Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (GSSE: Input n bit pair (n = 1 to 32)). Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value (GSSE: Input n default (n = 1 to 32)). The default value of 0 or 1 is chosen to be a failsafe "fallback".
SC
P63x/UK SC/A54 (SC) 12-54
SC
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK SG/A54
SYMBOLS AND GLOSSARY
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
SG
P63x/UK SG/A54
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
SG
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Logic Symbols Symbols t V V I I Z |Z| f T Time duration Voltage, potential difference Complex voltage Electrical current Complex current Complex impedance Modulus of complex impedance Frequency Temperature in C Sum, result Unit of electrical resistance Angle Explanation
P63x/UK SG/A54 (SG) 13-1
Phase angle. With subscripts indicates a specific angle between a defined current and a defined voltage. Time constant Temperature difference in K
Logic Gates and Timers Graphic symbols for block diagrams Binary elements according to DIN 40900 Part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12: amended 1991 Analogue information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981 To document the linking of analogue and binary signals, additional symbols have been used, taken from several DIN documents. As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side.
SG
P63x/UK SG/A54 (SG) 13-2 Symbol
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Explanation To obtain more space for representing a group of related elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if the following rules are met: There is no functional linkage between elements whose common contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction. Note: This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow direction. Components of a symbol A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or more qualifiers.
Control block A control block contains an input function common to several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger elements, for example.
Output block An output block contains an output function common to several symbols.
Settable control block The four digits represent the address under which the function shown in the text after the colon may be set via the local control panel.
SG
Settable control block with function blocks The digits in the function block show the settings that are possible at this address. The text below the symbol shows the setting and the corresponding unit or meaning. Static input Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Symbol Dynamic input Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective. Negation of an output Explanation
P63x/UK SG/A54 (SG) 13-3
The value up to the border line is negated at the output. Negation of an input The input value is negated before the border line. Dynamic input with negation Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective. AND element The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1. OR element The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is 1. Threshold element The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number. (m out of n) element The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly. Delay element The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds or strobe ticks). Monostable flip-flop The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, independent of the duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable). Without a 1 in the function block the monostable flip-flop is retriggerable. The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any other duration. Analog-digital converter An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
SG
P63x/UK SG/A54 (SG) 13-4 Symbol Subtractor
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Explanation
The output variable is the difference between the two input variables. A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input. Schmitt trigger with binary output signal The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input signal drops below the threshold again. Memory, general Storage of a binary or analog signal. Non-stable flip-flop When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is generated at the output. The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts with the input variable transition (synchronized start). If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop). Amplifier The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1. Band pass filter The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are attenuated. Counter At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are counted and stored in the function block. At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0. Electromechanical drive In general, here a relay, for example. Signal level converter
SG
With electrical isolation between input and output. L+ = pos. voltage input L- = neg. voltage input U1= device identifier
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Symbol Explanation Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to DIN EN 60445) Phase identifiers for current inputs: for A: A1 and A2 for B: B1 and B2 for C: C1 and C2 for N: N1 and N2 Phase identifiers for voltage inputs via transformer 1: for A: 1U for B: 1V for C: 1W for N: 1N via transformer 2: for A: 2U for B: 2V Item identifiers for current transformers: for A: T1 for B: T2 for C: T3 for N: T4 for voltage transformer 1: for A: T5 for B: T6 for C: T7 for N: T8 for VG-N transformer: T90 for voltage transformer 2: for A: T15 Change-over contact With item identifier. Special symbol
P63x/UK SG/A54 (SG) 13-5
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (closed-circuit operation). PC interface With pin connections.
SG
Multiplier The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two input variables. Divider The output variable is the result of the division of the two input variables.
P63x/UK SG/A54 (SG) 13-6 Symbol Comparator
Symbols and Glossary MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Explanation
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are equal to the function in the function block. Formula block The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block.
SG
Installation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK IN/A54
INSTALLATION
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-1
CONTENTS
(IN) 141. 2. 3. 4. 5.
5.1 5.2
RECEIPT OF RELAYS HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE UNPACKING RELAY MOUNTING

Rack mounting Panel mounting
3 3 4 4 5
5 6
6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6
RELAY WIRING
Medium and heavy duty ring terminal block connections EIA(RS)485 port IRIG-B connections (if applicable) EIA(RS)232 front port Ethernet port (if applicable) Earth connection (case protective ground)
12
12 13 13 13 13 14
7.
7.1 7.2
P63x CASE DIMENSIONS

40TE case dimensions 84TE case dimensions
15
15 16
8. 9.
STANDARD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR THE P63x P63x EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
17 19
IN
Installation (IN) 14-2
P63x/UK IN/A54 MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
FIGURES
Figure 1: Figure 2: Figure 3: Figure 4: Figure 5: Figure 6: Figure 7: Figure 8: Figure 9: Figure 10: Figure 11: Figure 12: Figure 13: Figure 14: Figure 15: Figure 16: Figure 17: Figure 18: Figure 19: Figure 20: Figure 21: Figure 22: Figure 23: Figure 24: Rack mounting of 40TE case relays Rack mounting of 84TE case relays Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) Panel cutout for the 84TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) Panel cutout for the 84TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) Installation of the 40TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1) Installation of the 84TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1) Mounting the angle brackets Installation of the 40TE case with cover frame (panel mount method 2) Installing the case earth connection Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 2 (using angle brackets and frame) Case dimensions for 84TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) Standard schematic diagram for the P63x P631 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 1 of 2 P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 2 of 2 P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 1 of 2 P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 2 of 2 P633 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 1 of 2 P633 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 2 of 2 P634 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 1 of 2 P634 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 2 of 2 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 10 10 11 14 15 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-3
1.
RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to ensure no external damage has been sustained in transit. If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor and AREVA T&D should be promptly notified. Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton. Section 3 of P63x/UK IN gives more information about the storage of relays.
2.
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the Safety Guide (SFTY/4L M/C11) or later issue, or the Safety and Technical Data sections of this Technical Manual and also the ratings on the equipments rating label. A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage that, although not always immediately apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. The relays electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit boards unnecessarily. Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit board, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured. Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case. Handle analog input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the circuit boards. Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors. Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential. Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface that is at the same potential as you. If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the case, place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags. In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k to 10M. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which may be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case whenever possible. More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be found in BS EN 100015: Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a special handling area such as described in the British Standard document.
IN
3.
STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust, which has collected on the carton, does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency. Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between 25C to +70C (-13F to +158F). If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be reformed every 4 years. Reform the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P63x for approximately 10 minutes.
4.
UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Ensure that any Users CDROM or technical documentation is NOT discarded - this should accompany the relay to its destination substation. Relays must only be handled by skilled persons. The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive vibration.
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-5
5.
RELAY MOUNTING
The P63x has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. It is important when choosing the installation location to ensure that it provides suitable conditions as specified in the Technical Data - TD section, in particular the sections detailing environmental, mechanical and electromagnetic conditions. MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack assembly. Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the dimensions for panel cutouts and hole centers. Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent unauthorized changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in size 40TE (GN0181 001) suitable to fit the 40TE case model, or 84TE (GN0183 001) to fit the 84TE case model. The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers are closed. If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed from the front, it be positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with which it is associated. This minimizes the wiring between the relay and test block, and allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and maintenance tests.
5.1
Rack mounting A rack mounting kit can be used to combine the 40TE case with a second subrack to form a 19 mounting rack (see Figure 1). The extra subrack can be another device or an empty subrack with blanking plate. Fit the 19 mounting rack as shown in Figure 2.
IN
Figure 1: Rack mounting of 40TE case relays
Figure 2: 5.2
Rack mounting of 84TE case relays
Panel mounting The panel (or flush) mounted case is designed to be mounted in a control panel. The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in section 7 P63x Case Dimensions. When the P63x is mounted in a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 3 to 6 show the required panel cutouts for panel mounted cases of different case widths.
IN
Figure 3:
Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-7
Figure 4:
Panel cutout for the 40TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame)
Figure 5:
Panel cutout for the 84TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
IN
Figure 6:
Panel cutout for the 84TE panel mounted case, panel mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame)
Prior to flush panel mounting of the P63x using panel mount method 1, the local control panel needs to be removed in the following manner: Remove the upper and lower covering flap. (Turn the upper/lower flap by 180 up/down. Take hold of the middle part and bend the flap. The side fastenings can now be unhinged.) Undo the M3 bolts (see Figure 7 and 8). Take off the local control panel.
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Note the correct position of the connector. Do not bend the connecting cable. Next, undo the lower M4 bolts completely and loosen the upper M4 bolts (see Figures 7 and 8). Now hang the P63x into the panel cutout from behind supported by the upper M4 bolts. Tighten all M4 bolts. Mount the local control panel.
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-9
Figure 7:
Installation of the 40TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1)
IN
Figure 8:
Installation of the 84TE case without cover frame, (panel mount method 1)
Panel mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) is only an option for the 40TE case width. When installing units in accordance with panel mount method 2, proceed as follows: Remove the bolts shown in Figure 9, , and mount the enclosed angle bracket using these bolts Slide the unit into the panel opening from the front Fasten the unit to the control panel using the enclosed M6 bolts (see Figure 10) Assemble the cover frame and snap it onto the mounting bolts
IN
Figure 9:
Mounting the angle brackets
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-11
P1842ENa
Figure 10: Installation of the 40TE case with cover frame (panel mount method 2)
IN
6.
RELAY WIRING
This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.
6.1
Medium and heavy duty ring terminal block connections Key: Heavy duty terminal block: Medium duty: CT and VT circuits, type T modules All other terminal blocks (27-pin, grey color)
Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring terminals per relay terminal. If required, AREVA T&D can supply M4 90 crimp ring terminals in three different sizes depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in bags of 100. Part Number ZB9124 901 ZB9124 900 ZB9124 904 Table 3: Wire Size 0.25 - 1.65mm2 (22 - 16AWG) 1.04 - 2.63mm2 (16 - 14AWG) 2.53 - 6.64mm2 (12 - 10AWG) Insulation Color Red Blue Un-insulated*
M4 90 crimp ring terminals
* To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping. The following minimum wire sizes are recommended: Current Transformers Auxiliary Supply, Vx EIA(RS)485 Port Other Circuits 2.5mm2 1.5mm2 See separate section 1.0mm2
Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that are not pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in a separate ring terminal at the relay. The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks, except the EIA(RS)485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms. It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring is protected by fuses of standard ratings between 6A and 16A. Low voltage fuse-links rated for 250V minimum and compliant with IEC60269-1 general application type gG with high rupturing capacity are acceptable. This gives equivalent characteristics to HRC "Red Spot" fuse types NIT/TIA often specified historically.
IN
Where only one or two relays are wired as a fused spur, it is acceptable to use a 6A rating. Generally, five relays could be connected on a spur protected at 10A, and ten relays for a 15A/16A fuse. Alternatively, miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) may be used to protect the auxiliary supply circuits. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to protect the wire used.
Installation MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 6.2 EIA(RS)485 port
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-13
Connections to the EIA(RS)485 port are made using a modular 5-terminal cabling connector. It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or 200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be: Each core: 16/0.2mm copper conductors PVC insulated Nominal conductor area: Screen: 0.5mm2 per core Overall braid, PVC sheathed
See SCADA Communications (P63x/UK CT) for detailed discussion on setting up an EIA(RS)485 bus. 6.3 IRIG-B connections (if applicable) The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50. It is recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant sheath. 6.4 EIA(RS)232 front port Short term connections to the EIA(RS)232 port, located behind the bottom access cover, can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug. The pin allocations are detailed in section 1.8 of Getting Started (P63x/UK GS). 6.5 Ethernet port (if applicable) Fiber Optic Port The relays can have an optional 10 or 100 Mbps Ethernet port. FO connection is recommended for use in permanent connections in a substation environment. The 10Mbit port uses type ST connector and the 100Mbit port uses type SC connector, both compatible with 850nm multi-mode fiber-optic cable. RJ-45 Metallic Port The user can connect to either a 10Base-T or a 100Base-TX Ethernet hub; the port will automatically sense which type of hub is connected. Due to possibility of noise and interference on this part, it is recommended that this connection type be used for short-term connections and over short distance. Ideally where the relays and hubs are located in the same cubicle. The connector for the Ethernet port is a shielded RJ-45. The table shows the signals and pins on the connector. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 4: Signal Name TXP TXN RXP RXN Signals on the Ethernet connector Signal Definition Transmit (positive) Transmit (negative) Receive (positive) Not used Not used Receive (negative) Not used Not used
IN
Installation (IN) 14-14 6.6 Earth connection (case protective ground)
The unit must be reliably earthed to meet protective equipment earthing requirements. The rack or panel mounted case must be earthed in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this earth conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required (3.3mm2 or 11AWG recommended in North America). In addition, a protective earth connection at the terminal contact on the power supply module (identified by the letters PE on the external connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the unit. The cross-sectional area of this earth conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm2 is required. The earthing connection at both locations must be low-inductance, therefore as short as possible.
P1842ENa
Figure 11: Installing the case earth connection
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-15
7.
7.1
P63x CASE DIMENSIONS

40TE case dimensions
Figure 12: Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
IN
P1933ENa
Figure 13: Case dimensions for 40TE panel mount method 2 (using angle brackets and frame)
Installation (IN) 14-16 7.2 84TE case dimensions
Figure 14: Case dimensions for 84TE panel mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-17
8.
STANDARD SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM FOR THE P63x
P1951ENa
Figure 15: Standard schematic diagram for the P63x Note: "Dot" convention for winding polarities shown. When using P1-P2, S1-S2 standard notation. Dot on CT primary signifies P1 terminal Dot on CT secondary signifies S1 terminal Dot on VT primary signifies AN, BN, CN, YN polarity Dot on VT secondary signifies an, bn, cn, yn polarity
IN
Blank Page
IN
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-19
9.
P63x EXTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
P1739ENa
IN
Figure 16:
P631 ring terminal connections (with all options shown)
IN
Figure 17: Note 1:
P1740ENa
P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 1 of 2 Slot 8 may contain either 24I type X input module or 4I type Y input module. See Fig. 18 for type Y connections.
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-21
P1742ENa
IN
Figure 18:
P632 ring terminal connections (with 24I type X option shown) - Part 2 of 2
IN
Figure 19:
P1741ENa
P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 1 of 2 Note 1: Slot 8 may contain either 24I type X input module or 4I type Y input module. See Fig. 16 for type X connections.
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-23
P1742ENa
IN
Figure 20:
P632 ring terminal connections (with 4I type Y option shown) - Part 2 of 2
P1743ENa
IN
Figure 21:
P633 ring terminal connections (with all options shown) - Part 1 of 2
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-25
P1744ENa
Figure 22:
IN
P1745ENa
IN
Figure 23:
P63x/UK IN/A54 (IN) 14-27
P1746ENa
Figure 24:
IN
IN
Firmware and Service Manual Version History MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
P63x/UK VH/A54
FIRMWARE AND SERVICE MANUAL VERSION HISTORY
16th June 2006 -305 -610 -404 (P631, P632, P634) -406 (P633)
VH
P63x/UK VH/A54
VH
Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634 Software Version Major Minor 15 Jan 2001 - 701 3 Apr 2001 -601 - 702 - 703 - 704 -301 17 May 2001 2 Aug 2001 17 Dec 2001 -602 -302 25 Jan 2002 Original Issue COMM1 software integration with switchable protocol Analog module software integration Improved IRIG-B software P63x/EN M/C11 Hardware Suffix Original Date of Issue Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Technical Documentation
P634 only Original issue Improved calibration algorithm
Project specific introduction only Software support for ring terminal connection version hardware Ring terminal connection version hardware and software option for all P63x Optional thyristor switched output relay module available COMM1 Courier protocol available COMM2 software integration with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol Separate settings for secondary nominal current of phase and star point CTs Signals for Id>> Triggered and Id>>> Triggered added THRM1 and THRM2 p.u. measured values added Signal for THRMx: Not Ready added (VH) 15-1 Broken conductor detection function BC_x added Overfluxing protection function V/f added Previous Documents + P63x/EN AD/B22 P63x/UK VH/A54
VH
VH
(VH) 15-2 P63x/UK VH/A54 Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634 Software Version Major -602 Cont. Minor - 705 - 706 -302 25 Jan 2002 22 Feb 2002 6 Jun 2002 27 Nov 2002 -707 25 Mar 2003 External logic input signals increased from 16 to 40 Improved disturbance recording handler Russian character font correction Order extension number entry correction DIFF and REF_x amplitude matching factor restrictions relaxed DIFF zero sequence current filtering for odd numbered vector groups is improved DIFF setting ranges for tripping characteristic and unrestrained element increased DIFF setting to allow disabling of hysteresis for tripping characteristic DIFF definite time delay trip added REF operating modes for low impedance biased by maximum phase current or high impedance added REF setting range of the unrestrained element increased Tripping signals for the application of low impedance REF on autotransformers added Accuracy of IDMT tripping times improved Underfrequency minimum value and overfrequency maximum values added to measured fault data Setting range of V/f>> increased Improved DTOC with faster trip command Previous Documents + P63x/EN AD/C32 Firmware and Service Manual Version History MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 Previous Documents + P63x/EN AD/B22 Hardware Suffix Original Date of Issue Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Technical Documentation -603 -302
Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634 Software Version Major -603 Cont. Minor -708 16 May 2003 Trip characteristic correction Improved saturation discriminator Previous documents + P63x/EN AD/A43 Hardware Suffix Original Date of Issue Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Technical Documentation
P634 only -604 -303 9 Oct 2003 -605 -303 30 Apr 2004 -606 -304 20 May 2005 UCA2 software integration with Ethernet hardware Optional increased voltage thresholds for opto-inputs Extended UCA2 software integration with Ethernet hardware for all P63x Optional increased voltage thresholds for opto-inputs Improved sensitivity in saturation stabilization CTS function added Disturbance recording maximum timer added COMM1 software enhancement of clock time message from 4bit to 7bit Optional new voltage thresholds for opto-inputs Positive and negative sequence p.u. current measurements added Clock synchronization priority setting added Current summation for virtual ends extended to include difference of two ends and sum of three ends Setting range of m1 and m2 increased to 0.10 - 1.50
Previous documents + P63x/EN AD/A43
Previous documents + P63x/EN AD/A54
P63x/UK VH/A54
(VH) 15-3
VH
VH
(VH) 15-4 P63x/UK VH/A54 Relay type: P631, P632, P633, P634 Software Version Major Minor -610 -305 Jun 2006 Regional English language data model with modified setting texts similar to Px40 platform English texts (-800 option) Implementation of new substation communication protocol IEC 61850 IEC 61850 introduces function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE MAIN: Phase reversal logic now available, for phase swapping where generator/motor sets may operate bi-directionally MAIN: Vector group numbers are now settable in each setting group, allowing use for phase angle regulating transformers IDMTn: Trip time accuracy improved UCA2 protocol no longer supported Hardware Suffix Original Date of Issue Description of Changes S1 Compatibility Technical Documentation P63x/UK M/A54 (Regional English) Firmware and Service Manual Version History MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634
Relay Software Version -601 -601 -602 -603 -604 -605 -606 Setting File Software Version * -610 -602 -603 -604 -605 -606 -610
P63x/UK VH/A54
* Incompatible settings files should be converted to the required relay software version prior to sending to the relay. This can be achieved using the Tools\Convert Settings File command in S&R-103.
(VH) 15-5
VH
P63x/UK VH/A54 (VH) 15-6
VH
INDEX
A
Address mode (GS) 3-14 Alarms (GS) 3-4 (OP) 5-135 (FD) 8-5 (TS) 11-6 Amplitude matching (OP) 5-12, 27 (AP) 6-13 Analog output (ST) 4-40 (OP) 5-103 (MR) 7-6, 26, 65 Analog readings (MR) 7-5 Application notes (AP) 6-5 Application overview (IT) 1-8 Auto-transformer protection (AP) 6-26 Auxiliary supply (TD) 2-4 Cold restart (OP) 5-136 (FD) 8-7 (TS) 11-6 Commissioning (CM) 9-3 Commissioning test record (CM) 9-22 Communications Courier interface (SC) 12-5 DNP3.0 interface (SC) 12-35 Ethernet port (IN) 14-13 GOOSE (ST) 4-26 (MR) 7-18, 24 (SC) 12-51 GSSE (ST) 4-31 (MR) 7-19, 24, 63 (SC) 12-53 IEC60870-5-103 interface (SC) 12-31 IEC61850 interface (SC) 12-48 MODBUS interface (SC) 12-11 Rear port (SC) 12-11 SCADA (SC) 12-5 Connection diagrams (IN) 14-19 Control and testing (MR) 7-62 Coolant temperature acquisition (OP) 5-53 (MR) 7-17 Courier interface (see Communications) Current summation (ST) 4-62 (OP) 5-117 Current transformer requirements Case dimensions (IN) 14-15 Clock notation (AP) 6-17 Clock synchronization via opto-inputs (OP) 5-131 (AP) 6-35 Current transformer supervision (ST) 4-50, 69, 105 (OP) 5-70 (MR) 7-56, 69
B
BCD-coded measured data (OP) 5-104 Bias characteristic (AP) 6-11 Binary inputs (see Opto inputs) Boolean equations (OP) 5-78 (FD) 8-4 Broken conductor (ST) 4-50, 69, 106 (OP) 5-68 (MR) 7-57 Busbar/mesh corner differential (AP) 6-31
Index
D
DC monitoring (ST) 4-37, 70 (OP) 5-74, 96 (MR) 7-5, 25 Definite time overcurrent (ST) 4-48, 66, 83 (OP) 5-33 (MR) 7-41 Differential high set (AP) 5-18 Differential protection (ST) 4-47, 62, 78 (OP) 5-11 (AP) 6-10 (MR) 7-15 (CM) 9-13 Dimensions (IN) 14-15 Display and keypad (GS) 3-8 Disturbance recorder (ST) 4-60 (MR) 7-79 Disturbance recording (OP) 5-145 DNP3.0 interface (see Communications) Dynamic settings (ST) 4-85, 87, 89
Frequency protection (see also Underfrequency protection) (ST) 4-49, 68, 101 (OP) 5-58 (MR) 7-54, 68 Front port connection (GS) 3-25 Front view (GS) 3-3 Fuse rating (AP) 6-38
G
Getting started (GS) 3-3 Glossary (SG) 13-1 GOOSE (see Communications) Ground overcurrent (see Definite time overcurrent and Inverse time overcurrent) GSSE (see Communications)
H
Hardware overview (FD) 8-4 Harmonic restraint (ST) 4-80 (OP) 5-22 High impedance (ST) 4-81 (OP) 5-31 (AP) 6-20, 36 (CM) 9-18 High-set differential (OP) 5-20
E
Earth fault (see Definite time overcurrent and Inverse time overcurrent) Environmental conditions (EMC) (TD) 2-3 Error code (TS) 11-4 Ethernet port (see Communications) External connection diagrams (IN) 14-19
I
IDMT (see Inverse time overcurrent) IEC60870-5-103 interface (see Communications) IEC61850 interface (see Communications) Installation
F
Fault data acquisition (Fault records) (OP) 5-140 (MR) 7-75 Fault panel (ST) 4-9 (OP) 5-84 Firmware design (FD) 8-3 Firmware history (VH) 15-1 Frequency gradient monitoring (OP) 5-60
(GS) 3-7 (IN) 14-3 Introduction (IT) 1-5 Inverse time overcurrent (ST) 4-48, 66, 90 (OP) 5-39 (MR) 7-48 IRIG-B time synchronization (ST) 4-34 (OP) 5-94 (MR) 7-24
Index
K
Knee point voltage (AP) 6-35
O
On-load checks (CM) 9-21 Operation (OP) 5-11 Operation panel (ST) 4-9 (OP) 5-84 Opto input assignment (ST) 4-35 Opto inputs (OP) 5-95 (FD) 8-5 (CM) 9-9 Ordering options (IT) 1-9 Output relays (OP) 5-100 Overfluxing protection (ST) 4-50, 69, 101 (OP) 5-62 (AP) 6-24 (MR) 7-18, 55, 69 Overload panel (ST) 4-9 (OP) 5-85 Overvoltage protection (ST) 4-49, 68, 100 (OP) 5-56 (MR) 7-53
L
Language (Regional English language) (GS) 3-30 LED indications (GS) 3-4 LED indicators (ST) 4-43 (OP) 5-110 (MR) 7-23 Limit value monitoring (ST) 4-51, 70 (OP) 5-74 Local contact list (TS) 11-11 Local control panel (ST) 4-9 (OP) 5-83 (MR) 7-23, 62 Logic (see Programmable logic)
M
Magnetizing inrush current (OP) 5-22 (AP) 6-18 Maintenance (MT) 10-3 Maintenance checks (MT) 10-3 Maintenance period (MT) 10-3 Measurements (MR) 7-5 Menu tree (GS) 3-10 METROSIL non-linear resistors (AP) 6-21 MiCOM S1 (GS) 3-26 MODBUS interface (SC) 12-11 Module positions (CM) 9-4
P
Panel mounting (IN) 14-6 Password protection (GS) 3-22 Phase current monitoring (ST) 4-51, 72 (OP) 5-76 Phase overcurrent (see Definite time overcurrent and Inverse time overcurrent) Phase reversal (ST) 4-78 (OP) 5-115 Phase rotation (ST) 4-53 Plain text mode (GS) 3-14 Power supply (TD) 2-4 Problem identification (TS) 11-3 Programmable logic (ST) 4-51, 74 (OP) 5-78 (MR) 7-60 (FD) 8-4
N
Negative sequence overcurrent (see Definite time overcurrent and Inverse time overcurrent)
Index
R
Rack mounting (IN) 14-5 Ratings (TD) 2-3 Ratio correction (AP) 6-13 Rear port communication (see Communications) Rear view (GS) 3-6 Records (MR) 7-71 Reference power (ST) 4-62 (OP) 5-12, 27 (AP) 6-13 Regional language (GS) 3-30 Relay outputs (CM) 9-9 Relay structure (FD) 8-3 Repair and modification authorization form (RMA) (TS) 11-10 Repair and modification procedure (TS) 11-10 Restricted earth fault (ST) 4-48, 63, 81 (OP) 5-26 (AP) 6-19 (MR) 7-16, 41 (CM) 9-18 Ring terminals (IN) 14-12 RTD (ST) 4-37 (OP) 5-96 (MR) 7-5, 25 (CM) 9-11
Setting group selection (ST) 4-77 (OP) 5-133 (MR) 7-30 Setting recommendations (AP) 6-33 Settings (ST) 4-5 Software overview (FD) 8-3 Software version (VH) 15-1 Status signals (MR) 7-18 Symbols and glossary (SG) 13-1
T
Technical data (TD) 2-1 Temperature monitoring (ST) 4-70 (OP) 5-74, 96 (MR) 7-5, 25 Terminal block connections (IN) 14-12 Terminal references (CM) 9-4 Thermal ammeter (OP) 5-118 (MR) 7-7 Thermal max. demand (OP) 5-118 Thermal overload (ST) 4-49, 67, 97 (OP) 5-50 (MR) 7-16, 51, 68 Time dependent characteristics (OP) 5-41 Timers (OP) 5-81 Troubleshooting (TS) 11-3 Type tests (TD) 2-1
S
Safety section (SS) - 3 SCADA communications (see Communications) Schematic diagram (IN) 14-17 Secondary injection (CM) 9-11 Self testing & diagnostics (OP) 5-134 (FD) 8-5 Setting checks
U
Underfrequency protection (ST) 4-49, 68, 101 (OP) 5-58 (MR) 7-54, 68 Undervoltage protection (ST) 4-49, 68, 100 (OP) 5-56 (MR) 7-53
Index
(CM) 9-13
Unpacking (IN) 14-4
V
Vector group (ST) 4-78 (OP) 5-15 (AP) 6-14 Version history (VH) 15-1 Virtual winding (ST) 4-62 (OP) 5-117 Voltage protection (ST) 4-49, 68, 100 (OP) 5-56 (MR) 7-53
W
Warm restart (OP) 5-135 (FD) 8-7 (TS) 11-6 Weight (TD) 2-1
Z
Zero sequence current filtering (OP) 5-17 (AP) 6-14
Index
Index
Publication: P63x/UK M/A54

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

P63x UK M A543

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P63x UK M A543

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P63x UK M A543

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What are some of the main sections covered in the document?

What are some of the main sections covered in the document?

MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Transformer Differential Protection

Measurements and Recording

Symbols and Glossary

Firmware and Service Manual Version History

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 1

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 2

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 3

HEALTH AND SAFETY

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 4

SYMBOLS AND LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 6 Equipment operating conditions

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 7

DE-COMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY

P63x/EN SS/D11 (SS) - 8

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Date: Hardware Suffix: Software Version: Connection Diagrams:

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-1

MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM PRODUCT SCOPE

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-2

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-3

MiCOM DOCUMENTATION STRUCTURE

A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined. P63x/UK TS Troubleshooting

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-4 P63x/UK SC SCADA Communications

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

History of all hardware and software releases for the product.

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-5

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-6

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-7 P633 P634

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-8 Application overview

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

Recording and Data Acquisition

Iph IY,c Iph Iph

always available optional or specific

Transformer Differential Protection P63x

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634 3.2 Ordering options

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-9

Information Required with Order - P631

>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)

Px40 English (English)

P63x/UK IT/A54 (IT) 1-10 Information Required with Order - P632

Introduction MiCOM P631, P632, P633, P634

>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)